1 Seagoing Ships 8 Fishing Vessels Edition 2007

Rules for Classification and Construction I Ship Technology

1 Seagoing Ships

8 Fishing Vessels

Edition 2007

The following Rules come into force on October 1st , 2007

Germanischer Lloyd Aktiengesellschaft

Head Office Vorsetzen 35, 20459 Hamburg Phone: +49 40 36149-0 Fax: +49 40 36149-200 [email protected]

www.gl-group.com

"General Terms and Conditions" of the respective latest edition will be applicable (see Rules for Classification and Construction, I - Ship Technology, Part 0 - Classification and Surveys).

Reproduction by printing or photostatic means is only permissible with the consent of Germanischer Lloyd Aktiengesellschaft.

Published by: Germanischer Lloyd Aktiengesellschaft, Hamburg Printed by: Gebrüder Braasch GmbH, Hamburg I - Part 1 Table of Contents Chapter 8 GL 2007 Page 3

Table of Contents

Section 1 General

A. Application ...... 1- 1 B. Class Notations ...... 1- 1 C. Ambient Conditions ...... 1- 2 D. Definitions ...... 1- 2 E. Documents for Approval ...... 1- 4

Section 2 Closure Conditions, Buoyancy and Stability

A. General ...... 2- 1 B. Openings and Closures in Hull, Deck and Superstructures ...... 2- 2 C. Draught Marking ...... 2- 7 D. Intact Buoyancy ...... 2- 7 E. Intact Stability ...... 2- 7 F. Subdivision and Damage Stability ...... 2- 13 G. Inclining Test ...... 2- 15 H. Stability Information ...... 2- 15

Section 3 Special Requirements for Hull Structures

A. General ...... 3- 1 B. Special Measures for the Hull Structure ...... 3- 1 C. Fish Holds ...... 3- 6 D. Fish Tanks ...... 3- 8 E. Fish Processing Holds ...... 3- 8 F. Membrane Type Tanks for Brines ...... 3- 8 G. Side Doors ...... 3- 9

Section 4 Hull Outfit

A. Sheathings and Ceilings ...... 4- 1 B. Air Pipes, Overflow Pipes, Sounding Pipes ...... 4- 1 C. Ventilators ...... 4- 2 D. Waste and Water Discharge in Fish Holds ...... 4- 2 E. Protective Measures ...... 4- 3 F. Signal and Radar Masts ...... 4- 4 G. Life-Saving Appliances ...... 4- 5 Chapter 8 Table of Contents I - Part 1 Page 4 GL 2007

Section 5 Anchoring and Mooring Equipment A. General ...... 5- 1 B. Equipment Numeral ...... 5- 1 C. Anchors ...... 5- 2 D. Chain Cables ...... 5- 3 E. Ropes instead of Chain Cables ...... 5- 4 F. Chain Locker ...... 5- 5 G. Windlasses ...... 5- 5 H. Mooring Equipment ...... 5- 6

Section 6 Fishing Gear and Lifting Appliances A. General ...... 6- 1 B. Plan Approval ...... 6- 2 C. Dimensioning ...... 6- 3 D. Construction ...... 6- 4 E. Accident Prevention ...... 6- 6 F. Tests, Examinations, Certification and Class Notation ...... 6- 6

Section 7 Structural Fire Protection A. General ...... 7- 1 B. Requirements for Fire Protection for Fishing Vessels with 12 m ≤ L < 45 m ...... 7- 1 C. Requirements for Fire Protection for Fishing Vessels with L ≥ 45 m ...... 7- 2

Section 8 Fire Protection and Fire Fighting A. General ...... 8- 1 B. Fire Protection in Machinery Spaces ...... 8- 2 C. Fire Detection ...... 8- 3 D. Water Fire Extinguishing System (Fire and Deckwash System) ...... 8- 3 E. Portable Fire Extinguishers in Accommodations and Service Spaces ...... 8- 4 F. Fire Extinguishing Arrangements in Machinery Spaces ...... 8- 5 G. Fire Extinguishers ...... 8- 5 H. Fire Extinguishing Arrangements in Spaces other than Machinery Spaces ...... 8- 6

Section 9a General Rules for Machinery Installations A. General ...... 9a- 1 B. Documents for Approval ...... 9a- 1 C. Ambient Conditions ...... 9a- 1 D. Design and Construction of the Machinery Installations ...... 9a- 1 E. Engine and Boiler Room Equipment ...... 9a- 3 F. Safety Equipment and Protective Measures ...... 9a- 4 G. Communication and Signalling Equipment ...... 9a- 5 H. Essential Equipment ...... 9a- 5 I - Part 1 Table of Contents Chapter 8 GL 2007 Page 5

Section 9b Internal Combustion Engines and Air Compressors A. General ...... 9b- 1 B. Documents for Approval ...... 9b- 2 C. Crankshaft Calculation ...... 9b- 4 D. Materials ...... 9b- 4 E. Tests and Trials ...... 9b- 6 F. Safety Devices ...... 9b- 11 G. Auxiliary Systems ...... 9b- 14 H. Starting Equipment ...... 9b- 16 I. Control Equipment ...... 9b- 18 J. Alarms ...... 9b- 19 K. Engine Alignment/Seating ...... 9b- 19 L. Approximate Calculation of the Starting Air Supply ...... 9b- 19 M. Air Compressors ...... 9b- 19

Section 9c Propulsion System A. Main Shafting ...... 9c- 1 B. Gears, Couplings ...... 9c- 6 C. Propellers and Special Propulsion Devices ...... 9c- 9 D. Steering Gear ...... 9c- 15 E. Machinery for Fishing Vessels with Ice Classes ...... 9c- 18 F. Torsional Vibrations ...... 9c- 18

Section 9d Storage of Liquids, Piping Systems, Valves and Pumps A. General ...... 9d- 1 B. Materials and Testing ...... 9d- 1 C. Wall Thickness of Pipe Lines ...... 9d- 6 D. Principles for the Construction of Pipes, Valves, Fittings and Pumps ...... 9d- 8 E. Oil Fuel Systems ...... 9d- 13 F. Lubricating Oil System ...... 9d- 15 G. Seawater Cooling Systems ...... 9d- 17 H. Fresh Water Cooling Systems ...... 9d- 18 I. Compressed Air Lines ...... 9d- 19 J. Exhaust Gas Lines ...... 9d- 20 K. Bilge Systems ...... 9d- 20 L. Equipment for the Treatment and Storage of Bilge Water, Fuel/Oil Residues ...... 9d- 22 M. Air, Overflow and Sounding Pipes ...... 9d- 23 N. Drinking Water System 5 ...... 9d- 25 O. Sewage Systems ...... 9d- 26 P. Hose Assemblies and Compensators ...... 9d- 27 Q. Storage of Liquid Fuels, Lubricating and Hydraulic Oils as well as Oil Residues ...... 9d- 27

Section 9e Boilers and Pressure Vessels A. Steam Boilers and Thermal Oil Heaters ...... 9e- 1 B. Pressure Vessels ...... 9e- 2 C. Oil Firing Equipment ...... 9e- 2 Chapter 8 Table of Contents I - Part 1 Page 6 GL 2007

Section 10 Refrigeration Installations A. General ...... 10- 1 B. Installation, Design and Rating ...... 10- 2 C. Refrigerants ...... 10- 4 D. Refrigerating Machinery Spaces ...... 10- 5 E. Refrigerant Compressors ...... 10- 6 F. Pressure Vessels and Apparatus ...... 10- 7 G. Pipes, Valves and Fittings ...... 10- 8 H. Fans and Pumps ...... 10- 9 I. Cooling Water Supply ...... 10- 9 J. Safety and Monitoring Equipment ...... 10- 9 K. Pressure and Tightness Tests ...... 10- 10 L. Insulation of Pressure Vessels, Apparatus, Pipes, Valves and Fittings ...... 10- 10 M. Equipment and Insulation of Refrigerated Spaces ...... 10- 11 N. Temperature Monitoring Equipment for Refrigerated Spaces ...... 10- 12 O. Quick Freezing Installations ...... 10- 13 P. Spare Parts and Protective Equipment ...... 10- 13 Q. Shipboard Testing ...... 10- 13

Section 11a General Requirements and Instructions for Electrical Installations A. General ...... 11a- 1 B. Definitions ...... 11a- 1 C. Documents for Approval ...... 11a- 3 D. Fishing Vessel's Documentation ...... 11a- 3 E. Ambient Conditions ...... 11a- 4 F. Operating Conditions ...... 11a- 5 G. Power Supply Systems ...... 11a- 5 H. Voltages and Frequencies ...... 11a- 6 I. Materials and Insulation ...... 11a- 6 J. Protection and Protective Measures ...... 11a- 6 K. Explosion Protection ...... 11a- 8 L. Spare Parts ...... 11a- 8

Section 11b Installation of Electrical Equipment A. General ...... 11b- 1 B. Generators, Electrical Sources ...... 11b- 1 C. Storage Batteries ...... 11b- 1 D. Power Transformers ...... 11b- 3 E. Electronics ...... 11b- 4 F. Switchboard ...... 11b- 4

Section 11c Power Supply Installations A. Electrical Power Demand ...... 11c- 1 B. Main Electrical Power Supply ...... 11c- 1 C. Emergency Electrical Power Supply ...... 11c- 2 D. Operation of Emergency Generator in Port ...... 11c- 3 I - Part 1 Table of Contents Chapter 8 GL 2007 Page 7

Section 11d Installation Protection and Power Distribution A. General ...... 11d- 1 B. Emergency Three-Phase Generators ...... 11d- 2 C. Direct Current Generators ...... 11d- 2 D. Transformers ...... 11d- 2 E. Storage Batteries ...... 11d- 2 F. Power Electronics ...... 11d- 2 G. Shore Connection ...... 11d- 2 H. Consumer Protective Equipment ...... 11d- 3 I. Power Distribution ...... 11d- 3

Section 11e Switchgear Assemblies A. General ...... 11e- 1 B. Construction ...... 11e- 1 C. Selection of Switchgear ...... 11e- 2 D. Choice of Electrical Protection Equipment ...... 11e- 2 E. Conductors, Bus Bars, Wiring ...... 11e- 3 F. Measuring Instrument's Characteristics ...... 11e- 4 G. Testing of Switchboards and Switchgear ...... 11e- 5

Section 11f Power Electronics A. General ...... 11f- 1 B. Construction ...... 11f- 1 C. Rating and Design ...... 11f- 1 D. Cooling ...... 11f- 2 E. Control and Monitoring ...... 11f- 2 F. Protection Equipment ...... 11f- 2 G. Tests ...... 11f- 2

Section 11g Power Equipment A. Steering Gear ...... 11g- 1 B. Lateral Thrust Propellers ...... 11g- 2 C. Variable Pitch Propeller Systems for Main Propulsion System ...... 11g- 2 D. Auxiliary Machinery and Systems ...... 11g- 2 E. Deck Machinery, Winches ...... 11g- 3 F. Electrical Heating Equipment and Heaters ...... 11g- 3 G. Plug and Socket Connections for Movable Power Consumers ...... 11g- 3 H. Refrigeration Installations for Preservation of the Catch ...... 11g- 3

Section 11h Control, Monitoring and Vessel's Safety Systems A. General ...... 11h- 1 B. Machinery Control and Monitoring Installation ...... 11h- 1 C. Vessel Control Systems ...... 11h- 2 D. Vessel's Safety Systems ...... 11h- 3 Chapter 8 Table of Contents I - Part 1 Page 8 GL 2007

Section 11i Lighting and Socket-Outlets A. Construction and Extent ...... 11i- 1 B. Lighting Installations ...... 11i- 1 C. Socket-Outlets ...... 11i- 1

Section 11j Cable Network A. Choice of Cables and Wires ...... 11j- 1 B. Determination of Conductor Cross-Sections ...... 11j- 1 C. Protection and Installation of Circuits ...... 11j- 2 D. Installation ...... 11j- 3

Section 11k Electrical Equipment A. Electrical Machinery ...... 11k- 1 B. Transformers and Reactance Coils ...... 11k- 5 C. Storage Batteries and Chargers ...... 11k- 6 D. Switchgear and Protection Device ...... 11k- 6 E. Cables and Insulated Wires ...... 11k- 7 F. Installation Material ...... 11k- 8 G. Lighting Fittings ...... 11k- 8 H. Electrical Heating Equipment ...... 11k- 9

Section 11l Tests A. General ...... 11l- 1 B. Examinations of Technical Documentation ...... 11l- 1 C. Tests in the Manufacturer's Works ...... 11l- 1 D. Tests on Board ...... 11l- 2 E. Type Approvals ...... 11l- 3

Section 12 Special Requirements for Automation A. General ...... 12- 1 B. Documents for Approval ...... 12- 1 C. Extent, Design and Construction of the Equipment ...... 12- 1 D. Monitoring Equipment ...... 12- 2 E. Remote Control from the Navigating Bridge ...... 12- 3 F. Fire Protection / Fire Extinguishing ...... 12- 4 G. Prevention against Engine Room Flooding ...... 12- 4 H. Miscellaneous ...... 12- 4 I. Alarm and Recording Points ...... 12- 4

Section 13 Spare Parts A. General ...... 13- 1 B. Volume of Spare Parts ...... 13- 1 I - Part 1 Index Chapter 8 GL 2007 Page 9

Index

A Accessibility ...... 9a-4, 9b-1 Accessories ...... 6-1 Accident prevention ...... 6-6 Air coolers ...... 10-7 Air pipes ...... 2-5, 4-1 Air, overflow and sounding pipes ...... 9d-23 Alarm systems ...... 8-1, 8-3, 10-3, 12-2 Alarms ...... 9b-19, 11g-2, 11h-3 Allowable working pressures ...... 10-4 Aluminium ...... 9d-3 Ambient conditions ...... 1-2, 9a-1 Ammonia ...... 10-4 Anchor equipment ...... 5-1 Anchors ...... 5-2 Anti-heeling devices ...... 2-1 Automation ...... 12-1 Availability ...... 9a-2, 11c-2

B Balancing ...... 9c-8 Bathing ...... 11i-2 Batteries ...... 11b-1, 11c-2 Bearings ...... 11k-1 Bilge lines ...... 9d-20 Bilge suctions ...... 9d-20 Bilge wells ...... 4-3 Blade geometry ...... 9c-13 Blade thickness ...... 9c-11 Boilers ...... 8-2, 9e-1, 12-4 Bollards ...... 5-7 Bottom ceiling ...... 4-1 Bow height ...... 2-11 Bridge ...... 9b-19, 9c-17, 11h-2, 12-3 Brine tanks ...... 10-7 Brines ...... 3-8 Chapter 8 Index I - Part 1 Page 10 GL 2007

Bulkheads ...... 2-13, 7-3 Bulwarks ...... 4-3 Bus bars ...... 11e-3

C Cables ...... 11j-1, 11k-7, 11l-2 Call systems ...... 12-3 Calorifiers ...... 11k-9 Carbon dioxide ...... 10-4 Cargo fish tween decks ...... 4-2 Cargo spaces ...... 7-9, 8-6 Catch handling gear ...... 6-3 Ceiling at tank bulkheads ...... 4-1 Certification ...... 6-1 Chain cables ...... 5-3 Chain locker ...... 5-5 Chargers ...... 11k-6 Chlorodifluormethane ...... 10-4 Circuit breakers ...... 11e-2 Circuits ...... 11j-2 Clamp-type couplings ...... 9c-9 Class Notations ...... 1-1, 10-1, 11h-2, 12-1 Classification ...... 1-2 Cleats ...... 5-7 Closure conditions ...... 2-1 Closures ...... 2-2 Collision bulkhead ...... 2-13 Combustible materials ...... 7-1, 7-7 Communication ...... 9a-5, 11h-2 Compass zone ...... 11j-4 Compensators ...... 9d-27 Compressed air lines ...... 9d-19 Compressors ...... 9b-19 Computers ...... 11h-1 Conductors ...... 11e-3, 11j-1 Control ...... 11f-2, 11g-1, 11h-1, 11h-2, 11l-3 Control station ...... 9b-2, 9b-18 Coolers ...... 9d-18 Cooling ...... 11f-2, 11k-1 I - Part 1 Index Chapter 8 GL 2007 Page 11

Cooling water ...... 9b-15, 10-9 Corrosion protection ...... 9a-2 Couplings ...... 9c-3 Crankcase ...... 9b-13 Crankshafts ...... 9b-4 Cross-sections ...... 11j-1 Currents ...... 11j-3

D Damage control plan ...... 2-16 Damage stability ...... 2-13 Dead ship condition ...... 11a-3, 11c-1 Deck machinery ...... 11g-3 Deck openings ...... 4-3 Deck sheathing ...... 4-1 Deep-fat cooking equipment ...... 8-6 Definition of fishing vessels ...... 1-1 Definitions ...... 10-1, 11a-1 Defrosting ...... 10-11 Diesel engines ...... 9b-1 Dock trials ...... 11l-2 Documents ...... 1-4, 2-1, 6-2, 7-1, 8-1, 9a-1, 9b-2, 9c-1, 9d-1, 9e-1, 10-1, 11a-3, 11l-1, 12-1 Door sills ...... 2-2 Double bottom ...... 2-13 Draught marking ...... 2-7 Drinking water systems ...... 9d-26

E Earthing ...... 9b-11, 11a-5, 11j-4 Electrical equipment ...... 11b-1, 11f-1, 11k-1 Electrical installations ...... 11a-1 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) ...... 11a-8 Electronic equipment ...... 11b-4, 11d-2, 11f-2, 11l-3 Emergency fire-extinguisher set ...... 9b-18 Emergency generating set ...... 9b-17, 11c-3 Emergency shut down ...... 11d-4 Emergency switchboards ...... 11b-4, 11d-2, 11e-2 Engine alignment/seating ...... 9b-19 Environmental conditions ...... 1-2, 11a-4 Equipment numeral ...... 5-1 Chapter 8 Index I - Part 1 Page 12 GL 2007

Equivalence ...... 1-1, 7-1 Escape ...... 7-2, 7-8 Essential equipment ...... 9a-5, 11a-1 European regulations ...... 1-1 Exhaust gas pipes ...... 9d-20 Exhaust gas turbochargers ...... 9b-16 Explosion protection ...... 11a-8

F Fairleads ...... 6-5 Fans 10-9 Fasting of cables and wires ...... 11j-3 Filters ...... 9b-15, 9c-18, 9d-15 Fire detection systems ...... 7-8, 8-3, 11h-3, 12-2 Fire extinguishers ...... 8-4, 8-5 Fire extinguishing ...... 12-4 Fire fighting ...... 8-1 Fire hydrants ...... 8-4 Fire integrity ...... 7-3 Fire piping ...... 8-4 Fire protection ...... 8-1, 12-4 Fire pumps ...... 8-3 Fire resisting divisions ...... 7-5 Fish flaps ...... 3-6 Fish holds ...... 3-6, 4-2 Fish pounds ...... 4-3 Fish processing areas ...... 3-8, 4-3 Fish tanks ...... 3-8, 4-3 Fishing gear ...... 6-1, 6-6 Fixed fire extinguishing systems ...... 8-5 Fixed local application fire fighting system (FWBLAFFS) ...... 8-5 Flammable liquid lockers ...... 8-6 Flange connections ...... 9d-8 Flange type couplings ...... 9c-4 Flange types ...... 9d-12 Flexible couplings ...... 9c-9 Free liquid surfaces ...... 2-8 Freeing ports ...... 2-6 Frequencies ...... 11a-6 I - Part 1 Index Chapter 8 GL 2007 Page 13

Fresh water cooling system ...... 9d-18 Fuel oil system ...... 9b-14 Fuel tanks ...... 9d-27 Fuel transfer ...... 9d-15 Fuels ...... 9a-3 Fuses ...... 11e-2

G Galley ...... 8-6 Gas bottles ...... 9d-29 Gears ...... 9c-6 Generators ...... 11b-1, 11c-2, 11d-1, 11e-1, 11l-2 Governors ...... 9b-12 Guard rails ...... 4-3 Guidelines ...... 1-1

H Hawses ...... 5-7 Heating ...... 11g-3, 11k-9 Heavy fuel oils ...... 9d-15 High holding power anchors ...... 5-2 Hose assemblies ...... 9d-27 Hull structures ...... 3-1 Hydraulic oil tanks ...... 9d-28 Hydraulic systems ...... 12-1

I Ice accretion ...... 2-13 Ice class ...... 9c-18 Inclinations ...... 1-2 Inlets ...... 2-5 Installation protection ...... 11d-1 Insulation ...... 8-2, 10-10 Insulation resistance ...... 11e-3, 11f-3, 11k-3 Intact buoyancy ...... 2-7 Intact stability ...... 2-7 Internal combustion engines ...... 9b-1

J Jumper stays ...... 6-5 Chapter 8 Index I - Part 1 Page 14 GL 2007

L Lateral thrust units ...... 9c-15, 11g-2 Life-saving appliances ...... 4-5 Lifting appliances ...... 6-1, 6-4 Lighting ...... 11d-3, 11i-1, 11k-8 Loads ...... 6-1 Lubricating oil systems ...... 9b-15, 9d-15 Lubricating oil tanks ...... 9d-24

M Main shafting ...... 9c-1 Mains quality ...... 11a-5 Manual operation ...... 9a-2, 12-1 Masts ...... 4-4 Materials ...... 5-1, 7-2, 9b-4, 9c-1, 9c-6, 9c-10, 9d-1, 11a-6 Measuring instruments ...... 11e-2 Mechanical joints ...... 9d-9 Membrane type tanks for brines ...... 3-8 Mobility ...... 11j-1 Monitoring ...... 11e-3, 11f-2, 11h-1, 11k-7 Mooring at sea ...... 3-1 Mooring equipment ...... 5-6 Mooring winches ...... 5-7 Motor protection ...... 11e-3 Motors ...... 11g-1 Mounting ...... 9c-14, 11i-1 Movements ...... 1-2

N Navigation in ice ...... 9c-18 Noise ...... 9a-4

O Oil burners ...... 9e-2 Oil firing equipment ...... 9e-2 Oil fuel systems ...... 9d-13 Oil residues ...... 9d-22, 9d-27 Oily water separating equipment ...... 9d-22 Openings ...... 2-2 Operating and maintenance instructions ...... 9a-3 I - Part 1 Index Chapter 8 GL 2007 Page 15

Overflow pipes ...... 4-1 Overflow systems ...... 9d-23

P Paint store ...... 8-6 Pelagic trawl ...... 6-3 Penetrations ...... 11j-4 Permeability ...... 2-1, 2-14 Pipe classes ...... 9d-1 Pipe connections ...... 9d-8 Piping systems ...... 9d-1 Plan approval ...... 6-2 Plastic pipes ...... 9d-2 Plug ...... 11g-3, 11i-1, 11k-8 Portable fish hold divisions ...... 3-6 Power demand ...... 11c-1 Power distribution ...... 11d-3 Power supply systems ...... 11a-5, 11c-1, 11g-1 Pressure testing ...... 9d-5 Pressure vessels ...... 9e-2, 10-7 Propellers ...... 9c-9, 11g-2, 11h-2 Propulsion system ...... 9c-1 Protection against direct contact ...... 11a-6 Protection against foreign bodies and water ...... 11a-6 Protection against indirect contact ...... 11a-6 Protective devices ...... 11e-1, 11f-2, 11k-6 Protective measures ...... 4-3 Pumps ...... 9d-13, 10-9, 11g-2 Purifiers ...... 9d-15

Q Quick freezing installations ...... 10-13

R Radar masts ...... 4-4 Recording points ...... 12-4 Refrigerated seawater tanks (RSW) ...... 10-7 Refrigerating machinery spaces ...... 10-5 Refrigerating units ...... 10-2 Refrigeration installations ...... 10-1 Chapter 8 Index I - Part 1 Page 16 GL 2007

Register book ...... 6-7 Regulations ...... 1-1 Remote control ...... 12-3 Rollers ...... 6-5 Room flooding ...... 12-4 Ropes ...... 5-4, 6-7 Routing of cables ...... 11j-3 Rudder angle indication ...... 9c-17, 11h-2 Rudder angle limitation ...... 9c-17 Rules ...... 1-1

S Safety equipment ...... 9a-4, 10-9 Safety systems ...... 9b-10, 11d-4, 11h-1, 11h-3, 11l-3, 12-2 Saunas ...... 7-9 Scavenge trunks ...... 8-6 Sea chests ...... 9d-17 Sea trials ...... 11l-3 Sealing ...... 9c-2 Seawater cooling systems ...... 9d-17 Sewage systems ...... 9d-26 Shaft alignment ...... 9c-6 Shaft bearings ...... 9c-4 Shaft diameter ...... 9c-1 Shaft liners ...... 9c-3 Shielding ...... 9b-14 Shore connection ...... 11d-2 Short-circuit ...... 11e-2, 11g-1 Shower ...... 11i-2 Side doors ...... 3-9 Side gallows ...... 6-5 Side trawlers ...... 3-1 Sidescuttles ...... 2-6 Signal masts ...... 4-4 Skylights ...... 2-6 Sliding doors ...... 2-2 Small vessels ...... 1-1 Smoke spread ...... 7-7 Socket ...... 11g-3, 11i-1, 11k-8 I - Part 1 Index Chapter 8 GL 2007 Page 17

Sounding devices ...... 2-5 Sounding pipes ...... 4-1, 9d-23 Spare parts ...... 10-13, 11a-8, 13-1 Stability ...... 2-1 Stability information ...... 2-15 Starting equipment ...... 9b-16 Steam boilers ...... 9e-1 Steering gear ...... 9c-15, 11g-1 Stern ...... 3-4 Stern gantries ...... 6-4 Stern ramp ...... 3-5 Storage batteries ...... 11b-1, 11d-2, 11k-6, 11l-2 Storage of liquids ...... 9d-27 Strengthening at the side shell ...... 3-1 Structural fire protection ...... 7-1 Subdivision ...... 2-13 Supply cables ...... 11d-3 Supply circuits ...... 11d-3 Switchboards ...... 11b-4, 11d-2, 11e-1, 11l-1 Switchgear ...... 11d-1, 11e-2, 11g-1, 11k-6, 11l-2

T Temperature monitoring ...... 10-12 Tests ...... 6-7, 9a-2, 9b-4, 9c-6, 9c-15, 9d-5, 9e-2, 10-2, 10-9, 11e-5, 11f-2, 11g-2, 11k-1, 11l-1, 12-4 Tetrafluorethane ...... 10-4 Thermal oil heaters ...... 9e-1 Thermal oil plants ...... 12-4 Thermometers ...... 10-10 Tooth couplings ...... 9c-9 Torremolinos Convention ...... 1-1, 11a-1 Torsional vibrations ...... 9c-18 Transformers ...... 11b-3, 11d-2, 11k-5, 11l-1 Trawl booms ...... 6-5 Trawling gear ...... 6-3 Type tests ...... 9b-6, 9b-7, 11l-3

V Valves ...... 9d-8, 10-8 Ventilation ...... 7-2, 7-6, 9a-4, 11b-2, 11k-1 Ventilation ducts ...... 11b-2 Chapter 8 Index I - Part 1 Page 18 GL 2007

Ventilators ...... 2-5 Vibrations ...... 9a-1, 11a-4 Voltages ...... 11a-6, 11e-5, 11f-2, 11j-2, 11k-4

W Wall thickness ...... 9d-6 Wall thickness groups ...... 9d-6, 9d-25 Warm water generators ...... 9e-1 Water on deck ...... 2-11 Watertight doors ...... 2-2 Weather deck ...... 3-6 Weathertight doors ...... 2-2 Winches ...... 6-5 Windings ...... 11k-1 Windlasses ...... 5-5, 11g-3 Windows ...... 2-6 Wires ...... 11j-1, 11k-7

I - Part 1 Section 1 B General Chapter 8 GL 2007 Page 1–1

Section 1

General

A. Application – Code on Intact Stability for All Types of Ships Covered by IMO Instruments, Resolution 1. Definition of fishing vessels A.749(18), as amended Fishing vessels under the terms of these Rules are – Code for Safety of Fishermen and Fishing Ves- seagoing ships used for commercially catching fish, sels, IMO 2005 whales, seals, walrus or other living resources of the – Voluntary Guidelines for the Design, Construc- sea with a length L of 12,0 m and above. tion and Equipment of Small Fishing Vessels, FAO/ILO/IMO 2005 2. Approach These Rules are based on the GL Rules defined in 3.1, 4. Equivalence summarizing in the following Sections additional Vessels deviating from the GL Rules in their types, aspects of fishing vessels for hull structures, machin- equipment or some of their parts may be classed, pro- ery and electrical installations as well as automation. vided that their structures or equipment are found to International requirements are included as far as they be equivalent to the GL requirements for the respec- are relevant for Classification by GL. tive Class.

3. Rules, guidelines and regulations

3.1 Basic GL Rules and guidelines B. Class Notations

The following GL Rules are relevant for fishing vessels: 1. Type of Vessel – Part 0 – Classification and Surveys Fishing vessels will get the descriptive Class Notation – Part 1 – Seagoing Ships, Chapter 1 – Hull Struc- FISHING VESSEL, possibly with supplementary tures, Chapter 2 – Machinery Installations, Notations for specification of type, if they fulfil the Chapter 3 – Electrical Installations, Chapter 4 – requirements of these Rules. Automation Supplementary Notations for different types of fishing – II – Materials and Welding, Part 1 to 3 vessels may be: 3.2 National regulations – SIDE TRAWLER Legal national regulations of the flag state have to be – STERN TRAWLER considered in addition by the designer and operator of – TUNA SEINER, etc. fishing vessels, e.g. – for vessels under German flag, e.g. "Unfallver- 2. Special equipment hütungsvorschriften für Unternehmen der See- fahrt (UVV See)", as amended for fishing ves- Special Class Notations for fishing vessels, such as sels with L < 24 m – RC (Remote control of the main propulsion plant from the bridge) 3.3 International regulations – RIC (Cargo refrigeration installation) The following international regulations may apply: – CFG (Certified fishing gear) – Torremolinos International Convention for the Safety of Fishing Vessels, 1977 amended by may be assigned. The detailed requirements for these Protocol of 1993 as applied by the relevant Flag Notations are defined in the relevant Sections of these State Administration for fishing vessels with a Rules. length L ≥ 45 m (did not enter into force on an international basis) 3. Range of service – European Communities, Commission Directive In general the requirements in these Rules are valid for 1997/70/EC of 11 December 1997 as amended by unrestricted service of the fishing vessels. If only a Commission Directive 2002/35/EC of 25 April restricted service is planned the Notations M (Re- 2002 for fishing vessels with a length L ≥ 24 m stricted International Service), K (Coastal Service) or Chapter 8 Section 1 D General I - Part 1 Page 1–2 GL 2007

W (Sheltered Water Service) will be fixed to the Char- 3. Environmental conditions acter of Classification and the special requirements for The design environmental conditions for fishing ves- these ranges of service will be applied. sels are contained in Table 1.2.

4. Further details Table 1.2 Design environmental conditions The Character of Classification and further Notations Standard are defined in the GL Rules Part 0 – Classification and Environmental Parameters requirements for Surveys, Section 2. area design conditions Outside the Temperature –25 °C to +45 °C 1 vessel/air at atmospheric pressure 1000 mbar C. Ambient Conditions at relative humidity of 60 % Outside the Temperature up to +32 °C 2 vessel/seawater Density acc. to salt 1. General operating conditions 1,025 t/m3 content The selection, layout and arrangement of the vessel's Outside the Icing on ship's surfaces See Section 2, structure and all shipboard machinery shall be such as vessel/icing of up to 20 m above E.3.7 to ensure faultless continuous operation under defined surface waterline standard requirements for ambient conditions. Outside the Ice class E, E1, E2, E3, see Section 3, vessel/navigation E4 see Section 9c, E. Variable requirements for unusual types and/or tasks in ice of fishing vessels can be discussed case by case, but Inside the vessel/ Air temperature 0 °C to +45 °C 1 shall not be less than the standard design condition. all spaces at atmospheric pressure 1000 mbar at relative humidity of up to 100% (+45 °C) 2. Inclinations and movements of the vessel Inside the vessel/ Air temperature up to +45 °C specially protect- The standard design conditions for static and dynamic ed control rooms Max. relative humidity 80% inclinations of fishing vessels are defined in Table 1.1. Inside the vessel/ in electrical de- Air temperature 0 °C to +55 °C vices with higher Maximum relative Table 1.1 Design conditions for vessel inclina- degree of heat 100% tions and movements dissipation humidity Structural Air temperature +5 °C Standard members/ unre- Type of Type of requirements for stricted service Seawater temperature 0 °C movement inclination design conditions 1 Higher temperatures due to radiation and absorption heat Static Inclination have to be considered. GL may approve lower air tempera- condition athwartships: 1 tures for vessels designed only for service in particular geo- Main and auxiliary 15° graphical areas. machinery 2 GL may approve lower limit water temperatures for vessels Other installations 2 22,5° operating only in special geographic areas. No uncontrolled 45° switches or functional changes Inclinations fore D. Definitions and aft: 1 Main and auxiliary 5° machinery 1. Administration Other installations 2 10° Administration is the responsible authority of the flag Dynamic Rolling: state of the fishing vessel. Movement Main and auxiliary 30° machinery Other installations 2 30° 2. Co-ordinate system Pitching: For the use of these Rules the fixed, right-handed co- Main and auxiliary 7,5° ordinate system 0, x, y, z as defined in Fig. 1.1 is intro- machinery duced. The origin of the system is situated at the aft end Other installations 2 10° of the length L, at centreline and on the moulded base- 1 Athwartships and fore and aft inclinations may occur line at the vessel's keel. The x-axis points in longitudi- simultaneously. nal direction of the vessel positive forward, the y-axis 2 vessel's safety equipment, e.g. emergency power installations, positive to port and the z- axis positive upwards. Angu- emergency fire pumps, etc. and switch gear and electric/elec- lar motions are considered positive in a clockwise di- tronic equipment rection about the three axes. I - Part 1 Section 1 D General Chapter 8 GL 2007 Page 1–3

z F P

L/2 Q y T x j H Y

L/2 Angles of motion: j = roll angle 0 Q = pitch angle Y = yaw angle

Fig. 1.1 Co-ordinate system and angles of motion

3. Principal dimensions deck of a vessel with a metal shell and to the top edge of the deck for vessels with a shell of other materials. 3.1 Length L In way of effective superstructures the depth is to be measured up to the superstructure deck for determina- The length L [m] on the summer load waterline from tion of the vessel’s scantlings. the fore side of the stem to the after side of the rudder post, or the centre of the rudder stock, if there is no 3.5 Draught T rudder post. L is not to be less than 96 % and need not be greater than 97 % of the extreme length of the The draught T [m] is the vertical distance, at the mid- summer load waterline. In vessels with unusual stern dle of the length L, from base line to a waterline and bow arrangement, the length L will be specially which results from stability calculations according to considered. Section 2.

3.2 Forward perpendicular FP 4. Frame spacing a The forward perpendicular coincides with the The frame spacing a [m] will be measured from moulded side of the plate stem on the waterline on moulding edge to moulding edge of frame. which the length L is measured.

3.3 Breadth B 5. Displacement Δ The breadth B [m] is the maximum breadth of the The displacement Δ represents the mass of the vessel vessel, measured to the moulded line of the frame in a in metric tons at the draught T. vessel with a metal shell and to the outer surface of the hull in a vessel with a shell of fibre reinforced plastic or wood. 6. Block coefficient CB Moulded block coefficient at design draught T, based 3.4 Depth H on the length L. The moulded depth H [m] is the vertical distance, at moulded volume of displacement[] m3 at T the middle of the length L, from the base line to top of C = the deck beam at side on the uppermost continuous B L ⋅⋅BT Chapter 8 Section 1 E General I - Part 1 Page 1–4 GL 2007

7. Vessel speeds are to be explained in a key list. All documents must show the number of the project and the name of the

7.1 Speed v0 owner and/or shipyard. Expected maximum ahead speed of the vessel in calm The drawings and documents have to give sufficient water [kn], at the summer load waterline, when the evidence to ensure conformity with the Rules. total available continuous propulsion power is acting exclusively on the propeller. 3. The supporting calculations shall contain all necessary information concerning reference docu- 7.2 Speed vTow ments (parts of the specification, drawings, superior Expected continuous ahead speed of the vessel [kn] at computations, computations for elements or neigh- fishing operations with nets. bouring elements, following calculations). Literature used for the calculations has to be cited, important but not commonly known sources shall be added as copy. 8. Definition of decks The choice of computer programs according to the 8.1 Bulkhead deck "State of the Art" is free. The programs may be checked by GL through comparative calculations with Bulkhead deck is the deck up to which the watertight predefined test examples. A generally valid approval bulkheads are carried. for a computer program is, however, not given by GL.

8.2 Freeboard deck Direct calculations may be used in the following fields: Freeboard deck is the deck upon which the freeboard calculation is based. – global strength – longitudinal strength 8.3 Strength deck – beams and grillages Strength deck is the deck or the parts of a deck which form the upper flange of the longitudinal structure. – detailed strength For such calculations the computer model, the bound- 8.4 Weather deck ary condition and load cases are to be agreed upon All free decks and parts of decks exposed to the sea with GL. are defined as weather deck. The calculation documents are to be submitted including input and output. During the examination it may 8.5 Lower decks prove necessary that GL perform independent com- Starting from the first deck below the uppermost con- parative calculations. tinuous deck, the decks are defined as 2nd, 3rd, deck, etc. 4. The detailed requirements for the documentation are defined in the different Sections. Reference is 8.6 Superstructure decks also made to the GL software for documents to be The superstructure decks situated immediately above submitted (SCOL). the uppermost continuous deck are termed forecastle deck, bridge deck and poop deck. Superstructure 5. GL reserve the right to demand additional decks above the bridge deck are termed 2nd, 3rd super- documentation if that submitted is insufficient for an structure deck, etc. assessment of the ship or essential parts thereof. This may especially be the case for plants and equipment related to new developments and/or which are not tested on board to a sufficient extent. E. Documents for Approval 6. The drawings are to be submitted in triplicate, 1. The documents to obtain Class defined in the all calculations and supporting documentation in one following have to be submitted to GL in German or copy for examination at a sufficiently early date to English language. ensure that they are approved and available to the Surveyor at the beginning of the manufacture or in- 2. The survey of the vessel's construction will stallation of the ship or of important components. be carried out on the basis of approved documents. The drawings must contain all data necessary for as- 7. Once the documents submitted have been sessment and approval. Where deemed necessary, approved by GL they are binding on the execution of calculations and descriptions of the vessel's elements the work. Subsequent modifications and extensions are to be submitted. Any non-standard symbols used require the approval of GL before becoming effective. I - Part 1 Section 2 A Closure Conditions, Buoyancy and Stability Chapter 8 GL 2007 Page 2–1

Section 2

Closure Conditions, Buoyancy and Stability

A. General 6. Definitions

1. Classification 6.1 Watertight

Fishing vessels with a length L ≥ 12 m will be as- Watertight in relation to a structural element means signed Class only after it has been demonstrated that capable of preventing the passage of water through the the closure conditions, buoyancy, subdivision and structure in any direction under the head of water for their stability are adequate for the service intended. which the surrounding structure is designed.

2. Basic regulations 6.2 Weathertight The regulations to be applied besides the International Convention on Load Lines, 1966, as amended (ICLL) Weathertight means that in any sea condition water are summarized in Section 1, A.3. The requirements will not penetrate into the fishing vessel. and measures contained in these regulations are integrated in this Section. 6.3 Angle of heel

3. Closure conditions ϕ = angle of heel relative to the y-axis [°], see also Section 1, Fig. 1.1 A closure plan report in accordance with GL Form F 434 or F 430 for fishing vessels, showing all openings, cut-outs, passages, etc. in deck and shell “as built“, 6.4 Angle of flooding will be established by the GL Surveyor and sent for approval to the GL Head Office. Angle of flooding Θf means the angle of heel at which openings in the hull, superstructures or deckhouses, 4. Stability which cannot be closed watertight, immerse.

4.1 Adequate intact stability means compliance 6.5 Permeability with standards laid down by the relevant Administra- tion. GL reserve the right to deviate therefrom, if re- The permeability μ of a space is the proportion of the quired for special reasons, taking into account the immersed volume of that space which can be occupied fishing vessel's size and type. by water.

4.2 Evidence of approval by the competent Ad- ministration of the flag state concerned may be ac- 6.6 Further definitions are given in Section 1, D. cepted for the purpose of Classification. 7. Anti-heeling devices 4.3 Fishing vessels with proven damage stability will be assigned the symbol , see GL Rules Part 0 – 7.1 If tanks are used as heeling devices, effects of Classification and Surveys, Section 2, C.2.4. maximum possible tank moments on intact stability are to be checked. A respective proof has to be carried 4.4 The compliance with the requirements of this out for several draughts and taking maximum allow- Section is to be checked by calculation and tests ac- able centres of gravity resulting from the stability limit cording to G. with the prototype, if any, or with the curve as a basis. actual fishing vessel itself in the fully loaded, ready for use condition. Trials are to be carried out under the supervision of a GL Surveyor. 7.2 If a fishing vessel is equipped with anti- heeling arrangements which may produce heeling Details regarding the execution of the trials are laid angles of more than 10°, the GL Rules Chapter 2 – down by GL Head Office, see also G. Machinery Installations, Section 11, P.1.4 have to be observed. 5. Documents to be submitted for approval For the condition of drawings and documents which 7.3 All devices have to comply with GL Rules are necessary for approval see Section 1, E. Chapter 3 – Electrical Installations, Section 7, G. Chapter 8 Section 2 B Closure Conditions, Buoyancy and Stability I - Part 1 Page 2–2 GL 2007

B. Openings and Closures in Hull, Deck and 2.1.4 Sliding doors Superstructures 2.1.4.1 Sliding doors shall be capable of being oper- 1. General ated when the fishing vessel is listed up to 15° either way. 1.1 Coaming heights for openings leading below the working deck, to enclosed superstructures or to 2.1.4.2 Sliding doors, whether manually operated or spaces considered buoyant in the stability calculation otherwise, shall be capable of being operated locally are in general to be in accordance with the require- from each side of the door. In fishing vessels with L ≥ ments of this Section as far as reasonable and practi- 45 m these doors shall also be capable of being oper- cable. ated by remote control from an accessible position above the working deck, except when the doors are 1.2 Where applicable, sill or coaming heights fitted in crew accommodation spaces. should comply with National Administration requirements. 2.1.4.3 Means shall be provided at remote operating positions to indicate when a sliding door is open or 1.3 Doors, hatches and ventilation ducts includ- closed. ing their covers, lock tumblers and securing arrangements must be adequately dimensioned. Details are to be submitted for approval. 2.2 Weathertight doors

1.4 All doors and escape hatches must be oper- 2.2.1 All access openings in bulkheads of enclosed able from both sides. superstructures and other outer structures through which water could enter and endanger the fishing 1.5 For ships other than fishing vessels, e.g. ves- vessel, shall be fitted with doors permanently attached sels processing their catch, with L ≥ 24 m the re- to the bulkhead, framed and stiffened so that the quirements of the International Convention on Load whole structure is of equivalent strength to the un- Lines (ICLL) have to be observed. pierced structure, and weathertight when closed, see Table 2.1. 2. Doors 2.2.2 The means of securing the doors weathertight 2.1 Watertight doors shall consist of gaskets and clamping devices or other equivalent means and shall be permanently attached to 2.1.1 The number of openings in watertight bulk- the bulkhead or to the doors themselves, and shall be heads, as required by F.1., shall be reduced to the so arranged that they can be operated from each side minimum compatible with the general requirements of the bulkhead. The Administration may, without and operational needs of the fishing vessel. The open- prejudice to the safety of the crew, permit the doors to ings shall be fitted with watertight closing appliances be opened from one side only for freezer rooms, pro- to the satisfaction of the Administration, see Table 2.1. vided that a suitable alarm device is fitted to prevent Watertight doors shall be of equivalent strength to the persons being trapped in those rooms. adjacent unpierced structure. 2.2.3 Height of door sills 2.1.2 Fishing vessels with L < 45 m Doors may be of the hinged type, which shall be capa- 2.2.3.1 The height above deck of sills in those door- ble of being operated locally from each side of the ways, in companionways, erections and machinery door and shall normally be kept close at sea. A notice casings which give direct access to parts of the deck shall be attached to the door on each side to state that exposed to the weather and sea shall be at least ac- the door shall be kept closed at sea. cording to Table 2.2, first column.

2.1.3 Fishing vessels with L ≥ 45 m The heights of sills on superstructure decks shall be at least according to Table 2.2, second column. Doors shall be of the sliding type in: – spaces where it is intended to open them at sea 2.2.3.2 Where operating experience has shown justi- and if located with their sills below the deepest fication and on approval of the Administration, the operating waterline, unless GL considers it to be heights on the working deck, except in the doorways impracticable or unnecessary taking into ac- giving direct access to machinery spaces, may be count the type and operation of the fishing ves- reduced according to Table 2.2, third column. sel Where operating experience has shown justification – the lower part of a machinery space where there and on approval of the Administration, the height of is access from it to a shaft tunnel sills on superstructure decks may be reduced to values Otherwise the doors shall be of the hinged type. not less than defined in Table 2.2, forth column. I - Part 1 Section 2 B Closure Conditions, Buoyancy and Stability Chapter 8 GL 2007 Page 2–3

Table 2.1 Requirements for openings and closures

Closure requirements Working deck Superstructure Closure components Superstructure Working deck for special deck for special deck conditions conditions Doors in watertight bulkheads watertight Doors in enclosed superstructures weathertight Hatchways weathertight Openings for fishing operations weathertight watertight 1 Ventilator coamings weathertight open 1 Air pipes weathertight weathertight Sidescuttles to spaces below working deck, to spaces within watertight closed structures Windows watertight

1 for coaming heights see Table 2.2

Table 2.2 Minimum coaming heights

Height requirements [mm] Working deck Superstructure Closure components Superstructure Working deck for special deck for special deck conditions conditions Door sills L = 12 m 300 300 150 150 1 1 L ≥ 24 m 600 300 380 150 12 m < L < 24 m linear interpolation linear interpolation linear interpolation linear interpolation Hatchways L = 12 m 300 300 reduced 2 reduced 2 L ≥ 24 m 600 300 reduced 2 reduced 2 12 m < L < 24 m linear interpolation linear interpolation linear interpolation linear interpolation Openings for fish operations acc. to hatchways flush possible 3 Ventilator coamings 12 m ≤ L < 24 m 760 450 2500 4 1000 4 24 m ≤ L < 45 m 760 450 3400 4 1700 4 L ≥ 45 m 900 760 4500 4 2300 4 Air pipes 760 450 reduced 5 reduced 5 Sidescuttles, 500 < 1000 windows above deepest waterline fixed type sidescuttles

1 for doorways not giving access to machinery spaces, if operation experience justifies and with approval by the Administration 2 for covers other than wood, if operation experience has shown justification and with approval by the Administration 3 where essential for fishing operations, manhole cover, etc. may be fitted 4 closing appliances need not be fitted 5 reduction may be accepted by the Administration to avoid interference with fishing operations

Chapter 8 Section 2 B Closure Conditions, Buoyancy and Stability I - Part 1 Page 2–4 GL 2007

3. Openings for fishing operations 4.3 Hatchway covers other than wood

3.1 Deck openings which may be open during 4.3.1 Where operating experience has shown fishing operations shall normally be arranged near the justification, and on the approval by the Administra- vessel’s centreline. However, the Administration may tion, the height of coamings according to 2.2.3.1 may approve different arrangements if satisfied that the be reduced, or the coamings omitted entirely, pro- safety of the vessel will not be impaired. vided that the safety of vessels is not thereby impaired. In this case, the hatchway openings shall be 3.2 Fish flaps on stern trawlers shall be power kept as small as practicable and covers be perma- operated and capable of being controlled from any nently attached by hinges or equivalent means and be position which provides an unobstructed view of the capable of being rapidly closed and battened down, operation of the flaps. or by equally effective arrangements to the satisfaction of the Administration. 3.3 Where it is essential for fishing operations, flush deck scuttles of the screw, bayonet or equiva- 4.3.2 For the purpose of strength calculations, it lent type and manholes may be fitted, provided these shall be assumed that hatchway covers are subjected are capable of being closed watertight and such de- to the weight of cargo intended to be carried on them vices shall be permanently attached to the adjacent or to the following static loads, whichever is the structure. Having regard to the size and disposition of greater: the openings and the design of the closing devices, – 10,0 kN/m2 for vessels with L < 24 m metal-to-metal closures may be fitted if the Admini- stration is satisfied that they are effectively water- – 17,0 kN/m2 for vessels with L ≥ 100 m tight. – linear interpolation for values of L in between 3.4 Openings other than hatchways, like man- The Administration may reduce the loads to not less holes and flush scuttles in the working or superstruc- than 75 % of the above values for covers to hatch- ture deck shall be protected by enclosed structures ways situated on the superstructure deck in a position fitted with weathertight doors or their equivalent. abaft a point located 0,25 L from the forward perpen- Companionways shall be situated as close as practi- dicular. cable to the centreline of the vessel. 4.3.3 Where the covers are made of normal hull structural steel, the maximum stress calculated ac- 4. Hatchway openings and hatch covers cording to 4.3.2 multiplied by 4,25 shall not exceed the minimum ultimate strength of the material. Under 4.1 General these loads the deflections shall not be more than 0,0028 times the span. 4.1.1 All hatchways shall be provided with covers. For vessels with 12 m ≤ L < 24 m hatchways which 4.3.4 Covers made of materials other than normal may be opened during fishing operation shall nor- hull structural steel shall be at least of equivalent mally be arranged near the vessel's centreline. strength to those of normal hull structural steel and their construction shall be of sufficient stiffness en- 4.1.2 The height above deck of the hatchway suring weathertightness under the loads specified in coamings shall be as defined in 2.2.3.1. 4.3.2.

4.2 Wooden hatchway covers 4.3.5 Hatch covers shall be fitted with clamping devices and gaskets sufficient to ensure weathertight- 4.2.1 The use of wooden hatchway covers is gen- ness or other equivalent arrangements to the satisfac- erally not recommended in view of the difficulty of tion of the Administration. rapidly securing their weathertightness. However, where fitted they shall be capable of being secured weathertight. 5. Machinery space openings

4.2.2 The finished thickness of wood hatchway 5.1 Machinery space openings shall be framed covers shall include an allowance for abrasion due to and enclosed by casings of a strength equivalent to rough handling. In any case, the finished thickness of the adjacent superstructure. External access openings these covers shall be at least 4 mm for each 100 mm therein shall be fitted with doors complying with the of unsupported span subject to a minimum of 40 mm requirements of Table 2.2 or with hatch covers other and the width of their bearing surface shall be at least than wood complying with the provisions of 4.3. 65 mm. 5.2 Openings other than access openings shall 4.2.3 Arrangements for securing wood hatchway be fitted with covers of equivalent strength to the covers weathertight shall be provided to the satisfac- unpierced structure, permanently attached thereto and tion of the Administration. capable of being closed weathertight. I - Part 1 Section 2 B Closure Conditions, Buoyancy and Stability Chapter 8 GL 2007 Page 2–5

6. Ventilators 6.5 Machinery space ventilators If the Administration is satisfied that it is unlikely that 6.1 General water will enter the vessel through machinery space ventilators, closing appliances to such ventilators may Ventilators shall have coamings of equivalent strength be omitted. to the adjacent structure and shall be capable of being closed weathertight by closing appliances permanently 7. Air pipes attached to the ventilators or adjacent structure. Where the coaming of any ventilator exceeds 900 mm in 7.1 The height of air pipes above deck to the height it shall be specially supported. point where the water may have access below shall be at least 760 mm on the working deck and at least 450 6.2 Fishing vessels with 12 m ≤ L < 24 m mm on the superstructure deck. The Administration may accept reduction of the height of an air pipe to 6.2.1 Ventilators shall be arranged as close to the avoid interference with the fishing operations, see vessels centreline as possible and, where practicable, Table 2.2. shall extend through the top of a deck erection or 7.2 Where air pipes to tanks and void spaces companion way. below deck extend above the working or the superstructure decks, the exposed parts of the pipes shall be 6.2.2 On the working deck the height above deck of strength equivalent to the adjacent structures and of coamings of ventilators other than machinery space fitted with appropriate protection. Openings of air ventilators shall not be less than 760 mm and on su- pipes shall be provided with means of closing, perma- perstructure decks not less than 450 mm. When the nently attached to the pipe or the adjacent structure. height of such ventilators may interfere with the working of the vessel their coaming heights may be re- 8. Sounding devices for fishing vessels with duced to the satisfaction of the competent Authority, see Table 2.2. L ≥ 24 m 8.1 Sounding devices shall be fitted for: 6.2.3 The height above deck of machinery space ventilator openings shall be to the satisfaction of the – all tanks and cofferdams competent Authority. – bilges of those compartments which are not readily accessible at all times during the voyage 6.2.4 Closing appliances need not be fitted to ventilators the coamings of which extend more than 2,5 m 8.2 Where sounding pipes are fitted, their upper above the working deck or more than 1,0 m above a ends shall be extended to a readily accessible position deckhouse top or superstructure deck. and, where practicable, above the working deck. Their openings shall be provided with permanently attached means of closing. Sounding pipes which are not ex- 6.3 Fishing vessels with 24 m ≤ L < 45 m tended above the working deck shall be fitted with automatic self-closing devices. 6.3.1 The height above deck of ventilator coamings, other than machinery space ventilator coamings, 9. Inlets and discharges shall be at least 760 mm on the working deck and at least 450 mm on superstructure decks, see Table 2.2. 9.1 Discharges led through the shell either from spaces below the working deck or from enclosed su- 6.3.2 Closing appliances need not be fitted to venti- perstructures or deckhouses on the working deck fitted lators the coamings of which extend to more than 3,4 with doors complying with the requirements of 2.2 m above the working deck or more than 1,7 m above shall be fitted with efficient and accessible means for the superstructure deck. preventing water from passing inboard. Normally each separate discharge shall have an automatic non-return 6.4 Fishing vessels with L ≥ 45 m valve with a positive means of closing from a readily accessible position. Such a valve is not required if the Administration considers that the entry of water into 6.4.1 The height above deck of ventilator coam- the vessel through the opening is not likely to lead to ings, other than machinery space ventilator coamings, dangerous flooding and that the thickness of the pip- shall be at least 900 mm on the working deck and at ing is sufficient. The means for operating the positive least 760 mm on the superstructure deck, see Table action valve shall be provided with an indicator show- 2.2. ing whether the valve is open or closed. 6.4.2 Closing appliances need not be fitted to venti- For fishing vessels with 12 m ≤ L < 24 m the open lators the coamings of which extend to more than inboard end of any discharge system shall be above 4,5 m above the working deck or more than 2,3 m the deepest operating waterline at an angle of heel above the superstructure deck. satisfactory to the Administration. Chapter 8 Section 2 B Closure Conditions, Buoyancy and Stability I - Part 1 Page 2–6 GL 2007

9.2 In (manned) machinery spaces main and 11. Freeing ports auxiliary sea inlets and discharges essential for the operation of machinery may be controlled locally. The 11.1 Where bulwarks on weather parts of the controls shall be accessible and shall be provided with working deck form wells, the minimum freeing port indicators showing whether the valves are open or area A on each side of the vessel for each well on the closed. working deck shall be determined in relation to the length and the bulwark height in the well as follows: For fishing vessels with 12 m ≤ L < 24 m suitable warning devices shall be incorporated to indicate leak- A = K ⋅ l [m2] age of water into the space. l = length of well [m] 9.3 Fittings attached to the shell and the valves = not to be taken as greater than 70 % of L required by these Rules shall be of steel, bronze or other approved ductile material. All pipes between the K = 0,035 for vessels with L = 12 m shell and the valves shall be of steel, except that in = 0,07 for vessels with L ≥ 24 m vessels constructed of material other than steel, other suitable materials may be approved by the Administra- = to be defined by linear interpolation for tion. lengths in between

9.4 Scuppers sufficient in number and size to Where the bulwark is more than 1,2 m in average provide effective drainage of water are to be fitted in height, the required area A shall be increased by 2 the weather deck and in the working deck within 0,004 m per metre length of the well and for each 100 weathertight closed superstructures and deckhouses. mm difference in height. Decks within closed superstructures are to be drained Where the bulwark is less than 0,9 m in average to the bilge. Scuppers from superstructures and deck- height, the required area A shall be decreased by houses which are not closed weathertight are to be led 0,004 m2 per metre length of the well and for each outside. 100 mm difference in height.

10. Sidescuttles, windows, skylights 11.2 The freeing port area calculated according to 11.1 shall be increased where the Administration con- 10.1 In general all windows have to be built in siders that the vessel's sheer is not sufficient to ensure accordance with ISO standards 1751 (side scuttles) that the deck is rapidly and effectively freed of water. and/or 3903 (rectangular windows) respectively and are to be tested accordingly in the presence of a GL 11.3 Subject to the approval of the Administration Surveyor. the minimum freeing port area for each well on the superstructure deck shall not be less than one half the 10.2 For all fishing vessels sidescuttles to spaces area A given in 11.1. below the working deck and to spaces within the enclosed structure on that deck shall be fitted with On vessels with L < 24 m, where the superstructure hinged deadlights capable of being closed watertight. deck forms a working deck for fishing operations the minimum area on each side shall not be less than 75 10.2.1 For fishing vessels with L < 24 m deadlights per cent of the area A. or a suitable number of storm shutters shall be provided where there is no method of preventing water 11.4 Freeing ports shall be so arranged along the from entering the hull through a broken window or length of bulwarks as to ensure that the deck is freed sidescuttle. from water most rapidly and effectively. Lower edges of freeing ports shall be as near the deck as practica- 10.3 No sidescuttles shall be fitted in such a posi- ble. tion that its sill is less than 500 mm above the deepest operating waterline. 11.5 Poundboards and means for stowage of the fishing gear shall be arranged so that the effectiveness 10.4 For fishing vessels with L ≥ 24 m sidescuttles of freeing ports will not be impaired. Poundboards fitted less than 1000 mm above the deepest operating shall be constructed that they can be locked in position waterline shall be of the fixed type. when in use and shall not hamper the discharge of shipped water. 10.5 Sidescuttles, together with their glasses and deadlights shall be of an approved construction (to the 11.6 Freeing ports over 300 mm in depth shall be satisfaction of the Administration for fishing vessels fitted with bars spaced not more than 230 mm and not with L < 24 m). Those prone to be damaged by fishing less than 150 mm apart or provided with other suitable gear shall be suitably protected. protective arrangements. Freeing port covers, if fitted, shall be of approved construction. If devices are con- 10.6 Toughened safety glass or its equivalent shall sidered necessary for locking freeing port covers dur- be used for the wheelhouse windows. ing fishing operations they shall be to the satisfaction I - Part 1 Section 2 E Closure Conditions, Buoyancy and Stability Chapter 8 GL 2007 Page 2–7

of the Administration and easily operable from a read- 3. Where entry of water into structures above ily accessible position. the boundary as defined in 1., third item, would significantly influence the stability and buoyancy of the 11.7 In vessels intended to operate in areas subject vessel, such structure shall be: to icing, covers and protective arrangements for free- – of adequate strength to maintain the weather- ing ports shall be capable of being easily removed to tight integrity and be fitted with weathertight restrict ice accretion. The size of openings and means closing appliances; or provided for removal of these protective arrangements shall be to the satisfaction of the Administration. – provided with adequate drainage arrangements; or 11.8 On vessels with L < 24 m where wells or – an equivalent combination of both above meas- cockpits are fitted in the working deck or superstruc- ures ture deck with their bottom above the deepest operating waterline, effective non-return means of drainage 4. The means for closing openings in the overboard shall be provided. Where bottoms of such boundaries of weathertight structures shall be such as wells or cockpits are below the deepest operating to maintain weathertight integrity in all operational waterline, drainage to the bilge will have to be pro- conditions. vided.

E. Intact Stability C. Draught Marking 1. General 1. A maximum permissible operating draught Adequate stability of the fishing vessel shall be shall be approved by GL and shall be such that, in the proven. Insofar as fishing gear, vessel type and pro- associated operating condition, the stability criteria pulsion plant installation do not demonstrate any un- according to E. and F. are satisfied. usual characteristics, the criteria listed below are used for determining stability for the operating conditions 2. Datum draught marks shall be provided at the defined in 3.1. bow and stern, port and starboard and be adequate in number for assessing the condition and trim of the Note vessel. The marks shall be permanent and easily to be Compliance with the stability criteria does not ensure read. immunity against capsizing. Good seamanship is therefore an essential prerequisite for a stability-safe The draught to which marks relate shall be indicated fishing vessel. above the mark on the hull.

2. Stability Criteria

2.1 Minimum stability criteria D. Intact Buoyancy The following minimum stability criteria have to be fulfilled unless GL is satisfied that operating experi- 1. All fishing vessels shall have a sufficient ence justifies alterations therefrom: reserve of buoyancy at the design waterline to meet the intact stability requirements of this Section. This – the area under the righting lever curve (GZ reserve of buoyancy shall be calculated by including curve) shall not be less than 0,055 metre-radian only those compartments which are: up to ϕ = 30° – watertight – the area under the righting lever curve shall not be less than 0,09 metre-radian up to ϕ = 40° or – accepted as having scantlings and arrangements the angle of flooding Θf (angle of heel at which adequate to maintain their watertight integrity non-weathertight openings immerse; small – situated in locations below a boundary, which openings through which progressive flooding may be a watertight deck or an equivalent struc- cannot take place need not to be considered as ture of a non-watertight deck covered by a open ) weathertight structure as defined in 3. – the area under the righting lever curve (GZ curve) between the angles of heel 30° and 40° or 2. Arrangements shall be provided for checking between 30° and the angle of flooding Θf, if this the watertight integrity of those compartments taken angle is less than 40°, shall not be less than 0,03 into account in 1. metre-radians Chapter 8 Section 2 E Closure Conditions, Buoyancy and Stability I - Part 1 Page 2–8 GL 2007

– the righting lever GZ shall be at least 0,20 m at 3. Conditions for stability an angle of heel ϕ ≥ 30° The proof of adequate stability shall be provided for at – the maximum righting arm shall occur at an least the following conditions. angle of heel preferably exceeding 30°, but not less than 25° 3.1 Operating conditions

– the initial metacentric height GM0 shall be not 3.1.1 The number and type of operating conditions less than 0,35 m for single deck vessels to be considered shall be to the satisfaction of GL and shall include the following as appropriate: – the initial metacentric height GM0 may be reduced for vessels with complete superstructures – departure for the fishing grounds with full fuel, and with L ≥ 70 m, but shall in no case be less stores, ice, fishing gear, etc. than 0,15 m – departure from the fishing grounds with full catch 2.2 If any of these criteria are not complied with, the corresponding condition may be accepted by GL if – arrival at home port with full catch and 10 % proof of equivalent safety is provided. stores, fuel, etc.

– arrival at home port with 10 % stores, fuel, etc. 2.3 Simplified stability criterion for L < 30 m and a minimum catch of 20 % of full catch Under all other operating conditions, including those 2.3.1 For decked fishing vessels with a length L < which produce the lowest values of the stability pa- 30 m, the following approximate formula for the rameters, the minimum stability criteria according to minimum metacentric height GMmin can be used as a 2. have to be met. criterion for all operating conditions, but it is not a replacement of the criteria according to 2.1.: 3.1.2 For the operating conditions defined in 3.1.1 the calculations shall include the following: 2 ⎪⎧ ff⎛⎞ GM=+⋅⋅ 0,53 2 B⎨ 0,075 −⋅+⋅ 0,37 0,82 ⎜⎟ – allowance for the weight of the wet fishing nets min wl BB ⎩⎪ wl⎝⎠ wl and tackle, etc. on deck – allowance for the ice accretion according to 3.7 Bwl ls ⎫ −⋅−⋅0,014 0,032 ⎬ H Lwl ⎭ – homogeneous distribution of the catch, unless this is inconsistent with practice Bwl = extreme breadth of the vessel in the waterline – catch on deck, if anticipated, in operating condi- in maximum load condition [m] tions for departure of the fishing grounds with full catch and arrival at home port with 10 % Lwl = length of the vessel in the waterline in maximum load condition [m] stores, etc. – water ballast if carried in tanks which are espe- l = actual length of the enclosed superstructure s cially provided for this purpose or in other tanks extending from side to side of the vessel [m] also equipped for carrying water ballast f = smallest freeboard measured vertically from – allowance for free surface effect of liquids the top of freeboard deck at side to the actual waterline 3.2 GL reserve the right to deviate from the a.m. regulations when particular circumstances warrant 2.3.2 The above formula is applicable for vessels this. This will especially be the case for a change in with the following parameters: the vessel’s mode or area of operation which effect the stability considerations of this Section. – 0,02 < f /Bwl < 0,20 3.3 Free liquid surfaces – ls/Lwl < 0,60 3.3.1 Tanks – 1,75 < Bwl / H < 2,15 The contribution of free liquid surfaces to the heeling – sheer fore and aft ≥ standard sheer according to moment has to be considered. ICLL, Reg. 38(8)

– superstructures with a height ≥ 1,8 m are to be Note included If no other information is available, the following densities of liquids may be used: For vessels with parameters outside of the above limits the formula should be applied with special care. – freshwater 1,000 t/m3 I - Part 1 Section 2 E Closure Conditions, Buoyancy and Stability Chapter 8 GL 2007 Page 2–9

– bilge water 1,005 t/m3 3.5 Severe wind and rolling (weather criterion) – waste water 1,050 t/m3 – fuel 0,830 t/m3 3.5.1 Fishing vessels with L ≥ 45 m – lubricants 0,900 t/m3 3.5.1.1 Scope – fire extinguishing foams 1,150 t/m3 Fishing vessels shall be able to withstand, to the satisfaction of GL, the effect of severe wind and rolling in 3.3.2 Flooding of fish holds associated sea conditions taking account of the seasonal weather conditions, the sea states in which the The angle of heel at which progressive flooding of fish vessel will operate, type of vessel and its mode of holds could occur through hatches which remain open operation. during fishing operations and which cannot be rapidly closed shall be at least 20° unless the stability criteria The criterion supplements the stability criteria given in of 2. can be satisfied with the respective fish holds 2. The more stringent criteria of 2. and the weather partially or completely flooded. criterion shall govern the minimum requirements for fishing vessels of L ≥ 45 m having large windage area. The catch shall be properly secured against shifting by portable fish-hold divisions or other adequate means 3.5.1.2 Weather criterion to avoid dangerous trim or heel of the vessel. 3.5.1.2.1 The ability of the vessel to withstand the combined effects of beam wind and rolling shall be 3.4 Particular fishing methods demonstrated for each standard condition of loading Fishing vessels engaged in particular fishing methods with reference to Fig. 2.1 as follows: where additional external forces are imposed on the – the vessel is subjected to a steady wind pressure vessel during fishing operations, shall meet the stabil- acting perpendicular to the vessel’s centreline ity criteria of 2. also under such conditions. which results in a steady wind heeling lever lw1 Particular care should be taken when the pull from the – from the resultant angle of equilibrium Θ , the fishing gear results in dangerous heel angles. This may 0 vessel is assumed to roll owing to wave action occur when fishing gear fastens onto an underwater obstacle or when handling fish gear, particularly on to an angle of roll Θ1 to windward. Attention purse seiners, or when one of the trawl wires tears off. shall be paid to the effect of steady wind so that The heel angles caused by the fishing gear in these excessive resultant angles of heel are avoided situations shall be eliminated by employing devices Note which can relieve or remove excessive forces applied through the fishing gear. Such devices shall not im- The angle of heel under action of steady wind Θ0 pose a danger to the vessel through operating in cir- should be limited to a certain angle to the satisfaction cumstances other than those for which they were in- of GL. As a guide 16 ° or 80 % of the angle of deck tended. edge immersion, whichever is less, is suggested.

b GZ Lever

lw2 lw1 Q2 Qc a Angle of heel

Fig. 2.1 Severe wind and rolling Chapter 8 Section 2 E Closure Conditions, Buoyancy and Stability I - Part 1 Page 2–10 GL 2007

– the vessel is then subjected to a gust of wind k = factor as follows: pressure which results in a gust wind heeling lever l = 1,0 for a round-bilged vessel having no bilge w2 or bar keels – under the circumstances area b shall be equal to = 0,7 for a vessel having sharp bilges or greater than area a = as shown in Table 2.5 for a vessel having – free surface effects, see 3.3 shall be accounted bilge keels, a bar keel or both for in the standard conditions of loading as defined in 3.1 X1 = factor as shown in Table 2.3

The angles in Fig. 2.1 are defined as follows: X2 = factor as shown in Table 2.4 OG Θ0 = angle of heel under action of steady wind r = 0, 73 ± Td Θ1 = angle of roll to windward due to wave action OG = distance between the centre of gravity and the Θ2 = angle of down flooding Θf or 50° or Θc, waterline [m] whichever is less, where the sign + is to be used for the centre of gravity above the waterline Θf = angle of heel at which openings in the hull, superstructures or deckhouses which cannot the sign – is to be used for the centre of grav- be closed weathertight, immerse. In applying ity below the waterline

this criterion, small openings through which Td = mean moulded draught of the vessel [m] progressive flooding cannot take place need not be considered as open s = factor as shown in Table 2.6 Intermediate values in the Tables 2.3 to 2.6 shall be Θ = angle of second intercept between wind heel- c obtained by linear interpolation. ing lever and GZ curve

3.5.1.2.2 The wind heeling levers lw1 and lw2 referred Table 2.3 Values for factor X1 to in 3.5.1.2.1 are constant values at all angles of inclination and shall be calculated as follows: B/Td X1

Z ≤ 2,4 1,00 lpA=⋅⋅ [m] w1 w 1000⋅⋅Δ g 2,5 0,98 2,6 0,96 l = 1,5 ⋅ l [m] w2 w1 2,7 0,95

2 2,8 0,93 pw = wind pressure [N/m ] 2,9 0,91 = 504 N/m2 3,0 0,90 = the value may be reduced for vessels in re- 3,1 0,88 stricted service, subject to approval by GL 3,2 0,86 A = projected lateral area of the portion of the vessel and deck cargo, if applicable, above 3,3 0,84 2 the waterline [m ] 3,4 0,82 0,80 Z = vertical distance from the centre of A to the ≥ 3,5 centre of the underwater lateral area or approximately to a point at one half of the draught [m] Table 2.4 Values for factor X2

2 g = 9,81 m/s CB X2 Δ = displacement according to Section 1, D. ≤ 0,45 0,75 0,50 0,82 3.5.1.2.3 The angle of roll Θ1 referred to in 3.5.1.2.1 shall be calculated as follows. For vessels with anti- 0,55 0,89 rolling devices the angle of roll shall be determined 0,60 0,95 without taking into account the effect of such systems. 0,65 0,97 109 k X X r s [ ] ≥ 0,70 1,00 Θ=112 ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ° I - Part 1 Section 2 E Closure Conditions, Buoyancy and Stability Chapter 8 GL 2007 Page 2–11

Table 2.5 Values for factor k 3.5.2 Fishing vessels with 24 m ≤ L < 45 m For fishing vessels with a length 24 m ≤ L < 45 m the (Ak ⋅ 100) / (L ⋅ B) k value of the wind pressure pw can be taken from Table 0 1,00 2.7. 1,0 0,98 1,5 0,95 Table 2.7 Wind pressure 2,0 0,88 h [m] 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 and over 2,5 0,79 2 pw [N/m ] 316 386 429 460 485 504 3,0 0,74 1 h is the vertical distance from the centre of the projected 3,5 0,72 vertical area of the vessel to the waterline

≥ 4,0 0,70 3.6 Water on deck

Table 2.6 Values for factor s 3.6.1 Fishing vessels shall be able to withstand, to the satisfaction of GL, the effect of water on deck. The T s seasonal weather conditions and the sea states in ≤ 6 0,100 which the vessel will operate, the type of vessel and the mode of operation have to be taken into account. 7 0,098 8 0,093 3.6.2 Bow height

12 0,065 3.6.2.1 The bow height HB is defined as the minimum vertical distance from the deepest waterline to 14 0,053 the top of the highest exposed deck measured at FP. 16 0,044 3.6.2.2 The bow height shall be sufficient, to the 18 0,038 satisfaction of GL, to prevent excessive shipping of ≥ 20 0,035 water and shall be determined taking account of the seasonal weather conditions, the sea states in which the vessel will operate, the type of the vessel and its The parameters in the Tables are defined as follows: mode of operation. T = rolling period [s] 3.6.2.3 Guidance for calculating bow height 2C⋅⋅B = The determination of the required bow height HB may GM be based upon the following formula: 0,023⋅B 0,043⋅ L C = 0,373 +−wl ⎛⎞L T100m HkB1=⋅L ⎜⎟ 1 + [m] ⎝⎠k2 Lwl = waterline length [m] k1, k2 = coefficients depending upon areas of opera- Tm = mean moulded draught of the vessel [m] tion according to Table 2.8.

Ak = total overall area of the bilge keels or area of the lateral projection of the bar keel, or sum 3.6.2.4 Where the bow height required is obtained by of these areas [m2] sheer, this shall extend from the stem for a length of at least 0,15 L abaft FP. Where it is obtained by a fore- GM = metacentric height corrected for free surface castle, such forecastle shall extend from the stem at effect [m] least 0,07 L abaft FP.

Table 2.8 Definition of coefficients k1 and k2

Area of operation L k1 k2 Extreme conditions with sig- 24 m ≤ L < 110 m 0,09 - 270 nificant wave height ≤ 8 m L ≥ 110 m 4,959 / L 600 Extreme conditions with sig- 24 m ≤ L < 110 m 0,117 - 220 nificant wave height > 8 m L ≥ 110 m 5,990 / L 1484

Chapter 8 Section 2 E Closure Conditions, Buoyancy and Stability I - Part 1 Page 2–12 GL 2007

If the length of the forecastle exceeds 0,15 L due con- 3.6.3.2 For the calculation of the static heeling mo- sideration should be given to the fitting of a bulkhead ment due to water on deck Mw the following assump- with adequate closing appliances. If no such bulkhead tions should be made: is fitted adequate arrangements should be provided for – at the beginning the vessel is in the upright po- removing water from the open forecastle. sition 3.6.2.5 Where a bulwark is fitted this may be taken – during heeling, trim and displacement are con- into account for a height of 1 m, provided that the stant and equal to the values for the vessel with- bulwark extends from the stem to a point at least 0,15 out water on deck L abaft FP. – the effect of freeing ports should be ignored 3.6.2.6 When a vessel is always trimmed by the stern – the deck well is filled to the top of the bulwark at in service conditions, the minimum trim may be al- its lowest point and the vessel heeled up to an lowed in the calculation of bow height. angle at which this point is immersed 3.6.3.3 For the determination of the dynamic heeling Note moment the following formula should be used:

3.6.3 Guidance for the calculation of the effect of Mwod = K ⋅ Mw water on deck K = coefficient for dynamic effects taking in ac- 3.6.3.1 The ability of the vessel to withstand the count for rolling period, dynamic effects of heeling effect due to the presence of water on deck water flow, disposition and configuration of should be demonstrated by a quasi-static method. deck wells and deckhouses, area of opera- According to Fig. 2.2 the following condition shall be tion, etc. satisfied with the vessel in the worst operating condition: = 1,0 for static approach > 1,0 for angle of deck immersion Θ < 10° - C = A / A ≥ 1 D wod a b 15°, or

for angle of bulwark top immersion ΘB < Aa = area between heeling lever curve due to wa- 20° - 25° ter on deck and righting lever GZ curve, see Fig. 2.2 < 1,0 for ΘD > 20° , or

for ΘB > 30° Ab = area below righting lever GZ curve and between heeling lever curve due to water on 3.6.3.4 Other methods for the calculation of the ef- deck and an angle of inclination ϕ = 40° or fect of water on deck using the dynamic approach the angle of flooding Θf ,whichever is less have to be approved by GL.

Mwod GZwod = D Lever Aa M GZ = D

Q Q or 40° B f Angle of inclination

Fig. 2.2 Heeling and righting levers for water on deck I - Part 1 Section 2 F Closure Conditions, Buoyancy and Stability Chapter 8 GL 2007 Page 2–13

3.7 Ice accretion F. Subdivision and Damage Stability

3.7.1 Fishing vessels intended for operation in 1. Bulkheads areas where ice accretion is known to occur shall be: 1.1 At least the following watertight bulkheads – designed to minimize the accretion of ice are to be fitted in all fishing vessels: – one collision bulkhead – equipped with such means of removing ice as GL may require – one afterpeak bulkhead – one bulkhead at each end of the machinery 3.7.2 Standard assumptions space

For fishing vessels operating in areas defined in 3.7.3 1.2 Collision bulkhead the following ice loads shall be assumed: 1.2.1 The collision bulkhead is a watertight bulk- – 0,30 kN/m2 on exposed weatherdecks and head up to the working deck in the forepart of the gangways vessel located at the following distance x [m] aft from FP: – 0,075 kN/m2 for the projected lateral area of each side of the vessel above the – for vessels with L ≥ 45 m: 0,05 ⋅ L ≤ x ≤ 0,08 waterline ⋅ L – for vessels with L < 45 m: 0,05 ⋅ L ≤ x ≤ 0,05 The projected lateral area of discontinuous surfaces of ⋅ L + 1,35 m rail, spars (except masts) and rigging of vessels having no sails and the projected lateral area of other small – in any case: 2,0 m ≤ x objects shall be computed by increasing the total projected area of continuous surfaces by 5 % and the Where any part of the underwater body extends for- static moments of this area by 10 %. ward of FP, e.g. a bulbous bow, the distance x defined above shall be measured from a point at mid-length of the extension forward of FP or from a point 0,015 ⋅ L 3.7.3 Special icing areas forward of FP, whichever is less.

3.7.3.1 Loads in excess of twice the standard loads 1.2.2 The bulkhead may have steps or recesses defined in 3.7.2 may be expected in following area: provided they are within the limits defined in 1.2.1.

– the area north of latitude 43° N bounded in the 1.2.3 Where a long forward superstructure is fitted, west by the North American coast and east by the collision bulkhead shall be extended weathertight the rhumb line running from latitude 43° N lon- to the deck next above the working deck. The exten- gitude 48° W to latitude 63° N longitude 28° W sion need not be fitted directly above the bulkhead and then along longitude 28° W below provided it is located at a distance x defined in 1.2.1 and the part of the deck which forms the step is 3.7.3.2 One half to twice the standard loads defined made effectively weathertight. in 3.7.2 may be expected in the following areas: 1.2.4 Pipes piercing the collision bulkhead shall be fitted with suitable valves operable from above the – the area north of latitude 65°30 N, between working deck and the valve chest shall be secured at longitude 28° W and the west coast of Iceland; the collision bulkhead inside the forepiek. No door, north of the north coast of Iceland; north of the manhole, ventilation duct or any other opening shall rhumb line running from latitude 66° N, longi- be fitted in the collision bulkhead below the working tude 15° W to latitude 73°30 N, longitude 15° E, deck. north of latitude 73°30 N between longitude 15° E and 35° E, and east of longitude 35° E The number of openings in the collision bulkhead above the working deck shall be reduced to the mini- – north of latitude 56° N in the Baltic Sea mum compatible with the design and normal operation of the vessel. Such openings shall be capable of being – all sea areas north of the North American conti- closed weathertight. nent, west of the areas defined above and in 3.7.3.1 2. Double Bottom – the Bering and Okhotsk Seas and the Tartary 2.1 At least for fishing vessels with a length L ≥ Street during the icing season 75 m a double bottom shall be fitted extending from the collision bulkhead to the afterpeak bulkhead. – south of latitude 60° S Chapter 8 Section 2 F Closure Conditions, Buoyancy and Stability I - Part 1 Page 2–14 GL 2007

2.2 The double bottom has to protect the vessel's – the vertical extent of damage in all cases is as- bottom up to the turn of the bilge. For this purpose, the sumed to be from the base line upwards without intersecting line of the outer edge of the margin plate limits with the shell plating is not to be lower at any part than a horizontal plane, passing through the point of – the transverse extent of damage is equal to Bwl/5 intersection with the frame line amidships of a trans- measured inboard from the side of the vessel in verse diagonal line inclined 25 degrees to the base line y-direction at the level of the deepest operating and cutting the base line at B/2 from the centreline of waterline the vessel, see Fig. 2.3. – if a damage of a lesser extent than in the two 2.3 The double bottom need not be fitted in way first conditions results in a more severe condi- of deep tanks, provided that the efficiency of the wa- tion, such lesser extent shall be assumed tertight subdivision is not impaired by such an arrangement. – if there are steps or recesses in a transverse bulkhead of no more than 3,05 m in length within the transverse extent of assumed damage, 2.4 The bottoms of drain sumps are to be situated such transverse bulkhead shall be considered in- at a distance of at least 460 mm from the base line. tact and the adjacent compartments may be Only above the horizontal plane determined from 2.2, flooded singly the bottoms of drain wells may be led to the shell plating. Exemptions for the depth of drain wells may – if the steps or recesses in a transverse bulkhead also be granted in shaft tunnels and pipe tunnels. exceed 3,05 m, the two compartments adjacent to this bulkhead shall be considered as flooded

CL – the step form at the junction of the afterpeak bulkhead and the afterpeak tank top shall not be B/2 regarded as a step in the bulkhead

– where a main transverse bulkhead is situated within the transverse extent of assumed damage and is stepped in way of a double bottom or side tank by more than 3,05 m, the double bottom or inner bottom side tanks adjacent to the stepped portion of the well main transverse bulkhead shall be considered as S flooded simultaneously

baseline 25° – where bulkheads are spaced at a distance less than ⅓ ⋅ L2/3, one or more of these bulkheads shall be assumed as non-existent in order to minimum height of inner bottom (measured from achieve the minimum spacing between bulk- baseline) heads 460 mm (measured from baseline) – if pipes, ducts or tunnels are situated within the assumed transverse extent of damage, arrange- Fig. 2.3 Double bottom with drain sumps location ments are to be made so that progressive flooding cannot thereby extend to compartments other than those assumed to be floodable in the 3. Damage stability calculation for each case of damage – where operating experience has shown that other 3.1 General values are more appropriate, those values may For fishing vessels with a length L ≥ 100 m where the be agreed with GL total number of persons carried on board is 100 or more, a damage stability investigation with flooding 3.2.2 Permeability of any one compartment between adjacent transverse bulkheads is required. The vessel shall be capable of For damage stability calculations, the permeability for remaining afloat with positive stability. each space or part of a space shall be used as set out in Table 2.9. 3.2 Assumptions Direct calculation of permeability shall be used where 3.2.1 Damage extensions a more onerous condition results, and may be used where a less onerous condition results compared with The assumed extent of damage shall be as follows: Table 2.9. I - Part 1 Section 2 H Closure Conditions, Buoyancy and Stability Chapter 8 GL 2007 Page 2–15

Table 2.9 Values of permeability G. Inclining Test

Definition of spaces Permeability µ [%] 1. Every vessel shall undergo an inclining test Control stations, accommoda- upon its completion and the actual displacement and tion rooms, kitchens, pantries, 95 position of the centre of gravity shall be determined workshops for the light ship condition. Machinery and ventilation 85 rooms 2. Where alterations are made to the vessel Storage rooms, refrigerating affecting its light ship condition and the position of the 60 rooms centre of gravity, the vessel shall, if GL considers this necessary, be re-inclined and the stability information Tanks, bunkers, cells 0 or 95 1 revised. Void spaces 95 1 3. GL may allow the inclining test of an indi- whichever results in more severe requirements vidual vessel to be dispensed with provided basic stability data are available from the inclining test of a 3.3 Conditions of equilibrium sister vessel and it is shown to the satisfaction of GL The final waterline after damage to anyone compart- that reliable stability information of the exempted ment shall be either: vessel can be obtained from such basic data. – the line of openings at which progressive flooding to spaces below would occur or according to 4. A report of each inclination test carried out in requirements defined by GL accordance with this Section or of each calculation of the lightship condition particulars shall be submitted – the line to the after end of the top of the poop to GL for approval. The approved report shall be superstructure deck at the centreline, subject to placed on board of the vessel in the custody of the the first four conditions of 3.4. skipper and should incorporate such additions and Unsymmetrical flooding shall be kept to a minimum amendments as GL may require in any particular case. consistent with effective arrangements. Where it is necessary to correct large angles of heel, the means adopted shall, where practicable, be self-acting. H. Stability Information 3.4 Stability criteria The fishing vessel is considered to survive the condi- 1. General tions of damage specified in 3.2.1 provided the vessel remains afloat in a condition of stable equilibrium 1.1 Suitable stability information shall be sup- according to 3.3 and satisfies the following criteria for plied to enable the skipper to assess with ease and residual stability: certainty the stability of the vessel under various operating conditions. Such information shall include spe- – the positive residual righting lever curve shall cific instructions to the skipper warning him of those have a minimum range of 20° beyond the angle operating conditions which could adversely affect of equilibrium either the stability or the trim of the vessel. A copy of – a residual righting lever is to be obtained within the stability information shall be submitted to GL for the range of the positive stability of at least approval. 0,1 m 1.2 The approved stability information shall be – the area under the righting lever curve shall be at kept on board, readily accessible at all times and in- least 0,0175 metre-radians, measured from the spected at the periodical surveys of the vessel to en- angle of equilibrium to the angle at which pro- sure that it has been approved for the actual operating gressive flooding occurs conditions. – the angle of heel in the final condition of flooding shall not exceed 20° 1.3 Where alterations are made to a vessel affecting its stability, revised stability calculations shall be – the initial metacentric height of the damaged prepared and submitted to GL for approval. If GL vessel in the final condition of flooding for the decides that the stability information has to be revised, upright position shall be positive and not less the new information shall be supplied to the skipper than 50 mm and the superseded information removed. Relaxation from these damage stability requirements will be permitted by GL only if the proportions, ar- 2. Scope for intact stability rangements and other characteristics of the vessel are more favourable to stability after damage. The following information has to be provided. Chapter 8 Section 2 H Closure Conditions, Buoyancy and Stability I - Part 1 Page 2–16 GL 2007

2.1 Basic information – information on the proper use and control of any anti-rolling devices – stability calculations including GZ curves of the operating conditions defined in E.3.1 – information on the weight and arrangement of permanent ballast – instructions warning of conditions critical from stability standpoint, e.g. instructions to keep the 3. Scope for damage stability ballast tanks full when necessary for adequate stability For vessels which require investigation of damage stability according to F.3.1 the following additional – maximum permissible operating draught associ- information has to be provided. ated with each operating condition – when appropriate, minimum required operating 3.1 General draught – information on the use of ballast and other liquid systems to correct heel and trim 2.2 Information having regard to the type of vessel, service, etc. – forms for recording daily tank statements – instructions for loading in order to maintain the 2.2.1 If GZ calculations are intended: vessel afloat after flooding – information for determination of weights, posi- 3.2 Damage control plan tions of centres of gravity, free surface effects of tanks, fish holds and pounds 3.2.1 There shall be permanently exhibited or read- – information relating to form stability and hydro- ily available on the navigating bridge, for the guidance static parameters of the skipper and the officers in charge of the fishing vessel, a plan showing clearly: – displacement and disposition of centres of grav- – for each deck and compartment the boundaries ity of light ship condition with regard to perma- of the watertight compartments, the openings nent ballast therein with the means of closure and position of any controls thereof 2.2.2 When rolling tests are used: – for doors, a description of degree of tightness, – information for the determination of metacentric operating mode, normal position, operating cir- height GM0 by means of a rolling test cumstances (opened while at sea, not normally – information giving required minimum metacen- used while at sea, not used while at sea) tric height GM0 for the practical range of – arrangements for the correction of any list due to draughts flooding

2.2.3 In form of simplified information supplemen- 3.2.2 General precautions shall consist of a listing tary or alternative information which permits safe of equipment, conditions and operational procedures, operation without recourse to calculations or rolling considered to be necessary to maintain watertight in- tests. tegrity under normal vessel operations.

2.3 Operational requirements 3.2.3 Specific precautions shall consist of a listing of elements (i.e. closures, securing of equipment/ – instructions for filling and emptying tanks with loads, sounding of alarm, etc.) considered to be vital free liquid surfaces to the survival of the vessel and its crew. I - Part 1 Section 3 B Special Requirements for Hull Structures Chapter 8 GL 2007 Page 3–1

Section 3

Special Requirements for Hull Structures

A. General 1.1 The thickness of the sheerstrake is to be increased by at least 3 mm in way of the trawl gallows. 1. Application It is recommended to also increase the thickness of the sheerstrake between the forward and aft gallows The provisions of this Section shall apply to all types throughout by 2 mm. of fishing vessels. 1.2 In way of the path of the bobbins at the aft 2. Basic Rules gallows during hauling operations, the side plating above the middle of the bilge turn is to be 50 per cent 2.1 For metal hulls of decked fishing vessels the greater in thickness than required. design and construction shall be based on the GL 1.3 At the forward gallows, the side plating Rules Chapter 1 – Hull Structures. But these Rules above the upper turn of the bilge is to be strengthened shall only be valid, where they are not superseded by correspondingly. the special requirements defined in this Section. 1.4 The seams at the lower edge of the sheer- 2.2 For glass fibre reinforced plastic hulls the strake and the upper turn of the bilge are to be pro- design and construction shall be based on the GL tected by half round bars running from the fore to the Rules Part 3 – Special Craft, Chapter 2 – Yachts ≥ aft gallows, and by further half round bars arranged 24 m and Chapter 3 – Yachts and Boats up to 24 m. between them or diagonally in such a way that the The factors defined there for fishing vessels/work- welds cannot be worn by the trawl wire ropes. boats have to be considered and the adequate increase of the scantlings to be agreed with GL. These Rules 1.5 In way of the strengthened shell plating under have to be completed by the reinforcements defined in the aft gallows, intermediate frames are to be arranged, this Section. which are to be connected to the deck and the plate floors, or to be supported by a stringer at the lower edge 2.3 For hulls made of solid wood the design shall of the strengthened plates. The section modulus of be based on the GL Rules Chapter 13 – Vorschriften intermediate frames is not to be less than 75 per cent of für Klassifikation und Bau von hölzernen Seeschif- that of the frames they are fitted between. fen 1. An adequate increase of the scantlings has to be agreed with GL. For cold moulded wood see 2.2. 1.6 The bulwarks at the operating side are to be 2 mm thicker, and under the gallows 3 mm thicker than 2.4 The design and construction of other types of required by the GL Rules Chapter 1 – Hull Structures, hull structures shall be agreed case by case with GL. Section 6, K. In way of the slip hook, the thickness of bulwarks is not to be less than 10 mm. 3. Definitions 2. Strengthening at the shell side for vessels The definition of the main parameters of the hull mooring at sea structure is given in Section 1, D. 2.1 Basic assumptions The requirements for vessels of a fishing fleet mooring together at sea provide for a damping protection of B. Special Measures for the Hull Structure the hull for which purpose pneumatic fenders or other equivalent damping arrangements may be used. These 1. Strengthening at the shell side for side requirements are based on assumptions that the vessels trawlers will be moored at a sea state not above 6 2. The following additional strengthening is required for side trawlers: 2.2 Regions for side strengthening The following regions have to be distinguished, compare Fig. 3.1.

–––––––––––––– –––––––––––––– 1 "Rules for Classification and Construction of Wooden Seago- 2 Sea states relating to wind and sea conditions according to inter- ing Ships" (not available in English) national agreement ranging from sea state 0 (best) to 9 (worst). Chapter 8 Section 3 B Special Requirements for Hull Structures I - Part 1 Page 3–2 GL 2007

> 0,36 L > 0,36 L

weather deck C C C B Summer loadline h A Ballast waterline

h B B B 0,1 0,1

0,5

Fig. 3.1 Regions for strengthening at the shell side for vessels mooring at sea

2.2.1 Depth dimension height or are fitted inboard at not less than the same distance no additional strengthening is required. – region A locating between the line drawn lower than the ballast waterline by the value of h and Where the inclination or the distance between the the line drawn higher than the summer loadline vessel side and the superstructure is less than this by the value of h value, the strengthening of their frames and side plating shall be determined by linear interpolation pro- h = 0,8 m for sea state ≤ 4 ceeding from the requirements in 2.4. = 1,2 m for sea state 5 = 2,0 m for sea state 6 2.3 Design pressure The design pressure on the sides and superstructure – region B located between the upper boundary of sides of vessels moored at sea is to be obtained from region A and the weather/strength deck. the following formulae: – region C located between the strength deck and For region A: the first tier superstructure deck including forecastle and poop. p =α ⋅α ⋅⎡⎤190 + 51 ⋅ Δ⋅ z ⋅ 10−32 − 0,464 [kN / m ] A12⎣⎦⎢⎥ 2.2.2 Length dimension – regions A, B and C are situated between sections of the vessel where the breadth of the vessel is For regions B and C: equal to 0,8 ⋅ B ⎡⎤−32 pBC=α 1 ⋅α 2 ⋅129 + 59 ⋅ Δ⋅ z ⋅ 10 − 0,464 [kN / m ] – for special purpose ships, like transport ships or ⎣⎦⎢⎥ ships with centralized fish processing plants, the regions are to extend at least 0,36 ⋅ L forward α1 = factor for ship displacement and sea condi- and aft from the midship section tions according to Table 3.1 α = factor for region of strengthening according 2.2.3 Additional fender areas 2 to Table 3.2 For big special purpose ships, one or more fender Δ = design ship displacement [t] areas are to be additionally established. The boundaries shall be formed by sections lying within 0,05 ⋅ L = for fishing vessels: to the summer load line forward and aft of the edges of the fender. Extreme = for special purpose ship: of the largest ship positions of fenders and all specific variations of mooring alongside planned mooring have to be considered. 464 t ≤ Δ ≤ 7500 t 2.2.4 Exceptions n = number of moorings, alongside the ship Where superstructure sides are inclined to the centre whose displacement has been adopted as the line of the vessel at not less than 0,1 of superstructure design value in formulae for p I - Part 1 Section 3 B Special Requirements for Hull Structures Chapter 8 GL 2007 Page 3–3

z = distance [m] from the mid-span of member 2.4.2 Framing calculated to the summer loadline 2.4.2.1 The section modulus W of the frames is not = where a special purpose ship has the free- to be less than: board depth hS greater than the freeboard depth h for the largest fishing vessel, the F k value of z is to be reduced by the difference W4,1p=⋅⋅⋅⋅a A23 [cm] m (hS – hF) = in region A z = 1,0 p = pA for region A or pBC for regions B and C = in any case z ≥ 0 according to 2.3 A = span of frame [m] measured along the chord Table 3.1 Factor α1 for ship displacement and between upper edge of inner bottom plating sea conditions and lower edge of deck at side, see Fig. 3.2

Ship Sea state no. k = material factor displacement Δ = 1,0 for normal strength hull structural steel [t] ≤ 4 5 6

≤ 2000 1,00 1,15 1,60 = 235 / ReH for steels with yield properties less 2 > 2000 0,82 1,00 1,16 than 235 N/mm

= 295 / (ReH + 60) for other steels

Table 3.2 Factor α2 for region of strengthening ReH = minimum nominal upper yield stress [N/mm2] Region of strengthening Fishing vessel A2 Region A 1,00 m = 6,8⋅⋅⋅⋅ k k k 123A − 0,75 Region A – within fender area k1, k2, k3 = see Table 3.3 1 Region B 1 0, 22⋅+ z 0, 6 1 Region C 1 0,12⋅+ z 1,28 1 Note: In the regions B and C, α2 is assumed between 1,1 and 1,4

2.4 Scantlings h 2.4.1 Plating In strengthened areas the thickness of side plating and sheer strake is not to be less than: 90° p h t21,7SK=⋅a − 0,242t[mm] + f 1,1⋅ R eH p = pA or pBC for regions A or for regions B and Fig. 3.2 Parameters for determination of framing C according to 2.3

ReH = minimum nominal upper yield strength 2.4.2.2 If a longitudinal framing system is applied for [N/mm2] tween deck spaces, the section modulus of the side longitudinals is not to be less than: tK = 4,0 mm for region A in case trawling is effected from the side of the fishing vessel W = 0,11 ⋅ p ⋅ a ⋅ A2 ⋅ k [cm3] = 1,2 for regions B and C = 3,0 mm elsewhere A = spacing of web frames [m] Chapter 8 Section 3 B Special Requirements for Hull Structures I - Part 1 Page 3–4 GL 2007

Table 3.3 Definition of factors k1 to k3

Number of load distributing side stringers Factor 0 1 2 and more hv = 0,75: hv = 0,75: 1,0 + 0,017 ⋅ A 1,1 + 0,017 ⋅ A a a k1 1,0 hv = 1,0: hv = 1,0: 1,0 + 0,034 ⋅ A 1,1 + 0,034 ⋅ A a a

k2 1,0 1,12 1,15

hhff⎛⎞ h f hf h k3 1,0+⋅ 6,8 ⋅⎜⎟ + 0,28 − 12,5 ⋅ 1, 0+ 7, 0⋅−⋅ 8, 0 AA⎝⎠ A AA

hv = ratio of height of load distributing side stringer to height of frame

hf = distance [m] between a section at the lower support of frame and a tangent to the frame contour in way of the section at the upper support, as measured normal to the tangent, see Fig. 3.2 h = maximum deflection of frame according to Fig. 3.2 [m]

2.5 Arrangement of strengthening 2.5.6 In tween decks the frame lower ends are to be welded to the deck plating. The upper ends of frames 2.5.1 In strengthened regions transverse framing is are to be carried to the deck plating and welded to be adopted to the vessel's sides. In single deck thereto. Beams are to be carried to the inner edges of ships, the deck and bottom in these regions are also to frames with a minimal gap. Beam knees are to have a be framed transversely. In multi-deck ships, transverse face plate or flange. framing is to be adopted for the deck located on the fender level. Longitudinal framing of sides is permis- The ends of intermediate frames are to be attached to sible in the upper tween deck space only. In this case, longitudinal intercostals, decks or platforms. the spacing of web frames is not to exceed three frame 2.5.7 Side longitudinals are to be attached to trans- spacings or 2,4 m, whichever is less. verse bulkheads with knees. Height and width of the knees are to comply with the basic Rules. 2.5.2 In the region A, intermediate frames are recommended through the region length in fishing vessels 2.5.8 The bulwark is to be inclined towards the and within fender areas in special purpose ships. centre line of the ship - or be fitted inboard of the ship's side - at not less than 0,1 of its height. 2.5.3 In any case, it is recommended that symmetrical sections be used and the minimum possible web Bulwark stays welded to sheerstrake are to be so con- depth be ensured for the particular section modulus. structed as to prevent deck plating damage in case of bumping. 2.5.4 Between the ship’s side and vertical stiffener nearest to it, transverse bulkheads are to have horizon- 3. Provisions at the stern tal stiffeners with a section height not less than 75 % of the vertical stiffener height. In ships with L ≤ 80 m, 3.1 In stern trawlers the thickness of the bottom horizontal stiffeners are to be spaced not more than plating in way of the "overhanging" part of the stern 600 mm apart and with L ≥ 150 m, not more than 800 shall not be less than: mm apart. For ships with intermediate lengths, linear interpolation may be used to determine this distance. t2,6kft[mm]=⋅⋅⋅⋅+ΔaL 2 The ends of horizontal stiffeners are to be welded to vertical stiffeners and sniped at the ship's sides. k = material factor according to 2.4.2.1 2 2.5.5 Bilge keels of ships with L ≤ 80 m are to be, 1a⎛⎞ f2 = 1,1 − ⎜⎟ as far as practicable, so arranged that a tangent drawn 2b⎝⎠ to the frame and passing through the outer free edge of the bilge keel would form an angle of not less than 15° f2max = 1,0 with the vertical axis. For ships with L ≥ 150 m, this an- a = smaller breadth of plate panel gle may be zero. For ships of intermediate lengths, the above angle is to be obtained by linear interpolation. b = larger breadth of plate panel I - Part 1 Section 3 B Special Requirements for Hull Structures Chapter 8 GL 2007 Page 3–5

Δt = thickness increase for vessel speed v0 greater Where the catch is dragged onto the weather deck, it is than 1,2 ⋅ L [kn] or 10 kn recommended that the stern ramp be longitudinally framed with transverses fitted at intervals not exceed- = 0,5 mm for each knot exceeding the above ing four frame spacings. The stern ramp longitudinals values are to be spaced not more than 600 mm apart.

Δtmin = 0,5 mm 4.2 The plate thickness of the aft ramp of stern Δtmax = 2,0 mm trawlers is not to be less than: The stern ramp is to be so constructed as to avoid flat of bottom in way of stern counter. t = (8+⋅ 0,1L ) k [mm]

3.2 In stern trawlers the shell strake in way of the tmin = 12⋅ k [mm] construction waterline from stern to the aft perpendicular is recommended to have a thickness as required for the stern ramp in 4. for protection against 4.3 The thickness of inner plating of the ramp local damage. Where the longitudinal framing system forming the ramp sides is not to be less than. is adopted, the side girders are to be fitted not more than two longitudinal frame spacings apart. tmin = (5,5+ 0,02⋅+L ) k 2 [mm]

4. Provisions at the stern ramp In the lower part adjacent to the ramp, a strengthened strake is to be provided having a thickness of not less 4.1 The ramp should be preferably stiffened in its than the thickness required under 5.2. See Fig.3.3. longitudinal direction. The transition radius between deck and ramp should be as large as possible, but should not be less than 300 mm. 4.4 Protection from excessive wear, especially by wire ropes when dragging the catch, should be pro- The connection of stern ramp sides to transom plating vided by the following measures: and of ramp deck to bottom plating are to have a radius of rounding not less than 200 mm. This connec- – protection of transom plating with half-round tion may be made by using a bar not less than 70 mm bars of at least 70 mm in diameter, which are to in diameter. be fitted inclined and secured by welding Stern ramp sides are, in general, to be carried down- – protection of junction line of rounding and flat wards to the shell plating and forward to the after peak side with half-round steel bars welded along the bulkhead and are to be smoothly tapered into deck line, but not farther than 200 mm from the tran- girders and transverses. som

inner planning of ramp ramp

Section A - A A bobbin of trawl

A ~ 1000

greater as diameter of bobbin of trawl, strengthened strake but not less than 700 mm

abt. half bobbin diameter

Fig. 3.3 Strengthening arrangement at the stern ramp Chapter 8 Section 3 C Special Requirements for Hull Structures I - Part 1 Page 3–6 GL 2007

– for vessels engaged in pelagic fishing, protection 2. Fish flaps and stiffening of the stern ramp sides with longitudinal half-round steel bars of at least 70 mm in Fish flaps of stern trawlers shall be power operated diameter, welded to the sides and spaced not and capable of being controlled from any position more than 200 mm apart; the edge of the upper which provides an unobstructed view of the operation bar is not to be less than 650 mm above the of the flaps. ramp deck plating 3. Portable fish hold divisions – alternatively protection by doubling plates at the top and bottom roundings over the full breadth 3.1 General of the ramp and doubling strips at least 400 mm wide at the sides over the ramp length 3.1.1 Task of the portable fish hold divisions is to properly secure the catch against shifting which could 5. Strengthening of the weather deck cause dangerous trim or heel of the vessel. Under trawl winches, trawl gallows, windlasses and 3.1.2 Every portable fish hold division is to extend centre fairleads, beams and substructures of adequate from the bottom of the hold to the deck. strength are to be fitted. The thickness of the deck plating is to be suitably increased, even if wood 3.1.3 One longitudinal division is to be fitted where sheathing will be fitted. the greatest internal cargo hold breadth is 6 m. If the breadth exceeds 6 m, at least 2 longitudinal divisions are to be fitted so that the distance between longitudinal divisions or between these and the vessel‘s side does not extend 3 m. Longitudinal divisions are to be C. Fish Holds positioned symmetrically to the vessel’s centre line.

1. General 3.1.4 It is assumed that in vessels having one longitudinal division, the level of cargo is at any time during loading approximately the same on both sides of 1.1 Basic requirements the division. The following basic requirements shall be met during operation of the fish holds: 3.1.5 The requirements of 3.1.2 to 3.1.4 are based on the assumption that the portable fish hold divisions – during loading of fish holds with a longitudinal consist of vertical uprights with horizontal wooden bulkhead, the level of cargo shall be at any time boards, see Fig. 3.4. approximately the same on both sides of the bulkhead 3.1.6 The longitudinal distance l between uprights or between permanent transverse bulkheads and up- – cargo not carried in tanks, is drained before rights should normally not exceed 2,0 m. loading 3.1.7 Arrangements and details of the fish hold – fish holds fully loaded with fish treated with divisions are to be submitted for approval. preserving agent have to be checked concerning uncontrolled swelling

1.2 No sharp corners or projections shall be allowed in fish holds or fish tanks, compare D., to facilitate cleaning and reduce inherent dangers to workers in these holds or tanks. h 1.3 Pipes and chains or conduits passing through h the fish hold shall, if practicable, be installed flush with ceilings or boxed in and adequately insulated in a manner facilitating access for inspection and maintenance. b

1.4 In fish holds, and also fish processing spaces, b in which non-packed salted catch or salt is stored or which are exposed to the detrimental effect of catch wastes and seawater, the plating thickness is to be increased by 1 mm as compared to that required by the relevant Sections of the basic Rules. Where the structure is so influenced from both sides, relevant thick- Fig. 3.4 Arrangement of uprights and horizontal ness is to be increased by 2 mm. boards I - Part 1 Section 3 C Special Requirements for Hull Structures Chapter 8 GL 2007 Page 3–7

3.2 Uprights y = distance of load centre from the vertical longitudinal central plane of tank [m] 3.2.1 The section modulus of steel or aluminium a = acceleration factor according to GL Rules uprights is not to be less than: V Chapter 1 – Hull Structures, Section 4, C.1.1 3 3 W = c ⋅ h (b + A) k [cm ] 3.3.2 In order to prevent galvanic corrosion, insulation is to be fitted at connections or contact surfaces The minimum section modulus is 40 ⋅ k [cm3] between steel and aluminium. c = 1,6 where one longitudinal division is fitted Corrugated boards are to be made of seawater resistant aluminium. = 2,0 where two or more longitudinal divisions The minimum thickness of wooden boards should be are fitted 65 mm. h = free span of upright [m] 4. Removable bulkheads of steel or aluminium b = distance between the uprights in the vessel's transverse direction [m] 4.1 Removable steel or aluminium bulkheads A = distance between uprights in the vessel's which are used in connection with hatches are to be longitudinal direction [m] double plated with the stiffeners placed horizontally. Internal surfaces of steel bulkheads are to be covered k = material factor see B.2.4.2.1 by a corrosion-resistant coating.

4.2 The plate thickness is to be at least: 3.2.2 The uprights are to be secured at top and bottom as to allow transmission of reaction forces in t = cs⋅⋅ h + 0,5 [mm] adjacent structures.

tmin = 6 mm 3.2.3 If openings are cut in the uprights for fitting of the upper boards, the boards in the opening are to c = 3,4 for steel be locked in position to prevent their slipping out of the guide. = 4,7 for aluminium s = stiffener spacing [m] 3.3 Portable boards h = height [m] from upper edge of bulkhead to lower edge of plating 3.3.1 The section modulus of the portable shifting boards is to be determined by the following formula: 4.3 The section modulus of horizontal stiffeners is not to be less than: W = k ⋅ 0,8 ⋅ e ⋅ p ⋅ A'2 [cm3] W = c ⋅ A2 ⋅ s ⋅ h [cm3] e = vertical width of board [m] c = 7,0 for steel A' = span of board [m] according to Fig. 3.4 = 13,5 for aluminium

= b in vessel's transverse direction A = stiffener span [m] = l in vessel's longitudinal direction s = stiffener spacing [m]

The design pressure p at the lowest board is the greater h = height [m] from midpoint of stiffener span to of the following values: top of bulkhead

2 For aluminium materials with a guaranteed 0,1% ten- p1 = 10 ⋅ h1 ⋅ (1 + aV) [kN/m ] 2 sile proof stress Rp0,1 which exceeds 125 N/mm , the or value of W can be reduced in direct proportion. If however, the materials guaranteed R value is ⎡⎤b' p0,2 ⎛⎞ 2 greater than 70 % of the guaranteed ultimate tensile p2 = 10⋅⋅⎢⎥ h1 cos 20 °++⋅⎜⎟ y sin 20 ° [kN/m ] ⎣⎦⎝⎠2 strength Rm, the lower value is to be used as a basis for scantlings. h1 = h + 0,5 m [m] 4.4 The moment of inertia of stiffeners is not to h = height from bottom of fish hold to top of hold be less than: [m], compare Fig. 3.4 3 4 4 b' = upper breadth of hold [m] I = cW⋅ [cm ] Chapter 8 Section 3 F Special Requirements for Hull Structures I - Part 1 Page 3–8 GL 2007

c = 2,2 for steel W = as given in 4.3 for steel = 5,75 for aluminium 4.5 Guides for removable bulkheads are to have The thickness of the partial bulkhead plating is to be brackets at 1 m spacing. The depth of the support at not less than that of the top strake of the correspond- the sides of removable bulkheads is to be at least equal ing watertight bulkhead below the deck where the to the bulkhead thickness and not less to 65 mm. The considered processing hold is located. minimum thickness of sections or plates, which form the guides is 10 mm. Partial bulkheads are to be strengthened with horizon- If necessary, removable bulkheads are to be equipped tal stiffeners according to the basic Rules. Strengthen- with a securing arrangement to prevent the bulkhead ing with vertical stiffeners is permitted with fitting the from floating. horizontal stiffeners between the side shell and the nearest vertical stiffener in compliance with B.2.5.4. 4.6 Removable aluminium bulkheads are to be Partial bulkheads are to be interconnected with deck constructed of a seawater-resistant alloy. transverses supported by pillars in a required number. Alternative structural arrangements may be used if In order to prevent galvanic corrosion, insulation is to approved as equivalent by GL. be fitted at connections or contact surfaces between steel and aluminium. Where multi-tier deckhouses are arranged above the processing holds, rigid supporting members (bulkheads, partial bulkheads) are to be fitted within the processing holds. D. Fish Tanks Tanks for the transport of fish in refrigerated seawater 3. Foundations (RSW) have to meet the following requirements. The assembly drawings of the main components of the processing plant with the information of weight, cen- 1. Scantlings tre of gravity and possibility of bolting them to the deck of the processing hold have to be submitted to In general RSW tanks are open at the top and as the GL. In addition the dynamic behaviour of the machin- tank is filled with fish, the equivalent volume of water ery has to be documented. It is recommended to sum- flows over on the weather deck. Therefore the tank marize this data in a load plan. The calculation of the can be dimensioned according to the GL Rules de- individual foundations for the main components has to fined in Chapter 1 – Hull Structures, Section 12 using be submitted to GL for approval. a pressure p1 as defined in C.3.3.1 but with h = distance from load centre to top of overflow. 4. Discharge of refuse and water

2. Filling and drainage It has to be ensured that all kinds of refuse and water accumulating in the course of processing the catch For filling, drainage, sounding, etc. compare Section may be discharged or carried outboards without en- 4. dangering the vessel. For details see Section 4, D.

E. Fish Processing Holds F. Membrane Type Tanks for Brines

1. General 1. General Design and testing of fish processing machinery is not 1.1 Membrane type tanks for brines are tanks subject to Classification by GL. However, approval of consisting of a liquid tight barrier (membrane) which foundations of the machinery taking into account the is supported through insulation by a load bearing tank forces and their integration into the hull structure as structure. The load bearing tank is normally formed by well as safety aspects for the vessel resulting from the the hull structure (bulkheads, decks, shell, inner bot- processing procedure are part of Classification. tom).

2. Bulkheads 1.2 The load bearing tank structure is to comply with the relevant requirements for decks, shell, inner Where in processing holds located above the bulkhead bottom, etc., but must at least have scantlings comply- deck the distance between the bulkheads forming the ing with the requirements stipulated in B. boundaries of that space exceeds 30 m, partial bulkheads extending inboard for not less than 0,5 of the 1.3 Prefabricated membrane tanks are to be di- tween deck height are to be fitted on the bulkhead mensioned such that they are capable of being trans- deck at each side of the vessel in line with watertight ported without undue overstressing the membrane bulkheads. walls. I - Part 1 Section 3 G Special Requirements for Hull Structures Chapter 8 GL 2007 Page 3–9

1.4 Details of the membrane and the insulation arranged with web frames at sides and stringers or material (preferably, polyurethane foam) are to be equivalent above and below. submitted for approval. 2. Scantlings 2. Testing for tightness of the membrane 2.1 In general the strength of side doors is to be 2.1 The tanks are to be suitably tested for tight- equivalent to the strength of the surrounding structure. ness by applying a test pressure (air pressure) of not less than 0,15 bar gauge. 2.2 Doors are to be adequately stiffened. Where necessary, stiffeners are to be supported by girders. 2.2 Hollow spaces between the membrane and Means are to be provided to prevent movement of the the hull are to be tested for tightness as stipulated doors when closed. Adequate strength is to be pro- under 2.1. vided in the connections of the lifting/manoeuvring arms and hinges to the door structure and to the ship 2.3 Prior to installation of the membrane, shell, structure. decks, bulkheads, etc. are to be hose tested for tightness. 2.3 Where doors also serve as vehicle ramps, the design of the hinges should take into account the ves- 3. Foam material, foam application sel’s angle of trim which may result in uneven loading on the hinges. 3.1 The foam material shall have sufficient compressive strength to transmit the liquid pressures from 2.4 Where doors also serve as vehicle ramps, the membrane to the hull. plate thickness and stiffeners will be specially considered. 3.2 The foam application is to be carried out according to manufacturer's instructions. 2.5 Thickness of the door plating, section modulus and shear area of stiffeners and girders are to be determined according to the GL Rules Chapter 1 – 3.3 It is to be assured that all hollow spaces be- Hull Structures, Section 6. tween hull and membrane are completely filled with foam. 2.6 The girder system is to have sufficient stiffness to ensure integrity of the boundary support of the door. Edge stiffeners/girders should be adequately G. Side Doors stiffened against rotation. For edge girders supporting main door girders be- 1. General tween securing devices, the moment of inertia is to be increased in relation to the additional force. 1.1 In general, doors shall not extend below the load waterline. 3. Closing and securing devices of doors

1.2 At the corners of the doors strengthened 3.1 The design force for closing and securing plates are to be provided which are to extend over a devices are to determined according to the GL Rules length of at least 1,5 frame spacings each beyond the defined in Chapter 1 – Hull Structures, Section 6, J. doors. 3.2 The closing and/or supporting devices are to 1.3 Doors shall be designed to preferably open be fitted not more than 2,5 m apart and as close to outwards. corner as possible. However, a large number of small devices should be avoided. The total vertical and hori- 1.4 Door openings in the shell are to have well zontal force may normally be considered as equally rounded corners and adequate compensation is to be distributed between the devices.

I - Part 1 Section 4 B Hull Outfit Chapter 8 GL 2007 Page 4–1

Section 4

Hull Outfit

A. Sheathings and Ceilings space for drainage of water or leakage oil. The ceiling may be laid directly on the inner bottom plating, if 1. Deck sheathings embedded in preservation and sealing compound.

1.1 Generally the different deck sheathings of a 2.4 It is recommended to fit double ceilings un- fishing vessel on the weatherdeck, on superstructures der deck openings used for loading/unloading. and deckhouses have to meet the following requirements: 2.5 The manholes are to be protected by a steel coaming welded around each manhole and shall be – protection of the hull structure against corrosion fitted with a cover of wood or steel, or by other suit- in a standard climate to be defined by the owner able means. – good connection to the deck area – fire-resistant or at least of low flammability 3. Ceiling at tank bulkheads – special requirements of the owner Where tanks are intended to carry liquids at temperatures exceeding 40 °C, their boundaries facing holds 1.2 The surface of all decks shall be so designed for transport or storage shall be fitted with a ceiling. or treated as to minimize the slip hazard for personnel. At vertical walls, sparred ceilings may be sufficient. In particular, decks of working areas, such as machin- The ceiling may be dispensed only with consent of the ery spaces, in galleys, at winches and where fish is Flag State Administration. handled as well as at the foot and head of ladders and in front of doors, shall be provided with anti-skid surfaces. B. Air Pipes, Overflow Pipes, Sounding Pipes 1.3 Before applying the deck sheathing the surface preparation of the relevant deck area has to be 1. Each tank is to be fitted with air pipes, over- prepared according to the specification of the sheath- flow pipes and sounding pipes. The air pipes are in ing supplier. general to be led to above the exposed deck. For the arrangement and scantlings of pipes see Section 9d. 1.4 The compliance with the requirements de- For the height from the deck to the point where the fined in 1.1 and 1.2 has to be shown by the supplier by water may have access see Section 2, Table 2.2. tests with a reasonable number of specimens according to recognized standards and approved by GL. The 2. Suitable closing appliances are to be provided samples have to be brought up on the relevant struc- for air pipes, overflow pipes and sounding pipes. tural deck material utilized for the fishing vessel Where fishing gear or materials, etc. are carried on (steel, aluminium, GRP, etc.). deck, the closing appliances are to be readily accessible at all times. In vessels for which flooding calcula- 2. Bottom ceiling tions are to be made, the ends of the air pipes are to be above the damage waterline in the flooded condition. 2.1 If a vessel contains holds for the transport of Where they immerse at intermediate stages of flood- materials or fish products a tight bottom ceiling is to ing, these conditions are to be examined separately. be fitted on the bottom of such a hold. It is recommended, that the thickness of a wooden ceiling is not less than 60 mm. If no ceiling is provided, GL will 3. Closely under the inner bottom or the tank decide whether the thickness of the load bearing bot- top, holes are to be cut into floor plates and side gird- tom areas has to be increased case by case. If opera- ers as well as into beams, girders, etc., to give the air tion of fork lift trucks is planned, only steel decks free access to the air pipes. Besides, all floor plates without wooden ceiling have to be provided. and side girders are to be provided with limbers to permit the water or oil to reach the pump suctions. 2.2 On single bottoms, ceilings are to be removable for inspection of bottom plating at any time. 4. Sounding pipes are to be extended to directly above the tank bottom. The shell plating is to be 2.3 Ceilings on double bottoms are to be laid on strengthened by thicker plates or doubling plates under battens not less than 12,5 mm thick providing a clear the sounding pipes. Chapter 8 Section 4 D Hull Outfit I - Part 1 Page 4–2 GL 2007

C. Ventilators Table 4.1 Drainage arrangement in cargo fish holds 1. The height of ventilator coamings and the Minimum Total length of relevant closing appliances on the exposed deck, quar- Area A of bin number of perforated trunk ter deck and on exposed superstructure decks are de- below deck drainage trunks circumference fined in Section 2, B.6. For the case of fire, draught- [m2] per bin per bin [m] tight fire dampers are to be fitted. A < 10 2 0,8 2. Ventilators of holds are not to have any con- 10 ≤ A < 15 3 1,0 nection with other spaces. 15 ≤ A < 20 3 1,2 20 ≤ A < 25 4 1,4 3. The thickness of the coaming plates is to be 25 ≤ A < 30 4 1,6 1,0 mm larger than the thickness of the surrounding deck. 30 ≤ A < 35 5 1,8

4. The thickness of ventilator posts should be at 1.3 Each cargo hold shall have a bilge well at its least equal to the thickness of coamings as per 3. The after end. If the length of the watertight compartment wall thickness of ventilator posts of a clear sectional exceeds 9 m, there shall also be a bilge well at the area exceeding 1600 cm2 is to be increased according forward end. to the expected loads. 1.4 Bilge wells of not less than 0,2 m3 capacity 5. Generally, the coamings and posts shall pass are to be arranged in fish holds. They are to be through the deck and shall be welded to the deck plat- equipped with an arrangement for rinsing the bilge ing from above and below. Where coamings or posts sections, which is to be secured against unintentional are welded on the deck plating, fillet welds of a = 0,5 operation. × t (t = thickness of the thinner plate) should be adopted for welding inside and outside, where applicable. 1.5 From each bilge well, a separate branch suction line shall be led to the machinery space. The in- 6. Coamings and posts particularly exposed to ternal diameter of this line is to be as required for wash of the sea are to be efficiently connected with main bilge lines. Minimum diameter is 50 mm. the vessel's structure. Coamings of a height exceeding 900 mm are to be specially strengthened. 1.6 The bilge distribution chest valves are to be of screw-down non-return type. The valve chest col- 7. Where beams are pierced by ventilator coam- lecting branch suction lines from the cargo fish holds ings, carlings of adequate scantlings are to be fitted are to have no connections from dry compartments. between the beams in order to maintain the strength of The valve chest is to be directly connected to the larg- the deck. est bilge pump. In addition, a connection is to be provided to another bilge pump. All valves are to be fitted in readily accessible positions.

1.7 Means for back-flushing bilge suctions shall D. Waste and Water Discharge in Fish Holds be provided. The connecting of water supply may be done by portable means, e.g. hoses. 1. Cargo fish holds 2. Cargo fish tween deck 1.1 There is to be a good drainage of water, oil or brine from the cargo. Trunks and gutters are to be located such that they will provide at all times good 2.1 If fish shall be carried loose in tween deck drainage from all layers of cargo, throughout the hold. satisfactory arrangement of drainage has to be provided. The drainage may be led to the bilge well in the hold below or arranged as described in 1. 1.2 In each bin there is to be drainage to a bilge well through vertical drainage trunks of perforated plates, grating, etc. The minimum acceptable perfo- 2.2 For tween deck compartments having no rated circumference per trunk is 0,3 m. The number of openings where sea may penetrate and where the fish trunks and the total length of perforated circumference processing requires no supply of water, drainage to are defined in Table 4.1. The perforations are to con- bilge well in the machinery space may be accepted. sist of holes with a diameter of 4 to 8 mm or equiva- The drainage pipes shall have a self-closing valve at lent. the machinery space side. I - Part 1 Section 4 E Hull Outfit Chapter 8 GL 2007 Page 4–3

3. Fish processing areas 1.3 Skylights or other similar openings shall be fitted with protective bars not more than 350 mm 3.1 It has to be ensured that all kinds of refuse apart, compare Section 2, B.11.6. The Administration and water accumulating in the course of processing of may exempt small openings from compliance with this the catch may be discharged or carried outboards requirement. without endangering the vessel. The bilge pumps are to have sufficient power. 2. Deck openings 3.2 Where the fish processing holds are located below the weather deck, the refuse and water accumu- 2.1 Hinged covers of hatchways, manholes and lating in the course of processing are to be discharged other openings shall be protected against accidental outboards through suitable pumps or conveyor worms. closing. In particular, heavy covers on escape hatches The respective outlets at the shell shall be located as shall be equipped with counterweights and so con- near as possible to the weather deck and are to be structed as to be capable of being opened from each closable by means of sluice valves. Where the dis- side of the cover. charge line is raised up above the weather deck, a swing check valve may be fitted instead of a sluice 2.2 Dimension of access hatches shall be not less valve. than 600 mm by 600 mm or 600 mm diameter. Where the pumps are sucking from outboard, a blocking device is required to prevent water from being 2.3 Where practicable, hand-holds shall be pro- pumped into the tween deck space. vided above the level of the deck over escape openings. 3.3 Stone shoots in fish processing decks are to be fitted as high as practicable. The lowest point of the 2.4 Hatch covers are to be dimensioned and ar- inner openings shall not come to water at inclinations ranged according to the GL Rules Chapter 1 – Hull of less than 15°, vessel fully loaded. In addition to the Structures, Section 17, B. watertight covers of the stone shoots swell shutters are to be fitted at the shell. 3. Bulwarks, rails and guards 3.4 Bilge wells 3.1 Efficient bulwarks or guard rails shall be For bilge wells see 1.4 and 1.5. fitted on all exposed parts of the working deck and on superstructure decks if they are working platforms. 4. Fish tanks The height of bulwarks or guard rails above deck shall be at least 1m. Where this height would interfere with The requirements for fish tanks are included in Sec- the normal operation of the vessel, a lesser height may tion 3, D. be approved by the Flag State Administration.

5. Fish pounds 3.2 The minimum vertical distance from the Fixed and removable parts of the fish pounds for hold- deepest operation waterline to the lowest point of the ing the catch on and below deck shall be of adequate top of the bulwark, or to the edge of working deck if size. Fish pounds on deck shall be constructed in such guard rails are fitted, shall ensure adequate protection a way that water can drain out of them without hin- of the crew from water shipped on deck, taking into drance. account the sea states and the weather conditions in which the vessel may operate, the areas of operation, type of vessel and its method of fishing and shall be to the satisfaction of the Administration. E. Protective Measures 3.3 Guard-rails are to be constructed in accordance with DIN 81702 or equivalent standards. 1. General measures Equivalent constructions of sufficient strength and safety can be accepted. Clearance below the lowest 1.1 A lifeline system shall be designed to be course of guard rails to the foot bar shall not exceed effective for all needs, and the necessary wires, ropes, 230 mm, other courses shall not be more than 380 mm shackles, eye bolts and cleats shall be provided. apart. Rails shall be free from sharp points, edges and corners and shall be of adequate strength. 1.2 Deck openings provided with coamings or sills of less than 600 mm in height shall be provided In a vessel with rounded gunwales guard rail supports with guards, such as hinged or portable railings or shall be placed on the flat part of the deck. Guard rail nettings. The Administration may exempt small open- stanchions are not to be welded to the shell plating and ings such as fish scuttles from compliance with these the distance between stanchions shall not be more than requirements. 1,5 m. Chapter 8 Section 4 F Hull Outfit I - Part 1 Page 4–4 GL 2007

3.4 Means such as guard rails, lifelines, gang- fixing point of shrouds. The length of the mast top ways or under deck passages to protect the crew in above the fixing point of shrouds is not to exceed 1/3 h. moving between accommodation, machinery and other working spaces shall be provided to the satisfac- 2.1.3 Masts according to 2.1.2 may be gradually tion of GL. Storm rails shall be fitted as necessary to tapered towards the fixing point of shrouds to 75 per the outside of all deckhouses and casings to secure cent of the diameter at the uppermost support. The safety of passage or work for the crew. plate thickness is not to be less than 1/70 of the diameter or at least 4 mm (see 4.1). 3.5 Stern trawlers shall be provided with suitable protection such as doors, gates or nets at the top of the 2.1.4 Wire ropes for shrouds are to be thickly gal- stern ramp at the same height as the adjacent bulwark vanized. It is recommended to use wire ropes com- or guard rails. When such protection is not in position posed of a minimum number of thick wires, as for a chain or other means of protection shall be provided instance a rope construction 6 × 7 with a tensile break- across the ramp. ing strength of 1570 N/mm2 on which Table 4.2 is based. Other rope constructions shall be of equivalent 4. Stairways and ladders stiffness. For the safety of the crew, stairways and ladders of 2.1.5 Where masts are stayed forward and back- adequate size and strength with handrails and non-slip wards by two shrouds on each side of the vessel, steel treads shall be provided to the satisfaction of GL. See wire ropes are to be used according to Table 4.2. also F.4.9.

Table 4.2 Definition of ropes for stays

F. Signal and Radar Masts h [m] 6 8 10 12 14 16 Rope diameter 14 16 18 20 22 24 1. General [mm] Nominal size of 1.1 Drawings of masts, mast substructures and shackle, rigging 1,6 2,0 2,5 3,0 4,0 4,0 hull connections are to be submitted for approval. screw, rope socket h = height of shroud fixing point above shroud foot point 1.2 Loose and accessory parts are to comply with the GL Rules VI – Additional Rules and Guidelines, Part 2 – Life-Saving Appliances, Lifting Appliances, 2.1.6 Where steel wire ropes according to Table 4.2 Accesses, Chapter 2 – Guidelines for the Construction are used, the following conditions apply: and Survey of Lifting Appliances. All parts which shall be supervised and certified by GL are to be indi- b ≥ 0,3 ⋅ h vidually tested. 0,15 ⋅ h ≤ a ≤ b

1.3 Other masts than covered by 2. and 3. as well a = the longitudinal distance from a shroud's foot as special construction forms, shall as regards dimen- point to its fixing point sions and design, in each case be individually agreed with GL. b = the transverse distance from a shroud's foot point to its fixing point 2. Signal masts Alternative arrangements of stayings are to be of The following requirements apply to single tubular or equivalent stiffness. equivalent rectangular sections made of steel with an ultimate tensile strength of 400 N/mm², which are 2.2 Unstayed masts typically designed to carry only signals (navigation lanterns, flag and day signals). 2.2.1 Unstayed masts may be completely con- strained in the uppermost deck or be supported by two 2.1 Stayed masts or more decks. In general, the fastenings of masts to the hull of a vessel should extend over at least one 2.1.1 Stayed masts may be constructed as simply deck height. supported masts (rocker masts) or may be supported by one or more decks (constraint masts). 2.2.2 The scantlings for unstayed steel masts are given in the Table 4.3. 2.1.2 The diameter of stayed steel masts at the uppermost support is to be at least 20 mm for each 1 m 2.2.3 The diameter of masts may be gradually height of mast h from the uppermost support to the tapered to D/2 at the height of 0,75 lm. I - Part 1 Section 4 G Hull Outfit Chapter 8 GL 2007 Page 4–5

Table 4.3 Scantlings of unstayed steel masts 4.4 In case of tubular constructions all welded fastenings and connections have to be of full penetra- Length tion weld type. of mast 6 8 10 12 14 lm [m] 4.5 If necessary, slim tubular structures are to be D × t additionally stayed or supported in order to avoid 160 × 4 220 × 4 290 × 4,5 360 × 5,5 430 × 6,5 [mm] vibrations.

lm = length of mast from uppermost support to the top 4.6 The dimensioning normally does not require D = diameter of mast at uppermost support a calculation of vibrations. However, in case of undue t = plate thickness of mast vibrations occurring during the vessel’s trial a respective calculation will be required. 3. Radar masts 4.7 For determining scantlings of masts made These masts are typically of 3-leg, box girder or frame from aluminium or austenitic steel see Section 3. work design. 4.8 At masts solid steel ladders have to be fixed 3.1 For dimensioning the dead loads, acceleration at least up to 1,50 m below top, if they have to be forces and wind loads are to be considered. climbed for operational or maintenance purposes. Above the ladders, suitable handgrips are necessary. 3.2 Where necessary additional loads, e.g. loads caused by the sea, fastening of crane booms or tension 4.9 If possible from the construction point of wires are also to be considered. view, ladders have to be at least 0,30 m wide. The distance between the rungs shall be 0,30 m. The horizontal distance of the rung centre from fixed structural 3.3 The design loads for 3.1 and 3.2 as well as components shall not be less than 0,15 m. The rungs the allowable stresses can be taken from the GL Rules shall be aligned and be made of square steel bars VI – Additional Rules and Guidelines, Part 2 – Life 20/20 set up on edge. Saving Appliances, Lifting Appliances, Accesses, Chapter 2 – Guidelines for the Construction and Sur- 4.10 Platforms on masts which have to be used for vey of Lifting Appliances. operational reasons, shall have a rail of at least 0,90 m in height with one intermediate bar. Safe access from 3.4 In case of 3-leg masts the individual leg the mast ladders to the platform is to be provided. forces shall be calculated with the before mentioned forces acting in the direction of a considered leg and 4.11 If necessary on masts a safety installation rectangular to the two other legs. consisting of foot, back, and hand rings enabling safe work in places of operating and maintenance has to be 3.5 Single tubular or rectangular masts mounted provided. on the top of box girder or frame work masts may be dimensioned according to 2.

3.6 In case of thin walled box girder masts a G. Life-Saving Appliances stiffening and/or additional buckling stiffeners may be necessary. 1. It is assumed that for the arrangement and operation of lifeboats and other life-saving appliances 4. Structural details the regulations defined by the Administration are complied with. For regulations and guidelines see 4.1 Steel masts closed all-round shall have a wall Section 1, A.3. thickness of at least 4 mm. 2. The designing and testing of life saving ap- For masts not closed all-round the minimum wall pliances are not part of Classification. However, ap- thickness is 6 mm. proval of the hull structure in way of the launching For masts used as funnels a corrosion addition of at appliances, taking into account the reaction forces least 1 mm is required. from the relevant appliances, is part of Classification.

4.2 The foundations of the mast integrated in the Note deck structure are to be dimensioned in accordance In all cases where GL is requested to approve the life- with the acting forces. saving appliances, the GL Rules VI – Additional Rules and Guidelines, Part 2 – Life Saving Appliances, Lift- 4.3 Doubling plates at mast feet are permissible ing Appliances, Accesses, Chapter 1 – Guidelines for only for the transmission of compressive forces. Life-Saving Launching Appliances apply.

I - Part 1 Section 5 B Anchoring and Mooring Equipment Chapter 8 GL 2007 Page 5–1

Section 5

Anchoring and Mooring Equipment

A. General Δ = moulded displacement [t] in seawater having a density of 1,025 t/m3 to the summer load 1. Scope waterline Anchor equipment designed for quick and safe opera- h = effective height from the summer load water- tion shall be provided which consists of anchoring line to the top of the uppermost house equipment, anchor chains and wire ropes, stoppers and a windlass or other arrangements for dropping and = a + Σhi hoisting the anchor and for holding the vessel at an- a = distance [m] from the summer load waterline, chor in all foreseeable service conditions. amidships, to the upper deck at side Vessels shall be provided with adequate mooring Σh = sum of height [m] on centreline of each tier equipment for safe mooring in all operating conditions. i of superstructures and deckhouses having a 2. Materials breadth greater than B/4. Deck sheer, if any, is to be ignored. Vessels built under survey of GL and which are to For the lowest tier "h" is to be measured at have the mark  stated in their Certificate and in the centre line from the upper deck or from an Register Book have to be equipped with anchors and assumed deck line where there is local dis- chain cables complying with the GL Rules II – Mate- continuity in the upper deck rials and Welding and having been tested on approved machines in the presence of a GL Surveyor. For ves- A = area [m2], in profile view of the hull, super- sels having the Class Notation K affixed to their Char- structures and houses, having a breadth acter of Classification proof is sufficient that the an- greater than B/4, above the summer load wa- chors and chain cables have been properly tested. terline within the length L and up to the height h

Where a deckhouse having a breadth greater than B/4 B. Equipment Numeral is located above a deckhouse having a breadth of B/4 or less, the wide house is to be included and the nar- 1. Equipment numeral ZF row house ignored.

The equipment numeral ZF is to be calculated as follows: Screens of bulwarks 1,5 m or more in height above deck at side are to be regarded as parts of houses when 3 2 A Z2hF =Δ+⋅⋅+B determining h and A, e.g. the area specially marked in 10 Fig. 5.1 is to be included in A. 1,5 m 1,5 m

Bulwark a DWL

L / 2 L / 2

Fig. 5.1 Bulwark relevant for equipment numeral Chapter 8 Section 5 C Anchoring and Mooring Equipment I - Part 1 Page 5–2 GL 2007

2. Equipment numeral ZK Normally each anchor should be stowed in the hawse and hawse pipe in such a way, that it remains firmly The equipment numeral ZK is to be calculated as fol- secured in seagoing conditions. lows: Other equivalent arrangements may be possible and 1 have to be in accordance with relevant maritime Ad- Z()=++⋅LB H ∑A h K 2 ministration rules. If an anchor arrangement is located at the aft part of the vessel, it has to be guaranteed, A = length of individual superstructures and deck- that the propeller will be protected against damage by chain cable or steel wire. Anchor manoeuvring has to houses [m] within length L be carried out with the propulsion engine in the stand- h = height of individual superstructures and deck- by condition. houses at centreline of the vessel [m] Deckhouses having a breadth of less than B/4 may be 2. Anchor design ignored. 2.1 Anchors have to be of approved design. The mass of the heads of patent (ordinary stockless) an- 3. Application chors, including pins and fittings, is not to be less than Anchors, chain cables and the recommended mooring 60 per cent of the total mass of the anchor. ropes are to be determined in accordance with the equipment numbers ZF according to 1. and ZK accord- 2.2 For stock anchors, the total mass of the an- ing to 2. respectively. chor, including stock, shall comply with the values in Tables 5.1 or 5.2. The mass of the stock shall be 20 3.1 Vessels with ZF > 720 percent of this total mass. Where Z exceeds 720 the requirements of the GL F 2.3 The mass of each individual bower anchor Rules defined in Chapter 1 – Hull Structures, Sec- may vary by up to 7 per cent above or below the re- tion 18 apply. quired individual mass provided that the total mass of all bower anchors is not less than the sum of the re- 3.2 Vessels with L ≥ 45 m and ZF ≤ 720 quired individual masses.

For vessels with ZF less or equal to 720 and no Class Notation K, Table 5.1 applies. The index "F" will be 3. High holding power anchors affixed to their equipment register number in the Cer- tificate and in the Register Book. 3.1 Where special anchors are approved by GL as "High Holding Power Anchors" (HHP), the anchor 3.3 Vessels with 24 m ≤ L < 45 m and Nota- mass may be 75 per cent of anchor mass as per Table tion K 5.1 or 5.2. For vessels with a length 24 m ≤ L < 45 m and which "High Holding Power Anchors" are anchors which are will have the Class Notation K attached to their Char- suitable for the vessel's use at any time and which do acter of Classification the equipment numeral ZK and not require prior adjustment or special placement on Table 5.2 apply. The index "FC" will be affixed to sea bed. their equipment register number in the Certificate and in the Register Book. Without Class Notation K Table 3.2 For approval as a "High Holding Power An- 5.1 applies. chor", satisfactory tests are to be made on various types of bottom and the anchor is to have a holding 3.4 Vessels with 12 m ≤ L < 24 m power at least twice that of a patent anchor ("Admi- The equipment is to be determined for the length L in ralty Standard Stockless") of the same mass. These Table 5.2. The index "FC" will be affixed to their tests have to be approved by GL. equipment register number in the Certificate and in the Register Book. 3.3 Dimensioning of chain cable and of windlass is to be based on the undiminished anchor mass according to Table 5.1 or 5.2.

C. Anchors 4. Holding equipment for vessels with 12 m ≤ L < 24 m 1. Arrangement Scallop rakes and comparable items may be used in The rule bower anchors are to be connected to their lieu of anchors if they are of equivalent holding chain cables and positioned on board ready for use. power. I - Part 1 Section 5 D Anchoring and Mooring Equipment Chapter 8 GL 2007 Page 5–3

Table 5.1 Anchor, chain cables and ropes 2 bower Equip- Stud link chain cables 1 for bower anchors Recommended mooring ropes anchors No. for ment Weight register numeral Total Diameter Breaking per Number Length ZF length load anchor d1 d2 d3 – – [kg] [m] [mm] [mm] [mm] – [m] [kN] 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 101 F –30 70 137,5 11 11 11 2 40 25 102 F 30 - 40 80 165 11 11 11 2 50 30 103 F 40 - 50 100 192,5 11 11 11 2 60 30 104 F 50 - 60 120 192,5 12,5 12,5 12,5 2 60 30 105 F 60 - 70 140 192,5 12,5 12,5 12,5 2 80 30 106 F 70 - 80 160 220 14 12,5 12,5 2 100 35 107 F 80 - 90 180 220 14 12,5 12,5 2 100 35 108 F 90 -100 210 220 16 14 14 2 110 35 109 F 100 -110 240 220 16 14 14 2 110 40 110 F 110 -120 270 247,5 17,5 16 16 2 110 40 111 F 120 -130 300 247,5 17,5 16 16 2 110 45 112 F 130 -140 340 275 19 17,5 17,5 2 120 45 113 F 140 -150 390 275 19 17,5 17,5 2 120 50 114 F 150 -175 480 275 22 19 19 2 120 55 115 F 175 -205 570 302,5 24 20,5 20,5 2 120 60 116 F 205 -240 660 302,5 26 22 20,5 2 120 65 117 F 240 -280 780 330 28 24 22 3 120 70 118 F 280 -320 900 357,5 30 26 24 3 140 80 119 F 320 -360 1020 357,5 32 28 24 3 140 85 120 F 360 -400 1140 385 34 30 26 3 140 95 121 F 400 -450 1290 385 36 32 28 3 140 100 122 F 450 -500 1440 412,5 38 34 30 3 140 110 123 F 500 -550 1590 412,5 40 34 30 4 160 120 124 F 550 -600 1740 440 42 36 32 4 160 130 125 F 600 -660 1920 440 44 38 34 4 160 145 126 F 660 -720 2100 440 46 40 36 4 160 160 Remarks: 1 studless chain cables in accordance with DIN 766 of at least same proof load may be taken in lieu of stud link chain cables up to 16 mm diameter d1 = chain diameter Grade K 1 (ordinary quality) d2 = chain diameter Grade K 2 (special quality) d3 = chain diameter Grade K 3 (extra special quality)

D. Chain Cables – Grade K 1 (ordinary quality) – Grade K 2 (special quality) 1. Chain cable diameters given in Tables 5.1 and 5.2 apply to chain cables made of chain cable – Grade K 3 (extra special quality) materials specified in the requirements of the GL Rules II – Materials and Welding, Part 1 – Metallic Grade K 1 material used for chain cables in conjunc- Materials, Chapter 4 – Equipment for following tion with "High Holding Power Anchors" shall have a 2 grades: tensile strength Rm of not less than 400 N/mm . Chapter 8 Section 5 E Anchoring and Mooring Equipment I - Part 1 Page 5–4 GL 2007

Table 5.2 Anchors, chain cables and ropes of fishing vessels in coastal operation Equip- Stud link chain cables 1 for Recommended mooring ment Bower anchors No. Length ropes numeral bower anchor for Weight register L Total Diameter Total Diameter Z Number per K length length anchor d1 d2 d4 d5 – [m] – – [kg] [m] [mm] [mm] [m] [mm] [mm] 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 105 FC 12 - 14 – 2 60 95,0 11,0 11,0 80 – 20 106 FC 14 - 17 – 2 80 110,0 11,0 11,0 100 10 20 107 FC 17 - 20 – 2 95 110,0 12,5 12,5 120 10 20 108 FC –270 2 110 137,5 12,5 12,5 150 10 22 109 FC 270-300 2 140 165,0 14,0 12,5 180 10 22 110 FC 300-330 2 180 165,0 14,0 12,5 200 10 22 111 FC 330-360 2 210 220,0 16,0 14,0 225 10 24

112 FC 20 - 45 360-400 2 250 220,0 16,0 14,0 225 10 24 113 FC 400-450 2 300 247,5 17,5 16,0 225 10 24 114 FC 450-500 2 370 247,5 19,0 17,0 250 12 26 115 FC >500 2 440 275,0 22,0 19,0 250 12 26 Remarks:

1 studless chain cables in accordance with DIN 766 (or equivalent) of at least same proof load may be taken in lieu of stud link chain cables

d1 = chain diameter Grade K 1 (ordinary quality) d2 = chain diameter Grade K 2 (special quality) 2 d4 = diameter of wire rope 6 × 24, nominal breaking strength: 1570 N/mm d5 = diameter of polyamid ropes of normal construction and manila ropes (Grade 1) The breaking load of polyester and polypropylen ropes is to be the same as of polyamid ropes.

Grade K 2 and K 3 chain cables have to be purchased 5. The attachment of inboard ends of chain and quenched and tempered after production from cables to the vessel's structure is to be provided with a recognized manufacturers only. mean suitable to permit, in case of emergency, an easy slipping of chain cables to sea, operable from an ac- 2. The total length of chain given in Table 5.1 cessible position outside the chain locker. and Table 5.2 is to be divided in approximately equal parts between the two bower anchors. The inboard ends of chain cables are to be secured to the structures by a fastening able to withstand a force 3. Short link chain cables in accordance with not less than 15 % nor more than 30 % of the rated DIN 766, or equivalent, of same proof load may be breaking load of the chain cable. taken in lieu of stud link chain cables of up to 16 mm diameter.

4. For connection of the anchor with the chain cable approved Kenter-type anchor shackles may be E. Ropes instead of Chain Cables chosen in lieu of the common Dee-shackles. A forerunner with swivel is to be fitted between anchor and chain cable. In lieu of a forerunner with swivel an 1. Vessels with 30 m ≤ L < 45 m approved swivel shackle may be used. However, swivel shackles are not to be connected to the anchor 1.1 The chain cable of one or two anchors may shank unless specially approved. A sufficient number be replaced by a steel wire rope. of suitable spare shackles are to be kept on board to facilitate fitting of the spare anchor at any time. On Owner's request the swivel shackle may be dispensed 1.2 Where steel wire ropes are fitted in lieu of with. chain cables, the following is to be observed: I - Part 1 Section 5 G Anchoring and Mooring Equipment Chapter 8 GL 2007 Page 5–5

1.2.1 The length of the rope is to be equal to 1,5 F. Chain Locker times the corresponding tabular chain cable length. The breaking load of the rope is not to be less than the 1. The chain locker is to be of capacity and breaking load of the tabular chain cable of Grade K 1. depth adequate to provide an easy direct lead of the cables through the chain pipes and self-stowing of the 1.2.2 A short length of chain cable is to be fitted cables. between anchor and wire rope having a length of 12,5 m or equal to the distance between anchor in stowed The minimum required stowage capacity without mud position and winch, whichever is less. box for the two bow anchor chains is as follows: A 1.2.3 Wire rope winches are to be fitted which S1,1d=⋅⋅23 [m] comply with the requirements defined in Section 6. 100000

1.2.4 Wire ropes of trawl winches may be used as d = chain diameter [mm] according to Table 5.1 anchor chain cables. Lead blocks and guide rollers or Table 5.2 shall be suitably fitted and arranged to prevent the ropes from chafing at deckhouses, superstructures, A = total length of stud link chain cable according deck plating and equipment on deck. Where the rope to Table 5.1 or Table 5.2 diameter is 18 mm and greater the guide rollers are to The total stowage capacity is to be distributed on two be permanently fitted. The trawl winch is to comply chain lockers of equal size for port and starboard chain with the requirements of Section 6. cables. The shape of the base areas shall as far as possible be quadratic with a maximum length of 33 d. 2. Vessels with L < 30 m As an alternative, circular base areas may be selected, the diameter of which shall not exceed 30 – 35 d. The chain cables of both anchors may be replaced by steel wire ropes. The requirements of 1.2 have to be Above stowage of each chain locker in addition a free considered. depth of h = 1500 [mm] 3. Vessels with 12 m ≤ L < 24 m is to be provided, if the local arrangement enables this. For vessels with L < 24 m, a manila or synthetic fibre rope of not less than 20 mm diameter may be fitted 2. The chain locker boundaries and their access instead of the steel wire rope for the second anchor openings are to be watertight to prevent flooding of (see 1.). The breaking load of a manila rope is not to adjacent spaces, where essential installations or be less than the breaking load of the chain cable. equipment are arranged in order to not affect the Suitable means for holding the vessel at anchor (rope proper operation of the vessel after accidental flooding winch, bollard) and for lifting the anchor (rope drum of the chain locker. or warping head of a rope winch or a trawl winch) are to be provided. The requirements of Section 6 are to 3. Adequate drainage facilities of the chain be observed. locker are to be provided.

4. Anchors of 60 kg or less 4. Where chain locker boundaries are also tank Where anchors of 60 kg or less are fitted, the follow- boundaries their scantlings of stiffeners and plating are ing applies: to be determined as for tanks in accordance with Sec- tion 3. 4.1 Manila or synthetic fibre ropes may be fitted Where this is not the case, plate thickness is to be for both anchors. The length of the rope is not to be determined as for t2 and the section modulus as for W2 less than 1,5 times the required chain length. The rope in accordance with Chapter 1 – Hull Structures, Sec- diameter is not to be less than 20 mm. tion 12, B.2. and B.3. respectively. The distance from the load centre to the top of chain locker pipe is to be 4.2 Between anchor and anchor rope a short taken for calculating the load. length of chain according to 1.2.2 is to be fitted. A corrosion allowance of 1,5 mm has to be applied. The minimum thickness of plating is 5,0 mm. 4.3 In lieu of the rope winch required according with 1.2.3 other suitable means for holding the vessel at anchor and lifting the anchor may be fitted, e.g. bollard, warping head of trawl or rope winch. The G. Windlasses requirements of Section 6 are to be observed. In special cases and upon application of the owner, the 1. Basic Rules winch may be dispensed with if it is proved by trials that the anchor can be dropped and lifted by hand The design and construction of windlasses for fishing without exposing the crew to any danger. vessels shall be based on the Chapter 2 – Machinery Chapter 8 Section 5 H Anchoring and Mooring Equipment I - Part 1 Page 5–6 GL 2007

Installations, Section 14, D. unless they are super- 2.4 If the trawl winch is fitted with messenger seded by the special requirements defined in this Sec- wheels, etc. and meets the requirements set out in 2.1 tion. to 2.3 such a winch may be used as a windlass.

2. Design principles 2.5 Fishing vessels which have been authorized to use trawl warp as anchor wire may use their trawl 2.1 Fishing vessels provided with anchors of or winch as a windlass provided the trawl warp can be above 150 kg shall be fitted with a windlass. The wound on a drum with a braking device that is inde- windlass shall be fitted with a messenger wheel and/or pendent of the actual trawl warps in use for fishing. drum for each anchor and means for release of each Lead blocks and guide rollers shall be suitably fitted messenger wheel or drum. If for anchors with a weight and arranged to prevent the warps from chafing at the of less than 150 kg no windlass is provided, other deckhouses, superstructures, deck plating and equip- arrangements for dropping and hoisting the anchor are ment on deck. to be considered.

2.2 It shall not be possible to carry the chains forward to the hawsepipe, skid or similar arrangement H. Mooring Equipment without the chain passing the messenger wheels. When anchor wire is used it shall pass a roller adja- Note cent to the hawsepipe to avoid chafing. For estimating approximate mooring forces, a GL computer program system is available. 2.3 The windlass, its support and its brakes shall be capable of absorbing a static tension of at least 45 1. Ropes % of the breaking strength of the anchor chain or anchor wire without the occurrence of any permanent 1.1 The mooring ropes specified in Tables 5.1 deformations and without the brake losing its hold. and 5.2 and the content of 1.2 and 1.3 are recommen- Furthermore, a chain stopper or wire nipper should be dations only, a compliance with which is not a condi- fitted between the windlass and the hawsepipe or tion of Class. similar for each anchor chain or anchor wire capable of holding the vessel while at anchor. 1.2 Breaking load If chain stoppers or wire nippers are not fitted, the For mooring lines steel wire ropes as well as fibre windlass, its support and its brake shall be capable of ropes made of natural or synthetic fibres or wire ropes absorbing a static tension of at least 80 % of the break- consisting of steel wire and fibre cores may be used. ing strength of the anchor chain or anchor wire. Nominal breaking loads specified in Table 5.1 are valid for wire ropes only. Where ropes of synthetic The chain stopper or wire nipper and their supports fibre are used, the breaking load is to be increased shall be capable of absorbing a static tension of at above the table values. The extent of increase depends least 80 % of the breaking strength of the anchor on material quality. chain/wire without the occurrence of any permanent deformations and without the chain stopper or wire The required diameters of synthetic fibre ropes used in nipper losing its hold. lieu of steel wire ropes may be taken from Table 5.3.

Table 5.3 Equivalent diameters of synthetic wire and fibre ropes related to steel wire ropes

Synthetic wire ropes Fibre Ropes Steel wire ropes 1 Polyamide 2 Polyamide Polyester Polypropylene Diameter [mm] Diameter [mm] Diameter [mm] Diameter [mm] Diameter [mm] 13 32 32 32 32 14 36 36 36 36 16 40 40 40 40 18 44 44 44 44 20 48 48 48 48 22 48 48 48 52 24 52 52 52 56 26 56 60 60 64

1 according to DIN 3068 or equivalent 2 Regular laid ropes of refined polyamide monofilaments and filament fibres I - Part 1 Section 5 H Anchoring and Mooring Equipment Chapter 8 GL 2007 Page 5–7

Regardless of the breaking load, recommended in and ropes is not less than the sum of the individual Table 5.1, the diameter of fibre ropes should not be lengths. less than 20 mm. 2. Mooring winches, bollards, hawses 1.3 Type of wire ropes Wire ropes shall be of the following type: 2.1 Mooring winches are to be designed according to the basic Rules defined in G.1. taking into ac- – 6 × 24 wires with 7 fibre cores for breaking count the actual mooring lines and 80 % of their loads of up to 500 kN type: standard nominal breaking loads. Substructures are to be dimensioned according to Section 3. – 6 × 36 wires with 1 fibre core for breaking loads of more than 500 kN type: standard 2.2 Hawses, bollards and cleats shall be so de- Where wire ropes are stored on mooring winch drums, signed as to protect the ropes against excessive wear. steel cored wire ropes may be used e.g.: They are to be of proved construction and shall comply with relevant standards. – 6 × 19 wires with 1 steel core type: seal Note – 6 × 36 wires with 1 steel core type: Warrington-seal Attention is drawn to relevant National Standards.

1.4 Length 2.3 Hawses, bollards, cleates and their substructures are to be strengthened, if they are intended to be The length of the individual mooring ropes may be up belayed by multiple lines. In this case 80 % of the to 7 per cent less than that given in Table 5.1 and nominal breaking load of the individual lines has to be Table 5.2 provided that the total length of all the wires used as pulling forces.

I - Part 1 Section 6 A Fishing Gear and Lifting Appliances Chapter 8 GL 2007 Page 6–1

Section 6

Fishing Gear and Lifting Appliances

A. General 2.3.2 Chains, rings, hooks, shackles, swivels, blocks, etc. are defined as accessories. 1. Scope of application 2.3.3 Ropes and accessories are usually part of a 1.1 Equipment which is used for fishing, catch fishing gear or lifting appliance. They may, however, handling, loading and/or discharging is subject to be fixed or used individually on the deck of a fishing these Rules. vessel as well.

1.2 Equipment according to 1.1 is not part of a 2.4 Loads fishing vessel's Classification even in case the Class Notation CFG (Certified Fishing Gear) has been as- 2.4.1 Design load DLn signed to the vessel. The design load DLn is the static load a fishing gear is 1.3 In a fishing vessel's Classification all founda- dimensioned for and will be distinguished as follows: tions and their substructures for cranes, masts, gan- – DL is the design load for catch handling at sea tries, gallows, winches, fairleads, etc. are included. 1

– DL2 is the nominal winch pull when there is 1.4 If the Class Notation CFG shall be assigned only one rope layer on the drum. to a vessel, the requirements according to F.2. and F.3. are to be met. – DL3 is the minimum breaking load of a trawl warp 1.5 In these Rules the requirements for fishing gear and lifting appliances as well as ropes and acces- For dimensioning, DL1 and DL2 are to be multiplied sories will be defined. by the operating factor fo , see C.2.1.2. 2.4.2 Operation load 2. Definitions – L1 is the operation load for catch handling gear 2.1 Fishing gear – L2 is the operation load for pelagic trawling gear 2.1.1 Masts, gantries, gallows, outriggers, jumper stays/tackles and other gear used for fishing and/or 2.5 Safe working load SWL catch handling at sea are defined as fishing gear. The safe working load SWL is the maximum static 2.1.2 Deck equipment like winches, fairleads, roll- load a lifting appliance is allowed to handle with its ers, pad eyes, etc. used for fishing is also part of the hook or any other load attaching device. For dimen- fishing gear. sioning the SWL is to be multiplied by a dynamic factor ψ as described in the Lifting Appliance Guide- 2.2 Lifting appliances lines, see 3.3.1.

2.2.1 All cranes, derricks, hoists, tackles and other 2.6 Certification gear used for loading and/or discharging of, e.g. proc- essed catch, fish meal, supplies, equipment, etc. in a Following plan approval as well as initial tests and harbour (for exceptions see C.3.2), are defined as examination fishing gear and lifting appliances will lifting appliances. get the GL documentation as described in F.4.1. This combined approval system is called "Certification". 2.2.2 Some gear/appliance or parts of it may be regarded as fishing gear and lifting appliance alike. 2.7 Class Notation

2.3 Ropes and accessories On the basis of "Certification" and in case GL is en- trusted to conduct annual/5-yearly surveys and the 2.3.1 Running and standing wire ropes used for supervision of load testing every five years the vessel fishing, catch handling, loading and/or discharging are will get the "Class Notation" CFG (Certified Fishing defined as ropes. Gear). For documentation see F.4.2. Chapter 8 Section 6 B Fishing Gear and Lifting Appliances I - Part 1 Page 6–2 GL 2007

3. Applicable regulations, rules and stan- 2. Documents for approval dards The approval documents shall contain all dimensions, details of materials and welding as well as accident 3.1 International regulations prevention measures. If necessary parts lists are to be For international regulations see Section 1, A.3.3. added.

3.2 Flag state regulations 2.1 Documents for Classification For plan approval the following documents shall be Flag State regulations for the stability of the vessel, submitted in triplicate: accident prevention, dimensioning, etc., if existing, are generally to be observed. – General arrangement drawings showing the fishing gear, lifting appliances and deck equip- 3.3 GL Rules and Guidelines ment together with their rope reeving/leading systems. 3.3.1 GL Rules VI – Additional Rules and Guide- – Drawings showing all foundations with their lines, Part 2 – Life-Saving Appliances, Lifting Appli- substructures for fishing gear, lifting appliances ances, Accesses, Chapter 2 – Guidelines for the Con- and deck equipment. struction and Survey of Lifting Appliances, in short "Lifting Appliance Guidelines". These Guidelines are – Information about the forces which may act on dealing in detail with design and dimensioning re- the foundations and their substructures, at least quirements, plan approval, supervision during con- the following: struction, Certification of components, examination – for fishing gear the respective DL values and testing, accident prevention and with the Certifi- n and, if necessary, height and angles of rope cation system for lifting appliances, ropes and acces- attack, see also C.2. sories. – for lifting appliances the SWL value and as- 3.3.2 Chapters 1 – 4 and GL Rules II – Materials sociated load radii, see also C.3. and Welding, for hull structures, machinery and electrical installations must be applied accordingly. – Stability sheets covering the fishing gear and/or lifting appliances as may be necessary. 3.4 Standards 2.2 Documents for Certification In general international and national standards for These documents are only required in case of national ropes and accessories are accepted. Other standards regulations asking for plan approval/Certification and may be accepted after verification. if this is agreed with the shipyard and/or owners.

2.2.1 Documents for fishing gear For plan approval the following documents are to be B. Plan Approval submitted in triplicate except strength calculations and/or force diagrams which are required in duplicate 1. General only: Depending on the contractual and legal situation the – strength calculations and/or force diagrams following applies: – detailed rope reeving / leading plans of fishing gear 1.1 Classification – drawings of masts and booms, gantries, gallows, For the Classification of the vessel it is conditional outriggers, etc. together with their fittings that the documents, as listed in 2.1, undergo approval and/or verification. – information about the machinery such as hoisting, slewing and luffing mechanisms plus general drawings of the winches including their de- 1.2 Certification sign data, and detail drawings of base plate and For the Certification of fishing gear and lifting appli- drums ances the documents as described in 2.2 shall undergo – hydraulic circuit diagrams of all machinery approval and/or verification. 2.2.2 Documents for lifting appliances 1.3 Class Notation For plan approval the documents prescribed by the For assigning a Class Notation to a vessel no addi- Lifting Appliance Guidelines are to be submitted in tional plan approval and/or verification in excess of triplicate, except strength calculations and/or force those addressed in 1.1 and 1.2 is required. diagrams which are required in duplicate only. I - Part 1 Section 6 C Fishing Gear and Lifting Appliances Chapter 8 GL 2007 Page 6–3

2.2.3 Documents for ropes and accessories – 15° angle of rope attack in all directions in case of freely suspended loads, e.g. jumper stay tack- 2.2.3.1 Information about all ropes as defined in les A.2.3.1 are to be provided, e.g. rope standard, construction, diameter and strength of material. (The – allowable stresses according to load condition B minimum breaking load is specified in the applicable in the Lifting Appliance Guidelines standard). 2.2.2 For dimensioning of jumper stays it has to be 2.2.3.2 Information about location and nominal sizes assumed that the minimum breaking load of the of all accessories which are used for fishing gear and jumper stays is not to be less than the product of the lifting appliances are to be provided. In addition draw- maximum rope tension (due to SWL and pre- ings of all accessories are required which are not tensioning) and a factor of utilization K equal to 4. manufactured according to standards, e.g. rollers, The slag span f of the unloaded rope shall be limited blocks, esp. trawl warp blocks, swivels, etc. by: l / f = length between suspension/slag span < 50 values between 10 and 30 are recommended C. Dimensioning 2.2.3 In case there are several tackles suspended from a jumper stay it will be assumed that only one at 1. General a time is in operation if not otherwise described in the approval documentation. 1.1 While fishing gear is to be dimensioned for a defined design load DLn, lifting appliances must be 2.3 Trawling gear assessed for a defined safe working load SWL. These The dimensioning of trawling gear is to be based on loads shall be specified in the drawings and calcula- the nominal winch pull (pelagic trawl) or, in case the tions submitted. Allowance is to be made for possible net may be caught, on the minimum breaking load of a oblique loading and simultaneous loading of a sup- trawl warp (ground trawl). porting structure by more than one fishing gear and/or lifting appliance. 2.3.1 Pelagic trawl

1.2 Shipyard, design office, manufacturers and/or The dimensioning of pelagic trawling gear is to be owners, as the case may be, have to decide on the based on the following: operating conditions and to specify the angles of trawl – L2 = DL2 × fo warp attack and there possible combinations, the design loads DLn of fishing gear and the SWL of lifting – trawl warp angles of egression from the vessel's appliances to provide the basis for dimensioning and hull as specified but within the following limits: approval. - –15° up to –45° in the vertical plane against horizontal level 2. Fishing gear - 0° up to ± 45° in the horizontal plane against vertical level 2.1 General – allowable stresses according to load condition B 2.1.1 For dimensioning it has to be considered that in the Lifting Appliance Guidelines the forces acting on fishing gear cannot be determined exactly. This is especially valid for loads acting on 2.3.2 Ground trawl e.g. net tails, jumper stay tackles or trawling gear. The dimensioning of ground trawling gear is to be based on the following: 2.1.2 Consequently the operating factor fo = 1,5 as applied in the following makes up for these uncertain – DL3 loads. – trawl warp angle of egression as described in 2.3.1 2.1.3 Fish pumps and power blocks for hauling of nets will be dealt with individually, if necessary. – allowable normal or von Mises stress equal to ReH in case of normal strength materials 2.2 Catch handling gear – a safety factor of 1,1 against ReH or Rp0,2 if being decisive 2.2.1 The dimensioning of catch handling gear is to be based on the following: – In case of breakage of a trawl warp, gantries, masts, derricks, gallows, etc., shall not fail and – L1 = DL1 × fo remain in place Chapter 8 Section 6 D Fishing Gear and Lifting Appliances I - Part 1 Page 6–4 GL 2007

2.3.3 The angles of trawl warp of egression as SWL. This system is described in the Lifting Appli- specified consider dynamic vessel inclinations as ance Guidelines. prescribed in the Lifting Appliance Guidelines. 4.2.2 In case of accessories for trawling gear their 2.3.4 If higher strength materials are used their ReH nominal sizes shall be equal to the design load DL2. or Rp0,2 shall be reduced in accordance with the Lifting 4.2.3 Accessories which have to take the trawl Appliance Guidelines. ReH respectively Rp0,2 is to be taken from the applicable material standards. warp pull and go over board for fishing, shall have nominal sizes at least equal to half the design load 2.3.5 In the North and Baltic Sea, or in other shal- DL2. low waters with similar conditions, it is recommended that trawl booms and their forward stays should be 4.2.4 Accessories which have to take the pull of dimensioned with an additional safety margin of 10 %. jumper stays shall have nominal sizes at least equal to half the minimum breaking load of the jumper stays.

3. Lifting appliances 4.2.5 The nominal sizes of accessories are to be finally determined by interpolation between the nomi- 3.1 The dimensioning of lifting appliances is to nal sizes as shown e.g. in the relevant Tables in the be based on SWL, load radius, dynamic influences, Lifting Appliance Guidelines. If a design value is etc. for a Type A lifting appliance as described in the 25 % higher than the difference towards the following Lifting Appliance Guidelines for load handling in nominal size, this higher nominal size shall be chosen. sheltered waters, i.e. in harbours. This system is based on allowed stresses, proof against ReH or Rp0,2 and fatigue, as may be necessary. D. Construction For dimensioning a minimum static vessel inclination is prescribed in the Lifting Appliance Guidelines. 1. General Depending on the actual stability of a given vessel a bigger inclination may have to be taken into consid- Constructional requirements for lifting appliances are eration. defined in the Lifting Appliance Guidelines. For fishing gear the following applies additionally: 3.2 A dimensioning of lifting appliances for load handling at sea may be considered individually on the 1.1 Fishing in arctic waters requires a special basis of the Lifting Appliance Guidelines, if this may design to prevent undue accumulation of ice as far as be necessary. In such cases a larger vessel inclination possible, e.g. mast stays should be avoided. and additional dynamic influences are to be taken into consideration. 1.2 Materials and welding procedures as well as the construction measures of hydraulic components 4. Ropes and accessories shall be in line with the relevant principles of the GL Rules, see A.3.3.2. 4.1 Ropes 2. Fishing gear Construction and diameter of the various wire ropes used on a fishing vessel are to be chosen by shipyard, 2.1 Stern gantries design office, manufacturers and/or owners as the case may be, however, the following is to be observed: 2.1.1 Stern gantries shall be dimensioned for angles of rope attack in accordance with C.2.3.1 as need may 4.1.1 The minimum breaking load of ropes for be. All locations where rope blocks are fixed shall be catch handling gear and lifting appliances is to be sufficiently strengthened, e.g. by inside frames and calculated by multiplying their static rope forces with outside brackets. the utility factor as given in the Lifting Appliances Guidelines. Static rope forces are to be calculated 2.1.2 End operating/rest positions of hinged gan- without dynamic influences but by taking into consid- tries shall be able to be sufficiently locked or secured eration the friction and bending resistance in the rope by mechanical or hydraulic means. sheaves. 2.1.3 The movement of hinged gantries shall be 4.1.2 The minimum breaking load of trawl warps controlled from a local control stand inaccessible to shall be at least 2,5 times the design load DL2, see unauthorized persons or from a central control stand, A.2.4. e.g. at the rear of the bridge. As soon as the controls, such as push-buttons, levers and similar are released, 4.2 Accessories movement of the gantry shall stop immediately. 4.2.1 In case of accessories for catch handling gear If central control is realized, emergency stop buttons and lifting appliances their nominal sizes shall be have to be provided in the rear working deck area. The equal to the static forces acting on them, e.g. DL1 or gantry has to be fully visible from the control station. I - Part 1 Section 6 D Fishing Gear and Lifting Appliances Chapter 8 GL 2007 Page 6–5

2.1.4 Fixed stern gantries shall have safe access to 3.1.5 Trawl winches and their leading rollers shall their top and to platforms, if any. Top and platforms be arranged such that the rope fleet angles to either shall have sufficient handrails and foot bars, compare side of the drum centre are symmetrical. Section 4, E.3. 3.1.6 The number of safety turns of rope left on a 2.2 Side gallows drum shall be such that the maximum rope tension, which is in case of winches for ground trawling the minimum rope breaking load, can be taken jointly by 2.2.1 Side gallows (fish davits) typically arranged the remaining turns and the end fastenings. on starboard side need to have sufficient additional strength because they may get heavy blows when the 3.1.7 Rope end fastenings shall be designed such trawl boards are hauled in at bad seaway conditions. that they 2.2.2 Means are to be provided in front of side – do not pull the rope over sharp edges gallows for a secure stowage of trawl boards and trawl – cannot be released unintentionally doors, if any. – are easy to inspect 2.3 Jumper stays 3.2 Fairleads and rollers 2.3.1 Sheaves rolling onto the jumper stay shall have at least a minimum diameter of 14 times the rope 3.2.1 Centre fairleads on side trawlers shall be diameter. provided with a protective guard extending at the sides at least 0,30 m beyond the outer periphery of the fair- 2.3.2 To reduce the effect of corrosion, jumper stay leads. ropes shall be galvanized and shall have wire cores. 3.2.2 The groove of rollers passed over by shackles, swivels, chain links, etc. shall be specially de- 2.3.3 Wire rope clips and other detachable clamps signed to prevent undue stressing of these parts. are not permitted for rope end attachments. For shackle connections only type C shackles as shown in 3.2.3 Rope sheaves are to be fitted with a protec- the Lifting Appliance Guidelines shall be employed. tive device which prevents the ropes from jumping out of the sheave. 2.4 Trawl booms 3.2.4 The sheave for the trawl warp messenger If trawl booms are also employed for loading and rope shall be fixed in the bulwark. Fixing on top of the discharging, they have to be designed as fishing gear bulwark is not allowed. and lifting appliances alike. 3.2.5 The fleet angle of wire ropes running over metallic rope sheaves shall not exceed 4°. 3. Deck equipment 3.2.6 Rope sheaves made of plastic may only be 3.1 Winches employed with the consent of GL and owners.

3.1.1 Winches shall be designed in accordance with 3.2.7 The groove diameter of rope sheaves shall be the Chapter 2 – Machinery Installations and be of at least 14 times the rope diameter in case of running reversible type. Also the rope paying out shall be ropes under load. motor controlled. 4. Ropes and accessories 3.1.2 Winches for ground trawling shall be dimensioned to withstand the design load DL3, i.e. the 4.1 Ropes, especially trawl warps, which are breaking of a trawl warp. Winches for pelagic trawling spooled in several layers, shall have a steel wire core. shall be designed to withstand the nominal winch pull DL2 multiplied by the operating factor fo. (see A.2.4 4.2 Portable guide rollers shall not be used unless and C.2.1.2). fitted with an efficient and adequately designed rope restraining device. 3.1.3 Satisfactory spooling of ropes onto the drums shall be ensured. Winch drums of trawl warps shall 4.3 Shackles, swivels, chain links, etc. which are have a diameter ratio (d : D) between ropes and drums to pass over rollers shall be specially designed in order of 1:14. The direction in which the rope reels onto the to prevent overstressing. drum shall be clearly indicated on the winch. 4.4 Bows and pad eyes for attaching of moveable 3.1.4 The way in which the first layer of rope is blocks shall be aligned in such a way that they may wound onto the drum shall be chosen depending on not be undue stressed rectangular to their main load the lay of the rope so that the rope does not unlay. plane. Chapter 8 Section 6 F Fishing Gear and Lifting Appliances I - Part 1 Page 6–6 GL 2007

4.5 The material properties and dimensions of 3. Lifting appliances pad eyes for high tensile shackles, e.g. green pin shackles, may be obtained from GL Head Office upon The relevant requirements in the Lifting Appliance request. Guidelines apply.

4.6 Chains used for fishing or load handling shall 4. Winches and controls meet the requirements in the relevant GL Rules, see A.3.3.2. 4.1 The controls and monitoring instruments of winches shall be clearly arranged on the control platform. They shall be placed to give the winch driver ample room for unimpeded operation and an unob- E. Accident Prevention structed view of the working area.

4.2 Controls and monitoring instruments have to 1. Deck areas be permanently, clearly and intelligible marked with the direction or the function of the movement they 1.1 After the net has been hauled in or out, the control. The arrangement and direction of movement stern ramp shall be properly secured by suitable of controls and monitoring instruments must match the equipment. direction of the movement which they control. In the case of pushbutton controls there shall be a separate 1.2 Provision shall be made for the stowage of button for each direction of movement. bulky netting to allow drainage and to prevent shifting. The stowage area shall be of adequate dimensions 4.3 Where a fishing winch is controlled from the to hold down the centre of gravity of the stowed net as bridge, the arrangements shall be such that the opera- far as possible and to allow for the crew to work not tor has a clear view of the winch and the adjacent area. endangered when handling the nets. In addition to an emergency button at the winch, an emergency button on the bridge shall be provided. 1.3 In the range of fishing winches and net drums, a passageway at least 0,60 m wide shall be 4.4 Where necessary, emergency buttons for maintained. winches shall be provided remote from the winch to protect fishermen working in places which are dan- 1.4 Fixed and removable fish pounds for holding gerous for operating trawl warps and boards. the catch on and below deck shall be of adequate size. Fish pounds on deck shall be constructed in such a way that water can drain without hindrance. F. Tests, Examinations, Certification and Class Notation 1.5 For further protective measures see Section 4, E. 1. General 2. Fishing gear 1.1 The following statements outline the test, survey and Certification system applied by GL in case 2.1 Fishing gear shall be designed to avoid work- this is required by Flag State Regulations or agreed ing accidents and damage to the gear if the operating upon with owners. The Class Notation system will be instructions to be provided are consequently followed. applied in case the vessel shall get the Class Notation Possible danger scenarios during operations have to be CFG. clearly addressed in these instructions. 1.2 Lifting appliances with a SWL below one 2.2 Where practicable, provision shall be made to tonne will be treated in the same way as those with stop trawl boards from swinging inboard, such as the one tonne and more, except national regulations stipu- fitting of a portable prevention bar at the gallows aper- late otherwise. ture, or other equally effective means. 2. Certification 2.3 If no fishing activities are under way, the complete fishing gear has to be stowed in a safe way. Certification of fishing gear and lifting appliances is Adequate devices for lashing have to be provided. mainly intended to confirm adequate strength of load bearing structural members and requires individual 2.4 Where manually operated gear is installed it Certificates for ropes and accessories. For Certifica- should be capable of being disengaged when the tion plan approval as well as initial tests and examina- warps are paying out. The operating wheels shall be tion of fishing gear and lifting appliances shall be without spokes or protrusions which could cause in- conducted before putting the gear/appliances into jury to the operator. operation, but no periodical surveys are required. I - Part 1 Section 6 F Fishing Gear and Lifting Appliances Chapter 8 GL 2007 Page 6–7

2.1 Supervision of construction 3.1 Periodical tests and examinations 2.1.1 Supervision of construction at the premises of 3.1.1 Once a year in conjunction with Annual Class subcontractors is not prescribed. Subcontractors shall Surveys fishing gear and lifting appliances will be deliver fishing gear and lifting appliances with their surveyed by the acting GL Surveyor. Following this, works Certificates for being presented to a GL Sur- the GL Surveyor will confirm the surveys conducted veyor by the shipyard. by him in the Register Book (Form LA1).

2.1.2 In case of components being constructed at 3.1.2 Every five years, in conjunction with the Class the shipyard, i.e. hinged stern gantries, etc., a GL Renewal Survey of the vessel, a new function/load Surveyor shall conduct supervision and certify the testing of fishing gear/lifting appliances, as far as pos- construction. Fixed stern gantries are subject to Classi- sible, supervised by a GL Surveyor is required. fication of the vessel and generally undergo supervision of construction. 3.1.3 Following function/load testing in according with 3.1.2 the acting GL Surveyor will examine all 2.2 Certificates for ropes and accessories gear/appliances, issue a new load test Certificate for the lifting appliances, confirm all examinations con- 2.2.1 Works Certificates for wire ropes and acces- ducted by him in the Register Book and add the load sories will be accepted, if tensile testing to destruction test Certificate to it. in case of ropes, respectively static load testing in case of accessories as prescribed in the Lifting Appliance 3.1.4 All time windows for tests and surveys are Guidelines is confirmed in the Certificates. the same as for the Class Surveys of the vessel.

2.2.2 The Certificates for wire ropes and accesso- 3.2 Tests and examinations after repair ries are to be ordered by the manufacturers of fishing gear and lifting appliances at subcontractors and shall 3.2.1 After repair of load bearing parts of fishing be delivered to the shipyard together with the fabri- gear an examination is required. cated gear/appliances for being handed over to a GL Surveyor by the shipyard. 3.2.2 After repair of load bearing parts of lifting appliances a new load testing/examination and a new 2.3 Initial tests and examination load test Certificate is required. 2.3.1 Before being taken into operation, fishing 3.2.3 Replacement of axles, shafts, rope sheaves, gear shall be presented to a GL Surveyor and function ropes, accessories, etc. due to wear and tear does not tested in his presence as far as possible by the ship- necessitate load testing and subsequent examination. yard. Following this the GL Surveyor will examine the gear. 3.2.4 Newly issued Certificates have to be included into the Register Book and the examinations have to 2.3.2 Before being taken into operation lifting be confirmed in this book. appliances shall be load and function tested on the vessel, usually by the shipyard, supervised by a GL 4. Documentation Surveyor who will examine the appliances after the test. 4.1 Certification

2.3.3 Following supervision of load and/or function 4.1.1 Following successful tests and examinations testing and after examination, the acting GL Surveyor as described in the foregoing, the acting GL Surveyor will issue a GL load test Certificate, Form LA2, for will issue a GL Register Book for all fishing gear and the lifting appliances, confirm the examinations con- lifting appliances on the vessel which shall remain on ducted by him for both fishing gear and lifting appli- board for at least 5 years after the last 5 yearly survey/ ances into a GL Register Book, Form LA1, and re- load testing. lease the complete documentation as described under 4. 4.1.2 In the Register Book all Certificates for load 3. Class Notation testing of lifting appliances as well as for testing of ropes and attachments will be collected as evidence to- For the Class Notation CFG, in addition to Certifica- wards all parties concerned. In addition the GL Survey- tion, annual and 5-yearly examinations of fishing gear or will add rope reeving plans for lifting appliances and and lifting appliances are to be conducted by a GL fishing gear to the Register Book, as far as available. Surveyor who will also supervise the 5 yearly load testing of lifting appliances. 4.2 Class Notation The Class Notation will automatically become invalid The Class Notation CFG is subject to a contractual and will be withdrawn by GL Head Office if fishing agreement. No special Certificate will be issued to this gear and lifting appliances are no more presented for regard. The Class Notation will be stated in the Class surveys and/or load testing within the time windows Certificate of the vessel by GL Head Office after suc- according to 3.1.4. The following tests and examina- cessful initial tests and examinations as well as Certi- tions are to be performed: fication.

I - Part 1 Section 7 B Structural Fire Protection Chapter 8 GL 2007 Page 7–1

Section 7

Structural Fire Protection

A. General ance or apparatus or type thereof, or provision, is at least as effective as that required by this Section. 1. Application Where compliance with any of the requirements of this Section would be impracticable for the particular The requirements in this Section are generally valid design of the vessel, GL may substitute those with for unrestricted service of fishing vessels as defined in alternative requirements, provided that equivalent Section 1, B.3. Exceptions may be granted by GL for safety is achieved. restricted service ranges according to the Class Nota- tions M, K and W. 5. References 2. Documents to be submitted For the rules for fire protection and fire fighting see Section 8, for electrical installations for fire detection The following drawings and documents are to be see Section 11h, D.4. submitted, at least in triplicate for approval. GL reserve the right to ask for supplementary copies, if deemed necessary. – fire division plan B. Requirements for Fire Protection for Fish- ing Vessels with 12 m ≤ L < 45 m – insulation plan (may be part of the fire division plan) 1. Material – ventilation and air condition scheme – deck covering plan 1.1 The hull, decks, structural bulkheads, superstructures and deckhouses are to be of steel except – door plan where in special cases the use of other suitable material may be approved, having in mind the risk of fire. – fire control plan – list of approved materials and equipment 1.2 Bulkheads and decks enclosing machinery spaces, cargo spaces, emergency generator rooms, galleys, pantries containing cooking appliances, store 3. GL approval rooms containing flammable liquids and workshops other than those forming part of the machinery spaces 3.1 The term "approved" relates to a material or are to be of steel or equivalent material. construction, for which GL has issued an Approval Certificate. A type approval can be issued on the basis 1.3 All stairways shall be of steel frame construc- of a successful standard fire test, which has been car- tion or equivalent material. ried out by neutral and recognized fire test institutes.

3.2 The type "A", "B" and "C" class partitions, 2. Exemptions fire dampers, duct penetrations as well as the insula- For fishing vessels with L < 24 m GL may accept tion materials, linings, ceilings, surface materials and deviations from material requirements of 1.1 and 1.2. not readily ignitable deck coverings shall be of approved type. 3. Restricted use of combustible materials 4. Equivalence 3.1 Paints, varnishes and other finishes used on Where this Section requires that a particular fitting, exposed interior surfaces shall not offer an undue fire material, appliance or apparatus, or type thereof, shall hazard and shall not be capable of producing exces- be fitted or carried in a fishing vessel, or that any sive quantities of smoke. particular provision shall be made, GL may allow any other fitting, material, appliance or apparatus, or type 3.2 Primary deck coverings, if applied, in ac- thereof, to be fitted or carried, or any other provision commodation and service spaces and control stations, to be made in the vessel, if it is satisfied by trial which are located above machinery spaces, shall be of thereof or otherwise that such fitting, material, appli- an approved material which will not readily ignite. Chapter 8 Section 7 C Structural Fire Protection I - Part 1 Page 7–2 GL 2007

4. Ventilation systems does not rise more than 200 °C above the ambient temperature at any time during the applicable fire 4.1 The main inlet and outlets of all ventilation exposure to the standard fire test. systems shall be capable of being closed from outside the respective spaces in the event of a fire. 1.2.2 Special attention shall be given to the insulation of aluminium alloy components of columns, stan- 4.2 Where they pass through accommodation chions and other structural members required to sup- spaces or spaces containing combustible materials, the port lifeboat and liferaft stowage, launching and em- exhaust ducts from galley ranges shall be appropri- barkation areas, and "A" and "B" class divisions to ately isolated. ensure: – that for such members supporting lifeboat and 5. Means of escape liferaft areas and "A" class divisions, the temperature rise limitation specified in 1.2.1 shall 5.1 Stairways and ladders shall be so arranged as apply at the end of one hour; and to provide, from all accommodation spaces and from spaces in which the crew is normally employed, other – that for such members required to support "B" than machinery spaces, ready means of escape to the class divisions, the temperature rise limitation open deck and from there to the lifeboats and liferafts. specified in 1.2.1 shall apply at the end of half an hour. 5.2 At all levels of accommodation there shall be 1.2.3 Crowns and casings of machinery spaces of provided at least two widely separated means of es- category A shall be of steel construction and be insu- cape from each restricted space or group of spaces. lated as required by Table 7.1 as appropriate. Open- 5.3 Dispense may be given with one of the means ings therein, if any, shall be suitably arranged and of escape, due regard being paid to the nature and protected to prevent the spread of fire. location of spaces and to the numbers of persons who normally might be quartered or employed there. 2. Accommodation and service spaces

5.4 No dead-end corridors having a length of 2.1 One of the following methods of protection more than 7 m shall be accepted. A dead-end corridor shall be adopted in accommodation and service areas: is a corridor or part of a corridor from which there is 2.1.1 Method IC only one escape route. The construction of all internal divisional bulkheading 5.5 Two means of escape shall be provided from of non-combustible "B" or "C" class divisions gener- the machinery space by two sets of steel ladders as ally without the installation of an automatic sprinkler, widely separated as possible leading to doors in the fire detection and fire alarm system in the accommo- upper part of the space similarly separated and from dation and service spaces, except as required by 10.1; which access is provided to the open deck. or

5.6 For a vessel of a gross tonnage less than 2.1.2 Method IIC 1000, dispense may be given with one of the means of The fitting of an automatic sprinkler, fire detection escape due regard being paid to the dimension and and fire alarm system, as required by 10.2 for the disposition of the upper part of the space. detection and extinction of fire in all spaces in which fire might be expected to originate, generally with no restriction on the type of internal divisional bulkheading; or C. Requirements for Fire Protection for Fish- ing Vessels with L ≥ 45 m 2.1.3 Method IIIC The fitting of a fixed fire detection and fire alarm 1. Materials system, as required by 10.3, in all spaces in which a fire might be expected to originate, generally with no 1.1 The hull, decks, structural bulkheads, super- restriction on the type of internal divisional bulkhead- structures and deckhouses are to be of steel except ing, except that in no case must the area of any ac- where in special cases the use of other suitable mate- commodation space or spaces bounded by an "A" or rial may be approved, having in mind the risk of fire. "B" class division exceed 50 m2. Consideration may be given to increasing this area for public spaces. 1.2 Components made from aluminium alloys require special treatment, with regard to the mechani- 2.2 The requirements for the use of non-com- cal properties of the material in case of temperature bustible materials in construction and insulation of the increase. In principle, the following is to be observed: boundary bulkheads of machinery spaces, control stations, service spaces, etc., and the protection of 1.2.1 The insulation of "A" or "B" class divisions stairway enclosures and corridors will be common to shall be such that the temperature of the structural core all three methods. I - Part 1 Section 7 C Structural Fire Protection Chapter 8 GL 2007 Page 7–3

Table 7.1 Fire integrity of bulkheads separating adjacent spaces

Spaces [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] [10]

Control stations [1] A-05 A-0 A-60 A-0 A-15 A-60 A-15 A-60 A-60 7

B-0 Corridors [2] C B-0 B-0 A-60 A-0 A-0 A-0 7 A-03 B-0 Accommodation spaces [3] C1, 2 B-0 A-60 A-0 A-0 A-0 7 A-03 B-0 B-0 Stairways [4] A-60 A-0 A-0 A-0 7 A-03 A-03

Service spaces (low risk) [5] C A-60 A-0 A-0 A-0 7

Machinery spaces of category A [6] 7 A-0 A-0 A-60 7

Other machinery spaces [7] A-04 A-0 A-0 7

Cargo spaces [8] 7 A-0 7

Service spaces (high risk) [9] A-04 7

Open decks [10] –

Notes 1 No special requirements are imposed upon bulkheads in methods IIC and IIIC fire protection. 2 In case of method IIC "B" class bulkheads of "B-0" rating shall be provided between spaces or groups of spaces of 50 m2 and over in area. 3 For clarification as to which applies, see 3. and 5. 4 Where spaces are of the same numerical category and superscript 4 appears, a bulkhead or deck of the rating shown in the Tables is only required when the adjacent spaces are for a different purpose, e.g. in category 9. A galley next to a galley does not require a bulkhead but a galley next to a paint room requires an "A-0" bulkhead. 5 Bulkheads separating the wheelhouse, chartroom and radio room from each other may be "B-0" rating. 6 Fire insulation need not be fitted if the machinery space in category 7, has little or no fire risk. 7 Where a 7 appears in the Tables, the division is required to be of steel or other equivalent material but is not required to be of "A" class standard.

3. Bulkheads within the accommodation and in individual cases where "C" class bulkheads are service spaces required in accordance with Table 7.1.

3.1 All bulkheads required to be "B" class divi- 3.4 Method IIIC sions shall extend from deck to deck and to the shell There shall be no restriction on the construction of or other boundaries, unless continuous "B" class ceil- bulkheads not required by this Section to be "A" or "B" ings or linings are fitted on both sides of the bulkhead class divisions except that the area of any accommoda- in which case the bulkhead may terminate at the con- tion space or spaces bounded by a continuous "A" or tinuous ceiling or lining. "B" class division must in no case exceed 50 m2 except in individual cases where "C" class bulkheads are re- 3.2 Method IC quired in accordance with Table 7.1. Consideration may be given to increasing this area for public spaces. All bulkheads not required by this or other requirements of this Section to be "A" or "B" class divisions, shall be of at least "C" class construction. 4. Fire integrity of bulkheads and decks

3.3 Method IIC 4.1 In addition to complying with the specific provisions for fire integrity of bulkheads and decks There shall be no restriction on the construction of mentioned elsewhere in this Section, the minimum fire bulkheads not required by this or other requirements integrity of bulkheads and decks shall be as prescribed of this Section to be "A" or "B" class divisions except in Tables 7.1 and 7.2. Chapter 8 Section 7 C Structural Fire Protection I - Part 1 Page 7–4 GL 2007

Table 7.2 Fire integrity of decks separating adjacent spaces

Spaces [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] [10]

Control stations [1] A-0 A-0 A-0 A-0 A-0 A-60 A-0 A-0 A-0 7

Corridors [2] A-0 7 7 A-0 7 A-60 A-0 A-0 A-0 7

Accommodation spaces [3] A-60 A-0 7 A-0 7 A-60 A-0 A-0 A-0 7

Stairways [4] A-0 A-0 A-0 7 A-0 A-60 A-8 A-8 A-8 7

Service spaces (low risk) [5] A-15 A-0 A-0 A-0 7 A-60 A-0 A-0 A-0 7

Machinery spaces of category A [6] A-60 A-60 A-60 A-60 A-60 7 A-606 A-30 A-60 7

Other machinery spaces [7] A-15 A-0 A-0 A-0 A-0 A-0 7 A-0 A-0 7

Cargo spaces [8] A-60 A-0 A-0 A-0 A-0 A-0 A-0 7 A-0 7

Service spaces (high risk) [9] A-60 A-0 A-0 A-0 A-0 A-60 A-0 A-0 A-04 7

Open decks [10] 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 –

See notes under Table 7.1

4.2 Continuous "B" class ceilings or linings, in bulkheads of such smaller rooms shall be as pre- association with the relevant decks or bulkheads, may scribed in Tables 7.1 and 7.2. be accepted as contributing, wholly or in part, to the required insulation and integrity of a division. The title of each category is intended to be typical rather than restrictive. The number in parentheses preceding each category refers to the applicable col- 4.3 External boundaries which are required in 1.1 umn or row number in the Tables. to be of steel or other equivalent material may be pierced for the fitting of windows and sidescuttles [1] Control stations provided that there is no requirement for such boundaries to have "A" class integrity elsewhere in these Spaces containing emergency sources of power requirements. Similarly, in such boundaries which are and lighting. Wheelhouse and chartroom. not required to have "A" class integrity, doors may be Spaces containing the vessel's radio equipment. of materials to meet the requirements of their applica- Fire control stations. Control room for propul- tion. sion machinery when located outside the machinery space. Spaces containing centralized fire 4.4 The following requirements shall govern alarm equipment. application of the Tables: [2] Corridors Tables 7.1 and 7.2 shall apply respectively to the Corridors and lobbies. bulkheads and decks separating adjacent spaces. [3] Accommodation spaces 4.5 For determining the appropriate fire integrity standards to be applied to divisions between adjacent Spaces used for public spaces, lavatories, cab- spaces, such spaces are classified according to their ins, offices, hospitals, hobby rooms, pantries fire risk as shown in the following categories 1 to 10. containing no cooking appliances and similar spaces. Where the contents and use of a space are such that there is a doubt as to its classification for the purpose [4] Stairways of this regulation, or where it is possible to assign two Interior stairways, totally enclosed emergency or more classifications to a space, it shall be treated as escape trunks and enclosures thereto. a space within the relevant category having the most stringent boundary requirements. Smaller, enclosed In this connection, a stairway which is enclosed rooms within a space that have less than 30 % com- only at one level shall be regarded as part of the municating openings to that space are to be considered space from which it is not separated by a fire as separate spaces. The fire integrity of the boundary door. I - Part 1 Section 7 C Structural Fire Protection Chapter 8 GL 2007 Page 7–5

[5] Service spaces (low risk) level, consideration may be given reducing the "A-0" requirements of 5.1 to "B-0". Lockers and store-rooms not having provisions for the storage of flammable liquids and having 2 5.3 All stairways shall be of steel frame construc- areas less than 4 m and drying rooms and laun- tion or of other equivalent material. dries.

[6] Machinery spaces of category A 6. Openings in fire resisting divisions Spaces and trunks to such spaces which contain: 6.1 Where "A" or "B" class divisions are pene- Internal combustion machinery used for main trated for the passage of electric cables, pipes, trunks, propulsion; or ducts, etc. or for girders, beams or other structural internal combustion machinery used for pur- members, arrangements shall be made to ensure that poses other than main propulsion where such the fire resistance is not impaired. machinery has in the aggregate a total power output of not less than 375 kW; or 6.2 Except for hatches between cargo, special category, store, and baggage spaces, and between such any oil-fired boiler or oil fuel unit. spaces and the weather decks, all openings shall be provided with permanently attached means of closing [7] Other machinery spaces which shall be at least as effective for resisting fires as Spaces, other than machinery spaces of category the divisions in which they are fitted. 1 A, containing propulsion machinery, boilers, fuel oil units, steam and internal combustion en- 6.3 The fire resistance of doors shall be equiva- gines, generators and major electrical machin- lent to that of the division in which they are fitted. ery, oil filling stations, refrigerating, stabilizing, Doors and door frames in "A" class divisions shall be ventilation and air conditioning machinery, and constructed of steel. Doors in "B" class divisions shall similar spaces, and trunks to such spaces. Elec- be non-combustible. Doors fitted in boundary bulk- trical equipment rooms (auto-telephone ex- heads of machinery spaces of category A shall be change, air-conditioning duct spaces). reasonably gastight and self-closing. In vessels constructed according to method IC the use of combusti- [8] Cargo spaces ble materials in doors separating cabins from individ- All spaces used for cargo and trunkways and ual interior sanitary accommodation such as showers hatchways to such spaces. may be permitted.

[9] Service spaces (high risk) 6.4 Doors required to be self-closing shall not be Galleys, pantries containing cooking appliances, fitted with hold-back hooks. However, hold-back saunas, paint and lamp rooms, lockers and store- arrangements fitted with remote release devices of the rooms having areas of 4 m2 or more, spaces for fail-safe type may be utilized. the storage of flammable liquids, and workshops other than those forming part of the machinery 6.5 In corridor bulkheads ventilation openings spaces. may be permitted only in and under class B-doors of cabins and public spaces. Ventilation openings are [10] Open decks also permitted in B-doors leading to lavatories, of- Open deck spaces having no fire risk. Air spaces fices, pantries, lockers and store rooms. Except as (the space outside superstructures and deck- permitted below, the openings shall be provided only houses). in the lower half of a door. Where such opening is in or under a door the total net area of any such opening or openings shall not exceed 0,05 m2. Alternatively, a 5. Protection of stairways in accommodation non-combustible air balance duct routed between the spaces, service spaces and control stations cabin and the corridor, and located below the sanitary unit is permitted where the cross-sectional area of the 5.1 Stairways which penetrate only a single deck duct does not exceed 0,05 m2. Ventilation openings, shall be protected at least at one level by at least "B-0" except those under the door, shall be fitted with a class divisions and self-closing doors. Stairways grille made of non-combustible material. which penetrate more than a single deck shall be surrounded by at least "A-0" class divisions and be pro- 6.6 Watertight doors need not be insulated. tected by self-closing doors at all levels.

5.2 On vessels having accommodation for 12 persons or less, where stairways penetrate more than a –––––––––––––– single deck and where there are at least two escape 1 Reference is made to the Fire Test Procedure Code, Annex 1, routes direct to the open deck at every accommodation Part 3, adopted by IMO by Resolution MSC.61(67). Chapter 8 Section 7 C Structural Fire Protection I - Part 1 Page 7–6 GL 2007

7. Ventilation systems 7.2.3.1 fire dampers, including relevant means of operation; 7.1 Ventilation ducts shall be of non-combustible material. Short ducts, however, not generally exceed- 7.2.3.2 duct penetrations through "A" class divisions. ing 2 m in length and with a cross-section not exceed- Where steel sleeves are directly joined to ventilation ing 0,02 m2 need not be non-combustible, subject to ducts by means of riveted or screwed flanges or by the following conditions: welding, the test is not required.

7.1.1 these ducts shall be of a material having low 7.3 The main inlets and outlets of all ventilation flame spread characteristics which is type approved; 2 systems shall be capable of being closed from outside the respective spaces in the event of a fire. 7.1.2 they may only be used at the end of the ventilation device; 7.4 Where they pass through accommodation spaces or spaces containing combustible materials, the 7.1.3 they shall not be situated less than 600 mm, exhaust ducts from galley ranges shall be constructed measured along the duct, from an opening in an "A" or of insulated "A" class divisions. Each exhaust duct "B" class division including continuous "B" class shall be fitted with: ceilings. 7.4.1 a grease trap readily removable for cleaning; 7.2 Where a thin plated duct with a free cross- sectional area equal to, or less than, 0,02 m2 passes 7.4.2 a fire damper located in the lower end of the through "A" class bulkheads or decks, the opening duct; shall be lined with a steel sheet sleeve having a thickness of at least 3 mm and a length of at least 200 mm, 7.4.3 arrangements, operable from within the gal- divided preferably into 100 mm on each side of the ley, for shutting off the exhaust fan; and bulkhead or, in the case of the deck, wholly laid on the lower side of the decks pierced. Where ventilation 7.4.4 fixed means for extinguishing a fire within ducts with a free cross-sectional area exceeding 0,02 the duct, see Section 8, H.1. m2 pass through "A" class bulkheads or decks, the opening shall be lined with a steel sheet sleeve. How- 7.5 Such measures as are practicable shall be ever, where such ducts are of steel construction and taken in respect of control stations outside machinery pass through a deck or bulkhead, the ducts and sleeves spaces in order to ensure that ventilation, visibility and shall comply with the following: freedom from smoke are maintained, so that in the event of fire the machinery and equipment contained 7.2.1 The sleeves shall have a thickness of at least therein may be supervised and continue to function 3 mm and a length of at least 900 mm. When passing effectively. Alternative and separate means of air through bulkheads, this length shall be divided pref- supply shall be provided; air inlets of the two sources erably into 450 mm on each side of the bulkhead. of supply shall be so disposed that the risk of both These ducts, or sleeves lining such ducts, shall be inlets drawing in smoke simultaneously is minimized. provided with fire insulation. The insulation shall have Such requirements need not apply to control stations at least the same fire integrity as the bulkhead or deck situated on, and opening on to, an open deck. through which the duct passes. 7.6 The ventilation system for machinery spaces 7.2.2 Ducts with a free cross-sectional area exceed- of category A, galleys, special category spaces and ing 0,075 m2 shall be fitted with fire dampers in addi- cargo spaces shall, in general, be separated from each tion to the requirements of 7.2.1. The fire damper shall other and from the ventilation systems serving other also be capable of being closed manually from both spaces. Except that, galley ventilation on vessels of sides of the bulkhead or deck. The damper shall be less than 4 000 gross tonnage need not be completely provided with an indicator which shows whether the separated, but may be served by separate ducts from a damper is open or closed. Fire dampers are not re- ventilation unit serving other spaces. In any case, an quired, however, where ducts pass through spaces automatic fire damper shall be fitted in the galley surrounded by "A" class divisions, without serving ventilation ducts near the ventilation unit. those spaces, provided those ducts have the same fire integrity as the divisions which they pierce. 7.7 Ducts provided for the ventilation of machinery spaces of category A, galleys or special category 7.2.3 The following arrangement shall be of an 3 spaces shall not pass through accommodation spaces, approved type. service spaces or control stations unless the ducts are either: –––––––––––––– 2 Reference is made to the Fire Test Procedure Code, Annex 1, 7.7.1 constructed of steel having a thickness of at Part 5, adopted by IMO by Resolution MSC.61(67). least 3 mm and 5 mm for ducts the widths or diame- 3 Reference is made to the Fire Test Procedure Code, Annex 1, ters of which are up to and including 300 mm and Part 3, adopted by IMO by Resolution MSC.61(67). 760 mm and over respectively and, in the case of such I - Part 1 Section 7 C Structural Fire Protection Chapter 8 GL 2007 Page 7–7

ducts, the widths or diameters of which are between 7.11 Control of smoke spread 300 mm and 760 mm having a thickness to be obtained by interpolation; 7.11.1 Purpose suitably supported and stiffened; The purpose of this requirement is to control the spread of smoke in order to minimize the hazards from fitted with automatic fire dampers close to the bounda- smoke. For this purpose, means for controlling smoke ries penetrated; and in atriums, control stations, machinery spaces and concealed spaces shall be provided. insulated to "A-60" standard from the machinery spaces, galleys or special category spaces to a point at 7.11.2 Prevention of spread of smoke over several least 5 m beyond each fire damper; decks or Ventilation ducts serving more than one deck level shall be provided with readily accessible means of 7.7.2 constructed of steel suitable supported and closure at each deck level. stiffened and insulated to "A-60" standard throughout the accommodation spaces, service spaces or control 7.11.3 Release of smoke from machinery spaces stations. 7.11.3.1 The provisions of 7.11.3.2 to 7.11.3.4 shall apply to machinery spaces of category A, and where 7.8 Ducts provided for the ventilation to accom- considered desirable to other machinery spaces. modation spaces, service spaces or control stations shall not pass through machinery spaces of category 7.11.3.2 Suitable arrangements shall be made to per- A, galleys or special category spaces unless either: mit the release of smoke in the event of fire, from the space to be protected. The normal ventilation systems 7.8.1 the ducts where they pass through a machin- may be acceptable for this purpose, subject to the ery space of category A, galley or special category provisions in GL Rules according to Chapter 21 – space are constructed of steel, suitable supported and Ventilation, Section 1, E.5.9. stiffened and automatic fire dampers are fitted close to the boundaries penetrated; and 7.11.3.3 Means of control shall be provided for per- mitting the release of smoke and such controls shall be automatic fire dampers are fitted close to the bounda- located outside the space concerned so that they will ries penetrated and not be cut off in the event of fire in the space they serve. the integrity of the machinery space, galley or special category space boundaries is maintained at the pene- 7.11.3.4 The controls shall be easily accessible as well trations; or as prominently and permanently marked and shall indicate whether the shutoff is open or closed. 7.8.2 the ducts where they pass through a machinery space of category A, galley or special category 8. Restricted use of combustible materials space are constructed of steel, suitable supported and stiffened, and 8.1 All exposed surfaces in corridors and stairway enclosures and surfaces including grounds in are insulated to "A-60" standard throughout the ac- concealed or inaccessible spaces in accommodation commodation spaces, service spaces or control sta- and service spaces and control stations shall have low tions. flame-spread characteristics. Exposed surfaces of ceilings in accommodation and service spaces (except 7.9 Ventilation ducts with a free cross-sectional saunas) and control stations shall have low flame- 2 area exceeding 0,02 m passing through "B" class spread characteristics. 4 bulkheads shall be lined with steel sheet sleeves of 900 mm in length divided preferably into 450 mm on 8.2 Paints, varnishes and other finishes used on each side of the bulkheads unless the duct is of steel exposed interior surfaces shall not offer an undue fire for this length. hazard and shall not be capable of producing excessive quantities of smoke. 5 7.10 Power ventilation of accommodation spaces, service spaces, cargo spaces, control stations and 8.3 Primary deck coverings, if applied, in ac- machinery spaces shall be capable of being stopped commodation and service spaces and control stations from an easily accessible position outside the space shall be of an approved material which will not readily being served. This position should not be readily cut off in the event of a fire in the spaces served. The –––––––––––––– means provided for stopping the power ventilation of 4 Reference is made to the Fire Test Procedure Code, Annex 1, the machinery spaces shall be entirely separate from Part 5, adopted by IMO by Resolution MSC.61(67). the means provided for stopping ventilation of other 5 Reference is made to the Fire Test Procedure Code, Annex 1, spaces. Part 2, adopted by IMO by Resolution MSC.61(67). Chapter 8 Section 7 C Structural Fire Protection I - Part 1 Page 7–8 GL 2007

ignite, or give rise to toxic or explosive hazardous at 10. Fixed fire detection and fire alarm sys- elevated temperatures. 6 tems, automatic sprinkler, fire detection and fire alarm system 8.4 Waste receptacles shall be constructed of non-combustible materials with no openings in the 10.1 In vessels in which method IC is adopted, a sides or bottom. Containers in galleys, pantries, gar- smoke detection system shall be so installed and ar- bage handling or storage spaces and incinerator rooms ranged as to protect all corridors, stairways and escape which are intended purely for the carriage of wet routes within accommodation spaces. waste, glass bottles and metal cans may be constructed of combustible materials. 10.2 In vessels in which method IIC is adopted, an automatic sprinkler, fire detection and fire alarm system shall be so installed and arranged as to protect 9. Details of construction accommodation spaces, galleys and other service spaces, except spaces which afford no substantial fire 9.1 Method IC risk such as void spaces, sanitary spaces, etc. In addi- In accommodation and service spaces and control station, a fixed fire detection and fire alarm system shall tions all linings, draught stops, ceilings and their asso- be so arranged and installed as to provide smoke de- ciated grounds shall be of non-combustible materials. tection in all corridors, stairways and escape routes within accommodation spaces. 9.2 Methods IIC and IIIC 10.3 In vessels in which method IIIC is adopted, a In corridors and stairway enclosures serving accom- fixed fire detection and fire alarm system shall be so modation and service spaces and control stations, installed and arranged as to detect the presence of fire ceilings, linings, draught stops and their associated in all accommodation spaces and service spaces, ex- grounds shall be of non-combustible materials. cept spaces which afford no substantial fire risk such as void spaces, sanitary spaces, etc. In addition, a 9.3 Methods IC, IIC and IIIC fixed fire detection and fire alarm system shall be so arranged and installed as to provide smoke detection 9.3.1 Except in cargo spaces or refrigerated com- in all corridors, stairways and escape routes within partments of service spaces, insulating materials shall accommodation spaces. be non-combustible. Vapour barriers and adhesives used in conjunction with insulation, as well as the 11. Means of escape insulation of pipe fittings, for cold service systems, need not be of non-combustible materials, but they 11.1 Stairways and ladders shall be so arranged as shall be kept to the minimum quantity practicable and to provide, from all accommodation spaces and from their exposed surfaces shall have low flame spread spaces in which the crew is normally employed, other characteristics. than machinery spaces, ready means of escape to the 9.3.2 Where non-combustible bulkheads, linings open deck and from there to the lifeboats and liferafts. and ceilings are fitted in accommodation and service spaces they may have a combustible veneer with a 11.2 At all levels of accommodation there shall be 7 2 provided at least two widely separated means of es- calorific value not exceeding 45 MJ/m of the area cape from each restricted space or group of spaces. for the thickness used. 11.3 Dispense may be given with one of the means 9.3.3 The total volume of combustible facings, of escape, due regard being paid to the nature and mouldings, decorations and veneers in any accommo- location of spaces and to the numbers of persons who dation and service space bounded by non-combustible normally might be quartered or employed there. bulkheads, ceilings and linings shall not exceed a volume equivalent to a 2,5 mm veneer on the com- 11.4 No dead-end corridors having a length of bined area of the walls and ceilings. more than 7 m shall be accepted. A dead-end corridor 9.3.4 Air spaces enclosed behind ceilings, panel- is a corridor or part of a corridor from which there is lings, or linings, shall be divided by close-fitting only one escape route. draught stops spaced not more than 14 m apart. In the vertical direction, such air spaces, including those 11.5 Two means of escape shall be provided from behind linings of stairways, trunks, etc., shall be the machinery space by two sets of steel ladders as closed at each deck. widely separated as possible leading to doors in the upper part of the space similarly separated and from which access is provided to the open deck. –––––––––––––– 6 Reference is made to the Fire Test Procedure Code, Annex 1, Part 6, adopted by IMO by Resolution MSC.61(67). 11.6 For a vessel of a gross tonnage less than 1000, dispense may be given with one of the means of 7 The gross calorific value measured in accordance with ISO standard 1716 - "Building Materials - Determination of Calo- escape due regard being paid to the dimension and rific Potential", should be quoted. disposition of the upper part of the space. I - Part 1 Section 7 C Structural Fire Protection Chapter 8 GL 2007 Page 7–9

12. Miscellaneous items 12.2.3 The traditional wooden lining on the bulkheads and on the ceiling are permitted in the sauna. 12.1 The cargo holds and machinery spaces have The ceiling above the oven shall be lined with a non- to be capable of being effectively sealed such as to combustible plate with an air-gap of at least 30 mm. prevent the inlet of air. Doors fitted in boundary bulk- The distance from the hot surfaces to combustible heads of machinery spaces of category A shall be materials shall be at least 500 mm or the combustible reasonably gastight and self-closing. materials shall be suitably protected.

12.2 Construction and arrangement of saunas 12.2.4 The traditional wooden benches are permitted to be used in the sauna. 12.2.1 The perimeter of the sauna shall be of "A" class boundaries and may include changing rooms, 12.2.5 The sauna door shall open outwards by push- showers and toilets. The sauna shall be insulated to ing. "A-60" standard against other spaces except those inside the perimeter and spaces of category (5), (9) 12.2.6 Electrically heated ovens shall be provided and (10). with a timer.

12.2.2 Bathrooms with direct access to saunas may 13. Protection of cargo spaces be considered as part of them. In such cases, the door between sauna and the bathroom need not comply Fire-extinguishing arrangements according to Sec- with fire safety requirements. tion 8, H.4. are to be provided for cargo spaces.

I - Part 1 Section 8 A Fire Protection and Fire Fighting Chapter 8 GL 2007 Page 8–1

Section 8

Fire Protection and Fire Fighting

A. General – arrangement of pipes, valves and hydrants including material, pipe diameters and wall thick- 1. Scope nesses The Rules in this Section apply to fire protection in – sizes and numbers of fire hoses and nozzles machinery spaces and to systems and equipment to be provided for fire fighting purposes in machinery 3.2 Fire extinguishers spaces and throughout the fishing vessel. – types, sizes and position

2. Application 3.3 Fixed gas fire extinguishing system – arrangement of pipes, nozzles, gas cylinders, 2.1 General controls and alarms In general the GL Rules defined in the following are – schematic diagram and details of the release valid for all types of fishing vessels. Some of the de- system, alarm system and the means of monitor- tailed requirements are to be applied in dependence of ing as applicable the length of the vessel, using the characteristic values L = 24 m and L = 45 m. – GL-form F 88 for CO2-system – calculation of the required quantity of extin- 2.2 International Torremolinos Convention guishing medium Fishing vessels of flag states which have already rati- – hydraulic calculation fied the Torremolinos International Convention for fishing vessels with a length L ≥ 45 m, see Section 1, 3.4 High-expansion foam system A.3., have to follow directly the requirements defined – arrangement drawing therein. – details on foam generator, pumps, power supply 2.3 European Community and supply of foam concentrate

Fishing vessels with a length L ≥ 24 m flying the flag 3.5 Pressure water-spraying system (sprinkler of a state of the European Community or vessels fish- and deluge system) ing in the waters of the European Community have to follow the requirements of the Torremolinos Conven- – arrangement drawing tion according to 2.2 overruled by the Commission – details on materials, nozzle characteristics, Directives defined in Section 1, A.3.3. A copy of the pumps and power supply consolidated text can be delivered by GL. – calculation of pump capacity and hydraulic 2.4 National regulations calculation Where national regulations are existing, these regula- 3.6 Fixed water-based local application fire- tions have to be met in addition. It will be decided fighting system (FWBLAFFS) in category case by case if GL will supervise also the compliance A machinery spaces, if applicable with such regulations. – arrangement drawing 3. Documents for approval – details on piping, nozzle characteristics, supply pump and water supply Diagrammatic plans, drawings and documents are to be submitted in triplicate for approval. – details of the release and alarm system All necessary details of the systems to be installed – calculation of pump capacity and hydraulic shall be given and in particular as follows: calculation 3.7 Fire extinguishing system for galley range 3.1 Water fire extinguishing system (Fire and exhaust ducts, if applicable deckwash system) – arrangement drawing – position, type and capacity of pumps and position of associated power sources – details of the release station Chapter 8 Section 8 B Fire Protection and Fire Fighting I - Part 1 Page 8–2 GL 2007

3.8 Fire extinguishing system for deep-fat 2.2 Oiltight coamings are to be provided between cooking equipment boiler and engine rooms not separated by watertight bulkheads. – arrangement drawing 2.3 Where boilers are located in machinery – details on piping and nozzle characteristics spaces on 'tween-decks and the boiler rooms are not – details of the release station separated from the machinery spaces by watertight bulkheads, the 'tween-decks are to be provided with oiltight coamings at least 200 mm high. Drains from 3.9 Fire extinguishing systems for cargo spaces this area may be led to the bilges. In case of thermal and paint stores oil boilers, however, the drains are to be led to a leakage oil tank. – arrangement drawing

– details on piping and nozzle characteristics 3. Insulation of lines and appliances

– details of the release station 3.1 All parts with surface temperatures above 220°, e.g. steam, thermal oil and exhaust gas lines, exhaust gas boilers and silencers, turbochargers etc., are to be effectively insulated with non-combustible B. Fire Protection in Machinery Spaces materials. The insulation shall be such that oil or fuel cannot penetrate into the insulating material. Metal cladding or approved hard jacketing of the insulation 1. Machinery space arrangement is considered to afford effective protection against such penetration. 1.1 The arrangement of machinery spaces shall be so that safe storage and handling of flammable 3.2 Boilers are to be provided with non-com- liquids is ensured. bustible insulation which is to be clad with steel sheet or equivalent. 1.2 All spaces in which internal combustion engines, oil burners or fuel settling or service tanks are 3.3 Insulation shall be such that it will not crack located shall be easily accessible and sufficiently ven- or deteriorate when subject to vibration. tilated. 4. Fuel and lubricating oil tanks 1.3 Where leakages of flammable liquids may The Rules in Section 9d, Q. are to be observed. occur during operation or routine maintenance work, special precautions are to be taken to prevent these liquids from coming into contact with sources of igni- 5. Protection against fuel and oil leakage tion. 5.1 Suitable means of collection are to be fitted below potential leakage points. 1.4 Materials used in machinery spaces shall normally not have properties increasing the fire poten- Where oil leakage is liable to be frequent, e.g. with oil tial of these rooms. burners, separators, drains and valves of service tanks, the collectors are to be drained to an oil drain tank. 1.5 Materials used as flooring, bulkhead lining, Leakage oil drains may not be part of an overflow ceiling or deck in control rooms, machinery spaces or system. rooms with oil tanks shall be non-combustible. This requirement, however, does not apply to vessels the 5.2 The arrangement of piping systems and their hull of which is constructed of combustible materials. components intended for combustible liquids, shall be such that leakage of these liquids cannot come into 1.6 Where there is a danger that oil may penetrate contact with heated surfaces or other sources of igni- insulating materials, these shall be protected against tion. Where this cannot be precluded by structural the penetration of oil or oil vapours. design, suitable precautionary measures are to be taken.

2. Installation of boilers 5.3 Tanks, pipelines, filters, preheaters, etc. containing combustible liquids may not be placed directly 2.1 Boilers are to be located at a sufficient dis- above heat sources such as boilers, steam lines, ex- tance from fuel and lubricating oil tanks and from haust gas manifolds and silencers or items of equip- cargo space bulkheads in order to prevent undue heat- ment which have to be insulated in accordance with ing of the tank contents or the cargo. Alternatively, the 3.1 and may also not be placed above electrical tank sides or bulkheads are to be insulated. switchgear. I - Part 1 Section 8 D Fire Protection and Fire Fighting Chapter 8 GL 2007 Page 8–3

5.4 Where tanks with flammable liquids are re- D. Water Fire Extinguishing System (Fire plenished automatically or remote controlled, means and Deckwash System) are to be provided to prevent overflow spillage. Every fishing vessel shall be provided with a water 5.5 In periodically unattended machinery spaces fire extinguishing system according to the require- fuel injection high pressure lines of diesel engines are ments defined in the following. to be shielded or installed in such a way, that, should leakage occur, the leaking fuel can be safely collected 1. Fire pumps in a suitable drain tank with high level alarm.

1.1 Fishing vessels with L ≥ 24 m shall be fitted 6. Bulkhead penetrations with at least two (2) fire pumps one of which is to be independent from the main engine. Pipe penetrations through class A or B divisions shall be able to withstand the temperature for which the divisions were designed. 1.2 Fishing vessels with L < 24 m shall be fitted with at least one fire pump which may be coupled to Where steam, exhaust gas and thermal oil lines pass the main engine provided that the propeller shaft can through bulkheads, the bulkhead shall be suitably be readily declutched or that a variable pitch propeller insulated to protect it against excessive heating. is fitted.

7. Means for emergency closing of openings, 1.3 The fire pumps shall be capable of supplying stopping of machinery and fuel shutoffs a total quantity of water for fire fighting of not less than two-thirds of the total capacity of the required bilge pumps. 7.1 Any opening in machinery spaces and boiler rooms shall be capable of being effectively sealed from outside the space. 1.4 The minimum capacity of any fire pump shall not be less than 25 m3/h for fishing vessels with L ≥ 3 7.2 Means are to be provided for stopping venti- 45 m and 15 m /h for fishing vessels with L < 45 m. lating fans serving machinery spaces or boiler rooms from outside such spaces. 1.5 With the fire pumps supplying water for the number of jets specified in 4.1, through nozzles speci- 2 7.3 Any forced - or induced - draft fans, oil fuel fied in 4.9, a pressure of at least 0,25 N/mm is to be unit pump, oil fuel transfer pump shall be capable of maintained at any hydrant. being stopped from outside the space concerned. 1.6 Where two pumps are required one of them 7.4 Except for small independent tanks every oil may be reduced to 40 % of the capacity specified in fuel suction pipe from storage, settling or service tanks 1.3, but not less than the capacity specified in 1.4, situated above the double bottom is to be fitted with a provided that the prescribed total capacity is main- cock or valve capable of being closed from outside the tained by increasing the capacity of the second pump space concerned. This regulation applies also to lubri- accordingly. cating oil tanks. 1.7 Bilge, ballast or other seawater pumps of 7.5 The controls required by 7.2, 7.3 and 7.4 sufficient capacity and head may be used as fire should be arranged in as few locations as possible, be pumps provided that at least one pump is immediately readily accessible, not likely to be cut-off in the event available for fire fighting purposes. of a fire in the space concerned and bear clear de- nominations. 1.8 Where more than one pump is connected to the fire main a screw-down non-return valve or a combination of shut-off and check valve is to be fitted at the outlet of each pump. C. Fire Detection 1.9 Provisions are to be made as to safeguard the supply of water for fire fighting under all conditions of 1. Periodically unattended machinery spaces are list, trim, roll and pitch likely to be encountered by the to be equipped with an approved fire detection and vessel. alarm system. 1.10 For vessels with unattended machinery 2. The design and arrangement are to comply spaces according to Section 12 remote start for at least with Section 11h and Section 12, D. one fire pump is to be provided. Chapter 8 Section 8 E Fire Protection and Fire Fighting I - Part 1 Page 8–4 GL 2007

2. Emergency fire pump 4.3 One hydrant is to be arranged near the entrance to any space containing internal combustion 2.1 For vessels of 1000 GT and above an emer- machinery or oil fired boilers. gency fire pump shall be provided, if a fire in one compartment can put all the main fire pumps out of 4.4 The hydrants are to be so located as to be service. The emergency fire pump shall be capable of readily accessible at any time. delivering at least 40 % of the capacity specified in 1.3, but in any case not less than the capacity specified 4.5 Fire hoses shall be of appropriate materials. in 1.4. Their length should be chosen in view of easy handling considering the vessel's dimensions, however, 2.2 Emergency fire pumps shall meet the re- the length shall not exceed 20 m on deck and 15 m in quirements specified in 1.5, 1.8 and 1.9 and including machinery spaces. their source of power and fuel supply be independent from the space containing the main fire pumps and be 4.6 The number of fire hoses provided shall be capable of supplying water to the fire main for at least 18 hours. – at least two in vessels with L < 24 m

2.3 A shut-off valve shall be provided such as to – at least three in vessels with L ≥ 24 m be capable of isolating the fire main within the space where the main fire pumps are installed from the rest – in vessels of 1000 GT and above one hose for of the fire main. The shut-off valve shall be arranged each 30 m of vessel's length but at least five. in a suitable location outside of such space. Hoses for machinery spaces and boiler rooms shall be provided in addition to this figure. 2.4 Any diesel driven power source for the pump shall be capable of being readily started in cold condi- 4.7 Fire hoses with nozzles attached are to be tion down to a temperature of 0 °C. If lower tempera- located near the fire hydrants, the position to be tures are likely to be encountered proper means are to marked conspicuously. be provided to the satisfaction of GL so that ready starting will be safeguarded. 4.8 Only appropriate quick-acting couplings shall be used for the connection of hoses to hydrants and 3. Fire piping nozzles.

3.1 The piping system for the distribution of 4.9 Nozzle size shall be 12 mm in vessels with water for fire fighting shall be designed for the total L ≥ 24 m and 10 mm in vessels with L < 24 m. capacity of the fire pumps required. 4.10 Nozzles for use in machinery spaces and 3.2 Materials readily rendered ineffective by heat boiler rooms shall be of dual purpose type (full shall not be used unless adequately protected. Ordi- jet/spray with shut-off). However, it is recommended nary cast iron shall not be used. to use this type of nozzle throughout the vessel.

3.3 The pipes and their accessories are to be adequately protected against corrosion, shock and freezing. Drain cocks are to be provided in suitable E. Portable Fire Extinguishers in Accom- locations in order to drain all parts of the system modations and Service Spaces which may be subjected to freezing. 1. Portable fire extinguishers shall be provided 4. Fire hydrants, hoses and nozzles in accommodation and service spaces.

4.1 The number and position of hydrants shall be The number of extinguishers provided shall not be less such that any part of the vessel normally accessible than: while at sea can be reached with: – five in vessels with L ≥ 45 m – one jet of water from a single length of hose in a vessel with L < 24 m – three in vessels with L < 45 m – two jets of water not emanating from the same hydrant in a vessel with L ≥ 24 m, one of the 2. Portable extinguishers should be of a type jets shall be from a single length of hose. suitable for all types of fires to be expected in accommodation and service spaces. 4.2 Fire hydrants shall be fitted with a shut-off such that any fire hose can be disconnected while the 3. Fire extinguishers shall meet the require- system is pressurized. ments specified in G. I - Part 1 Section 8 G Fire Protection and Fire Fighting Chapter 8 GL 2007 Page 8–5

F. Fire Extinguishing Arrangements in Ma- which contain internal combustion machinery or oil chinery Spaces fired boilers.

1. Oil-fired boilers or internal combustion 5. Types of fixed fire extinguishing systems engines The fixed fire extinguishing system required by 4. Spaces containing oil-fired boilers or internal combus- shall be any one of the following: tion machinery shall be provided with: (a) one wheeled fire extinguisher of 45 ltrs. foam or 5.1 A gas system complying with GL Rules ac- 50 kg dry powder cording to Chapter 2 – Machinery Installations, Sec- tion 12, G. or I. (b) one portable fire extinguisher for each 750 kW or part thereof of the total power output of inter- 5.2 A high expansion foam system complying nal combustion machinery. The total number is with GL Rules according to Chapter 2 – Machinery not to be less than 2 and need not exceed 6. Installations, Section 12, K.3. (c) a receptacle containing sand or other appropriate dry material and a scoop. One additional port- 5.3 A pressure water-spraying system complying able extinguisher may be substituted as an alter- with GL Rules according to Chapter 2 – Machinery native. Installations, Section 12, L.2.1. In vessels with L < 24 m the extinguisher specified in (a) may be replaced by one additional portable extin- 6. Fixed water based local application fire guisher. fighting system (FWBLAFFS) In fishing vessels of 2000 GT and above, fire hazard 2. Internal combustion engines only areas in category A machinery spaces above 500 m3 in gross volume shall be protected with a fixed local In spaces containing only internal combustion machin- application fire fighting system. The design of the ery, other than for propulsion, of a total power output system and the protected areas shall be in compliance of less than 110 kW, one portable extinguisher will be with the GL Rules according to Chapter 2 – Machin- accepted in lieu of the equipment specified in 1. ery Installations, Section 12, L.3.

3. Internal combustion engines and domestic boilers In spaces containing only domestic boilers with a G. Fire Extinguishers capacity of less than 175 kW one portable extinguisher will be accepted in lieu of the extinguisher 1. Type of fire specified in 1. (a). This may also be applied where internal combustion machinery is installed in the same Portable and wheeled fire extinguishers provided in space if 175 kW are not exceeded when adding up the accordance with these Rules shall be of a type suitable output of internal combustion machinery and the ca- for the fire to be extinguished. pacity of the boiler. 2. Approval 4. Installation of fixed fire extinguishing systems All extinguishers shall normally be approved by the competent National Authority. Extinguishers approved A fixed fire extinguishing system as specified in 5. by other authorities may be accepted if they are con- shall be provided for: sistent with applicable National Regulations.

4.1 All vessels in machinery spaces containing 3. Minimum charge internal combustion machinery of total power output of 375 kW or above. The charge in portable dry powder and gas extinguishers should be at least 5 kg and the content of 4.2 Vessels of 500 GT and above in machinery foam and water extinguishers should be not less than spaces containing internal combustion machinery used 9 liters. for the main propulsion and for spaces containing oil- fired boilers or oil-fuel units. For fishing vessels with 4. Toxic gases Class Notation AUT the GL Rules according to Chapter 2 – Machinery Installations, Section 12 apply. Fire extinguishers containing an extinguishing medium which either by itself or under expected condi- 4.3 Vessels constructed mainly of wood or GRP tions gives off toxic gases in such quantities as to in machinery spaces decked with such material and endanger persons shall not be permitted. Chapter 8 Section 8 H Fire Protection and Fire Fighting I - Part 1 Page 8–6 GL 2007

5. CO2 extinguishers H. Fire Extinguishing Arrangements in Spaces other than Machinery Spaces CO2 extinguishers may not be located in accommodation spaces and water-filled extinguishers may not be provided for the extinguishers required in machinery 1. Galley range exhaust duct spaces or boiler rooms. Where the galley range exhaust duct passes through accommodation spaces or spaces containing combustible materials, a fixed fire extinguishing system shall 6. Location be provided complying with the GL Rules according The extinguishers are to be installed in readily acces- to Chapter 2 – Machinery Installations, Section 12, sible positions. If stowed in a cabinet, conspicuous M.2. marking is to be provided. 2. Deep-fat cooking equipment One of the extinguishers intended for use in any space is to be located near the entrance to that space. Deep-fat cooking equipment is to be fitted with arrangements as specified in the GL Rules according to Chapter 2 – Machinery Installations, Section 12, M.3. 7. Instruction plates Instruction plates shall be fitted either near the extin- 3. Paint stores and flammable liquid lockers guishers or on the extinguishers themselves, stating Paint stores and flammable liquid lockers are to be that a discharged extinguisher may not be put back protected with a fixed fire extinguishing system com- into place. plying with the GL Rules according to Chapter 2 – Machinery Installations, Section 12, M.1. 8. Spare charges 4. Cargo spaces 8.1 For fire extinguishers, capable of being re- Cargo spaces on fishing vessels of 2000 GT and above charged on board, spare charges are to be provided: are to be provided with a fixed CO2 system complying with GL Rules according to Chapter 2 – Machinery – 100 % for the first 10 extinguishers of each type Installations, Section 12, G. – 50 % for the remaining extinguishers of each type, but not more than 60 (fractions to be 5. Scavenge trunks of two-stroke internal rounded off) combustion engines Scavenge trunks of two-stroke internal combustion 8.2 For fire extinguishers which cannot be re- engines, if applied, are to be provided with a fixed charged on board, additional portable fire extinguish- CO2 system or another extinguishing system approved ers of same type and capacity shall be provided. The by the engine manufacturer which is independent of number is to be determined as per 8.1. the engine room fire extinguishing system. I - Part 1 Section 9a D General Rules for Machinery Installations Chapter 8 GL 2007 Page 9a–1

Section 9a

General Rules for Machinery Installations

A. General is defined in the different Sections where the requirements for the different elements of the fishing vessel 1. The Rules for Machinery Installations apply are given. to the propulsion installations of ships classed by Germanischer Lloyd (GL), including all the auxiliary machinery and equipment necessary for the operation C. Ambient Conditions and safety of the fishing vessel. They also apply to machinery which GL is to confirm 1. Operating conditions, general as being equivalent to classed machinery. 1.1 The general ambient conditions for the opera- 2. Apart from the machinery and equipment tions of the machinery installations are defined in detailed in the following, the Rules are also individu- Section 1, C. ally applicable to other machinery and equipment where this is necessary to the safety of the vessel or its 1.2 Account is to be taken of the effects on the cargo. machinery installation of distortions of the vessel's hull. 3. Designs which deviate from the Rules for the Construction of Machinery Installations may be ap- 2. Vibrations proved provided that such designs have been exam- 2.1 Machinery, equipment and hull structures are ined by GL for suitability and have been recognized as normally subjected to vibration stresses. Design, con- equivalent. struction and installation must in every case take account of these stresses. 4. Machinery installations which have been developed on novel principles and/or which have not The faultless long-term service of individual compo- yet been sufficiently tested in shipboard service re- nents shall not be endangered by vibration stresses. quire GL's special approval. 2.2 Assessment, proof and measurement of vibra- Such machinery may be marked by the Class Notation tions shall follow the GL Rules according to Chapter 2 EXP affixed to the Character of Classification and be – Machinery Installations. subjected to intensified survey, if sufficiently reliable proof cannot be provided of its suitability and equivalence in accordance with 3. D. Design and Construction of the Machinery 5. In the instances mentioned in 3. and 4. GL is Installations entitled to require additional documentation to be submitted and special trials to be carried out. 1. Dimensions of components 1.1 All parts must be capable of withstanding the 6. In addition to the Rules, GL reserve the right stresses and loads peculiar to shipboard service, e.g. to impose further requirements in respect of all types those due to movements of the vessel, vibrations, of machinery where this is unavoidable due to new intensified corrosive attack, temperature changes and findings or operational experience, or GL may permit wave impact, and has to be dimensioned in accordance deviations from the Rules where these are specially with the requirements set out in the following Sec- warranted. tions.

7. National rules or regulations outside GL's In the absence of Rules governing the dimensions of Rules remain unaffected. parts, the recognized rules of engineering practice are to be applied.

1.2 Where connections exist between systems or B. Documents for Approval plant items which are designed for different forces, pressures and temperatures (stresses), safety devices The general conditions for these documents are de- are to be fitted which prevent the over-stressing of the fined in Section 1, E. The scope of the documentation system or plant item designed for the lower design Chapter 8 Section 9a D General Rules for Machinery Installations I - Part 1 Page 9a–2 GL 2007

parameters. To preclude damage, such systems are to The "dead ship" condition means that the complete be fitted with devices affording protection against machinery installation including the main electrical excessive pressures and temperatures and/or against power supply is out of operation and auxiliary sources overflow. of energy such as starting air, battery-supplied starting current, etc. are not available for restoring the vessel's 2. Materials main electrical system, restarting auxiliary operation and bringing the propulsion installation back into All components must comply with the GL Rules II – operation. Materials and Welding. To overcome the "dead ship" condition use may be made of an emergency generator set provided that it is 3. Welding ensured that the electrical power for emergency ser- The fabrication of welded components, the approval vices is available at all times. It is assumed that means of companies and the testing of welders are subject to are available to start the emergency generator at all the GL Rules II – Materials and Welding, Part 3 – times. Welding, Chapters 1 - 3. 6.2 In case of "dead-ship" condition it must be ensured that it will be possible for the propulsion sys- 4. Tests tem and all necessary auxiliary machinery to be re- started within a period of 30 minutes, see Section 11c, 4.1 Machinery and its component parts are sub- C. ject to constructional and material tests, pressure and leakage tests, and trials. All the tests prescribed in the following Sections are to be conducted under the su- 7. Control and regulating pervision of GL. 7.1 Machinery must be so equipped that it can be In the case of parts produced in series, other methods controlled in accordance with operating requirements of testing may be agreed with GL instead of the tests in such a way that the service conditions prescribed by prescribed, provided that the former are recognized as the manufacturer can be met. equivalent by GL. 7.1.1 For the control equipment of main engine and 4.2 GL reserve the right, where necessary, to systems essential for operation see Section 11h. increase the scope of the tests and also to subject to testing those parts which are not expressly required to be tested according to the Rules. 7.2 In the event of failure or fluctuations of the supply of electrical, pneumatic or hydraulic power to regulating and control systems, or in case of a break in 4.3 Components subject to mandatory testing a regulating or control circuit, steps have to be taken must be replaced with tested parts. to ensure that: 4.4 After installation on board of the main and – the appliances remain at their present opera- auxiliary machinery, the operational functioning of the tional setting or, if necessary, are changed to a machinery including the associated ancillary equip- setting which will have the minimum adverse ment is to be verified. All safety equipment is to be effect on operation (fail-safe conditions) tested, unless adequate testing has already been performed at the manufacturer's works in the presence of – the power output or engine speed of the machin- GL's Representative. ery being controlled or governed is not increased and In addition, the entire machinery installation is to be tested during sea trials, as far as possible under the – no unintentional start-up sequences are initiated. intended service conditions. 7.3 Manual operation 5. Corrosion protection Every functionally important, automatically or remote Parts which are exposed to corrosion are to be safe- controlled system shall also be capable of manual guarded by being manufactured of corrosion-resistant operation. materials or provided with effective corrosion protection. 8. Propulsion plant

6. Availability of machinery 8.1 Manoeuvring equipment Every engine control platform is to be equipped in 6.1 Vessel's machinery is to be so arranged and such a way that equipped that it can be brought into operation from the "dead ship" condition with the means available on – the propulsion plant can be adjusted to any set- board. ting

I - Part 1 Section 9a E General Rules for Machinery Installations Chapter 8 GL 2007 Page 9a–3

– the direction of propulsion can be reversed and 12.2 The flash point 1 of liquid fuels for the operation of boilers and diesel engines may not be lower – the propulsion unit or the propeller shaft can be than 60 °C. stopped. For emergency generating sets, however, use may be 8.2 Remote controls made of fuels with a flash point of ≥ 43 °C. The fuel shall enable a starting of the emergency generating set The remote control of the propulsion plant from the at ambient temperatures of –15 °C and above. bridge is subject to the Rules in Section 12. 12.3 In exceptional cases, for vessels intended for 8.3 Multiple-shaft and multi-engine systems operation in limited geographical areas or where special precautions subject to GL's approval are taken, Steps are to be taken to ensure that in the event of the fuels with flash points between 43 °C and 60 °C may failure of a propulsion engine, operation can be main- also be used. This is conditional upon the requirement tained with the other engines, where appropriate by a that the temperatures of the spaces in which fuels are simple change-over system. stored or used shall invariably be 10 °C below the flash point. For multiple-shaft systems, each shaft is to be provided with a locking device by means of which dragging of the shaft can be prevented. 13. Refrigerating installations The requirements for refrigeration installations are 9. Turning appliances defined in Section 10.

9.1 Machinery is to be equipped with the necessary turning appliances. E. Engine and Boiler Room Equipment 9.2 The turning appliances are to be of the self- locking type. Electric motors are to be fitted with 1. Operating and monitoring equipment suitable retaining brakes. 1.1 Instruments, warning and indicating systems and operating appliances are to be clearly displayed 9.3 An automatic interlocking device is to be and conveniently sited. Absence of dazzle, particularly provided to ensure that the propulsion and auxiliary on the bridge, is to be ensured. prime movers cannot start up while the turning gear is engaged. In case of manual turning installations warn- Operating and monitoring equipment is to be grouped ing devices may be provided alternatively. in such a way as to facilitate easy supervision and control of all important parts of the installation. 10. Operating and maintenance instructions The following requirements are to be observed when installing systems and equipment: Manufacturers of machinery, boilers and auxiliary equipment have to supply a sufficient number of oper- – protection against humidity and the effects of ating and maintenance notices and manuals together dirt with the equipment. – avoidance of excessive temperature variations In addition, an easily legible board is to be mounted – adequate ventilation on boiler operating platforms giving the most important operating instructions for boilers and oil-firing In consoles and cabinets containing electrical or hy- equipment. draulic equipment or lines carrying steam or water the electrical gear is to be protected from damage due to leakage. Redundant ventilation systems are to be pro- 11. Markings, identification of machinery vided for air-conditioned machinery and control parts rooms.

In order to avoid unnecessary operating and switching 1.2 Pressure gauges errors, all parts of the machinery whose function is not immediately apparent are to be adequately marked and The scales of pressure gauges are to be dimensioned labelled. up to the specified test pressure. The maximum permitted operating pressures are to be marked on the pressure gauges for boilers, pressure vessels and in 12. Fuels and consumables for operation systems protected by safety valves. Pressure gauges

12.1 All fuels and consumables used for opera- –––––––––––––– tions of the machinery installations have to be in ac- 1 Based, up to 60 °C, on determination of the flash point in a cordance with the requirements of the manufacturers. closed crucible (cup test).

Chapter 8 Section 9a F General Rules for Machinery Installations I - Part 1 Page 9a–4 GL 2007

shall be installed in such a way that they can be iso- 6. Ventilation lated. Lines leading to pressure gauges shall be installed in such a way that the readings cannot be af- The machinery ventilation is to be designed under fected by liquid heads and hydraulic hammer. consideration of ambient conditions as defined in C.1.

7. Noise abatement 2. Accessibility of machinery and boilers In compliance with the relevant national regulations, care is to be taken to ensure that operation of the ves- 2.1 Machinery- and boiler installations and appa- sel is not unacceptably impaired by engine noise. ratus have to be accessible for operation and maintenance.

2.2 In the layout of machinery spaces (design of F. Safety Equipment and Protective Meas- foundation structures, laying of pipelines and cable ures conduits, etc.) and the design of machinery and equipment (mountings for filters, coolers, etc.), 2.1 is to be Machinery is to be installed and safeguarded in such a complied with. way that the risk of accidents is largely ruled out. Besides national regulations particular attention is to be paid to the following: 3. Engine control rooms

Engine control rooms are to be provided with at least 1. Moving parts, flywheels, chain and belt two exits, one of which can also be used as an escape drives, linkages and other components which could route. constitute an accident hazard for the operating personnel are to be fitted with guards to prevent contact. The same applies to hot machine parts, pipes and walls for 4. Lighting which no thermal insulation is provided, e.g. pressure lines to air compressors. All operating spaces shall be adequately lit to ensure that control and monitoring instruments can be easily 2. When using hand cranks for starting internal read. In this connection see Section 11i. combustion engines, steps are to be taken to ensure that the crank disengages automatically when the 5. Bilge wells/bilges engines start. Dead-Man's circuits are to be provided for rotating 5.1 Bilge wells and bilges shall be readily acces- equipment. sible, easy to clean and either easily visible or adequately lit. 3. Blowdown and drainage facilities are to be designed in such a way that the discharged medium 5.2 Bilges beneath electrical machines shall be so can be safely drained off. designed as to prevent bilge water from penetrating into the machinery at all angles of inclination and 4. In operating spaces, anti-skid floor plates and movements of the vessel in service. floor-coverings have to be used.

5.3 For the following spaces bilge level monitor- 5. Service gangways, operating platforms, ing is to be provided and limit values being exceeded stairways and other areas open to access during opera- are to be indicated at a permanently manned alarm tion are to be safeguarded by guard rails. The outside point: edges of platforms and floor areas are to be fitted with coamings unless some other means is adopted to pre- – Unmanned machinery rooms of category "A" vent persons and objects from sliding off. and other machinery rooms (Class Notation AUT) are to be equipped with at least 2 indicators for bilge level monitoring. 6. Devices for blowing through water level gauges shall be capable of safe operation and observa- (For division of machinery rooms into category tion. "A" and other "machinery rooms", see Sec- tion 7.) 7. Safety valves and shutoffs shall be capable of – Other unmanned machinery rooms, such as bow safe operation. Fixed steps, stairs or platforms are to thruster and steering gear compartments ar- be fitted where necessary. ranged below the load waterline are irrespective of Class Notation AUT to be equipped at least 8. Safety valves are to be installed to prevent the with one indicator for bilge level monitoring. occurrence of excessive operating pressures.

I - Part 1 Section 9a H General Rules for Machinery Installations Chapter 8 GL 2007 Page 9a–5

9. Steam and feedwater lines, exhaust gas ducts, H. Essential Equipment boilers and other equipment and pipelines carrying steam or hot water are to be effectively insulated. 1. Principal requirements Insulating materials have to be incombustible. Points at which combustible liquids or moisture can penetrate Essential (operationally important) equipment is re- into the insulation are to be suitably protected, e.g. by quired to ensure continuity of the following functions: means of shielding. – propulsion, manoeuvrability, navigation and safety of the vessel – safety of the crew G. Communication and Signalling Equipment – functioning of all equipment, machinery and appliances needed to an unrestricted extent for 1. Voice communication the primary duty of the fishing vessel Means of voice communication are to be provided between the vessel's manoeuvring station, the engine These requirements apply for the mechanical part of room and the steering gear compartment, and these the equipment and complete equipment units supplied means shall allow fully satisfactory intercommunica- by subcontractors. tion independent of the shipboard power supply under Essential equipment is subdivided into: all operating conditions, see also Section 11h, C. – primary essential equipment according to 2. 2. Engineer alarm – secondary essential equipment according to 3. From the engine room or the engine control room it shall be possible to activate an alarm in the engineers' 2. Primary essential equipment living quarters, see also Section 11h, D. Primary essential equipment is that required to be operative at all times to maintain the manoeuvrability 3. Engine telegraph of the vessel as regards propulsion and steering and Machinery operated from the engine room are to be that required directly for the primary duty of the fish- equipped with a telegraph. ing vessel. In the case of multiple-shaft installations, a telegraph It comprises e.g.: shall be provided for each unit. – steering gear Local control stations are to be equipped with an – controllable pitch propeller installation emergency telegraph. – fuel oil supply pumps, fuel booster pumps, fuel 4. Shaft revolution indicator valve cooling pumps, lubricating oil pumps, cooling water pumps for main and auxiliary en- The speed and direction of rotation of the propeller gines and turbines necessary for propulsion shafts are to be indicated on the bridge and in the engine room. In the case of small propulsion units, the – forced draught fans, feed water pumps, water indicator may be dispensed with. circulating pumps, vacuum pumps and condensate pumps for auxiliary boilers of vessels where Barred speed ranges are to be marked on the shaft steam is used for equipment supplying primary revolution indicators, see Section 9c, F. essential equipment – burner equipment for auxiliary steam boilers of 5. Design of communication and signalling vessels where steam is used for equipment sup- equipment plying primary essential equipment Reversing, command transmission and operating con- – azimuth thrusters which are the sole means for trols, etc. are to be grouped together at a convenient propulsion/steering including lubricating oil point on the control platform. pumps, cooling water pumps The current status, "Ahead" or "Astern", of the revers- – main propulsion plant with internal combustion ing control is to be clearly indicated on the propulsion engines and gas turbines, gears, main shafting, plant control platform. propellers Signalling devices shall be clearly perceptible from all – electric generator units and associated power parts of the engine room when the machinery is in full sources supplying primary essential equipment operation. – hydraulic pumps for primary essential equip- For details of the design of electrically operated com- ment mand transmission, signalling and alarm systems, see Section 11h and Section 12. – drives for fishing gear

Chapter 8 Section 9a H General Rules for Machinery Installations I - Part 1 Page 9a–6 GL 2007

3. Secondary essential equipment – fire pumps and other fire fighting installations Secondary essential equipment is that required for the – ventilating fans for engine and boiler rooms safety of vessel and crew, and is such equipment which can briefly be taken out of service without the – equipment considered necessary to maintain propulsion, steering and equipment needed for the endangered spaces in a safe condition primary duty of the fishing vessel, being unacceptably impaired. – equipment for watertight closing appliances It comprises e.g.: – auxiliary and main engine starting installations – windlasses – generator units supplying secondary essential equipment, if this equipment is not supplied by – azimuth thrusters, if they are auxiliary equip- generators as described in 2. ment – hydraulic pumps for secondary essential equip- – fuel oil transfer pumps and fuel oil treatment ment equipment – compressors, pumps and fans for the refrigerat- – lubrication oil transfer pumps and lubrication oil ing installations treatment equipment – starting air and control air compressors 4. Non-essential equipment – turning device for main engines Non-essential equipment is that which temporary – bilge, ballast and heel-compensating installa- disconnection does not impair the principal require- tions ments defined in 1.

I - Part 1 Section 9b A Internal Combustion Engines and Air Compressors Chapter 8 GL 2007 Page 9b–1

Section 9b

Internal Combustion Engines and Air Compressors

A. General 3.6 Subject to the approval of GL, diesel engines for special applications may be designed for a con- 1. Scope tinuous power (fuel stop power) which cannot be The Rules contained in this Section are valid for inter- exceeded. nal combustion engines as main and auxiliary drives as well as air compressors. Internal combustion en- 3.7 For main engines, a power diagram (Fig. gines in the sense of these Rules are non-reversible, 9b.1) is to be prepared showing the power ranges four-stroke diesel engines with trunk piston. within which the engine is able to operate continuously and for short periods under service conditions. For the purpose of these requirements, internal combustion engines are diesel engines. 4. Fuels For other types of internal combustion engines the GL Rules according to Chapter 2 – Machinery Installa- 4.1 The use of liquid fuels is subject to the Rules tions, Section 2 are to be applied. contained in Section 9a, D.12.

2. Ambient conditions 4.2 For fuel treatment and supply, see Section 9d. For all engines, which are used on fishing vessels, the definition of the performance has to be based on the 5. Accessibility of engines ambient conditions according to Section 1, C. Engines are to be so arranged in the engine room that 3. Rated power all the assembly holes and inspection ports provided by the engine manufacturer for inspections and main- 3.1 Diesel engines are to be designed such that tenance are accessible. A change of components, as their rated power when running at rated speed accord- far as practicable on board, shall be possible. Re- ing to the definitions of the engine manufacturer at quirements related to space and construction have to ambient conditions as defined in Section 1, C. can be be considered for the installation of the engines. delivered as continuous power. Diesel engines are to be capable of continuous operation within power range 1 in Fig. 9b.1 and of short period operation in Overload power power range 2. The extent of the power ranges is to be stated by the engine manufacturer. Nominal propeller curve 3.2 Continuous power is to be understood as the standard service power which an engine is capable of delivering continuously, provided that the mainte- Rated nance prescribed by the engine manufacturer is carried (continuous) out, between the maintenance intervals stated by the power engine manufacturer.

3.3 The rated power is to be specified in a way [%] that an overload power corresponding to 110 % of the rated power can be demonstrated at corresponding Intermittent 2 Power 1 speed for an uninterrupted period of 1 hour. Devia- operation tions from the overload power value require the Continuous agreement of GL. operation

3.4 After running on the test bed, the fuel delivery system of main engines is normally to be so adjusted that overload power cannot be given in service. The limitation of the fuel delivery system has to be secured permanently. Engine speed [%] 3.5 Subject to the prescribed conditions, diesel engines driving electric generators are to be capable of overload operation even after installation on board. Fig. 9b.1 Example of a power diagram Chapter 8 Section 9b B Internal Combustion Engines and Air Compressors I - Part 1 Page 9b–2 GL 2007

6. Electronic components and systems ever applicable, be submitted by the engine manufacturer to GL for approval (A) or information (R). 6.1 For electronic components and systems Where considered necessary, GL may request further which are necessary for the control of internal com- documents to be submitted. This also applies to the bustion engines the following items have to be ob- documentation of design changes according to 4. served: 2. Engines manufactured under licence 6.2 Electronic components and systems have to be type approved according to the GL Rules VI – For each engine type manufactured under licence, the Additional Rules and Guidelines, Part 7 – Guidelines licensee shall submit to GL, as a minimum require- for the Performance of Type Approvals, Chapter 2 – ment, the following documents: Test Requirements for Electrical / Electronic Equip- – comparison of all the drawings and documents ment and Systems. as per Table 9b.1 - where applicable – indicating the relevant drawings used by the licensee and 6.3 For computer systems the Rules according to the licensor Section 11h, A.2. have to be observed. – all drawings of modified components, if available, as per Table 9b.1 together with the licen- 6.4 For main propulsion engines one failure of an sor's declaration of consent to the modifications electronic control system shall not result in any sudden loss or change of the propulsion power. In indi- – a complete set of drawings at the disposal of the vidual cases, GL may approve other failure conditions, local inspection office of Germanischer Lloyd as whereby it is ensured that no increase in vessel's speed a basis for the tests and inspections occurs. 3. Definition of a diesel engine type 6.5 The non-critical behaviour in case of a failure of an electronic control system has to be proven by a The type specification of an internal combustion en- structured analysis (e.g. FMEA), which has to be pro- gine is defined by the following data: vided by the system's manufacturer. This shall include the effects on persons, environment and technical – manufacturer's type designation condition. – cylinder bore

6.6 Where the electronic control system incorpo- – stroke rates a speed control, F.1.3, Section 11h, C. and Sec- – method of injection tion 12 have to be observed. – fuels which can be used 7. Local control station – working cycle (4-stroke) – method of gas exchange (naturally aspirated or 7.1 For the local control station, I. has to be ob- supercharged) served. – rated power per cylinder at rated speed and 7.2 The indicators named in I. shall be realised in maximum continuous brake mean effective such a way that one failure can only affect a single pressure indicator. Where these indicators are an integral part – method of pressure charging (pulsating pressure of an electronic control system, means shall be taken system or constant-pressure system) to maintain these indications in case of failure of such a system. – charge air cooling system – cylinder arrangement (in-line, vee) 7.3 Where these indicators are realised electrically, the power supply of the instruments and of the electronic system has to be realised in such way to 4. Design modifications ensure the behaviour stated in 7.2. Following initial approval of an engine type by GL, only those documents listed in Table 9b.1 require to be resubmitted for examination which embody important design modifications. B. Documents for Approval 5. Additional engine components 1. General The approval of exhaust gas turbochargers, heat ex- The general conditions for these documents are de- changers, engine-driven pumps, etc. the corresponding fined in Section 1, E. For each engine type the draw- applications are to be submitted to GL by the respec- ings and documents listed in Table 9b.1 shall, wher- tive manufacturer.

I - Part 1 Section 9b B Internal Combustion Engines and Air Compressors Chapter 8 GL 2007 Page 9b–3

Table 9b.1 Documents for approval

Serial A / R Description Quantity Remarks no. Details required on GL Forms F 144 and F 144/1 when applying for 1 R 3 approval of an internal combustion engine 2 R Engine transverse cross-section 3 3 R Engine longitudinal section 3 4 R Cast bedplate and crankcase 1 5 R Thrust bearing assembly 3 1 6 R Cast thrust bearing bedplate 1 7 R Tie rod 1 8 R Cylinder cover/head, assembly 1 9 R Cylinder liner 1 Crankshaft, details for each number of cylinders, with data sheets for 10 A 3 calculation of crankshafts 11 A Crankshaft, assembly for each number of cylinders 3 12 A Shaft coupling bolts 3 13 R Counterweights(if not integral with crankshaft), including fastening 3 14 R Connecting rod, details 3 15 R Connecting rod, assembly 3 16 R Piston assembly 1 17 R Camshaft drive, assembly 1 Material specification of main parts with information on non-destructive 18 A 3 6 tests and pressure tests 19 R Arrangement of foundation (for main engines only) 3 20 A Schematic layout or other equivalent documents of starting air system 3 4 21 A Schematic layout or other equivalent documents of fuel oil system 3 4 22 A Schematic layout or other documents of lubricating oil system 3 4 23 A Schematic layout or other documents of cooling water system 3 4 24 A Schematic diagram of engine control and safety system 3 4 25 A Schematic diagram of electronic components and systems 1 26 R Shielding and insulation of exhaust pipes, assembly 1 27 A Shielding of high pressure fuel pipes, assembly 3 2 28 A Arrangement of crankcase explosion relief valves 3 3 29 R Operation and service manuals 1 5 Schematic layout or other equivalent documents of hydraulic system (for 30 A 3 valve lift) on the engine 31 A Type test program and type test report 1 32 A High pressure parts for fuel oil injection system 3 7 A for approval R for reference 1 if integral with engine and not integrated in the bedplate 2 all engines 3 only for engines with a bore > 200 mm or a crankcase volume ≥ 0,6 m3 4 and the system so far as supplied by the engine manufacturer. If engines incorporate electronic control systems a failure mode and effects analysis (FMEA) is to be submitted to demonstrate that failure of an electronic control system will not result in the loss of essential services for the operation of the engine and that operation of the engine will not be lost or degraded beyond an acceptable performance criteria of the engine 5 operation and service manuals are to contain maintenance requirements (servicing and repair) including details of any special tools and gauges that are to be used with their fittings/settings together with any test requirements on completion of maintenance 6 for comparison with GL requirements for material, NDT and pressure testing as applicable 7 the documentation has to contain specification of pressures, pipe dimensions and materials

Chapter 8 Section 9b D Internal Combustion Engines and Air Compressors I - Part 1 Page 9b–4 GL 2007

C. Crankshaft Calculation 1.2 Materials with properties deviating from those specified may be used only with GL's special approval. GL requires proof of the suitability of such 1. Design methods materials.

1.1 Crankshafts are to be designed to withstand the stresses occurring when the engine runs at rated 2. Testing of materials power and the documentation has to be submitted for approval. Calculations are to be based on the GL 2.1 In the case of individually produced engines, Rules VI – Additional Rules and Guidelines, Part 4 – the following parts are to be subjected to material tests Diesel Engines, Chapter 2 – Guidelines for the Calcu- in the presence of the GL representative. lation of Crankshafts for I.C. Engines. Other methods 1. Crankshaft of calculation may be used provided that they do not result in crankshaft dimensions smaller than those 2. Crankshaft coupling flange (non-integral) for obtained by applying the aforementioned regulations. main power transmission 3. Crankshaft coupling bolts 1.2 Outside the end bearings, crankshafts designed according to the requirements specified in 1.1 4. Pistons or piston crowns made of steel, cast steel may be adapted to the diameter of the adjoining shaft or nodular cast iron d by a generous fillet (r ≥ 0,06 ⋅ d) or a taper. 5. Connecting rods including the associated bearing covers 1.3 Design methods for application to crankshafts of special construction and to the crankshafts of en- 6. Cylinder liners made of steel or cast steel gines of special type are to be agreed with GL. 7. Cylinder covers made of steel or cast steel 8. Tie rods 2. Screw joints 9. Bolts and studs for: 2.1 Split crank shafts – cylinder covers Only fitted bolts may be used for assembling split – main bearings crankshafts. – connecting rod bearings 2.2 Power-end flange couplings 10. Camshaft drive gear wheels and chain wheels made of steel or cast steel. The bolts used to connect power-end flange couplings are normally to be designed as fitted bolts in accor- 2.1.1 Materials tests are to be performed in accordance with Section 9c, A.4. dance with Table 9b.2. If the use of fitted bolts is not feasible, GL may agree to the use of an equivalent frictional resistance trans- Table 9b.2 Material tests mission. In these cases the corresponding calculations are to be submitted for approval. Parts to be tested Cylinder bore (numbered according to the list under D.2.1) 3. Torsional vibration, critical speeds ≤ 300 mm 1 – 5 – 8 Section 9c, F. applies. > 300 ≤ 400 mm 1 – 5 – 6 – 7 – 8 – 9 > 400 mm all parts

D. Materials 2.1.2 In addition, material tests are to be carried out on pipes and parts of the starting air system and other 1. Approved materials pressure systems forming part of the engine, see Sec- tion 9d. 1.1 The mechanical characteristics of materials used for the components of diesel engines have to 2.1.3 Material for charge air coolers are to be sup- conform to GL Rules II – Materials and Welding, Part plied with manufacturer test reports. 1 – Metallic Materials, Chapter 2 – Steel and Iron Materials. The materials approved for the various 2.2 In the case of individually manufactured components are shown in Table 9b.3 together with engines, non-destructive material tests are to be per- their minimum required characteristics and material formed on the parts listed below in accordance with Certificates. Tables 9b.4 and 9b.5.

I - Part 1 Section 9b D Internal Combustion Engines and Air Compressors Chapter 8 GL 2007 Page 9b–5

Table 9b.3 Approved materials and type of test Certificate

Test Certificate ** Approved materials GL Rules * Components A B C Crankshafts × – – Connection rods × – – Forged steel: 3 4 2 Section 3, C. Piston and piston crowns × × – Rm ≥ 360 N/mm Cylinder covers/heads × – – Camshaft drive wheels × 3 × 4 – Rolled and forged steel rounds: Tie rods × – – 2 Section 3, C. Rm ≥ 360 N/mm Bolts and studs × 1 × 2 – Bearing transverse girders – – (weldable) × Cast steel Section 4, C. Pistons and piston crowns × 3 × 4 – Cylinder covers/heads × 1 × 2 – Camshaft drive wheels × 3 × 4 – Engine blocks – × 1 – Bedplates – × 1 – Nodular cast iron, preferably Cylinder blocks – × 1 – ferritic grades: Section 5, B. Piston and piston crowns × 3 × 4 – R ≥ 370 N/mm2 m Cylinder covers/heads – × 1 – Flywheels – × 1 – Valve bodies – × 1 – Engine blocks – – × Bedplates – – × Lammelar cast iron: Cylinder blocks – – × 2 Section 5, C. Rm ≥ 200 N/mm Cylinder liners – – × Cylinder covers/heads – – × Flywheels – – × * all details refer to GL Rules II – Materials and Welding, Part 1 – Metallic Materials, Chapter 2 – Steel and Iron Materials ** Test Certificates are to be issued in accordance with GL Rules II – Materials and Welding, Part 1 – Metallic Materials, Chapter 1 – Principles and Test Procedures – Section 1, H. with the following abbreviations: A: GL Material Certificate, B: Manufacturer Inspection Certificate, C: Manufacturer Test Report 1 only for cylinder bores > 300 mm 2 for cylinder bores ≤ 300 mm 3 only for cylinder bores > 400 mm 4 for cylinder bores ≤ 400 mm

1. Steel castings for bedplates, e.g. bearing trans- 7. Bolts which are subjected to alternating loads, verse girders, including their welded joints e.g.: 2. Solid forged crankshafts – main bearing bolts 3. Cast, rolled or forged parts of fully built crank- – connecting rod bolts shafts 4. Connecting rods – cylinder cover bolts 5. Piston crowns of steel or cast steel 8. Cylinder covers made of steel or cast steel 6. Tie rods (at each thread over a distance corre- 9. Camshaft drive gear wheels made of steel or sponding to twice the threaded length) cast steel

Chapter 8 Section 9b E Internal Combustion Engines and Air Compressors I - Part 1 Page 9b–6 GL 2007

2.2.1 Magnetic particle or dye penetrant tests are to 2. Pressure tests be performed in accordance with Table 9b.4 at those points, to be agreed between the GL Surveyor and the The individual components of internal combustion manufacturer, where experience shows that defects are engines are to be subject to pressure tests at the pres- liable to occur. sures specified in Table 9b.6. GL Certificates are to be issued for the results of the pressure tests. 2.2.2 Ultrasonic tests are to be carried out by the manufacturer in accordance with Table 9b.5, and the 3. Type approval testing (TAT) corresponding signed manufacturer's Certificates are to be submitted. 3.1 General 2.2.3 Welded seams of important engine compo- Engines for installation on board of the vessel have to nents may be required to be subjected to approved be type tested by GL. For this purpose a type approval methods of testing. test in accordance with 3.1.2 is to be performed.

2.2.4 Where there is reason to doubt the soundness 3.1.1 Preconditions for type approval testing of any engine component, non-destructive testing by Preconditions for type approval testing are that: approved methods may be required in addition to the tests mentioned above. – the engine to be tested conforms to the specific requirements for the series and has been suitably Table 9b.4 Magnetic particle tests optimized – the inspections and measurements necessary for Parts to be tested reliable continuous operation have been per- Cylinder bore (numbered according to the formed during works tests carried out by the en- list under D.2.2) gine manufacturer and GL has been informed of ≤ 400 mm 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 the results of the major inspections > 400 mm all parts – GL has issued the necessary approval of drawings on the basis of the documents to be submitted in accordance with B. Table 9b.5 Ultrasonic tests 3.1.2 Scope of type approval testing Parts to be tested The type approval test is subdivided into three stages, (numbered according to the Cylinder bore namely: list under D.2.2) ≤ 400 mm 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 – 8 – Stage A - Internal tests Functional tests and collection of operating > 400 mm 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 – 8 – 9 values including test hours during the internal tests, which are to be presented to GL during the 2.3 Crankshafts welded together from forged or type test. cast parts are subject to GL special approval. Both the – Stage B - Type test manufacturers and the welding process shall have been accepted. The materials and the welds are to be This test is to be performed in the presence of tested. the GL representative. – Stage C – Component inspection After conclusion of the tests, major components are to be presented for inspection. E. Tests and Trials The operating hours of the engine components 1. Manufacturing inspections which are presented for inspection after type testing in accordance with 3.4, are to be stated. 1.1 The manufacture of all engines with GL Classification is subject to supervision by GL. 3.2 Stage A - Internal tests Functional tests and the collection of operating data 1.2 Where engine manufacturers have been ap- are to be performed during the internal tests. The en- proved by GL as "Suppliers of Mass Produced En- gine is to be operated at the load points important for gines", these engines are to be tested in accordance the engine manufacturer and the pertaining operating with GL Guidelines VI – Additional Rules and Guide- values are to be recorded. The load points are to be lines, Part 4 – Diesel Engines, Chapter 1 – Guidelines selected according to the range of application of the for Mass Produced Engines, Section 1, C. engine.

I - Part 1 Section 9b E Internal Combustion Engines and Air Compressors Chapter 8 GL 2007 Page 9b–7

Table 9b.6 Pressure tests 1

2 Component Test pressure, pp [bar] Cylinder cover, cooling water space 3 7 Cylinder liner, over whole length of cooling water 7 space 5

Cylinder jacket, cooling water space 4, at least 1,5 ⋅ pe,zul

Exhaust valve, cooling water space 4, at least 1,5 ⋅ pe,zul Piston, cooling water space 7 (after assembly with piston rod, if applicable)

Pump body, pressure side 1,5 ⋅ pe,zul or pe,zul + 300 (whichever is less)

Fuel injection system Valves 1,5 ⋅ pe,zul or pe,zul + 300 (whichever is less)

Pipes 1,5 ⋅ pe,zul or pe,zul + 300 (whichever is less)

High pressure piping for Hydraulic system hydraulic drive of exhaust 1,5 ⋅ p gas valves e,zul

Exhaust gas turbocharger, cooling water space 4, at least 1,5 ⋅ pe,zul

Exhaust gas line, cooling water space 4, at least 1,5 ⋅ pe,zul 4 Coolers, both sides 4, at least 1,5 ⋅ pe,zul Engine-driven pumps 4, at least 1,5 ⋅ pe,zul (oil, water, fuel and bilge pumps)

Starting and control air system 1,5 ⋅ pe,zul before installation 1 In general, items are to be tested by hydraulic pressure as indicated in the Table. Where design or testing features may require modification of these test requirements, special consideration will be given. 2 pe, zul [bar] = maximum allowable working pressure in the part concerned. 3 For forged steel cylinder covers test methods other than pressure testing may be accepted, e.g. suitable non-destructive examination and dimensional control exactly recorded. 4 Charge air coolers need only be tested on the water side. 5 For centrifugally cast cylinder liners, the pressure test can be replaced by a crack test.

3.2.1 Normal case Note The normal case includes the load points 25 %, 50 %, The engine manufacturer has to state whether the 75 %, 100 % and 110 % of the maximum rated power: achievable output is continuous. If there is a time limit, the permissible operating time is to be indicated. a) along the nominal (theoretical) propeller curve and/or at constant speed for propulsion engines 3.3 Stage B - Type test b) at rated speed with constant governor setting for During the type test all the tests listed under 3.3.1 to generator drive 3.3.3 are to be carried out in the presence of the GL representative. The results achieved are to be recorded The limit points of the permissible operating range as and signed by GL representative. Deviations from this defined by the engine manufacturer are to be tested. program, if any, require the agreement of GL. 3.2.2 Emergency operation situations 3.3.1 Load points For turbocharged engines the achievable output in Load points at which the engine is to be operated are case of turbocharger damage is to be determined as to conform to the power/speed diagram in Fig. 9b.2. follows: The data to be measured and recorded when testing – engines with one turbocharger, when rotor is the engine at various load points has to include all the blocked or removed parameters necessary for an assessment. – engines with two or more turbochargers, when The operating time per load point depends on the en- the damaged turbocharger is shut off gine size and on the time for collection of the operating

Chapter 8 Section 9b E Internal Combustion Engines and Air Compressors I - Part 1 Page 9b–8 GL 2007

Overload power 110 105,8

110 3 3a 100 Rated power (continuous power) 100 3 90 12

4 90 80

80 5 6 70 9

70 2 60

60 Power [%] 50 [%] Torque Nominal propeller curve 7 1 50 10

40 40

30 30

8 11

Speed [%] 100 103,2

1 = Range of continuous operation

2 = Range of intermittent operation

3 = Range of short-time overload operation in special applications

Fig. 9b.2 Power/speed diagram values. The measurements shall in every case only be If an engine can continue to operate without its opera- performed after achievement of steady-state condition. tional safety being affected in the event of a failure of its independent cylinder lubrication, proof of this shall Normally, an operating time of 0,5 hour can be as- be included in the type test. sumed per load point. 3.3.1.1 Rated power (continuous power) At 100 % output (rated power) in accordance with 3.3.1.1 an operating time of 2 hours is required. At The rated power is defined as 100 % output at 100 % least two sets of readings are to be taken at an interval torque and 100 % speed (rated speed) corresponding of 1 hour in each case. to load point 1.

I - Part 1 Section 9b E Internal Combustion Engines and Air Compressors Chapter 8 GL 2007 Page 9b–9

3.3.1.2 100 % power Note The operation point 100 % output at maximum allow- If deemed necessary by the GL representative, further able speed corresponding to load point 2 has to be dismantling of the engine may be required. performed. 3.3.1.3 Maximum permissible torque 3.5 Test approval test report The maximum permissible torque normally results at The results of the type approval test are to be com- 110 % output at 100 % speed corresponding to load piled in a report which is to be submitted to GL. point 3 or at maximum permissible power (normally 110 %) at a speed according to the nominal propeller 3.6 Test approval Certificate curve corresponding to load point 3a. After successful conclusion of the test and appraisal of 3.3.1.4 Minimum permissible speed for intermit- the required documents GL issues a Type Approval tent operation Certificate. The minimum permissible speed for intermittent operation has to be adjusted: 3.7 Type testing of mass produced engines – at 100 % torque corresponding to load point 4 3.7.1 For engines with cylinder bores ≤ 300 mm – at 90 % torque corresponding to load point 5 which are to be manufactured in series the type test shall be carried out in accordance with GL Rules VI – 3.3.1.5 Part-load operation Additional Rules and Guidelines, Part 4 – Diesel En- For part-load operation the operation points 75 %, gines, Chapter 1 – Guidelines for Mass Produced En- 50 %, 25 % of the rated power at speeds according to gines. the nominal propeller curve at load points 6, 7 and 8 and proceeding from the nominal speed at constant 3.7.2 For the performance of the type test, the en- governor setting has to be adjusted corresponding to gine is to be fitted with all the prescribed items of load points 9, 10 and 11. equipment. If the engine, when on the test bed, cannot be fully equipped in accordance with the require- 3.3.2 Emergency operation ments, the equipment may be demonstrated on another The maximum achievable power when operating in engine of the same series. accordance with 3.2.2 has to be performed: 3.8 Renewal of type test – at speed conforming to nominal propeller curve – with constant governor setting for rated speed If the rated power (continuous power) of a type tested and operationally proven engine is increased by more 3.3.3 Functional tests than 10 %, a new type test is required. Approval of the power increase includes examination of the relevant Functional tests to be carried out as follows: drawings. – ascertainment of lowest engine speed according to the nominal propeller curve 4. Works trials – starting tests 4.1 General – governor test – test of the safety system particularly for over- In general, engines are to be subjected to trials on the speed and failure of the lubricating oil pressure test bed at the manufacturer's works and under GL supervision. The scope of these trials shall be as speci- – test of electronic components and systems ac- fied below. Exceptions to this require the agreement of cording to the test program approved by GL GL.

3.4 Stage C – Component inspection 4.2 Scope of works trials Immediately after the test run the components of one cylinder for in-line engines and two cylinders for V- During the trials the operating values corresponding to engines are to be presented for inspection as follows: each load point are to be measured and recorded by the engine manufacturer. All the results are to be – piston, removed and dismantled compiled in an acceptance protocol to be issued by the – crank bearing and main bearing, dismantled engine manufacturer. – cylinder liner in the installed condition In each case all measurements conducted at the various load points shall be carried out under steady oper- – cylinder head, valves disassembled ating conditions. The readings for 100 % power (rated – camshaft, camshaft drive and crankcase with power at rated speed) are to be taken twice at an inter- opened covers val of at least 30 minutes.

Chapter 8 Section 9b E Internal Combustion Engines and Air Compressors I - Part 1 Page 9b–10 GL 2007

4.2.1 Main engines for direct propeller drive 4.3 Depending on the type of plant concerned, GL reserve the right to call for a special test schedule. The operation points have to be adjusted according to a) – e), functional tests have to be performed accord- 4.4 In the case of engines driving electrical gen- ing to d) – f). erators the rated electrical power as specified by the a) 100 % power (rated power): manufacurer is to be verified as minimum power. at 100 % engine speed (rated engine speed) for at least 60 minutes after reaching the steady- 4.5 Component inspection state conditions After the test run randomly selected components shall b) 110 % power: be presented for inspection. The crankshaft web deflection is to be checked. at 103 % engine speed for 30 minutes after reaching the steady-state conditions 5. Shipboard trials (dock and sea trials) After the conclusion of the running-in programme Note prescribed by the engine manufacturer engines are to undergo the trials specified below. After the test bed trials the output shall normally be limited to the rated power (100 % power) so that the 5.1 Scope of sea trials engine cannot be overloaded in service (see A.3.4). c) 90 %, 75 %, 50 % and 25 % power in accor- 5.1.1 Main propulsion engines driving fixed dance with the nominal propeller curve propellers d) starting and reversing manoeuvres, see H.2.4 The tests have to be carried out as follows: e) test of governor and independent overspeed a) at rated engine speed: protection device for at least 4 hours and at engine speed corresponding to normal cruise f) test of engine shutdown devices power: for at least 2 hours 4.2.2 Main engines for electrical propeller drive b) at 103 % engine speed: The test is to be performed at rated speed with a constant governor setting under conditions of: for 30 minutes where the engine adjustment permits, see A.3.4 a) 100 % power (rated power): for at least 60 minutes after reaching the steady- c) determination of the minimum on-load speed. state condition d) starting and reversing manoeuvres see H.2.4 b) 110 % power: e) in reverse direction of propeller rotation during for 30 minutes after reaching the steady-state the sea trials at a minimum speed of 70 % en- condition gine speed: for 10 minutes Note f) testing of the monitoring and safety systems After the test bed trials the output of engines driving generators is to be so adjusted that overload (110 %) 5.1.2 Main propulsion engines driving control- power can be supplied in service after installation on lable pitch propellers or reversing gears board in such a way that the governing characteristics 5.1.1 applies as appropriate. and the requirements of the generator protection devices can be fulfilled at all times (see A.3.5). Controllable pitch propellers are to be tested with various propeller pitches. Where provision is made for c) 75 %, 50 % and 25 % power and idle run operating in a combinator mode, the combinator dia- d) start-up tests, see H.2.4 gram is to be plotted and verified by measurements. e) test of governor and independent overspeed 5.1.3 Main engines driving generators for pro- protection device pulsion f) test of engine shutdown devices The tests are to be performed at rated speed with a constant governor setting under conditions of 4.2.3 Auxiliary driving engines and engines driving electric generators a) 100 % power (rated power): for at least 4 hours The tests have to be performed according to 4.2.2. and For testing of diesel generator sets, see also Sec- at normal continuous cruise power: tion 11 l. for at least 2 hours

I - Part 1 Section 9b F Internal Combustion Engines and Air Compressors Chapter 8 GL 2007 Page 9b–11

b) 110 % power: can be declutched in service or which drives a vari- for 30 minutes able-pitch propeller must be fitted with an independent overspeed protection device so adjusted that the en- c) in reverse direction of propeller rotation during gine speed cannot exceed the rated speed by more than the sea trials at a minimum speed of 70 % of the 20 %. nominal propeller speed: for 10 minutes Equivalent equipment may be approved by GL. d) starting manoeuvres, see H.2.4 1.2 Engines driving electric generators e) testing of the monitoring and safety systems 1.2.1 Each diesel engine used to drive an electric Note main or emergency generator has to be fitted with a Tests are to be based on the rated powers of the driven governor which will prevent transient frequency varia- generators. tions in the electrical network in excess of ± 10 % of the rated frequency with a recovery time to steady 5.1.4 Engines driving auxiliaries and electrical state conditions not exceeding 5 seconds when the generators maximum electrical step load is switched on or off.

These engines are to be subjected to an operational In the case when a step load equivalent to the rated test for at least four hours. During the test the set con- output of the generator is switched off, a transient cerned is required to operate at its rated power for an speed variation in excess of 10 % of the rated speed extended period. may be acceptable, provided this does not cause the It is to be demonstrated that the engine is capable of intervention of the overspeed device as required by supplying 110 % of its rated power, and in the case of 1.1.1. shipboard generating sets account shall be taken of the times needed to actuate the generator's overload pro- 1.2.2 In addition to the normal governor, each tection system. diesel engine with a rated power of 220 kW or over shall be equipped with an overspeed protection device 5.2 The suitability of main and auxiliary engines independent of the normal governor which prevents to burn special fuels is to be demonstrated if the ma- the engine speed from exceeding the rated speed by chinery installation is designed to burn such fuels. more than 15 %.

5.3 The scope of the shipboard trials may be 1.2.3 The diesel engine shall be suitable and de- extended in consideration of special operating condi- signed for the special requirements of the vessel's tions such as low-load operation, towing, trawling, etc. electrical system.

5.4 Earthing Where two stage load application is required, the following procedure is to be applied: Sudden loading It is necessary to ensure that the limits specified for from no-load to 50 %, followed by the remaining 50 main engines by the engine manufacturers for the % of the rated generator power, duly observing the difference in electrical potential (Voltage) between the requirements of 1.2.1 and 1.2.4. crankshaft/shafting and the hull are not exceeded in service. Appropriate earthing devices including limit Application of the load in more than two steps, see value monitoring of the permitted voltage potential are Fig. 9b.3, is acceptable on condition that: to be provided. – the vessel's electrical system is designed for the use of such generator sets

F. Safety Devices – load application in more than two steps is considered in the design of the vessel's electrical system and is approved when the drawings are 1. Speed control and engine protection reviewed against overspeed – during shipboard trials the functional tests are 1.1 Main and auxiliary engines carried out without objections. Here the loading of the vessel’s electrical net while sequentially 1.1.1 Each diesel engine not used to drive an elec- connecting essential equipment after breakdown tric generator has to be equipped with a speed gover- and during recovery of the net is to be taken into nor or regulator so adjusted that the engine speed account. cannot exceed the rated speed by more than 15 %. – the safety of the vessel's electrical system in the 1.1.2 In addition to the normal governor, each main event of parallel generator operation and failure engine with a rated power of 220 kW or over which of a generator is to be demonstrated

Chapter 8 Section 9b F Internal Combustion Engines and Air Compressors I - Part 1 Page 9b–12 GL 2007

100

80 limiting curve for 3rd load step 70 60 limiting curve for 50 2nd load step

40 limiting curve for 30 1st load step 20

10 Load increase referred to rated power [%] 0 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24

Mean eff. working pressure pe,e [bar] at rated power of diesel engine

Fig. 9b.3 Limiting curves for loading 4-stroke diesel engines step by step from no load to rated power as function of the brake mean effective pressure

1.2.4 Speed shall be stabilized and in steady-state range. The permanent deviation from the theoretical condition within five seconds, inside the permissible linearity of the speed characteristic may, in the case of range for the permanent speed variation δT. generating sets intended for parallel operation, in no range exceed 1 % of the rated speed. The steady-state condition is considered to have been reached when the residual speed variation does not Notes relating to 1.1 and 1.2: exceed ± 1 % of the speed associated with the set power. a) The rated power and the corresponding rated speed relate to the conditions under which the 1.2.5 The characteristic curves of the governors of engines are operated in the system concerned. diesel engines of generator sets operating in parallel must not exhibit deviations larger than those specified b) An independent overspeed protection device means a system all of whose component parts, in Sections 11a – 11 l. including the drive, work independently of the 1.2.6 Generator sets which are installed to serve normal governor. stand-by circuits are to satisfy the corresponding requirements when the engine is cold. The start-up and 1.3 Use of electrical/electronic governors loading sequence is to be concluded in about 30 seconds. 1.3.1 The governor and the associated actuator shall, for controlling the respective engine, be suitable 1.2.7 Emergency generator sets have to satisfy the for the operating conditions laid down in the Con- above governor conditions also unlimited with the struction Rules and for the requirements specified by start-up and loading sequence having to be concluded the engine manufacturer. For single propulsion drives in about 45 seconds. it has to be ensured that in case of a failure of the governor or actuator the control of the engine can be 1.2.8 The governors of the engines mentioned in taken over by another control device. 1.2.1 have to enable the rated speed to be adjusted over the entire power range with a maximum devia- The regulating conditions required for each individual tion of 5 %. application as described in 1.1 and 1.2 are to be satisfied by the governor system. 1.2.9 The rate of speed variation of the adjusting Electronic governors and the associated actuators are mechanisms has to permit satisfactory synchronization subject to type testing. in a sufficiently short time. The speed characteristic should be as linear as possible over the whole power For the power supply, see Sections 11a – 11 l.

I - Part 1 Section 9b F Internal Combustion Engines and Air Compressors Chapter 8 GL 2007 Page 9b–13

1.3.2 Requirements applying to main engines 3.2.2 Where provision has been made for the forced extracting the lubricating oil vapours, e.g. for For propulsion installations, to ensure continuous monitoring the oil vapour concentration, the negative speed control or immediate resumption of control after pressure in the crankcase may not exceed 2,5 mbar. a fault, at least one of the following requirements is to be satisfied: 3.2.3 The vent pipes of two or more engines shall a) The governor system has an independent back- not be combined. Exemptions may be approved if an up system or interaction of the combined systems is inhibited by suitable means. b) there is a redundant governor assembly for manual change-over with a separately protected 4. Crankcase safety devices power supply or c) the engine has a manually operated fuel admis- 4.1 Crankcase safety devices have to be type sion control system suitable for manoeuvring approved.

In the event of a fault in the governor system, the 4.2 Safety valves to safeguard against overpres- operating condition of the engine shall not become sure in the crankcase are to be fitted to all engines dangerous, that is, the engine speed and power shall with a cylinder bore of > 200 mm and/or a crankcase not increase. volume of ≥ 0,6 m3. Alarms to indicate faults in the governor system are to All separated spaces within the crankcase, e.g. gear or be fitted. chain casings for camshafts or similar drives, are to be equipped with additional safety devices if the volume 1.3.3 Requirements applying to auxiliary en- of these spaces exceeds 0,6 m3. gines for driving electrical generators Each auxiliary engine has to be equipped with its own 4.3 Engines with a cylinder bore of > 200 mm governor system. and ≤ 250 mm shall be equipped with at least one safety valve at each end of the crankcase. If the crank- In the event of a fault in the governor system, the fuel shaft has more than 8 throws, an additional safety admission in the injection pumps shall be set to "0". valve is to be fitted near the middle of the crankcase. Alarms to indicate faults in the governor system are to Engines with a cylinder bore of > 250 mm and ≤ 300 be fitted. mm shall have at least one safety valve close to every second crank throw, subject to a minimum number of 1.3.4 The special conditions necessary to start two. operation from the dead ship condition are to be observed, see Sections 11a – 11 l. Engines with a cylinder bore of > 300 mm shall have at least one safety valve close to each crank throw.

2. Cylinder overpressure warning device 4.4 Each safety valve shall have a free relief area of at least 45 cm2. 2.1 All the cylinders of engines with a cylinder bore of > 230 mm are to be fitted with cylinder over- The total relief area of all safety valves fitted to an pressure warning devices. The response threshold of engine to safeguard against overpressure in the crank- these warning devices shall be set at not more than 40 case may not be less than 115 cm2/m3 of crankcase % above the combustion pressure at the rated power. volume.

2.2 A warning device may be dispensed with if it Notes relating to 4.2 and 4.4 is ensured by an appropriate engine design or by con- a) In estimating the gross volume of the crankcase, trol functions that the cylinder pressure cannot in- the volume of the fixed parts which it contains crease in an unacceptable range. may be deducted. b) A space communicating with the crankcase via a 3. Crankcase airing and venting total free cross-sectional area of > 115 cm2/m3 of volume need not be considered as a separate 3.1 Crankcase airing space. In calculating the total free cross- 2 The airing of crankcases is not allowed. sectional area, individual sections of < 45 cm are to be disregarded. 3.2 Crankcase venting c) Each safety valve required may be replaced by not more than two safety valves of smaller 3.2.1 Where crankcase venting systems are pro- cross-sectional area provided that the cross- vided their clear opening is to be dimensioned as small sectional area of each safety valve is not less as possible. than 45 cm2. Chapter 8 Section 9b G Internal Combustion Engines and Air Compressors I - Part 1 Page 9b–14 GL 2007

4.5 The safety devices are to be of quick acting down the engine in the event of failure of the lubricat- and self closing type. In service they shall be oiltight ing oil supply. This is not valid for engines serving when closed and have to prevent air from flowing into solely for the drive of emergency generator sets and the crankcase. The gas flow caused by the response of emergency fire pumps. For these engines an alarm has the safety device shall be deflected, e. g. by means of to be provided. a baffle plate, in such a way as not to endanger persons standing nearby. 7. Safety devices in scavenge manifolds Safety devices shall respond quickly and be fully The scavenge air manifolds in open connection to the opened at a differential pressure not greater than 0,2 cylinders are to be fitted with explosion relief valves bar. as in 4. 4.6 Crankcase doors and their fittings are to be so dimensioned as not to suffer permanent deformation due to the overpressure occurring during the response of the safety equipment. G. Auxiliary Systems

4.7 Crankcase doors and hinged inspection ports 1. General are to be equipped with appropriate latches to effectively prevent unintended closing. For piping systems and accessory filter arrangements Section 9d is to be applied, additionally. 4.8 A warning sign specifying that the crankcase doors and/or sight holes may not be opened immedi- 2. Fuel oil system ately after stopping the engine, but only after a sufficient cooling period has elapsed, is to be mounted on 2.1 General the local engine control platform or, if appropriate, on both sides of the engine. 2.1.1 Only pipe connections with metal sealing surfaces or equivalent pipe connections of approved 4.9 Engines with a cylinder diameter > 300 mm design may be used for fuel injection lines. or a rated power of 2250 kW and above are to be fitted with crankcase oil mist detections systems. 2.1.2 Feed and return lines are to be designed in such a way that no unacceptable pressure surges occur 4.10 The oil mist monitoring and alarm informa- in the fuel supply system. Where necessary, the en- tion is to be capable of being read from a safe location gines are to be fitted with surge dampers approved by away from the engine. GL.

4.11 For multiple engine installations each engine 2.1.3 All components of the fuel system are to be is to be provided with a separate oil mist detection designed to withstand the maximum peak pressures system and a dedicated alarm. which will be expected in the system.

4.12 A copy of the documention supplied with the 2.1.4 If fuel oil reservoirs or dampers with a lim- oil mist detection system such as maintainance and ited life cycle are fitted in the fuel oil system the life test manuals are to be provided on board vessel. cycle together with overhaul instructions is to be specified by the engine manufacturer in the corre- 5. Safety devices in the starting air system sponding manuals.

The following equipment is to be fitted to safeguard 2.1.5 Oil fuel lines are not to be located immedi- the starting air system against explosions due to fail- ately above or near units of high temperature, steam ure of starting valves: pipelines, exhaust manifolds, silencers or other equipment required to be insulated by 7.1. As far as practi- 5.1 An isolation non-return valve is to be fitted to cable, oil fuel lines are to be arranged far apart from the starting air line serving each engine. hot surfaces, electrical installations or other potential 5.2 Engines with cylinder bores of > 230 mm are sources of ignition and are to be screened or otherwise to be equipped with flame arrestors immediately in suitably protected to avoid oil spray or oil leakage front of the intake of the main starting air line to each onto the sources of ignition. The number of joints in engine. such piping systems is to be kept to a minimum.

5.3 Equivalent safety devices may be approved 2.2 Shielding by GL. 2.2.1 Regardless of the intended use and location of internal combustion engines, all external fuel injec- 6. Safety devices in the lubricating oil system tion lines (high pressure lines between injection Each engine with a rated power of 220 kW or over is pumps and injection valves) are to be shielded by to be fitted with devices which automatically shut jacket pipes in such a way that any leaking fuel is: I - Part 1 Section 9b G Internal Combustion Engines and Air Compressors Chapter 8 GL 2007 Page 9b–15

– safely collected 3.5 Oil filters fitted parallel for the purpose of enabling cleaning without disturbing oil supply to – drained away unpressurized and engines (e.g. duplex filters) are to be provided with – efficiently monitored and alarmed arrangements that will minimize the possibility of a filter under pressure being opened by mistake. Filters/ filter chambers shall be provided with suitable means 2.2.2 If pressure variations of > 20 bar occur in fuel for: feed and return lines, these lines are also to be shielded. – venting when put into operation

2.2.3 The high pressure fuel pipe and the outer – depressurizing before being opened jacket pipe have to be of permanent assembly. Valves or cocks with drain pipes led to a safe location shall be used for this purpose. 2.2.4 Where pipe sheaths in the form of hoses are provided as shielding, the hoses have to be demonstrably suitable for this purpose and approved by GL. 4. Lubricating oil system

2.3 Fuel leak drainage 4.1 General requirements relating to lubricating oil systems and to the cleaning, cooling, etc. of the Appropriate design measures are to be introduced to lubricating oil are contained in Section 9d, F. For ensure generally that leaking fuel is drained efficiently piping arrangement 2.1.3 is to be applied. and cannot enter into the engine lube oil system. 4.1.1 Engines which sumps serve as oil reservoirs 2.4 Heat tracing, thermal insulation, re- shall be so equipped that the oil level can be estab- circulation lished and, if necessary, topped up during operation. Means are to be provided for completely draining the Fuel lines, including fuel injection lines, to engines oil sump. which are operated with preheated fuel are to be insulated against heat losses and, as far as necessary, pro- 4.1.2 The combination of the oil drainage lines vided with heat tracing. from the crankcases of two or more engines is not allowed. Means of fuel circulation are also to be provided. 4.1.3 Drain lines from the engine sump to the drain 2.5 Fuel oil emulsions tank are to be submerged at their outlet ends. For engines operated on emulsions of fuel oil and other liquids it has to be ensured that engine operation 4.2 The equipment of engines fitted with lubri- can be resumed after failures to the fuel oil treatment cating oil pumps is subject to Section 9d, F. system. 4.2.1 Main lubricating oil pumps driven by the engine are to be designed to maintain the supply of 3. Filter arrangements for fuel oil and lubri- lubricating oil over the entire operating range. cating oil systems 4.2.2 Main engines which drive main lubricating 3.1 Fuel and lubricating oil filters which are to be oil pumps are to be equipped with independently mounted directly on the engine are not to be located driven stand-by pumps. above rotating parts or in the immediate proximity of hot components. 4.2.3 In multi-engine installations having separate lubricating oil systems approval may be given for the 3.2 Where the arrangement stated in 3.1 is not carriage on board of reserve pumps ready for mount- feasible, the rotating parts and the hot components are ing provided that the arrangement of the main lubri- to be sufficiently shielded. cating oil pumps enables the change to be made with the means available on board. 3.3 Filters have to be so arranged that fluid residues can be collected by adequate means. The same 4.2.4 Lubricating oil systems for cylinder lubrica- applies to lubricating oil filters if oil can escape when tion which are necessary for the operation of the en- the filter is opened. gine and which are equipped with electronic dosing units have to be approved by GL. 3.4 Change-over filters with two or more chambers are to be equipped with means enabling a safe 5. Cooling system pressure release before opening and a proper venting before re-starting of any chamber. Normally, shut-off 5.1 For the equipment of engines with cooling devices are to be used. It shall be clearly visible, water pumps and for the design of cooling water sys- which chamber is in and which is out of operation. tems, see Section 9d. Chapter 8 Section 9b H Internal Combustion Engines and Air Compressors I - Part 1 Page 9b–16 GL 2007

5.1.1 Main cooling water pumps driven by the 6.2 Charge air cooling engine are to be designed to maintain the supply of cooling water over the entire operating range. 6.2.1 The construction and testing of charge air coolers are subject to Section 9e, B. 5.1.2 Main engines which drive main cooling water 6.2.2 Means are to be provided for regulating the pumps are to be equipped with independently driven temperature of the charge air within the temperature stand-by pumps or with means for connecting the range specified by the engine manufacturer. cooling water system to independently driven stand-by pumps. 6.2.3 The charge air lines of engines with charge air coolers are to be provided with sufficient means of 5.1.3 In multi-engine installations having separate drainage. fresh cooling water systems approval may be given for the carriage on board of reserve pumps ready for 7. Exhaust gas lines mounting provided that the arrangement of the main fresh cooling water pumps enables the change to be 7.1 Exhaust gas lines are to be insulated and/or made with the means available on board. Shutoff cooled in such a way that the surface temperature valves shall be provided enabling the main pumps to cannot exceed 220 °C at any point. be isolated from the fresh cooling water system. Insulating material must be non-combustible. 5.2 If cooling air is drawn from the engine room, the design of the cooling system is to be based on a 7.2 General rules relating to exhaust gas lines are room temperature of at least 45 °C. defined in Section 9d.

The exhaust air of air-cooled engines may not cause any unacceptable heating of the spaces in which the plant is installed. The exhaust air is normally to be led H. Starting Equipment to the open air through special ducts. 1. General 5.3 Where engines are installed in spaces in which oil-firing equipment is operated, Section 9e is Engine starting equipment shall enable engines to be also to be complied with. started up from the shutdown condition using only the means available on board.

6. Charge air system 2. Starting with compressed air

6.1 Exhaust gas turbochargers 2.1 Starting air systems for main engines are to be equipped with at least two starting air compressors. 6.1.1 The construction and testing of exhaust gas At least one of the air compressors shall be driven turbochargers are subject to the GL Rules according to independently of the main engine and has to supply at Chapter 2 – Machinery Installations, Section 3b. least 50 % of the total capacity required. 2.2 The total capacity of the starting air compres- 6.1.2 Exhaust gas turbochargers may exhibit no sors is to be such that the starting air receivers de- critical speed ranges over the entire operating range of signed in accordance with 2.4 or 2.5, as applicable, the engine. can be charged from atmospheric pressure to their final pressure within one hour. 6.1.3 The lubricating oil supply shall also be ensured during start-up and run-down of the exhaust gas Normally, compressors of equal capacity are to be turbochargers. installed. This does not apply to an emergency air compressor 6.1.4 Even at low engine speeds, main engines are which may be provided to meet the requirement stated to be supplied with charge air in a manner to ensure in 1. reliable operating. 2.3 If the main engine is started with compressed 6.1.5 If, in the lower speed range or when used for air, the available starting air is to be divided between manoeuvring, an engine can be operated only with a at least two starting air receivers of approximately charge air blower driven independently of the engine, equal size which can be used independently of each a stand-by charge air blower is to be installed or an other. equivalent device of approved design. 2.4 The total capacity of air receivers is to be 6.1.6 With main engines emergency operation has sufficient to provide, without their being replenished, to be possible in the event of a turbocharger failure. not less than six starts. I - Part 1 Section 9b H Internal Combustion Engines and Air Compressors Chapter 8 GL 2007 Page 9b–17

2.5 With multi-engine installations the number of 3.5 For ventilation requirements see also Section start-up operations per engine may, with GL's agree- 11b, C.3. ment, be reduced according to the concept of the propulsion plant. 4. Start-up of emergency generating sets

2.6 If starting air systems for auxiliaries or for 4.1 Emergency generating sets are to be so de- supplying pneumatically operated regulating and ma- signed that they can be started up readily even at a noeuvring equipment or tyfon units are to be fed from temperature of 0 °C. the main starting air receivers, due attention is to be If the set can be started only at higher temperatures, or paid to the air consumption of this equipment when cal- where there is a possibility that lower ambient tem- culating the capacity of the main starting air receivers. peratures may occur, heating equipment is to be fitted 2.7 Other consumers with a high air consumption to ensure ready reliable starting. apart from those mentioned in 2.6 may not be con- The operational readiness of the set shall be guaran- nected to the main starting air system. Separate air teed under all weather and seaway conditions. Fire supplies are to be provided for these units. Deviations flaps required in air inlet and outlet openings shall to this require the agreement of GL. only be closed in case of fire and are to be kept open at all other times. Warning signs to this effect are to be 2.8 If auxiliary engines are started by compressed installed. In the case of automatic fire flap actuation air sufficient air capacity for three consecutive starts dependent on the operation of the set warning signs of each auxiliary engine is to be provided. are not required. Air inlet and outlet openings shall not be fitted with weatherproof covers. 2.9 If starting air systems of different engines are fed by one receiver it is to be ensured that the receiver 4.2 Each emergency generating set required to be air pressure cannot fall below the highest of the differ- capable of automatic starting is to be equipped with an ent systems minimum starting air pressure. automatic starting system approved by GL, the capacity of which is sufficient for at least three consecutive 2.10 For the approximate calculation of the start- starts, compare Section 11c, C. ing air capacity, use may be made of the formula given in the Rules defined in L. Additionally a second source of energy is to be provided capable of three further starting operations within 30 minutes. This requirement is not applicable 3. Electrical starting equipment if the set can be started manually.

3.1 Where main engines are started electrically, 4.3 In order to guarantee the availability of the two mutually independent starter batteries are to be starting equipment, steps are to be taken to ensure that installed. The batteries are to be so arranged that they cannot be connected in parallel with each other. Each a) electrical and hydraulic starting systems are battery shall enable the main engine to be started from supplied with energy from the emergency cold. switchboard The total capacity of the starter batteries shall be suffi- b) compressed air starting systems are supplied via cient for the execution within 30 minutes, without a non-return valve from the main and auxiliary recharging the batteries, of the same number of start- compressed air receivers or by an emergency air up operations as is prescribed in 2.4 or 2.5 for starting compressor, the energy for which is provided with compressed air. via the emergency switchboard and c) the starting, charging and energy storage equip- 3.2 If two or more auxiliary engines are started ment is located in the emergency generator electrically, at least two mutually independent batter- room. ies are to be provided. Where starter batteries for the main engine are fitted, the use of these batteries is 4.4 Where automatic starting is not specified, acceptable. reliable manual starting systems may be used, e.g. by The capacity of the batteries has to be sufficient for at means of hand cranks, spring-loaded starters, hand- least three start-up operations per engine. operated hydraulic starters or starters using ignition cartridges. If only one of the auxiliary engines is started electrically, one battery is sufficient. 4.5 Where direct manual starting is not possible, starting systems in accordance with 4.2 and 4.3 are to 3.3 The starter batteries may only be used for be provided, in which case the starting operation may starting (and preheating where applicable) and for be initiated manually. monitoring equipment belonging to the engine. 4.6 The starters of emergency generator sets may 3.4 Steps are to be taken to ensure that the batter- be used only for the purpose of starting the emergency ies are kept charged and the charge level is monitored. generator sets. Chapter 8 Section 9b I Internal Combustion Engines and Air Compressors I - Part 1 Page 9b–18 GL 2007

5. Start-up of emergency fire-extinguisher 2. Main engines sets 2.1 Local control station 5.1 Diesel engines driving emergency fire pumps To provide emergency operation of the propulsion are to be so designed that they can still be reliably plant a local control station is to be installed from started by hand at a temperature of 0 °C. which the plant can be operated and monitored. If the engine can be started only at higher tempera- 2.1.1 Indicators according to Table 9b.7 are to be tures, or where there is a possibility that lower tem- clearly sited on the local main engine control station. peratures may occur, heating equipment is to be fitted to ensure reliable starting. 2.1.2 Temperature indicators are to be provided on the local control station or directly on the engine. 5.2 If manual start-up using a hand crank is not possible, the emergency fire-extinguisher set is to be 2.1.3 In the case of gear and controllable pitch fitted with a starting device approved by GL which propeller systems, the local control indicators and enables at least 6 starts to be performed within 30 control equipment required for emergency operation minutes, two of these being carried out within the first are to be installed at the main engines' local control 10 minutes. station. 2.1.4 Critical speed ranges are to be marked in red on the tachometers. I. Control Equipment 2.2 Machinery control room/control centre

1. General If the fishery vessel has a control station for the propulsion system with remote operation or control, the For unmanned machinery installations Section 12 is to indicators listed in Table 9b.7 are to be installed in the be observed in addition to the following requirements. machinery control room, see also Section 12.

Table 9b.7 Alarms and indicators

Propulsion Auxiliary Emergency Description engines engines engines Speed / direction I Engine overspeed 4 A, S A, S A, S Lubricating oil pressure at engine inlet I, L, S I, L, S I, L Lubricating oil temperature at engine inlet I, H I 4, H 4 I 4, H 4 Fuel oil pressure at engine inlet I I Fuel oil leakage from high pressure pipes A A A Cylinder cooling water pressure or flow at engine inlet I, L I 3, L 3 I 3, L 3 Cylinder cooling water temperature at engine outlet I, H I, H I, H Charge air pressure at cylinder inlet I Charge air temperature at charge air cooler inlet I Charge air temperature at charge air cooler outlet I, H Starting air pressure I, L Control air pressure I, L Exhaust gas temperature 1 I, H 2 Oil mist concentration in crankcase or alternative monitoring I, H 5 I, H 5 I, H 5 system 6, 7

1 where ever the dimensions permit, at each cylinder outlet and I: Indicator at the turbo charger inlet and outlet A: Alarm 2 at turbo charger outlet only H: Alarm for upper limit 3 cooling water pressure or flow L: Alarm for lower limit 4 only for an engine output > 220 kW S: Shutdown 5 for engines having an output > 2250 kW or a cylinder bore > 300 mm 6 alternative methods of monitoring may be approved by GL 7 an engine shutdown may be provided where necessary

I - Part 1 Section 9b M Internal Combustion Engines and Air Compressors Chapter 8 GL 2007 Page 9b–19

2.3 Bridge/navigation centre K. Engine Alignment/Seating 2.3.1 The essential operating parameters for the propulsion system are to be provided in the control 1. Engines are to be mounted and secured to station area. their foundations in conformity with the GL Guide- lines VI – Additional Rules and Guidelines, Part 4 – 2.3.2 The following stand-alone control equipment Diesel Engines, Chapter 3 – Guidelines for the Seating is to be installed showing: of Propulsion Plants and Auxiliary Machinery. – speed of main engine – speed/direction of rotation of shafting 2. The crankshaft alignment is to be checked every time an engine has been aligned on its founda- – propeller pitch (controllable pitch propeller) tion by measurement of the crank web deflection – starting air pressure (if applicable) and/or other suitable means. – control air pressure (if applicable) For the purpose of subsequent alignments note is to be taken of: 2.3.3 In the case of engine installations up to a total output of 600 kW, simplifications can be agreed with – the draught/load condition of the vessel GL. – the condition of the engine - cold/preheated/hot 2.4 Auxiliary engines For auxiliary engines and emergency application en- 3. Where the engine manufacturer has not speci- gines as a minimum requirement the controls given in fied values for the permissible crank web deflection, Table 9b.7, third and forth column are to be provided. assessment is to be based on GL's reference values according to Chapter 2 – Machinery Installations, Sec- tion 2, K.4. J. Alarms

1. General L. Approximate Calculation of the Starting Air Supply 1.1 The following requirements apply to machinery installations which have been designed for con- This calculation shall follow the GL Rules according ventional operation without any degree of automation. to Chapter 2 – Machinery Installations, Section 2, L. 1.2 Within the context of these requirements, the word alarm is to be understood as the visual and audible warning of abnormal operating parameters. M. Air Compressors 2. Scope of alarms The requirements for design and construction of air Alarms have to be provided for main, auxiliary and compressors are defined in the GL Rules according to emergency engines according to Table 9b.7. Chapter 2 – Machinery Installations, Section 2, M.

I - Part 1 Section 9c A Propulsion System Chapter 8 GL 2007 Page 9c–1

Section 9c

Propulsion System

A. Main Shafting 2.2 Testing of materials All component parts of the shafting which assist in 1. General transmitting the torque from the vessel's propulsion plant are subject to the GL Rules II – Materials and 1.1 Scope Welding and are to be tested. This requirement also The following requirements apply to standard and covers metal propeller shaft liners. Where propeller established types of shafting for main and auxiliary shafts running in seawater are protected against sea- propulsion. Deviating designs require GL's special water penetration not by a metal liner but by plastic approval. coatings, the coating technique used is to be approved by GL. In the case of fishing vessels with ice classes, the strengthening factors given in E. are to be complied For fishing vessels with L < 24 m Inspection Certifi- with. GL reserve the right to call for propeller shaft cates 3.1B according to EN 10204 : 1995 can be ac- dimensions in excess of those specified in this Section cepted. if the propeller arrangement results in increased bending stresses. 3. Shaft dimensions

1.2 Documents for approval 3.1 General General drawings of the entire shafting, from the main All parts of the shafting are to be dimensioned in ac- engine coupling flange to the propeller, and detail cordance with the following formulae and in compli- drawings of the shafts, couplings and other component ance with the requirements relating to torsional vibra- parts transmitting the propelling engine torque, in tions set out in F. The dimensions of the shafting shall addition detail drawings and the arrangement of the be based on the total rated installed power. Where the stern tube seals and the cast resin mount for the stern geometry of a part is such that it cannot be dimen- tubes and shaft bearings are to be submitted to GL in sioned in accordance with these formulae, special triplicate for approval. evidence of the mechanical strength of the part or parts concerned is to be furnished to GL. For the arrangement of the shaft bearings an alignment calculation, including alignment instructions, has to be 3.2 Minimum shaft diameter submitted for approval. With consent of GL for shaftings with intermediate shafts d < 200 mm the align- 3.2.1 For fishing vessels with L < 24 m and fishing ment calculation may be waived. along the coast line at a distance not exceeding 20 nautical miles from main land or off-shore islands the The submitted documentation must contain all the data minimum shaft diameter is to be determined by the necessary to enable the stresses to be evaluated. following formula:

2. Materials P ddkC≥≥⋅ 3 W [mm] (1a) a n 2.1 Approved materials d = actual outer shaft diameter [mm] Propeller, intermediate and thrust shafts together with a flange and clamp couplings are to be made of forged d = required outside diameter of shaft [mm] steel; where appropriate, couplings shall be made of PW = rated power of propulsion motor [kW] cast steel. Rolled round steel may be used for plain, -1 flangeless shafts. n = shaft speed [min ] In general, the tensile strength of steels used for shaft- k = 90 for shafts of corrosion-resistant steel, ing (shafts, flange couplings, bolts/fitted bolts) shall wrought copper alloys, nickel alloys or non-corrosion resistant steel if the shaft is be between 400 N/mm2 and 800 N/mm2. However, the protected against contact with seawater value of Rm used for the calculation of the material factor Cw in accordance with formula (2) for propeller = 75 for shafts of high tensile wrought nickel shafts shall not be greater than 600 N/mm2. Where in alloys 1 special cases wrought copper alloys resistant to seawater are to be used for the shafting, the consent of –––––––––––––– GL shall be obtained. 1 e.g. "Monal alloy K-500", tensile strength > 800 N/mm2 Chapter 8 Section 9c A Propulsion System I - Part 1 Page 9c–2 GL 2007

C = 1,06 for vessels with one propulsion line = 1,20 for intermediate shafts with longitudinal slots where the length and width of the = 1,0 for vessels with two propulsion lines slot do not exceed 1,17 ⋅ d and 0,25 ⋅ d respectively. 3.2.2 For all other fishing vessels the minimum shaft diameter is to be determined by applying for- = 1,22 for propeller shafts in the area of the aft mula (1b): stern tube or shaft bracket bearing to the forward face of the propeller boss subject to a minimum of 2,5 ⋅ d, if the pro- PW ddFkaW≥≥⋅⋅ ⋅ C (1) peller is shrink-fitted, without key, on to ⎡⎤4 3 ⎛⎞di the tapered end of the propeller shaft us- n1⋅−⎢⎥⎜⎟ ⎢⎥d ing a method approved by GL, or if the ⎣⎦⎝⎠a propeller is bolted to a flange forged on the propeller shaft. di = diameter of shaft bore, where present [mm] = 1,26 for propeller shafts in the area specified If the bore in the shaft is = 0,4 ⋅ d, 1,0 may be for k = 1,22, if the propeller is keyed to applied for the expression: the tapered propeller shaft 4 = 1 – (di / da) = 1,40 for propeller shafts in the area specified for k = 1,22, if the shaft inside the stern F = factor for the type of propulsion installation [–] tube is lubricated with grease. = 1,15 for propeller shafts forward portion of a) Intermediate and thrust shafts shafts to where they emerge from the = 95 stern tube. The portion of the propeller for engine installations with slip cou- shaft located forward of the stern tube plings and electric propulsion installations seal can be gradually reduced to the size = 100 of the intermediate shaft. for all other propulsion installations b) Propeller shafts 4. Design = 100 4.1 General for all types of installations Changes in diameter are to be effected by tapering or CW = material factor [–] ample radiusing. For intermediate shafts, the radius at forged flanges is to be at least 0,08 ⋅ d, that at the aft = 560 / (R + 160) (2) m propeller shaft flange at least 0,125 ⋅ d.

Rm = tensile strength of the shaft material (see also 2.1) [N/mm2] 4.2 Shaft tapers and nut threads Keyways in the shaft taper for the propeller shall be so k = factor for the type of shaft [–] designed that the forward end of the groove makes a = 1,0 for intermediate shafts with integral gradual transition to the full shaft section. In addition, forged coupling flanges or with shrink- the forward end of the keyway shall be spoon-shaped. fitted keyless coupling flanges The edges of the keyway at the surface of the shaft taper for the propeller are not to be sharp. The forward = 1,10 for intermediate shafts where the cou- end of the rounded keyway has to lie well within the pling flanges are mounted on the ends of seating of the propeller boss. Threaded holes to ac- the shaft with the aid of keys. At a dis- commodate the securing screws for propeller keys shall tance of at least 0,2 ⋅ d from the end of be located only in the aft half of the keyway, see Fig. the keyway, such shafts can be reduced 9c.1. to a diameter corresponding to k = 1,0 In general, tapers for securing flange couplings which = 1,10 for intermediate shafts with radial holes are jointed with keys shall have a conicity of between which diameter is not greater than 0,3 ⋅ d 1 : 12 and 1 : 20. See C. for details of propeller shaft = 1,10 for thrust shafts near the plain bearings tapers on the propeller side. on both sides of the thrust collar, or near The outside diameter of the threaded end for the pro- the axial bearings where a roller bearing peller retaining nut shall not be less than 60 % of the design is used calculated big taper diameter. = 1,15 for intermediate shafts designed as multi-splined shafts where d is the out- 4.3 Propeller shaft protection side diameter of the splined shaft. Out- 4.3.1 Sealing side the splined section, the shafts can be reduced to a diameter corresponding Propeller shafts with oil or grease lubrication are to be to k = 1,0 fitted with seals of proven efficiency and approved by

I - Part 1 Section 9c A Propulsion System Chapter 8 GL 2007 Page 9c–3

X r6 ~ 0,5 b

d Section E - E

A B C D

E E r1 < r2 < r3 < r4

Standard values of r b 5 r r r r d r 1 2 3 4 5 r5 r5 r5 r5 up to 150 3 up to 250 4 up to 450 5 A B C D from 450 6 Sections: A - A B - B C - C D - D a ( a ~ b ) Detail X

Fig. 9c.1 Design of keyway in propeller shaft

GL at the stern tube ends, see also the requirements approved by GL to guarantee water-tightness. Such applicable to the external sealing of the stern tube in joints will be subject to special tests to prove their the context with the propeller shaft survey prescribed effectiveness. in the GL Rules Part 0 – Classification and Surveys, Section 3. 4.3.2.3 Minimum wall thickness of shaft liners The securing at stern tube, shaft line or propeller (e.g. The minimum wall thickness s [mm] of metal shaft chrome steel liner) shall guarantee a permanent tight- liners in accordance with 4.3.2.1 is to be determined ness. GL reserve the right to demand corresponding using the following formula: verifications. s = 0,03 ⋅ d + 7,5 (3) For protection of the sealing a rope guard shall be provided. d = shaft diameter under the liner [mm] The propeller boss seating is to be effectively pro- In the case of continuous liners, the wall thickness tected against the ingress of seawater. This seal can be between the bearings may be reduced to 0,75 ⋅ s. dispensed with if the propeller shaft is made of corrosion-resistant material. 4.4 Coupling connection

In the case of Class Notation IW, the seal shall be 4.4.1 The thickness of coupling flanges on the fitted with a device by means of which the bearing intermediate and thrust shafts and on the forward end clearance can be measured when the vessel is afloat. of the propeller shaft shall be equal to at least 20 % of the calculated minimum diameter of a solid shaft at 4.3.2 Shaft liners the relevant location. 4.3.2.1 Propeller shafts which are not made of corro- Where propellers are attached to a forged flange on sion- resistant material and which run in seawater are the propeller shaft, the flange has to have a thickness to be protected against ingress of seawater by sea- equal to at least 25 % of the calculated minimum di- water-resistant metal liners or other liners approved by ameter of a solid shaft at the relevant location. GL and by proven seals at the propeller. These flanges shall not be thinner than the Rule di- 4.3.2.2 Metal liners in accordance with 4.3.2.1, ameter of the fitted bolts if these are based on the which run in seawater, shall be made in a single piece. same tensile strength as that of the shaft material. Only with the expressed consent of GL and in excep- In the formulae (4), (5), (6) and (7), the following tional cases the liner may consist of two or more parts, symbols are used: provided that the abutting edges of the parts are additionally sealed and protected after fitting by a method A = effective area of shrink-fit seating [mm2]

Chapter 8 Section 9c A Propulsion System I - Part 1 Page 9c–4 GL 2007

cA = coefficient for shrink-fitted joints [–], de- 4.4.4 The minimum thread root diameter dk of the pending on the kind of driving unit connecting bolts used for clamp-type couplings is to be determined using the formula: = 1,0 for geared diesel engine and turbine drives 106 ⋅ P = 1,2 for direct coupled diesel engine drives d12=⋅ w [mm] (5) k ndzR⋅⋅⋅ C = conicity of shaft ends [–] m = difference in tapers diameters/length of tapers 4.4.5 The shaft of necked-down bolts shall not be d = shaft diameter in area of clamp-type coupling less than 0,9 times the thread root diameter. If, besides [mm] the torque, the bolted connection has to transmit con- d = diameters of fitted bolts [mm] siderable additional forces, the bolts shall be increased s accordingly. dk = inner throat diameter for necked-down bolts [mm] 4.4.6 Shrink fitted couplings D = diameter of pitch circle of bolts [mm] f = coefficient for shrink-fitted joints [–] Where shafts are connected by keyless shrink fitted couplings (flange or sleeve type), the dimensioning of Q = peripheral force at the mean joint diameter of these shrink fits shall be chosen in a way that the a shrink fit [N] maximum von Mises equivalent stress in all parts will not exceed 80 % of the yield strength of the specific n = shaft speed [min-1] materials during operation and 95 % during mounting p = contact pressure of shrink fits [N/mm2] and dismounting. P = rated power of the driving motors [kW] W For the calculation of the safety margin of the connec- Rm = tensile strength of fitted or necked-down bolt tion against slippage, the maximum clearance will be material [N/mm2] applied, derived as the difference between the lowest respectively highest still acceptable limit of the ap- sfl = flange thickness in area of bolt pitch circle plied nominal tolerance field for the bore and the [mm] shaft. The contact pressure p in the shrunk-on joint to S = safety factor against slipping of shrink fits in achieve the required safety margin may be determined the shafting [–] by applying formulae (6) and (7). = 3,0 between motor and gear 22⋅ 2 2 2 = 2,5 for all other applications Θ TfcQT+⋅()A ⋅ + ±Θ⋅ T p = [N/mm2] (6) Af⋅ T = propeller thrust [N] z = number of fitted or necked-down bolts [–] "+" sign following the root applies to conical shrunk

μ0 = coefficient of static friction [–] joints without an axial stop to absorb astern thrust = 0,15 for hydraulic shrink fits = 0,18 for dry shrink fits "–" sign following the root if the conical shrunk joint has an axial stop to absorb astern thrust Θ = half conicity of shaft ends [–]

= C /2 2 ⎛⎞μo 2 f = ⎜⎟−Θ [–] (7) 4.4.2 The bolts used to connect flange couplings ⎝⎠S are normally to be designed as fitted bolts. The minimum diameter ds of fitted bolts at the coupling flange faces is to be determined by applying the formula: 4.5 Shafting bearings

6 10⋅ Pw d16s =⋅ [mm] (4) 4.5.1 Arrangement of shaft bearings nDzR⋅⋅⋅m Shaft bearings both inside and outside the stern tube 4.4.3 Where, in special circumstances, the use of are to be so arranged that, when the plant is hot and fitted bolts is not feasible, GL may agree to the use of irrespective of the condition of loading of the vessel, an equivalent frictional transmission. each bearing is subjected to positive reaction forces.

I - Part 1 Section 9c A Propulsion System Chapter 8 GL 2007 Page 9c–5

By appropriate spacing of the bearings and by the of shafts supported on white metal bearings and less alignment of the shafting in relation to the coupling than 0,6 MPa in the case of bearings made of synthetic flange at the engine or gearing, care is to be taken to materials. ensure that no undue shear forces or bending moments are exerted on the crankshaft or gear shafts when the 4.5.2.3 Where the propeller shaft inside the stern plant is at operating state temperature. By spacing the tube runs in bearings made of lignum vitae, rubber or bearings sufficiently far apart, steps are also to be plastic approved for use in water-lubricated stern tube taken to ensure that the reaction forces of line or gear bearings, the length of the after stern tube bearing shaft bearings are not significantly affected should the shall be approximately 4 ⋅ da and that of the forward alignment of one or more bearings be altered by hull stern tube bearing approximately 1,5 ⋅ da. deflections or by displacement or wear of the bearings themselves. A reduction of the bearing length may be approved if the bearing is shown by means of bench tests to have Guide values for the maximum permissible distance sufficient load-bearing capacity. between bearings Amax [mm] can be determined using formula (8): 4.5.2.4 Where the propeller shaft runs in grease- lubricated, grey cast iron bushes the lengths of the after and forward stern tube bearings should be ap- Amax=⋅Kd 1 (8) proximately 2,5 ⋅ da and 1,0 ⋅ da respectively. d = diameter of shaft between bearings [mm] The peripheral speed of propeller shafts in grease- K1 = 450 for oil-lubricated white metal bearings lubricated grey cast iron bearings shall not exceed 2,5 = 280 for grey cast iron, grease-lubricated stern up to a maximum of 3 m/s and that of propeller shafts tube bearings in rubber and water-lubricated lignum vitae bearings shall not exceed 6 m/s and 3 up to a maximum of 4 = 280 – 350 for water-lubricated rubber bear- m/s respectively. ings in stern tubes and shaft brackets (upper values for special designs only) 4.5.2.5 Where propeller shafts are to run in roller -1 bearings inside the stern tube, these should wherever Where the shaft speed exceeds 350 min it is recom- possible take the form of cylindrical roller bearings mended that the maximum bearing spacing is deter- with cambered rollers or races and with increased mined in accordance with formula (9) in order to bearing clearance. The camber must be large enough avoid excessive loads due to bending vibrations. In to accommodate a 0,1 % inclination of the shaft rela- limiting cases a bending vibration analysis should be tive to the bearing axis without adverse effects. made for the shafting system. For application of roller bearings care must be taken d that the minimum load requirements as specified by Amax=⋅K 2 (9) the manufacturer are fulfilled (axial adjustment rec- n ommended). n = shaft speed [min-1] 4.5.3 Bearing lubrication K2 = 8500 for oil-lubricated white metal bearings 4.5.3.1 Lubrication and matching of materials of the = 7500 for water lubricated rubber bearings plain and roller bearings for the shafting have to meet = 5200 for grease-lubricated, grey cast iron the operational demands of seagoing vessels. bearings 4.5.3.2 Lubricating oil or grease shall be introduced 4.5.2 Stern tube bearings into the stern tube in such a way as to ensure a reliable supply of oil or grease to the forward and after stern 4.5.2.1 Inside the stern tube the propeller shaft shall tube bearing. normally be supported by two bearing points. In short With grease lubrication, the forward and after bearings stern tubes the forward bearing may be dispensed are each to be provided with a grease connection. with, in which case at least one free-standing journal Wherever possible, a grease pump driven by the shaft shaft bearing should be provided. is to be used to secure a continuous supply of grease. 4.5.2.2 Where the propeller shaft inside the stern tube Where the shaft runs in oil within the stern tube, a runs in oil-lubricated white metal bearings or in syn- header tank is to be fitted at a sufficient height above thetic rubber or reinforced resin or plastic materials the vessel's load line. Facilities are to be provided for approved for use in oil-lubricated stern tube bearings, checking the level of oil in the tank at any time. the lengths of the after and forward stern tube bearings The temperature of the after stern tube bearing is to be shall be approximately 2 ⋅ da and 0,8 ⋅ da respectively. indicated. Alternatively, with propeller shafts less than The length of the after stern tube bearing may be re- 400 mm in diameter the stern tube oil temperature duced to 1,5 ⋅ da where the contact load, which is cal- may be indicated. In this case the temperature sensor culated from the static load and allowing for the is to be located in the vicinity of the after stern tube weight of the propeller is less than 0,8 MPa in the case bearing.

Chapter 8 Section 9c B Propulsion System I - Part 1 Page 9c–6 GL 2007

4.5.3.3 In the case of vessels with automated ma- For stern tubes fabricated from welded steel plates, it is chinery, Section 12 has to be complied with. sufficient to test for tightness during the pressure tests applied to the hull spaces passed by the stern tube. 4.5.4 Stern tube water-lubricated connections Oil-lubricated stern tubes are to be fitted with filling, testing and drainage connections as well as with a vent B. Gears, Couplings pipe. Where the propeller shaft runs in seawater, a flushing 1. General line is to be fitted in front of the forward stern tube bearing in place of the filling connection. 1.1 Scope 4.5.5 Cast resin mounting 1.1.1 These requirements apply to spur, planetary and bevel gears and to all types of couplings for in- The mounting of stern tubes and stern tube bearings corporation in the main propulsion plant or essential made of cast resin and also the seating of intermediate equipment as specified in Section 9a, H. The design shaft bearings on cast resin parts is to be carried out by requirements laid down here may also be applied to GL-approved companies in the presence of a GL Sur- the gears and couplings of equipment other than that veyor. Only GL-approved cast resins may be used for mentioned in Section 9a, H., if equivalent evidence of seatings. Note is to be taken of the installation instruc- mechanical strength is not available. tions issued by the manufacturer of the cast resin. 1.1.2 Application of these requirements to the For further details see the GL Rules VI – Additional auxiliary machinery couplings mentioned in 1.1.1 may Rules and Guidelines, Part 4 – Diesel Engines, Chap- generally be limited to a basic design approval by GL ter 3 – Guidelines for the Seating of Propulsion Plants of the particular coupling type. Regarding the design and Auxiliary Machinery and Part 9 – Materials and of elastic couplings for use in generator sets, reference Welding, Chapter 5 – Guidelines for the Approval of is made to 7.2.6. Reaction Plastics and Composite Materials for the Seating and Repair of Components. 1.1.3 For the dimensional design of gears and couplings for vessels with ice class, see E. 4.5.6 Shaft alignment It has to be verified by alignment calculation that the 1.2 Documents for approval requirements for shaft-, gearbox- and engine bearings Assembly and sectional drawings together with the are fulfilled in all relevant working conditions. There- necessary detail drawings and parts lists are to be fore all essential static, dynamic and thermal effects submitted to GL in triplicate for approval. They shall have to be taken into account. contain all the data necessary to enable the load calcu- The submitted calculation reports shall include the lations to be checked. complete scope of used input data and has to disclose the resulting shaft deflection, bending stress and bear- 2. Materials ing loads and the compliance with the specific maker requirements. 2.1 Approved materials An instruction for the alignment procedure has to be 2.1.1 Shafts, pinions, wheels and wheel rims of issued describing the execution on board and listing gears in the main propulsion plant shall preferably be the permissible gap and sag values for open flange made of forged steel. Rolled steel bar may also be connections or jack-up loads for bearings. used for plain, flangeless shafts. Gear wheel bodies 2 The final alignment on board has to be checked by may be made of grey cast iron or nodular cast iron or suitable measurement methods in afloat condition in may be fabricated from welded steel plate with steel or presence of the GL Surveyor. cast steel hubs. 2.1.2 Couplings in the main propulsion plant shall 5. Pressure Tests be made of steel, cast steel or nodular cast iron with a mostly ferritic matrix. Grey cast iron or suitable cast 5.1 Shaft liners aluminium alloys may also be permitted for lightly Prior to fitting in the finish-machined condition, shaft stressed external components of couplings and the liners are to be subjected to a hydraulic tightness test rotors and casings of hydraulic slip couplings. at 2 bar pressure. 2.1.3 The gears of essential equipment according to 5.2 Stern tubes Section 9a, H. are subject to the same requirements as

Prior to fitting in the finish-machined condition, cast –––––––––––––– stern tubes and cast stern tube parts are to be sub- 2 The peripheral speed of cast iron gear wheels shall generally jected to a hydraulic tightness test at 2 bar pressure. A not exceed 60 m/s, that of cast iron coupling clamps or bowls, further tightness test is to be carried out after fitting. 40 m/s.

I - Part 1 Section 9c B Propulsion System Chapter 8 GL 2007 Page 9c–7

those specified in 2.1.1 as regards the materials used. P For gears intended for equipment other than that men- ddFkaw≥≥⋅⋅ ⋅ C tioned in Section 9a, H. other materials may also be ⎡⎤4 3 ⎛⎞di permitted. n1⋅−⎢⎥⎜⎟ ⎢⎥d ⎣⎦⎝⎠a 2.1.4 Flexible coupling bodies for essential auxiliary machinery according to Section 9a, H. may gen- di erally be made of grey cast iron, and for the outer for≤ 0,4 the expression d coupling bodies a suitable aluminium alloy may also a be used. However, for generator sets use shall only be 4 ⎡⎤⎛⎞d made of coupling bodies preferably made of nodular ⎢⎥1maybesetto1,0.− i cast iron with a mostly ferritic matrix, of steel or of ⎜⎟ ⎢⎥⎝⎠da cast steel, to ensure that the couplings are well able to ⎣⎦ withstand the shock torques occasioned by short circuits. GL reserve the right to impose similar require- d = required outside diameter of shaft [mm] ments on the couplings of particular auxiliary drive units. di = diameter of shaft bore, if applicable [mm]

da = actual shaft diameter [mm] 2.2 Testing of materials P = driving power of shaft [kW] All gear and coupling components which are involved -1 in the transmission of torque and which are intended for n = shaft speed [min ] the main propulsion plant have to be tested in accordance with the GL Rules II – Materials and Welding, F = factor for the type of drive [–] Part 1 – Metallic Materials. The same applies to the = 95 for turbine plants, electrical drives and materials used for gear components with major torque internal combustion engines with slip transmission function and couplings in generator couplings drives. = 100 for all other types of drive. GL reserve For fishing vessels with L < 24 m Inspection Certifi- the right to specify higher F values if cates 3.1 B according to EN 10204 : 1995 can be ac- this appears necessary in view of the cepted. loading of the plant. Suitable documentation is to be submitted for the C = material factor [–] materials used for the major components of the cou- W plings and gears of all other functionally essential 560 equipment in accordance with Section 9a, H. This = R160+ documentation may be a GL Material Test Certificate m or an acceptance test Certificate of the steelmaker. 2 Rm = tensile strength of the shaft material [N/mm ]

3. Calculation of the load-bearing capacity of However, for wheel shafts the value applied cylindrical and bevel gearing for Rm in the formula shall not be higher than 800 N/mm2. For pinion shafts the actual ten- For gears in main propulsion plants and for dynami- sile strength value may be applied. cally and statically loaded gears of essential equipment sufficient load bearing capacity of the toothing k = 1,10 for gear shafts [–] has to be proven according to Chapter 2 – Machinery = 1,15 for gear shafts in the area of the pinion Installations, Section 5, C. But for fishing vessels with or wheel body if this is keyed to the L < 24 m, the following minimum safety margins for shaft and for multiple-spline shafts. flank and root bending stress may be used: Higher values of k may be specified by GL SH = 1,3 SF = 1,8 for vessels with one propul- where increased bending stresses in the shaft sion line are liable to occur because of the bearing arrangement, the casing design, the tooth pres- SH = 1,2 SF = 1,55 for vessels with two propulsion lines sure, etc.

4. Gear shafts 5. Equipment

4.1 Minimum diameter 5.1 Oil level indicator The dimensions of shafts of reversing and reduction For monitoring the lubricating oil level in main and gears are to be calculated by applying the following auxiliary gears, equipment shall be fitted to enable the formula: oil level to be determined.

Chapter 8 Section 9c B Propulsion System I - Part 1 Page 9c–8 GL 2007

-1 5.2 Pressure and temperature control n = operating speed of body to be balanced [min ]

Temperature and pressure gauges are to be fitted to z = number of balancing planes [–] monitor the lubricating oil pressure and the lubricating oil temperature at the oil-cooler outlet before the oil Q = degree of balance [–] enters the gears. = 6,3 for gear shafts, pinions and coupling Plain journal bearings are also to be fitted with tem- members for engine gears perature indicators. Where gears are fitted with anti-friction bearings, a = 2,5 for torsion shafts and gear couplings, pinions and gear wheels within turbine temperature indicator is to be mounted at a suitable driven plants point. For gears rated up to 2000 kW, special arrangements may be agreed with GL. 6.2 Testing of gears Where vessels are equipped with automated machinery, the requirements of Section 12 are to be complied with. 6.2.1 Testing in the manufacturer's works When the testing of materials and component tests 5.3 Lubricating oil pumps have been carried out, gearing systems for the main Lubricating oil pumps driven by the gearing must be propulsion plant and for essential auxiliaries in accor- mounted in such a way that they are accessible and dance with Section 9a, H. are to be presented to GL can be replaced. for final inspection and operational testing in the manufacturer's works. For the inspection of welded For the pumps to be fitted, see Section 9d. gear casing, see GL Rules II – Materials and Welding, Part 3 – Welding, Chapter 3 – Welding in the Various 5.4 Gear casings Fields of Application. The casings of gears belonging to the main propulsion The final inspection is to be combined with a trial run plant and to essential auxiliaries shall be fitted with lasting several hours under part or full-load condi- removable inspection covers to enable the toothing to tions, on which occasion the tooth clearance and con- be inspected, the thrust bearing clearance to be meas- tact pattern are to be checked. In the case of a trial at ured and oil sump to be cleaned. full-load, any necessary running-in of the gears shall have been completed beforehand. Where no test facili- 5.5 Seating of gears ties are available for the operational and on-load testing of large gear trains, these tests may also be per- The seating of gears on steel or cast resin chocks is to formed on board vessel on the occasion of the dock conform to the GL Rules VI – Additional Rules and trials. Guidelines, Part 4 – Diesel Engines, Chapter 3 – Guidelines for the Seating of Propulsion Plants and Tightness tests are to be performed on those compo- Auxiliary Machinery. nents to which such testing is appropriate. In the case of cast resin seatings, the thrust must be Reductions in the scope of the tests require the consent absorbed by means of stoppers. The same applies to of GL. cast resin seatings of separate thrust bearings.

6.2.2 Tests during sea trials 6. Balancing and testing 6.2.2.1 Prior to the start of sea trials, the teeth of the 6.1 Balancing gears belonging to the main propulsion plant are to be coloured with suitable dye to enable the contact pat- 6.1.1 Gear wheels, pinions, shafts, gear couplings tern to be checked. During the sea trials, the gears are and, where applicable, high-speed flexible couplings to be checked at all forward and reverse speeds for shall be assembled in a properly balanced condition. their operational efficiency and smooth running as well as the bearing temperatures and the pureness of 6.1.2 The generally permissible residual imbalance the lubricating oil. At the latest on conclusion of the U per balancing plane of gears for which static or dy- sea trials, the gearing is to be examined via the inspec- namic balancing is rendered necessary by the method tion openings and the contact pattern checked. If pos- of manufacture and by the operating and loading condi- sible the contact pattern has to be checked after con- tions can be determined by applying the formula clusion of every load step. Assessment of the contact pattern is to be based on the guide values for the pro- 9,6 ⋅ Q ⋅ G U = [kgmm] portional area of contact in the axial and radial direc- z ⋅ n tions of the teeth given in Table 9c.1 and shall take account of the running time and loading of the gears G = mass of body to be balanced [kg] during the sea trial.

I - Part 1 Section 9c C Propulsion System Chapter 8 GL 2007 Page 9c–9

Table 9c.1 Percentage area of contact issue of a general type approval for flexible couplings to be introduced into shipbuilding for the first time, Material / Working tooth Width of tooth GL reserve the right to call for the execution of special Manufactur- depth (without (without end dynamic loading tests appropriate to the design of the ing tip relief) relief) coupling in question. of toothing 7.2.4 With regard to casings, flanges and bolts of heat-treated, 33 % average 70 % flexible couplings, the requirements specified in A.4. milling shaping values are to be complied with. surface-hard- 40 % average ened, grinding, 80 % 7.2.5 When flexible couplings are exposed due to values scarping special arrangements (e.g. couplings in propeller shaft line) to additional axial forces (thrust), their design shall be adequate to transmit these forces additionally 6.2.2.2 In the case of multistage gear trains and to the torque. planetary gears manufactured to a proven high degree of accuracy, checking of the contact pattern after sea 7.2.6 Flexible couplings for diesel generator sets trials may, with the consent of GL, be reduced. shall be capable of absorbing impact moments due to electrical short circuits up to a value of 6 times the nominal torque of the plant. 7. Design and construction of couplings 7.3 Flange and clamp-type couplings 7.1 Tooth couplings In the dimensional design of the coupling bodies, 7.1.1 Adequate loading capacity of the tooth flanks flanges and bolts of flange and clamp-type couplings, has to be proven according the generally accepted the requirements specified in A. are to be complied methods defined in Chapter 2 – Machinery Installa- with. tions, Section 5, G. For fishing vessels with L < 24 m Inspection Certificates 3.1 B according to EN 10204 : 7.4 Testing of couplings 1995 can be accepted. Couplings for vessel's propulsion plants and couplings 7.1.2 The coupling teeth are to be effectively lubri- for generator sets and transverse thrusters are to be cated. For this purpose a constant oil level maintained presented to GL for final inspection and, where appro- in the coupling may generally be regarded as adequate priate, for the performance of functional and tightness if tests. d ⋅ n2 < 6 ⋅ 109 [mm/min2]

For higher values of d ⋅ n2, couplings in main propul- C. Propellers and Special Propulsion Devices sion plants are to be provided with a circulating lubrication oil system. 1. General 7.1.3 For the dimensional design of the coupling sleeves, flanges and bolts of tooth couplings the for- 1.1 Scope mulae given in A. are to be applied. The requirements defined in C. apply to fixed pitch 7.2 Flexible couplings screw propellers and lateral thrust units. For controllable pitch propellers see Chapter 2 – Machinery Instal- 7.2.1 Flexible couplings shall be type approved for lations, Section 6, B. and D.; for rudder propeller units the loads specified by the manufacturer and for use in see Section 14, B. main propulsion plants and essential auxiliary machinery. 1.2 Documents for approval

7.2.2 Flexible couplings in the main propulsion 1.2.1 The general conditions for these documents plant and in power-generating plants shall be so di- are defined in Section 1, E. mensioned that they are able to withstand for a reasonable time operation with one engine cylinder out of 1.2.2 Design drawings of propellers in main pro- service. Additional dynamic loads for vessels with ice pulsion systems having an engine output in excess of class are to be taken into account. In this connection 300 kW and in lateral thrust systems of over 500 kW, reference is made to E. as well as a general arrangement drawing are to be submitted to GL in triplicate for examination. The 7.2.3 With regard to the routine supervision of drawings are required to contain all the details neces- coupling types already approved by GL and in order to sary to carry out an examination in accordance with prove adequate dynamic fatigue strength prior to the the following requirements.

Chapter 8 Section 9c C Propulsion System I - Part 1 Page 9c–10 GL 2007

1.3 Materials CG = size factor in accordance with formula (2) [–]

1.3.1 Propellers and propeller hubs Cdyn = dynamic factor in accordance with formula (3) [–] Propellers are to be made of sea-water-resistant cast C = characteristic material value for propeller copper alloys or cast steel alloys with a minimum W material [–] as shown in Table 9c.2 (corre- tensile strength of 440 N/mm2, according to the GL sponds to the minimum tensile strength Rm of Rules II – Materials and Welding, Part 1 – Metallic the propeller material where this has been Materials. For the purpose of the following design shown to possess sufficient fatigue strength requirements governing the thickness of the propeller under alternating bending stresses in accor- blades, the requisite resistance to seawater of a cast dance with 1.3.1) copper alloy or cast steel alloy is considered to be achieved if the alloy used is capable to withstand a fatigue test under alternating bending stresses com- Table 9c.2 Characteristic values Cw prising 108 load cycles amounting to about 20 % of 1 the minimum tensile strength and carried out in a 3 % Material Description Cw NaCl solution, and if it can be proven that the fatigue strength under alternating bending stresses in natural Cu 1 Cast manganese brass 440 seawater is not less than about 65 % of the values Cu 2 Cast manganese nickel brass 440 established in 3 % NaCl solution. Sufficient fatigue Cu 3 Cast nickel aluminium bronze 590 strength under alternating bending stresses has to be Cu 4 Cast manganese aluminium 630 proven by a method recognized by GL. bronze

1.3.2 Components for built-up propellers Fe 1 Unalloyed cast steel 440 Fe 2 Low-alloy cast steel 440 The blade retaining bolts of assembled propellers are Fe 3 Martensitic cast chrome steel 600 to be manufactured from seawater-resistant materials 13/1-6 if they are not protected against contact with seawater. Fe 4 Martensitic cast chrome steel 600 17/4 1.3.3 Novel materials Fe 5 Ferritic-austenitic cast steel 600 Where it is proposed to use propeller materials whose 24/8 serviceability is not attested by a sufficient period of Fe 6 Austenitic cast steel 18/8-11 500 practical experience, GL has to be provided with spe- 1 For the chemical composition of the alloys, see GL Rules cial proof of the suitability of such materials. II – Materials and Welding.

1.3.4 Material testing C = conicity of shaft ends [–] The material of propellers, propeller bosses and all other essential components involved in the transmis- difference in taper diameter = sion of torque is to be tested in accordance with the length of taper GL Rules II – Materials and Welding, Part 1 – Metal- lic Materials. For fishing vessels having an output below 300 kW Manufacturer Inspection Certificates d = pitch circle diameter of blade or propeller- according to GL Rules II – Materials and Welding, fastening bolts [mm] Part 1 – Metallic Materials, Chapter 1 – Principles and d = root diameter of blade or propeller-fastening Test Procedures, Section 1, H. can be accepted. k bolts [mm] 2. Dimensions and design of propellers D = diameter of propeller [mm]

2.1 Symbols and terms = 2 ⋅ R

A = effective area of a shrink fit [mm2] dm = mean taper diameter [mm]

B = developed blade width of cylindrical sections e = blade rake to aft acc. Fig. 9c.2 [mm] at radii 0,25 R, 0,35 R and 0,6 R in an ex- = R ⋅ tan ε panded view [mm] ET = thrust stimulating factor in accordance with cA = coefficient for shrunk joints [–] formula (5) [–]

= 1,0 for engine gear transmissions and electric f, f1, f2 = factors in formulae (2), (4) and (7) [–] motor drives H = pitch of propeller blade pressure side at radii = 1,2 for direct drives 0,25 R, 0,35 R and 0,6 R [mm]

I - Part 1 Section 9c C Propulsion System Chapter 8 GL 2007 Page 9c–11

Hm = mean effective propeller pitch on pressure z = number of blades [–] side for pitch varying with the radius [mm] α = pitch angle of profile at radii 0,25 R, 0,35 R Σ⋅⋅(R B H) and 0,6 R [°] = Σ⋅(R B) 1,27 ⋅ H α = arc tan 0,25 D R, B and H are corresponding measures of the various sections. 0,91⋅ H α = arc tan 0,35 D k = coefficient for various profile shapes in accordance with Table 9c.3 [–] 0,53 ⋅ H α = arc tan 0,6 D Table 9c.3 Values of k for various profile shapes ε = angle included by face generatrix and normal Values of k [°] Profile shape 0,25 R 0,35 R 0,6 R Θ = half-conicity [–] C Segmental profiles = with circular arced 73 62 44 2 back µo = coefficient of static friction [–] Segmental profiles = 0,13 for hydraulic oil shrunk joints brass/ with parabolic 77 66 47 bronze to steel suction side = 0,15 for hydraulic oil shrunk joints steel to Blade profiles as steel for Wageningen B 80 66 44 = 0,18 for dry shrunk joints brass/bronze to steel Series propellers = 0,20 for dry shrunk joints steel to steel L = pull-up length when mounting propeller on ψ = skew angle acc. to Fig. 9c.2 [°] taper [mm] σ max = ratio of maximum to mean stress at pressure L = pull-up length at t = 35 °C [mm] mech σm side of blades [–] Ltemp = temperature-related portion of pull-up length at t < 35 °C [mm] 2.2 Calculation of blade thickness M = torque [Nm] 2.2.1 At radii 0,25 R and 0,6 R, the maximum blade thickness of solid propellers shall, at minimum n = propeller speed [min-1] 2 comply with formula (1). Pw = nominal power of driving engine [kW] t ≥ K0 ⋅ k ⋅ K1 ⋅ CG ⋅ Cdyn (1) p = surface pressure in shrink joint between pro- 2 peller and shaft [N/mm ] e ⋅ cos α n 2 K0 = 1 + + Q = peripheral force at mean taper diameter [N] H 15000 2 Rp 0,2 = 0,2 % proof stress [N/mm ] k as in Table 9c.3 2 ReH = yield strength [N/mm ] 5 ⎛⎞D 2 P102⋅ ⋅⋅⎜⎟ ⋅ cossin α+α Rm = tensile strength [N/mm ] w ⎝⎠Hm K1 = S = margin of safety against propeller slipping on nBzCcos⋅⋅⋅ ⋅2 ε cone 2w = 2,8 [–] CG = size factor [–] t = maximum blade thickness of developed cy- D f − lindrical section at radii 0,25 R (t ), 0,35 1 0,25 = 1000 (2) R (t0,35), 0,6 R (t0,6) and 1,0 R (t1,0) [mm] 12,2 T = propeller thrust [N] 1,1≥≥ CG 0, 85 VS = speed of vessel [kn] w = wake fraction [–] f1 = 7,2 for solid propellers = 6,2 for separately casted blades of built-up W , W = section modulus of cylindrical blade 0,35R 0,6R propellers section at radii 0,35 R and 0,6 R [mm3] Cdyn = dynamic factor [–]

Chapter 8 Section 9c C Propulsion System I - Part 1 Page 9c–12 GL 2007

e max. t 1,0 1,0 R thickness line

(+) (-) 0,9 R

0,8 R mid chord line

curve of 0,7 R swept area t 0,6 0,6 R

B0,6 0,5 R y 0,4 R D

t 0,25 0,25 R rS r 0,2 R D B0,25

trailing edge leading edge

Blade-sections according to Wageningen B-series e

Fig. 9c.2 Blade geometry

2.2.2 The blade thicknesses calculated by applying σσ−max/0,8 m Cdyn = ≥ 1, 0 (3) formula (1) are minima for the finish-machined pro- 0,7 pellers.

σ 2.2.3 The fillet radius at the transition from the for max > 1, 5 ; otherwise pressure and suction side of the blades to the propeller σm boss shall correspond, in the case of three and four- bladed propellers, to about 3,5 % of the propeller dia- Cdyn = 1,0 meter. For propellers with a larger number of blades the maximum possible fillet radius shall be aimed at, but the radius shall not in any case be made smaller σmax/σm is generally to be taken from the detailed than 40 % of the blade root thickness. calculation analogously to the calculation in 2.2.5. If, in exceptional cases, no such calculation exists, the 2.2.4 A variable fillet radius, ensuring a uniform stress ratio may be calculated approximately accord- stress distribution, may be accepted based on a ing to formula (4). strength calculation case by case. The resulting calculated maximum stress shall not exceed the values, σmax resulting from a standard constant fillet radius design = f2 ⋅ ET + 1 (4) in accordance to 2.2.3. σm 2.2.5 For special designs such as propellers with Vn⋅⋅−⋅ (1w)D3 skew angle ψ ≥ 25°, tip fin propellers, special profiles, E = 4,3⋅ 10−9 S2 (5) T T etc., special mechanical strength calculations are to be submitted to GL. f2 = 0,4 – 0,6 for single-screw vessels, the lower A blade geometry data file and details on the meas- value applying to stern shapes with a wide ured wake are to be submitted to GL by data carrier or propeller tip clearance and no rudder heel, e-mail: [email protected], together with the design and the larger value to sterns with small documents to enable the check of the blade stress clearance and with rudder heel. Intermediate distribution of these special designs. values are to be selected accordingly. 2.2.6 If the propeller is subjected to an essential = 0,2 for twin-screw vessels wear due to special operating conditions, e.g. abrasion

I - Part 1 Section 9c C Propulsion System Chapter 8 GL 2007 Page 9c–13

in tidal flats, a wear addition has to be provided to the The safety factor has to be taken as S = 2,8 for geared thickness determined under 2.2.1. If the actual thick- plants. ness in service drops below 50 % at the blade tip or 90 % at other radii of the rule thickness obtained from For direct drives the safety factor has to be taken as 2.2.1, effective countermeasures have to be taken. S = 1,0 and the peripheral force Q has to be replaced by QFR according to formula (10) In case of unconventional blade geometries according to 2.2.5, the design thickness as shown on the ap- Q2,0Q1,8QFR=⋅+⋅ V− MCR (10) proved drawing shall be used in lieu of the rule thickness according to 2.2.1. where QFR replaces Q in formula (7).

3. Propeller Mounting QV-MCR is the maximum value from torsional vibration evaluations, but is not to be taken less than 0,44 times 3.1 Cone connection the Q value. The torsional vibration evaluation is to consider the worst relevant operating conditions, e.g. 3.1.1 Where the cone connection between the shaft such as misfiring (one cylinder with no injection) and and the propeller is fitted with a key, the propeller is cylinder unbalance. to be mounted on the tapered shaft in such a way that approximately 120 % of the mean torque can be trans- 3.1.3 The von Mises' equivalent stress based on the mitted from the shaft to the propeller by the frictional maximum specific pressure p and the tangential stress bond. in the bore of the propeller hub may not exceed 75 % of the 0,2 % proof stress or yield strength of the pro- The tapers of propellers which are mounted with a key peller material when the propeller is installed and 90 should not be more than 1 : 10 or less than 1 : 15. % during mounting and dismounting, respectively. 3.1.2 Where the tapered fit to the shaft is per- 3.1.4 The cones of propellers which are mounted formed by the hydraulic oil technique without the use on the propeller shaft with the aid of the hydraulic oil of a key, the necessary pull-up distance L on the ta- technique shall not be more than 1 : 15 and not less pered shaft is given by formula (6). Where appropri- than 1 : 25. ate, allowance is also to be made for surface smoothing when calculating L. 3.1.5 The propeller nut shall be strongly secured to L = Lmech + Ltemp (6) the propeller shaft.

Where appropriate allowance is also made for surface 3.2 Blade retaining bolts smoothing when calculating L, where Lmech is determined according to the formulae of elasticity theory The blade retaining bolts of built-up propellers have to applied to shrink joints for a specific surface pressure be dimensioned according to Chapter 2 – Machinery p [N/mm²] at the mean taper diameter determined by Installations, Section 6, D.3. For fishing vessels with applying formula (7) and for a water temperature of a length L < 24 m the dimensioning may follow the 35 °C. GL Rules Part 2 – Inland Navigation Vessels, C – Machinery, Systems and Electricity, Ch. 1, Sec. 2, 22 2 6 2 2 4.4.4. Θ⋅TfccQT + ⋅()Ae ⋅ ⋅ + ±Θ⋅ T p = (7) Af⋅ 3.3 Flange connections

2 The flange connections have to be dimensioned as for ⎛⎞μo 2 f = ⎜⎟−Θ (8) controllable pitch propellers according to the GL ⎝⎠S Rules defined in 1.1.

For fishing vessels with a length L < 24 m the dimen- dm −6 L610(35t)temp =⋅⋅⋅− (9) sioning of the flange connections may follow the C GL Rules Part 2 – Inland Navigation Vessels, C – Machinery, Systems and Electricity, Ch. 1, Sec. 2, t = the temperature at which the propeller is 4.6.2. mounted [°C]

Ltemp applies only to propellers made of brass, 4. Balancing and testing bronze and austenitic steel. Note: 4.1 Balancing "+" sign following the root applies to shrunk joints Monobloc propellers ready for mounting are required of tractor propeller to undergo static balancing. Thereby the mass differ- "–" sign following the root applies to shrunk joints ence between blades of built-up fixed pitch propeller of push propeller has to be less than 1,5 %.

Chapter 8 Section 9c D Propulsion System I - Part 1 Page 9c–14 GL 2007

4.2 Testing The pipe connections of hydraulic drive systems are subject to the applicable requirements contained in 4.2.1 Fixed pitch propellers are to be presented to D.2.1.3 and D.2.1.4. GL for final inspection and verification of the dimen- Lateral thrust units shall be capable of being operated sions. independently of other connected systems. GL reserve the right to require non-destructive tests to Windmilling of the propeller during passages has to be be conducted to detect surface cracks or casting de- taken into account as an additional load case. Other- fects. wise effective countermeasures have to be introduced to avoid windmilling, e.g. a shaft brake. 4.2.2 Casted propeller boss caps have to be tested for tightness at the manufacturer's workshop, so far In the propeller area the thruster tunnel shall be pro- they also serve as corrosion protection. GL reserve the tected against damages caused by cavitation corrosion, right to require a tightness test of the aft propeller boss e.g. by providing effective measures such as stainless sealing in assembled condition. steel plating. For the electrical equipment of lateral thrust units, see 4.2.3 If the propeller is mounted onto the shaft by a Section 11g, B. hydraulic shrink fit connection, a blue print test showing at least a 70 % contact area has to be demonstrated 5.4 Tests in the manufacturer's works to the Surveyor. The blue print pattern shall not show any larger areas without contact, especially not at the D.6. is applicable as appropriate. forward cone end. The blue print pattern has to be For hydraulic pumps and motors with a drive power of demonstrated using the original components. 100 kW or more, the tests are to be conducted in the presence of a GL Surveyor. If alternatively a male / female calibre system is used, a contact area of at least 80 % has to be demonstrated For lateral thrust units with an input power of less than and certified. After ten applications or five years the 100 kW final inspection and function tests may be blue print prove has to be renewed. carried out by the manufacturer, who will then issue the relevant Inspection Certificate. 5. Lateral thrust units 5.5 Shipboard trials 5.1 General Testing is to be carried out during sea trials during which the operating times are to be established. 5.1.1 Scope The requirements contained in 5. apply to the lateral thrust unit, the control station and all the transmission D. Steering Gear elements from the control station to the lateral thrust unit. 1. General 5.1.2 Documents for approval 1.1 Scope Assembly and sectional drawings for lateral thrust For the purposes of D. steering gears comprise all the units with an input power of 100 kW and more to- equipment used to operate the rudder from the rudder gether with detailed drawings of the gear mechanism actuator to the steering station including the transmis- and propellers containing all the data necessary for sion elements. checking are each to be submitted to GL in triplicate for approval. In case of propellers, this only applies to The requirements set out in SOLAS Chapter II-1, propulsive power levels above 500 kW. Regulation 29 and 30 in their most actual version are integral part of these Rules and are to be satisfied as 5.2 Materials far as an application for fishing vessels is senseful. Materials are subject, as appropriate, to the provisions 1.2 Documents for approval of A.2., B.2. as well as of 1.3 concerning the materials and the material testing of propellers. Fishing vessels Assembly and general drawings of all steering gears, diagrams of the hydraulic and electrical equipment with L < 24 m are treated in the same way as larger together with detail drawings of all important load- vessels. transmitting components are to be submitted to GL in triplicate for approval. 5.3 Dimensioning and design The drawings and other documents shall contain all The design of the driving mechanisms of lateral thrust the information relating to materials, working pres- units is governed by A. and B., that of the propellers sures, pump delivery rates, drive motor ratings etc. by 1. to 4. necessary to enable the documentation to be checked.

I - Part 1 Section 9c D Propulsion System Chapter 8 GL 2007 Page 9c–15

2. Materials 3. Design and equipment

2.1 Approved materials 3.1 Number of steering gears

2.1.1 As a rule, important load-transmitting com- Every vessel has to be equipped with at least one main ponents of the steering gear shall be made of steel or and one auxiliary steering gear. Both steering gears cast steel complying with the GL Rules II – Materials are to be independent of each other and, wherever and Welding, Part 1 – Metallic Materials. possible, act separately upon the rudder stock. GL may agree to components being used jointly by the With the consent of GL, cast iron may be used for main and auxiliary steering gear. certain components. Pressure vessels shall in general be made of steel, cast 3.2 Main steering gear steel or nodular cast iron (with a predominantly ferritic matrix). 3.2.1 Main steering gears shall, with the rudder fully immersed in calm water, be capable of putting For welded structures, the GL Rules II – Materials and the rudder from 35° port to 35° starboard and vice Welding, Part 3 – Welding are to be observed. versa at the vessel's speed for which the rudder has been designed in accordance with Section 3. The time 2.1.2 Casings of journal and guide bearings on required to put the rudder from 35° port to 30° star- vessels with a nozzle rudder and ice class are not to be board or vice versa shall not exceed 28 seconds. The made of grey cast iron. maximum pressure occurring during this manoeuvre is referred to as working pressure. Pressure loaded com- 2.1.3 The pipes of hydraulic steering gears are to ponents of the steering gear must be designed for a be made of seamless or longitudinally welded steel pressure of at least 1,25 times the working pressure. tubes. The use of cold-drawn, unannealed tubes is not permitted. As a rule the main steering gear shall be power- operated. At points where they are exposed to damage, copper pipes for control lines are to be provided with protec- 3.2.2 Manual operation is acceptable for rudder tive shielding and are to be safeguarded against hard- stock diameters up to 120 mm calculated for torsional ening due to vibration by the use of suitable fasten- loads in accordance with Section 3. Not more than 25 ings. turns of the hand-wheel shall be necessary to put the rudder from one hard over position to the other. Tak- 2.1.4 High-pressure hose assemblies may be used ing account of the efficiency of the system, the force for short pipe connections subject to compliance with required to operate the handwheel shall generally not Section 9d, if this is necessary due to vibrations or exceed 200 N. flexibly mounted units. 3.3 Auxiliary steering gear 2.1.5 The materials used for pressurized components including the seals shall be suitable for the hy- 3.3.1 Auxiliary steering gears shall, with the rudder draulic oil in use. fully immersed in calm water, be capable of putting the rudder from 15° port to 15° starboard or vice versa 2.2 Testing of materials within 60 seconds at 50 % of the vessel's maximum speed, subject to a minimum of eight knots. Hydrauli- 2.2.1 The materials of important load-transmitting cally operated auxiliary steering gears are to be fitted components of the steering gear as well as of the pres- with their own piping system independent of that of surized casings of hydraulic steering gears are to be the main steering gear. The pipe or hose connections tested under the supervision of GL in accordance with of steering gears shall be capable of being shut off the Rules II – Materials and Welding, Part 1 – Metal- directly at the pressurized casings. lic Materials. 3.3.2 Manual operation of auxiliary steering gear For pressurized oil pipes the requirements according systems is permitted up to a theoretical stock diameter to Section 9d are to be observed of 230 mm referring to steel with a minimum nominal 2 For welded pressurized casings, the GL Rules II – upper yield stress ReH = 235 N/mm . Materials and Welding, Part 3 – Welding are to be applied. 3.4 Power unit

2.2.2 In the case of small hand-operated main 3.4.1 Where power operated hydraulic main steer- steering gears and small manually operated auxiliary ing gears are equipped with two or more identical equipment GL may dispense with testing the materials power units, no auxiliary steering gear need be in- of individual components such as axiometer gear stalled provided that the following conditions are shafts, etc. fulfilled.

Chapter 8 Section 9c D Propulsion System I - Part 1 Page 9c–16 GL 2007

3.4.1.1 The power units shall be so designed that 3.8.2 Relief valves have to be provided for protect- requirements 3.2.1 and 4. are complied with while any ing any part of the hydraulic system which can be one of the power units is out of operation. isolated and in which pressure can be generated from the power source or from external forces. 3.4.1.2 In the event of failure of a single component of the main steering gear including the piping, exclud- The relief valves shall be set to a pressure value equal ing the rudder tiller or similar components as well as or higher than the working pressure but lower than the cylinders, rotary vanes and casing, means are to be 1,25 times working pressure, compare 3.2.1. provided for quickly regaining control of one steering The minimum discharge capacity of the relief valve(s) system. shall not be less than 1,1 times the total capacity of the 3.4.1.3 In the event of a loss of hydraulic oil, it shall pumps, which can deliver through it (them). be possible to isolate the damaged system in such a With this setting any higher peak pressure in the sys- way that the second control system remains fully ser- tem than 1,1 times the setting pressure of the valves viceable. has to be prohibited.

3.5 Rudder angle limitation 3.9 Controls The rudder angle in normal service is to be limited by devices fitted to the steering gear (e.g. limit switches) 3.9.1 Control of the main and auxiliary steering to a rudder angle of 35 ° on both sides. Deviations from gears shall be exercised from a steering station on the this requirement are permitted only with the consent bridge. Controls have to be mutually independent and of GL. so designed that the rudder cannot move unintentionally. 3.6 End position limitation 3.9.2 Means shall also be provided for exercising For the limitation by means of stoppers of the end control from the steering gear compartment. The positions of tillers and quadrants, see Section 3. transmission system has to be independent of that serving the main steering station. In the case of hydraulic steering gears without an end position limitation of the tiller and similar compo- 3.9.3 Suitable equipment is to be installed to pro- nents, an end position limiting device shall be fitted vide means of communication between the bridge, all within the rudder actuator. steering stations and the steering gear compartment.

3.7 Locking equipment 3.9.4 Failures of single control components (e.g. control system for variable displacement pump or flow Steering gear systems are to be equipped with a lock- control valve) which may lead to loss of steering shall ing system effective in all rudder positions, see Sec- cause an audible and visible alarm on the navigating tion 3. bridge, if loss of steering cannot be prevented by other Where hydraulic plant is fitted with shutoffs directly measures. at the cylinders or rotary vane casings, special locking equipment may be dispensed with. 3.10 Rudder angle indication For steering gears with cylinder units which may be 3.10.1 The rudder position shall be clearly indicated independently operated these shut-off devices do not on the bridge and at all steering stations. Where the have to be fitted directly on the cylinders. steering gear is operated electrically or hydraulically, the rudder angle has to be indicated by a device (rud- 3.8 Overload protection der position indicator) which is actuated either by the rudder stock itself or by parts which are rigidly con- 3.8.1 Power-operated steering gear systems are to nected to it. In case of time-dependent control of the be equipped with overload protection (slip coupling, main and auxiliary steering gear, the midship position relief valves) to ensure that the driving torque is lim- of the rudder shall be indicated on the bridge by some ited to the maximum permissible value. The overload additional means (signal lamp or similar). In general, protection device shall be secured to prevent later this indicator is still to be fitted even if the second adjustment by unauthorized persons. Means have to be control system is a manually operated hydraulic sys- provided for checking the setting while in service. tem.

The pressurized casings of hydraulic steering gears See also Sections 11a – 11 l. which also fulfil the function of the locking equipment mentioned in 3.7 are to be fitted with relief valves 3.10.2 The actual rudder position shall also be indi- unless they are so designed that the pressure generated cated at the steering gear itself. when the elastic-limit torque is applied to the rudder stock cannot cause rupture, deformation or other dam- It is recommended that an additional rudder angle age of the pressurized casing. indicator is fitted at the main engine control station.

I - Part 1 Section 9c F Propulsion System Chapter 8 GL 2007 Page 9c–17

3.11 Piping 6. Tests in the manufacturer’s works For the tests in the manufacturer’s works see Chapter 3.11.1 The pipes of hydraulic steering gear systems 2 – Machinery Installations, Section 14, A.5. are to be installed in such a way as to ensure maximum protection while remaining readily accessible. 7. Shipboard trials Pipes are to be installed at a sufficient distance from The operational efficiency of the steering gear is to be the vessel's shell. As far as possible, pipes should not proved during the sea trials. For this purpose, the Z pass through cargo spaces. manoeuvre corresponding to 3.2.1 and 3.3.1 is to be Connections to other hydraulic systems are not permit- executed as a minimum requirement. ted.

3.11.2 For the design and dimensions of pipes, valves, fittings, pressure vessels etc., see Section 9d. E. Machinery for Fishing Vessels with Ice Classes 3.12 Oil level indicators, filters 1. Scope 3.12.1 Tanks within the hydraulic system are to be The machinery of fishing vessels strengthened for equipped with oil level indicators. navigation in ice is designated after the Character of Classification +MC by the additional Notations E, E1, 3.12.2 The lowest permissible oil level is to be E2, E3 or E4, provided the requirements defined monitored. Audible and visual alarms shall be given herein and the relevant structural requirements set out on the navigating bridge and in the machinery space. in Section 3 are satisfied. The reinforcements neces- The alarm on the navigating bridge shall be individual sary for the Class Notation E may also be applied to alarm. the machinery alone.

3.12.3 Filters for cleaning the operating fluid are to 2. Minimum required propulsion power be located in the piping system. The installed propulsion power has to be equal or 3.13 Storage tank greater than the minimum required propulsion power for the corresponding ice class as defined in Chapter 1 In power-operated steering gear systems, an additional – Hull Structures, Section 15. permanently installed storage tank is to be fitted which The rated output of the main engines in accordance has a capacity sufficient to refill at least one of the with Section 9b, A.3. shall be such that they are able control systems including the service tank. This stor- to supply in continuous service the propulsion power age tank is to be permanently connected by pipes to necessary for the ice class concerned. the control systems so that the latter can be refilled from a position inside the steering gear compartment. 3. Necessary reinforcements 3.14 Arrangement Depending on the actual ice class, reinforcements have to be provided for Steering gears are to be installed in a way to be accessible at any time and to be easily maintainable. – propeller, intermediate and thrust shafts – coupling bolts, shrink joints 3.15 Electrical equipment – propellers For the electrical part of steering gear systems, see Section 11g, A. – gears – flexible couplings. 4. Power of steering gears The relevant requirements are defined in Chapter 2 – Machinery Installations, Section 13, C. The power of the steering gear is governed by the requirements set out in 3.2 and 3.3. For the determination of the necessary power the frictional losses in the rudder stock bearings and in the steering gear itself are F. Torsional Vibrations to be considered. 1. Scope 5. Design of transmission components For the purposes of these requirements, torsional vi- For the design of the transmission components bration stresses are additional loads due to torsional Chapter 2 – Machinery Installations, Section 14, A.4.2 vibrations. They result from the alternating torque applies. which is superimposed on the main torque.

Chapter 8 Section 9c F Propulsion System I - Part 1 Page 9c–18 GL 2007

2. Prohibited range of operation 2.2 Measures necessary to avoid overloading of the propulsion plant under misfiring conditions are to 2.1 Operating ranges which, because of the mag- be displayed on instruction plates to be affixed to all nitude of the torsional vibration stresses for shaftings engine control stations. and torsional torques for elastic couplings and gears, may only be passed through, are to be indicated as prohibited ranges of operation by red marks on the 3. Further details tachometer or in some other suitable manner at the operating station. In normal operation the speed range The calculations and the permissible torsional λ ≥ 0,8 is to be kept free of prohibited ranges of opera- stresses/torques, as well as relevant requirements for tion, where λ is the speed ratio actual speed to nomi- measurements are defined in Chapter 2 – Machinery nal speed. Installations, Section 16. In specifying prohibited ranges of operation it is im- For fishing vessels with a length L < 24 m measure- portant to ensure that the navigating and manoeuvring ments of torsional vibrations are in general not re- functions are not severely restricted. quired.

I - Part 1 Section 9d B Storage of Liquids, Piping Systems, Valves and Pumps Chapter 8 GL 2007 Page 9d–1

Section 9d

Storage of Liquids, Piping Systems, Valves and Pumps

A. General 2.1.4 Diagrammatic plans of the following piping systems including all the details necessary for ap- 1. Scope proval (e.g. lists of valves, fittings and pipes): – fuel systems (bunkering, transfer and supply 1.1 For fishing vessels with a length L ≥ 45 m the systems) GL Rules Chapter 2 – Machinery Installations, Sec- – seawater / fresh water cooling systems tion 11 are to be applied. For fishing vessels with a length 12 m ≤ L < 45 m, the requirements defined in – lubricating oil systems the following have to be applied. – starting air, control air and working air systems – exhaust gas systems 1.2 The requirements of B. to P. apply to pipes and piping systems, including valves, fittings and – bilge systems pumps, which are necessary for the operation of the – equipment for the treatment and storage of bilge main propulsion plant together with its auxiliaries and water and fuel oil residues equipment. They also apply to piping systems used in – air, overflow and sounding pipes including de- the operation of the vessel whose failure could directly tails of filling pipe cross sections or indirectly impair the safety of vessel or catch, and to piping systems which are dealt with in other parts – sanitary water piping (fresh water, drinking of the Rules. water, seawater & sewage) 2.1.5 For remotely controlled valves; diagrammatic 1.3 The requirements of Q. apply to the storage piping plans and the arrangement of piping and con- of liquid fuels, lubricating and hydraulic oils as well trol stands in the vessel, including power units, control as to oil residues. stands, pressure vessels and electrical circuit diagrams. 1.4 For systems and equipment not covered by these Rules, please refer to Chapter 2 – Machinery 3. Pipe classes Installations, Section 10 and Section 11. For the testing of pipes, selection of joints, welding 1.5 Ventilation systems are subject to Chapter 21 and heat treatment, pipes are subdivided into three - Ventilation. classes as indicated in Table 9d.1.

1.6 Gas welding equipment is subject to the GL Rules VI – Additional Rules and Guidelines, Part 3 – B. Materials and Testing Machinery Installations, Chapter 5 – Guidelines for the Design, Equipment and Testing of Gas Welding 1. General Installations on Seagoing Ships. Materials shall be suitable for the proposed application and comply with GL Rules II – Materials and Weld- 2. Documents for approval ing, Part 1 – Metallic Materials.

2.1 The following drawings/documents are to be In case of especially corrosive media, GL may impose submitted for approval, at least in triplicate: special requirements on the materials used. For welds see GL Rules II – Materials and Welding, Part 3 – 2.1.1 Engine room arrangement plan. Welding.

2.1.2 Ventilation system drawings for machinery 2. Materials spaces and cargo holds, stating volumes of air, coam- Components intended to be used in pipe class I and II ing heights, type of mechanical ventilators as well as are to be manufactured by GL approved manufactur- arrangement and operating devices of fire/weathertight ers. closures. 2.1 Pipes, valves and fittings of steel 2.1.3 Tank plan including particulars regarding arrangement, medium and volume of tanks as well as Pipes belonging to Classes I and II shall be either information about the maximum height of the over- seamless drawn or fabricated by a welding procedure flow level. approved by GL. In general, carbon and carbon- Chapter 8 Section 9d B Storage of Liquids, Piping Systems, Valves and Pumps I - Part 1 Page 9d–2 GL 2007

Table 9d.1 Classification of pipes into classes

Design pressure PR [bar] Medium/type of pipeline Design temperature t [°C] Pipe class I II III Air, gas Non-flammable hydraulic fluid PR > 40 PR ≤ 40 PR ≤ 16 Boiler feedwater, condensate or and and Seawater and fresh water for cooling t > 300 t ≤ 300 t ≤ 200 Brine in refrigerating plant PR > 16 PR ≤ 16 PR ≤ 7 Liquid fuels, lubricating oil, flammable hydraulic fluid or and and t > 150 t ≤ 150 t ≤ 60 Refrigerants – all – Open-ended pipelines (without shutoff), e.g. drains, venting pipes, – – – overflow lines and boiler blowdown lines

manganese steel pipes, valves and fittings are not to be 2.4 Pipes, valves and fittings of lamellar- used for temperatures above 400 °C. However, they graphite cast iron (grey cast iron) may be used for higher temperatures provided that Pipes, valves and fittings of grey cast iron may be their metallurgical behaviour and their strength prop- accepted by GL for Class III. erty after 100 000 h of operation are in accordance with national or international regulations or standards This applies also to the hose connections of fuel and and if such values are guaranteed by the steel manu- lubricating oil filling lines. facturer. Otherwise, alloy steels in accordance with GL Rules II – Materials and Welding, Part 1 – Metal- The use of grey cast iron is not allowed: lic Materials are to be used. – for pipes, valves and fittings for media having temperatures above 220 °C and for pipelines 2.2 Pipes, valves and fittings of copper and subject to water hammer, severe stresses or vi- copper alloys brations Pipes of copper and copper alloys shall be of seamless – for sea valves and pipes fitted on the vessel sides drawn material or fabricated according to a method and for valves fitted on the collision bulkhead approved by GL. Copper pipes for Classes I and II – for valves on fuel and oil tanks subject to static must be seamless. head In general, copper and copper alloy pipe lines shall not The use of grey cast iron in cases other than those be used for media having temperatures above the stated is subject to GL approval. following limits: 2.5 Plastic pipes – copper and aluminium brass 200 °C – copper nickel alloys 300 °C 2.5.1 Plastic pipes may be used after type approval 1 – high-temperature bronze 260 °C by GL. The use of such systems is restricted to pipe class III only. 2.3 Pipes, valves and fittings of nodular ferritic cast iron 2.5.2 Pipes, connecting pieces, valves and fittings made of plastic materials are to be subjected to a con- Pipes, valves and fittings of nodular ferritic cast iron tinuous GL-approved quality control by the manufac- according to the GL Rules II – Materials and Welding, turer. Part 1 – Metallic Materials may be accepted for bilge and ballast pipes within double-bottom tanks and for 2.5.3 Pipe penetrations through watertight bulk- other purposes approved by GL. heads and decks as well as through fire divisions are to be approved by GL. Dependent on application and In special cases (applications corresponding in princi- installation location additional flame tests may be ple to classes II and III) and subject to GL special required. approval, valves and fittings made of ferritic nodular cast iron may be accepted for temperatures up to 350 °C. Nodular ferritic cast iron for pipes, valves and fittings fitted on the vessel's side have to comply with –––––––––––––– GL Rules II – Materials and Welding, Part 1 – Metal- 1 See IMO Resolution A.753 (18): Guidelines for the Applica- lic Materials. tion of Plastic Pipes on Ships.

I - Part 1 Section 9d B Storage of Liquids, Piping Systems, Valves and Pumps Chapter 8 GL 2007 Page 9d–3

2.5.4 Plastic pipes are to be continuously and per- 2.6 Aluminium and aluminium alloys manently marked with the following particulars: Aluminium and aluminium alloys shall comply with – manufacturer's marking GL Rules II – Materials and Welding, Part 1 – Metal- – standard specification number lic Materials and may in individual cases, with the agreement of GL, be used for temperatures up to – outside diameter and wall thickness of pipe 200 °C. They are not acceptable for use in fire extin- – year of manufacture guishing lines.

2.5.5 Valves and connecting pieces made of plastic 2.7 Application of materials shall, as a minimum requirement, be marked with the manufacturer's marking and the outside diameter of For the pipe classes mentioned in A.3. materials shall the pipe. be applied according to Table 9d.2

Table 9d.2 Approved materials

Pipe class Material or application I II III Steel pipes for high temperatures above 300 °C, Pipes for Steel not subject to any special pipes made of steel with high/ low Pipes general quality specification, weldability in temperature toughness at tempera- applications accordance with Rules for Welding tures below – 10 °C, stainless steel pipes for chemicals Forgings, Steel suitable for the corresponding service and processing conditions, plates, high temperature steel for temperatures above 300 °C, flanges, steel with high/low-temperature toughness for temperatures below –10 °C Steels Bolts for general machinery constructions, high-temperature steel for tempera- Bolts, tures above 300 °C, Bolts for general machine construction nuts steel with high/low temperature toughness for temperatures below –10 °C High-temperature cast steel for temperatures above 300 °C, cast steel with high/low tempera- Cast steel ture toughness at temperatures Cast steel for general applications below –10 °C, stainless castings for aggressive media Nodular cast iron Only ferritic grades, elongation A5 at least 15 % At least GG-20 up to 220 °C, grey cast iron is not permitted for valves Cast iron with lamel- – – and fittings on ship's side, on the lar graphite collision bulkhead and on fuel and Castings (valves, fittings, pipes) pipes) fittings, Castings (valves, oil tanks

Copper, For seawater and alkaline water only corrosion resis- – copper alloys tant copper and copper alloys rous r fe Aluminium,i) alumin- Only with the agreement of GL up to 200 °C, metals metals – ium alloys not permitted in fire extinguishing systems Non (valves, fittings,

On special approval Plastics – – (see 2.5) materials Non-metallic

Chapter 8 Section 9d B Storage of Liquids, Piping Systems, Valves and Pumps I - Part 1 Page 9d–4 GL 2007

Table 9d.3 Approved material and types of material Certificates

Type of Design Pipe Nominal diameter Type Certificate + Approved materials component temperature class DN A B C Pipes 1, Steel, > 50 × − − I Pipe elbows, Copper, ≤ 50 – × – > 50 – × – Fittings Copper alloys, II – ≤ 50 – – × Aluminium Aluminium alloys III All – – × Plastics Valves 1, Steel, Flanges, Cast steel, > 300 °C DN > 100 × – – Nodular cast iron I, II DN ≤ 100 – × – Copper, > 225 °C Copper alloys PB × DN > 2500 Steel, × – – or DN > 250 Cast steel, ≤ 300 °C I, II PB × DN ≤ 2500 Nodular cast iron – × – and DN ≤ 250 Steel, Cast steel, – III All – – × Nodular cast iron, Grey cast iron Copper, ≤ 225 °C PB × DN > 1500 × – – Copper alloys I, II Aluminium, ≤ 200 °C PB × DN ≤ 1500 – × – Aluminium alloys Acc. to Type Plastics Approval III All – – × Certificate Semi-finished products, I, II – – × – Screws and According to Table 9d.2 – other compo- III – – – × nents

1 Casings of valves and pipes fitted on vessel’s side and bottom and bodies of valves fitted on collision bulkhead are to be included in pipe class II. + Test Certificates are to be issued in accordance with GL Rules II – Materials and Welding, Part 1 – Metallic Materials, Chapter 1 – Principles and Test Procedures, Section 1, H. with the following abbreviations: A: GL Material Certificate, B: Manufacturer Inspection Certificate, C: Manufacturer Test Report

I - Part 1 Section 9d B Storage of Liquids, Piping Systems, Valves and Pumps Chapter 8 GL 2007 Page 9d–5

3. Testing of materials Table 9d.4 Design pressure for fuel pipes

3.1 For piping systems belonging to class I and Max. working II, tests in accordance with GL Rules II – Materials temperature and Welding, Part 1 – Metallic Materials and under T ≤ 60 °C T > 60 °C GL supervision are to be carried out in accordance Max. working with Table 9d.3 for: pressure 3 bar or max. 3 bar or max. working pres- working pres- – pipes, bends and fittings PB ≤ 7 bar sure, whichever sure, whichever – valve bodies and flanges is greater is greater 14 bar or max. max. working working pres- PB > 7 bar 3.2 Welded joints in pipelines of classes I and II pressure sure, whichever are to be tested in accordance with GL Rules II – Ma- is greater terials and Welding, Part 3 – Welding.

4.2 Pressure test prior to installation on board 4. Hydraulic tests on pipes 4.2.1 All Class I and II pipes as well as steam lines, 4.1 Definitions feed water pressure pipes, compressed air and fuel lines having a design pressure PR greater than 3,5 bar 4.1.1 Maximum allowable working pressure PB together with their integral fittings, connecting pieces, [bar], Formula symbol: pe,zul branches and bends, after completion of manufacture but before insulation and coating, if this is provided, This is the maximum allowable internal or external shall be subjected to a hydraulic pressure test in the working pressure for a component or piping system presence of the Surveyor at the following value of with regard to the materials used, piping design re- pressure: quirements, the working temperature and undisturbed operation. pp = 1,5 ⋅ pc [bar] pc = design pressure 4.1.2 Nominal pressure, PN [bar] This is the term applied to a selected pressure tem- 4.2.2 Where for technical reasons it is not possible perature relation used for the standardization of struc to carry out complete hydraulic pressure tests on all tural components. In general, the numerical value of sections of piping before assembly on board, propos- the nominal pressure for a standardized component als are to be submitted to GL for approval for testing made of the material specified in the standard will pipe connections on board, particularly in respect of correspond to the maximum allowable working pres- welding seams. sure PB at 20 °C. 4.2.3 Where the hydraulic pressure test of piping is 4.1.3 Test pressure, PP [bar], Formula symbol: carried out on board, these tests may be conducted in pp conjunction with the tests required under 4.3.

This is the pressure to which components or piping 4.2.4 Pressure testing of pipes with less than DN 15 systems are subjected for testing purposes. may be omitted at GL's discretion depending on the application.

4.1.4 Design pressure, PR [bar], Formula sym- 4.3 Test after installation on board bol: pc 4.3.1 After assembly on board, all pipelines cov- This is the maximum allowable working pressure PB ered by these requirements are to be subjected to a for which a component or piping system is designed tightness test in the presence of a GL Surveyor. with regard to its mechanical characteristics. In general, the design pressure is the maximum allowable In general, all pipe systems are to be tested for leakage working pressure at which the safety equipment will under operational conditions. If necessary, special interfere (e.g. activation of safety valves, opening of techniques other than hydraulic pressure tests are to be return lines of pumps, operating of overpressure safety applied. arrangements, opening of relief valves) or at which the pumps will operate against closed valves. 4.3.2 Heating coils in tanks and pipe lines for fuels The design pressure for fuel pipes shall be chosen are to be tested to not less than 1,5 PR but in no case according to Table 9d.4. less than 4 bar.

Chapter 8 Section 9d C Storage of Liquids, Piping Systems, Valves and Pumps I - Part 1 Page 9d–6 GL 2007

4.4 Pressure testing of valves GL Rules II – Materials and Welding, Part 1 – Metal- lic Materials. The following valves are to be subjected in the manufacturer's works to a hydraulic pressure test in the presence of a GL Surveyor: – valves of pipe classes I and II to 1,5 PR C. Wall Thickness of Pipe Lines – valves on the vessel's side to not less than 5 bar 1. Minimum wall thickness Shut-off devices of the above type are to be additionally tested for tightness with the nominal pressure. 1.1 The pipe thicknesses stated in Tables 9d.5 to 9d.8 are the assigned minimum thicknesses, unless 5. Structural tests, heat treatment and non- due to stress analysis greater thicknesses are neces- destructive testing sary. Attention shall be given to the workmanship in con- Provided that the pipes are effectively protected struction and installation of the piping systems accord- against corrosion, the wall thicknesses of group M and ing to the approved data in order to obtain the maxi- D stated in Table 9d.6 may, with GL's agreement, be mum efficiency in service. For details concerning reduced by up to 1 mm, the amount of the reduction is structural tests and tests following heat treatments, see to be in relation to the wall thickness.

Table 9d.5 Minimum wall thickness groups N, M and D of steel pipes and approved locations

Location

Piping system Machinery Spaces / void spaces Cofferdams holds Cargo Ballast water tanks tanks Fuel and changeover tanks water cooling Fresh oil tanks Lubricating Hydraulic oil tanks tanks water Drinking Thermal oil tanks and Condensate feedwater tanks Accommodation deck Weather

Bilge lines M D M  Ballast lines M D X M X X Seawater lines D X X M 1 X Fuel lines D N Lubricating lines  X X N X X Thermal lines N  Steam lines M M M M M N N Condensate lines N N Feedwater lines X X M X X X Drinking lines X X N N Fresh water lines D N D X X Compressed air lines M M X N N M M N Hydraulic lines X X X X

1 Seawater discharge lines, see O. X Pipelines are not to be installed.

I - Part 1 Section 9d C Storage of Liquids, Piping Systems, Valves and Pumps Chapter 8 GL 2007 Page 9d–7

Table 9d.6 Minimum wall thickness for steel pipes

Group N Group M Group D

da s da s da s da s

[mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm]

10,2 1,6 from 406,4 6,3 from 21,3 3,2 from 38,0 6,3

from 13,5 1,8 from 660,0 7,1 from 38,0 3,6 from 88,9 7,1

from 20,0 2,0 from 762,0 8,0 from 51,0 4,0 from 114,3 8,0

from 48,3 2,3 from 864,0 8,8 from 76,1 4,5 from 152,4 8,8

from 70,0 2,6 from 914,0 10,0 from 177,8 5,0 from 457,2 8,8

Protective coatings, e.g. hot-dip galvanizing, can be Table 9d.8 Minimum wall thickness for recognized as an effective corrosion protection pro- copper and copper alloy pipes vided that the preservation coating during installation is guaranteed. Pipe outside Minimum wall thickness diameter s For steel pipes the wall thickness group corresponding da [mm] to the location is to be as stated in Table 9d.5. [mm] Copper Copper alloys 8 – 10 1,0 0,8 1.2 The minimum wall thicknesses for austenitic 12 – 20 1,2 1,0 stainless steel pipes are given in Table 9d.7. 25 – 44,5 1,5 1,2 50 – 76,1 2,0 1,5 Table 9d.7 Minimum wall thickness for austen- 88,9 – 108 2,5 2,0 itic stainless steel pipes 133 – 159 3,0 2,5 Pipe outside Minimum wall 193,7 – 267 3,5 3,0 diameter thickness 273 – 457,2 4,0 3,5 da s (470) 4,0 3,5 [mm] [mm] 508 4,5 4,0 up to 17,2 1,0

up to 48,3 1,6 up to 88,9 2,0 1.3 For the minimum wall thickness of air, sounding and overflow pipes through weather decks, up to 168,3 2,3 see M., Table 9d.17a. up to 219,1 2,6 1.4 Where the application of mechanical joints re- up to 273,0 2,9 sults in reduction in pipe wall thickness (bite type rings or other structural elements) this is to be taken into up to 406,0 3,6 account in determining the minimum wall thickness. over 406,0 4,0

1.5 For the calculation of pipe wall thicknesses see Chapter 2 – Machinery Installations, Section 11, C.

Chapter 8 Section 9d D Storage of Liquids, Piping Systems, Valves and Pumps I - Part 1 Page 9d–8 GL 2007

D. Principles for the Construction of Pipes, 2.2 Flange connections Valves, Fittings and Pumps 2.2.1 Dimensions of flanges and bolting shall com- 1. General principles ply with recognized standards. 2.2.2 Gaskets are to be suitable for the intended 1.1 Piping systems are to be constructed and media under design pressure and temperature condi- manufactured on the basis of standards generally used tions and their dimensions and construction shall be in in shipbuilding. accordance with recognized standards.

1.2 Welded connections rather than detachable 2.2.3 Steel flanges may be used as shown in Tables couplings shall be used for pipelines carrying toxic 9d.13 and 9d.14 in accordance with the permitted media and inflammable liquefied gases. pressures and temperatures specified in the relevant standards. 1.3 Expansion in piping systems due to heating and shifting of their suspensions caused by deforma- 2.2.4 Flanges made of non-ferrous metals may be tion of the vessel are to be compensated by bends, used in accordance with the relevant standards and compensators and flexible pipe connections. The ar- within the limits laid down in the approvals. Flanges rangement of suitable fixed points is to be taken into and brazed or welded collars of copper and copper consideration. alloys are subject to the following requirements:

1.4 Where pipes are protected against corrosion a) welding neck flanges according to standard up by special protective coatings, e.g. hot-dip galvanis- to 200 °C or 300 °C applicable to all classes of ing, rubber lining etc., it is to be ensured that the pro- pipes tective coating will not be damaged during installa- b) loose flanges with welding collar; as for a) tion. c) plain brazed flanges: for pipe class III up to a 2. Pipe connections nominal pressure of 16 bar and a temperature of 120°C 2.1 Types of pipe connections 2.2.5 Flange connections for pipe classes I and II The following pipe connections may be used: with temperatures over 300 °C are to be provided with necked-down bolts. – full penetration butt welds with/without provision to improve the quality of the root 2.3 Welded socket connections – socket welds with suitable fillet weld thickness Welded socket connections may be accepted accord- and in accordance with recognized standards ing to Table 9d.9. Following conditions are to be ob- – steel flanges may be used in accordance with the served. permitted pressures and temperatures specified in the relevant standards – The thickness of the sockets is to be in accordance with C.1.1 at least equal to the thickness – mechanical joints (e.g. pipe unions, pipe cou- of the pipe. plings, press fittings) of an approved type – The clearance between the pipes and the socket For the use of welded pipe connections, see Table is to be as small as possible. 9d.9. – The use of welded socket connections in systems of pipe class II may be accepted only under Table 9d.9 Pipe connections the condition that in the systems no excessive stress, erosion and corrosion are expected. Outside Types of connections Pipe class diameter 2.4 Screwed socket connections

Welded butt-joints 2.4.1 Screwed socket connections with parallel and with special provisions I, II, III tapered threads shall comply with requirements of for root side recognized national or international standards. Welded butt-joints all without special provi- II, III 2.4.2 Screwed socket connections with parallel sions for root side threads are permitted for pipes in class III with an outside diameter ≤ 60,3 mm as well as for subordinate III systems (e.g. sanitary and hot water heating systems). Socket weld II ≤ 60,3 mm They are not permitted for systems for flammable media.

I - Part 1 Section 9d D Storage of Liquids, Piping Systems, Valves and Pumps Chapter 8 GL 2007 Page 9d–9

2.4.3 Screwed socket connections with tapered 3.3 Watertight bulkhead penetrations of supply threads are permitted for the following: and operating installations, such as piping, scuppers or electric cables, require to be approved by type test 3 – class I, outside diameter not more than 33,7 mm that for a period of 30 minutes leakages will not occur – class II and class III, outside diameter not more at the penetrations. The pressure assumed is to at least than 60,3 mm correspond to the pressure head prevailing at the intended points of installation of the penetrations. Screwed socket connections with tapered threads are not permitted for piping systems conveying toxic or Penetrations welded into bulkheads watertight are not flammable media or services where fatigue, severe subject to type testing. erosion or crevice corrosion is expected to occur. 3.4 Piping close to electrical switchboards shall be so installed or protected that a leakage cannot dam- 2.5 Brazed connections may be used after special age the electrical installation. approval by GL. 3.5 Piping systems are to be so arranged that they 2.6 Mechanical joints can be completely emptied, drained and vented. Pip- ing systems in which the accumulation of liquids dur- 2 2.6.1 Type approved mechanical joints may be ing operation could cause damage shall be equipped used as shown in Tables 9d.10 to 9d.12. with special drain arrangements.

2.6.2 Mechanical joints in bilge and seawater sys- 3.6 Pipe lines laid through ballast tanks, which tems within machinery spaces or spaces of high fire are coated in accordance with Chapter 1 – Hull Struc- risk, shall be flame resistant. tures, Section 35, F. are to be either effectively protected against corrosion or they are to be of low sus- 2.6.3 Mechanical joints are not to be used in piping ceptibility to corrosion. sections directly connected to sea openings or tanks containing flammable liquids. The method of corrosion protection of tanks and pipes shall be compatible. 2.6.4 The use of slip-on joints is not permitted in: 3.7 The wall thickness of pipes between vessel's – bilge lines inside ballast and fuel tanks side and first shut-off device is to be in accordance – seawater and ballast lines including air and with Table 9d.17 b, column B. Pipes are to be con- overflow pipes inside cargo holds and fuel tanks nected by welding or flanges. – fuel and oil lines including air and overflow 4. Shut-off devices pipes inside machinery spaces, cargo holds and ballast tanks 4.1 Shut-off devices shall comply with a recog- – non water filled pressure water spraying systems nized standard. Valves with screwed-on covers are to (dry pipe systems) be secured to prevent unintentional loosening of the cover. Slip-on joints inside tanks may be permitted only if the pipes contain the same medium as the tanks. 4.2 Hand-operated shut-off devices are to be Unrestrained slip on joints may be used only where closed by turning in the clockwise direction. required for compensation of lateral pipe movement. 4.3 Valves must be clearly marked to show whether they are in the open or closed position. 3. Layout, marking and installation 4.4 Change-over devices in piping systems in 3.1 Piping systems shall be adequately identified which a possible intermediate position of the device according to their purpose. Valves are to be perma- could be dangerous in service shall not be used. nently and clearly marked. 4.5 Valves are to be permanently marked. The 3.2 Pipe penetrations leading through bulk- marking shall comprise at least the following details: heads/decks and tank walls have to be water and oil tight. Bolts through bulkheads are not permitted. – material of valve body Holes for fastening screws shall not be drilled in the – nominal diameter tank walls. – nominal pressure

–––––––––––––– 3 VI – Additional Rules and Guidelines, Part 7 – Guidelines for the Performance of Type Approvals, Chapter 4 – Test Re- –––––––––––––– quirements for Sealing Systems of Bulkhead and Deck Pene- 2 See also "List of Type Tested Appliances and Equipment". trations.

Chapter 8 Section 9d D Storage of Liquids, Piping Systems, Valves and Pumps I - Part 1 Page 9d–10 GL 2007

Table 9d.10 Examples of mechanical joints

Pipe Unions

Welded and brazed type

Compression Couplings

Swage type

Press type

Bite type

Flared type

Slip-on Joints

Grip type

Machine grooved type

I - Part 1 Section 9d D Storage of Liquids, Piping Systems, Valves and Pumps Chapter 8 GL 2007 Page 9d–11

Table 9d.10 Examples of mechanical joints (continued)

Slip type

Table 9d.11 Application of mechanical joints Kind of connections Systems Pipe Unions Compression couplings 5 Slip-on joints Flammable fluids (Flash point > 60 °C) Fuel oil + + + 2, 3 Lubricating oil + + + 2, 3 Hydraulic oil + + + 2, 3 Sea water Bilge + + + 1 Fire main and water spray + + + 3 Foam + + + 3 Sprinkler + + + 3 Cooling water + + + 1 Non-essential + + + Fresh water Cooling water system + + + 1 Non-essential system + + + Sanitary / Drain / Scuppers Deck drains (internal) + + + 4 Sanitary drains + + + Scuppers and discharge + + – Sounding / Vent Water tanks / Dry spaces + + + Oil tanks (F.p. > 60 °C) + + + 2, 3 Miscellaneous Starting-/ control air + + – Service air (non-essential) + + + Brine + + + 1 CO2 system + + – Abbreviations: Footnotes: + Application is allowed 1 Inside machinery spaces of category A – only approved fire resistant types – Application is not allowed 2 Not inside machinery spaces of category A or accommodation spaces. May be accepted in other machinery spaces provided the joints are located in easily visible and accessible positions. 3 Approved fire resistant types 4 Above freeboard deck only 5 If compression couplings include any components which readily deteriorate in case of fire, they are to be of approved fire resistant type as required for Slip-on joints.

Chapter 8 Section 9d D Storage of Liquids, Piping Systems, Valves and Pumps I - Part 1 Page 9d–12 GL 2007

Table 9d.12 Application of mechanical joints depending upon the class of piping

Types of joints Classes of piping systems I II III Pipe Unions + + + Welded and brazed type (da ≤ 60,3 mm) (da ≤ 60,3 mm) Compression Couplings Swage type + + + Press type – – + Bite type + + + Flared type (da ≤ 60,3 mm) (da ≤ 60,3 mm) Slip-on Joints Machine grooved type + + + Grip type – + + Slip type – + +

Abbreviations: + Application is allowed – Application is not allowed

Table 9d.13 Use of flange types

Toxic, corrosive and Lubricating combustible media, Steam, thermal oils Other media oil, fuel oil Pipe liquefied gases (LG) class Type of Temperature Type of Type of Temperature Type of PR [bar] flange [°C] flange flange [°C] flange > 10 A > 400 A A, B > 400 A I ≤ 10 A, B 1 ≤ 400 A, B 1 ≤ 400 A, B – A, B, C > 250 A, B, C A, B, C, E 2 > 250 A, B, C II ≤ 250 A, B, C, D, E ≤ 250 A, B, C, D, E

3 III – – – A, B, C, D, E A, B, C, E – A, B, C, D, E, F

1 Type B only for outside diameter da < 150 mm 2 Type E only for t < 150 °C and PR < 16 bar 3 Type F only for water pipes and open-ended lines

5. Valves on the shell plating 5.3 Valves with only one flange may be used on the shell plating and on the sea chests only after special approval. 5.1 For the mounting of valves on the shell plating, see Chapter 1 – Hull Structures, Section 6, G. 5.4 On vessels with > 500 GT, in periodically unattended machinery spaces, the controls of sea inlet discharge valves shall be sited so as to allow to reach 5.2 Valves on the shell plating shall be easily and operate sea inlet and discharge valves in case of accessible. Seawater inlet and outlet valves have to be influx of water within 106 minutes after triggering of capable of being operated from above the floor plates. the bilge alarm. Cocks on the shell plating shall be so arranged that the handle can only be removed when the cock is closed. Non return discharge valves need not to be considered.

I - Part 1 Section 9d E Storage of Liquids, Piping Systems, Valves and Pumps Chapter 8 GL 2007 Page 9d–13

6. Pumps 2.2 Shut-off devices on fuel oil tanks having a capacity of less than 500 l need not be provided with 6.1 For materials and construction requirements remote control. VI – Additional Rules and Guidelines, Part 6 – Pumps, Chapter 1 – Guidelines for Design, Construc- 2.3 Filling lines are to extend to the bottom of the tion and Testing of Pumps of GL are to be applied. tank. Short filling lines directed to the side of the tank may be admissible. Storage tank suction lines may 6.2 For the pumps listed below, a performance also be used as filling lines. test is to be carried out in the manufacturer's works under GL supervision: 2.4 Where filling lines are led through the tank – bilge pumps / bilge ejectors top and end below the maximum oil level in the tank, – cooling water pumps (seawater / freshwater) a non-return valve at the tank top is to be arranged. – fire pumps 2.5 The inlet connections of suction lines are to – lubricating oil pumps be arranged far enough from the drains in the tank so – fuel oil pumps that water and impurities which have settled out will not enter the suctions. – brine pumps / refrigerant pumps

7. Protection of piping systems against over- 3. Pipe layout pressure 3.1 Fuel lines may not pass through tanks con- The following piping systems are to be fitted with taining feed water, drinking water or lubricating oil. safety valves to avoid excessive overpressures: – piping systems and valves in which liquids can 3.2 Fuel lines which pass through tanks with be enclosed and heated other media, are to have an increased wall thickness – piping systems which may be exposed to pres- according to Table 9d.5. sures in excess of the design pressure 3.3 Fuel lines may not be laid directly above or in Safety valves shall be capable of discharging the me- the vicinity of boilers, turbines or equipment with high dium at a maximum pressure increase of 10 % of the surface temperatures (over 220 °C) or in way of other allowable working pressure. Safety valves are to be sources of ignition. fitted on the low pressure side of reducing valves. 3.4 Flanged and screwed socket connections in fuel oil lines shall be screened or otherwise suitably E. Oil Fuel Systems protected to avoid, as far as practicable, oil spray or oil leakages onto hot surfaces, into machinery air 1. Bunker lines intakes, or other sources of ignition. The bunkering of oil fuels is to be effected by means The number of detachable pipe connections is to be of permanently installed lines, from the open deck. limited. In general, flanged connections according to recognized standards shall be used. Bunker stations are to be so arranged that the bunkering can be performed from both sides of the vessel 3.4.1 Flanged and screwed socket connections in without danger. The bunkering lines are to be fitted fuel oil lines which lay directly above hot surfaces or with blind flanges on deck. other sources of ignition are to be screened and provided with drainage arrangements. 2. Tank filling and suction lines 3.4.2 Flanged and screwed socket connections in 2.1 Filling and suction lines from storage and fuel oil lines with a maximum allowable working settling tanks situated above the double bottom and 2 from which in case of their damage fuel oil may leak, pressure of more than 0,18 N/mm and within about 3 m from hot surfaces or other sources of ignition and are to be fitted directly on the tanks with shut-off direct sight of line must be screened. Drainage ar- devices capable of being closed from a safe position outside the space concerned. rangements need not to be provided.

In the case of deep tanks situated in shaft or pipe tunnel 3.4.3 Flanged and screwed socket connections in or similar spaces, shut-off devices are to be fitted on the fuel oil lines with a maximum allowable working tanks. The control in the event of fire may be effected pressure of less than 0,18 N/mm2 and within about by means of an additional shut-off device in the pipe 3 m from hot surfaces or other sources of ignition outside the tunnel or similar space. If such additional shall be assessed individually taking into account shut-off device is fitted in the machinery space it shall working pressure, type of coupling and possibility of be operated from a position outside this space. failure.

Chapter 8 Section 9d E Storage of Liquids, Piping Systems, Valves and Pumps I - Part 1 Page 9d–14 GL 2007

Table 9d.14 Types of flange connections

Type A

Welding neck flange Loose flange with welding neck

Type B

Slip-on welding flange - fully welded

Type C

Slip-on welding flange

Type D Type E Type F

Socket screwed flange Plain flange Lap joint flange - conical threads - - welded on both sides - - on flanged pipe -

I - Part 1 Section 9d F Storage of Liquids, Piping Systems, Valves and Pumps Chapter 8 GL 2007 Page 9d–15

3.4.4 Flanged and screwed socket connections in sured that a failure of the automatic back-flushing will fuel oil lines with a maximum allowable working not lead to a total loss of filtration. pressure of more than 1,6 N/mm2 need normally to be screened. 6.5 Back-flushing intervals of automatic back- flushing filters provided for intermittent back-flushing 3.4.5 Pipes running below engine room floor need are to be monitored. normally not to be screened. 6.6 Fuel oil filters are to be fitted with differential 3.5 Shut-off valves in fuel lines in the machinery pressure monitoring. On engines provided for opera- spaces are to be operable from above the floor plates. tion with gas oil only, differential pressure monitoring may be dispensed with. 3.6 Glass and plastic components are not permitted in fuel systems. 6.7 Engines for the exclusive operation of emer- Sight glasses made of glass located in vertical over- gency generators and emergency fire pumps may be flow pipes may be permitted. fitted with simplex filters.

3.7 Fuel pumps shall be capable of being isolated 6.8 Fuel transfer units are to be fitted with a sim- from the piping system by shut-off valves. plex filter on the suction side.

4. Fuel transfer, feed and booster pumps 7. Purifiers 4.1 Fuel transfer, feed and booster pumps shall be 7.1 Manufacturers of purifiers for cleaning fuel designed for the operating temperature of the medium and lubricating oil have to be approved by GL. pumped.

4.2 A fuel transfer pump is to be provided. Other 7.2 Where a fuel purifier may exceptionally be service pumps may be used as a stand-by pump pro- used to purify lubricating oil the purifier supply and vided they are suitable for this purpose. discharge lines are to be fitted with a change-over arrangement which prevents the possibility of fuel and 4.3 At least two means of oil fuel transfer are to lubricating oils being mixed. be provided for filling the service tanks. Suitable equipment is also to be provided to prevent such mixing occurring over control and compression 4.4 Where a feed or booster pump is required to lines. supply fuel to main or auxiliary engines, stand-by pumps shall be provided. Where pumps are attached to 7.3 The sludge tanks of purifiers are to be fitted the engines, stand-by pumps may be dispensed with with a level alarm which ensures that the level in the for auxiliary engines. sludge tank cannot interfere with the operation of the purifier. 5. Plants with more than one main engine For plants with more than one engine, complete spare 8. Service tanks and heavy fuel oils feed or booster pumps stored on board may be accepted instead of stand-by pumps provided that the Where service tanks or heavy fuel oil are used, the feed or booster pumps are so arranged that they can be requirements of Chapter 2 – Machinery Installations, replaced with the means available on board. Section 11, G. are to be applied as well as the requirements of Q.2. 6. Filters

6.1 Fuel oil filters are to be fitted in the delivery line of the fuel pumps. F. Lubricating Oil System

6.2 For ships with Class Notation AUT the filter 1. General requirements equipment shall satisfy the requirements of Chapter 4 – Automation, Section 2. 1.1 Lubricating oil systems are to be so constructed to ensure reliable lubrication over the whole 6.3 Mesh size and filter capacity are to be in range of speed and during run-down of the engines accordance with the requirements of the manufacturer and to ensure adequate heat transfer. of the engine. 1.2 Priming pumps 6.4 Uninterrupted supply of filtered fuel has to be ensured during cleaning of the filtering equipment. In Where necessary, priming pumps are to be provided case of automatic back-flushing filters it is to be en- for supplying lubricating oil to the engines.

Chapter 8 Section 9d F Storage of Liquids, Piping Systems, Valves and Pumps I - Part 1 Page 9d–16 GL 2007

1.3 Emergency lubrication filters it is to be ensured that a failure of the automatic back-flushing will not lead to a total loss of filtration. A suitable emergency lubricating oil supply (e.g. gravity tank) is to be arranged for machinery which may 2.3.4 Back-flushing intervals of automatic back- be damaged in case of interruption of lubricating oil flushing filters provided for intermittent back-flushing supply. are to be monitored.

1.4 Lubricating oil treatment 2.3.5 Main lubricating oil filters are to be fitted with differential pressure monitoring. On engines Equipment necessary for adequate treatment of lubri- provided for operation with gas oil only, differential cating oil such as purifiers, automatic back-flushing pressure monitoring may be dispensed with. filters, filters and free-jet centrifuges are to be provided. 2.3.6 Engines for the exclusive operation of emergency generators and emergency fire pumps may be 2. Lubricating oil systems fitted with simplex filters.

2.1 Lubricating oil circulating tanks and grav- 2.3.7 For protection of the lubricating oil pumps ity tanks simplex filters may be installed on the suction side of the pumps if they have a minimum mesh size of 2.1.1 For the capacity and location of these tanks 100 µ. see Q.3. 2.4 Oil level indicators 2.1.2 The suction connections of lubricating oil pumps are to be located as far as possible from drain Machines with their own oil charge are to be provided pipes. with a means of determining the oil level from outside during operation. This requirement also applies to 2.1.3 Gravity tanks are to be fitted with an over- reduction gears, thrust bearings and shaft bearings. flow pipe which leads to the circulating tank. Ar- rangements are to be made for observing the flow of 2.5 Purifiers excess oil in the overflow pipe. The requirements in E.7. apply as appropriate. 2.2 Filling and suction lines 3. Lubricating oil pumps 2.2.1 Filling and suction lines of lubricating oil tanks with a capacity of 500 l and more located above the double bottom and from which in case of their 3.1 Main engines damage lubricating oil may leak, are to be fitted directly on the tanks with shut-off devices according to 3.1.1 Main and independent stand-by pumps are to E.2.1. be arranged for vessels for unrestricted service. Main pumps driven by the main engines are to be so de- The remote operation of shut-off valves according to signed that the lubricating oil supply is ensured over E.2.1 may be dispensed with for valves which are kept the whole range of operation. closed during normal operation 3.1.2 On vessels with more than one main engine 2.2.2 Where lubricating oil lines are to be led in the and with separate lubricating oil systems, complete vicinity of hot machinery, steel pipes which shall be in spare lubricating oil pumps on board may be accepted one length and which are protected where necessary instead of stand-by pumps, provided that the main are to be used. lubricating oil pumps are so arranged that they can be replaced with the means available on board. 2.2.3 For screening arrangements of lubricating oil pipes E.3.4 applies as appropriate. 3.2 Main reduction gearing

2.3 Filters 3.2.1 Lubricating oil is to be supplied by a main pump and an independent stand-by pump. 2.3.1 Lubricating oil filters are to be fitted in the delivery line of the lubricating oil pumps. 3.2.2 Where a reduction gear has been approved by 2.3.2 Mesh size and filter capacity are to be in GL to have adequate self-lubrication at 75 % of the accordance with the requirements of the manufacturer torque of the propelling engine, a stand-by lubricating of the engine. oil pump for the reduction gear may be dispensed with up to a power-speed ratio of 2.3.3 Uninterrupted supply of filtered lubricating P / n [kW/min-1] ≤ 3,0 oil has to be ensured under cleaning conditions of the 1 -1 filter equipment. In case of automatic back-flushing n1 = gear input revolution [min ]

I - Part 1 Section 9d G Storage of Liquids, Piping Systems, Valves and Pumps Chapter 8 GL 2007 Page 9d–17

3.2.3 The requirements under 3.1.2 are to be ap- 2.1.1 For vessels with ice class E1 to E4 the sea plied for multi-propeller plants and plants with more chest is to be arranged as follows: than one engine. – In calculating the volume of the sea chest the following value shall be applied as a guide: 3.3 Auxiliary machinery about 1 m3 for every 750 kW of the vessel's 3.3.1 Diesel generators engine output including the output of auxiliary engines. Where more than one diesel generator is available, stand-by pumps are not required. – The sea chest shall be of sufficient height to allow ice to accumulate above the inlet pipe. Where only one diesel generator is available a complete spare pump is to be carried on board. – The free area of the strum holes shall be not less than four times the sectional area of the seawater inlet pipe.

G. Seawater Cooling Systems 2.1.2 As an alternative two smaller sea chests of a design as specified in 2.1.1 may be arranged.

1. Sea suctions, sea chests 2.1.3 All discharge valves shall be so arranged that the discharge of water at any draught will not be ob- 1.1 At least two sea chests are to be provided. structed by ice. Wherever possible, the sea chests are to be arranged as low as possible on either side of the vessel. 2.2 Where necessary, a steam connection or a heating coil is to be arranged for de-icing and thawing 1.2 For service in shallow waters, it is recom- the sea chests. mended that an additional high seawater intake is provided. 2.3 At least one fire pump shall have a suction from the de-iced sea chest. 1.3 It is to be ensured that the total seawater supply for the engines can be taken from only one sea 3. Sea valves chest. 3.1 Sea valves are to be so arranged that they can 1.4 Each sea chest is to be provided with an ef- be operated from above the floor plates. fective vent. The following venting arrangements will be approved: 3.2 Discharge pipes for seawater cooling systems are to be fitted with a shut-off valve of non-return type – an air pipe of at least 32 mm ID which can be at the shell. shut off and which extends above the bulkhead deck 4. Strainer – adequately dimensioned ventilation slots in the shell plating The suction lines of the seawater pumps are to be fitted with strainers. 1.5 Compressed air connections (or steam if The strainers are to be so arranged that they can be available) are to be provided for cleaning the sea chest cleaned during service. gratings. The compressed air lines are to be fitted with shut-off valves fitted directly to the sea chests. Com- Alternatively, strainers may be arranged inside sea- pressed air for blowing through sea chest gratings may water cross-over. exceed 2 bar only if the sea chests are constructed for higher pressures. Alternative solutions have to be 5. Seawater cooling pumps agreed with GL. 5.1 Diesel engine plants 1.6 Where a sea chest is exclusively arranged as chest cooler the steam or compressed airlines for 5.1.1 Main propulsion plants are to be provided clearing according to 1.5 may, with GL's agreement, with main and stand-by cooling water pumps. be dispensed with. 5.1.2 The main cooling water pump may be attached to the propulsion plant. It is to be ensured that 2. Special rules for vessels with ice class the attached pump is of sufficient capacity for the cooling water required by main engines and auxiliary 2.1 For one of the sea chests specified in 1.1 the equipment over the whole speed range of the propul- sea inlet is to be located as near as possible to midship sion plant. and as far aft as possible. The seawater discharge line of the entire engine plant is to be connected to the top The drive of the stand-by cooling water pump is to be of the sea chest. independent of the main engine.

Chapter 8 Section 9d H Storage of Liquids, Piping Systems, Valves and Pumps I - Part 1 Page 9d–18 GL 2007

5.1.3 Main and stand-by cooling water pumps are 1.4 As far as possible, the temperature controls of each to be of sufficient capacity to meet the maximum main and auxiliary engines as well as of different cooling water requirements of the plant. circuits are to be independent of each other.

5.1.4 Other suitable seawater pumps may be used 1.5 Where, in automated engine plants, heat as stand-by cooling water pumps. exchangers for fuel or lubricating oil are incorporated in the cylinder cooling water circuit of main engines, 5.2 Plants with more than one main engine the entire cooling water system is to be monitored for For plants with more than one engine and with sepa- fuel and oil leakage. rate cooling water systems, complete spare pumps stored on board may be accepted instead of stand-by 1.6 Common engine cooling water systems for pumps provided that the main seawater cooling pumps main and auxiliary plants are to be fitted with shut-off are so arranged that they can be replaced with the valves to enable repairs to be performed without tak- means available on board. ing the entire plant out of service.

5.3 Cooling water supply for auxiliary engines 2. Heat exchangers, coolers Where a common cooling water pump is provided to serve more than one auxiliary engine, an independent 2.1 The construction and equipment of heat ex- stand-by cooling water pump with the same capacity changers and coolers are subject to the requirements is to be fitted. Independently operated cooling water of Section 9e. pumps of the main engine plant may be used to supply cooling water to auxiliary engines while at sea, provided that the capacity of such pumps is sufficient to 2.2 The coolers of cooling water systems, en- meet the additional cooling water requirement. gines and equipment are to be so designed to ensure that the specified cooling water temperatures can be If each auxiliary engine is fitted with an attached cool- maintained under all operating conditions. Cooling ing water pump, stand-by cooling water pumps need water temperatures are to be adjusted to meet the re- not to be provided. quirements of engines and equipment.

2.3 Heat exchangers for auxiliary equipment in the main cooling water circuit are to be provided with H. Fresh Water Cooling Systems by-passes if in the event of a failure of the heat exchanger it is possible by these means to keep the sys- 1. General tem in operation.

1.1 Fresh water cooling systems are to be so 2.4 It is to be ensured that auxiliary machinery arranged that the engines can be sufficiently cooled can be maintained in operation while repairing the under all operating conditions. main coolers. If necessary, means are to be provided for changing over to other heat exchangers, machinery 1.2 Depending on the requirements of the engine or equipment through which a temporary heat transfer plant, the following fresh water cooling systems are can be achieved. allowed: 2.5 Shut-off valves are to be provided at the inlet – a single cooling circuit for the entire plant and outlet of all heat exchangers. – separate cooling circuits for the main and auxiliary plant 2.6 Every heat exchanger and cooler is to be provided with a vent and a drain. – several independent cooling circuits for the main engine components which need cooling (e.g. cylinders and fuel valves) and for the auxiliary 2.7 Keel coolers, box coolers engines – separate cooling circuits for various temperature 2.7.1 Arrangement and construction drawings of ranges keel and box coolers are to be submitted for approval.

1.3 The cooling circuits are to be so divided that, 2.7.2 Permanent vents for fresh water are to be should one part of the system fail, operation of the provided at the top of keel coolers and chest coolers. auxiliary systems can be maintained. Change-over arrangements are to be provided for this purpose if 2.7.3 Keel coolers are to be fitted with pressure necessary. gauge connections at the fresh water inlet and outlet.

I - Part 1 Section 9d I Storage of Liquids, Piping Systems, Valves and Pumps Chapter 8 GL 2007 Page 9d–19

3. Expansion tanks tional reliability of the engine are to be equipped for manual operation. 3.1 Expansion tanks are to be arranged at sufficient height for every cooling water circuit. Different cooling circuits may only be connected to a common 6. Preheating of cooling water expansion tank if they do not interfere with each other. Means are to be provided for preheating cooling fresh Care must be taken here to ensure that damage to or water. Exceptions are to be approved by GL. faults in one system cannot affect the other system.

3.2 Expansion tanks are to be fitted with filling 7. Emergency generating units connections, aeration/de-aeration devices, water level indicators and drains. Internal combustion engines driving emergency generating units are to be fitted with independent cooling systems. Such cooling systems are to be made proof 4. Fresh water cooling pumps against freezing. 4.1 Main and stand-by cooling water pumps are to be provided for each fresh water cooling system.

4.2 Main cooling water pumps may be driven I. Compressed Air Lines directly by the main or auxiliary engines which they are intended to cool provided that a sufficient supply of cooling water is assured under all operating condi- 1. General tions. 1.1 Pressure lines connected to air compressors 4.3 The drives of stand-by cooling water pumps are to be fitted with non-return valves at the compres- are to be independent of the main engines. sor outlet.

4.4 Stand-by cooling water pumps are to have the 1.2 For oil and water separators, see Section 9b, same capacity as main cooling water pumps. M.

4.5 Main engines are to be fitted with at least one 1.3 Starting air lines may not be used as filling main and one stand-by cooling water pump. Where lines for air receivers. according to the construction of the engines more than one water cooling circuit is necessary, a stand-by pump is to be fitted for each main cooling water 1.4 Only type-tested hose assemblies made of pump. metallic materials may be used in starting air lines of diesel engines which are permanently kept under pres- 4.6 For fresh cooling water pumps of essential sure. auxiliary engines the requirements for sea water cooling pumps in G.5.3 may be applied. 1.5 The starting air line to each engine is to be fitted with a non-return valve and a drain. 4.7 A stand-by cooling water pump of a cooling water system may be used as a stand-by pump for 1.6 Tyfons are to be connected to at least two another system provided that the necessary pipe con- compressed air receivers. nections are arranged. The shut-off valves in these connections are to be secured against unintended operation. 1.7 A safety valve is to be fitted downstream of each pressure-reducing valve. 4.8 Equipment providing emergency cooling from another system can be approved if the plant and 1.8 Pressure water tanks and other tanks con- the system are suitable for this purpose. nected to the compressed air system are to be considered as pressure vessels and shall comply with the 4.9 For plants with more than one main engine requirements in Section 9e for the working pressure of the requirements for sea cooling water pumps in G.5.2 the compressed air system. may be applied. 1.9 For compressed air connections for blowing 5. Temperature control through sea chests refer to G.1.5. Cooling water circuits are to be provided with temperature controls in accordance with the requirements. 1.10 Requirements for starting engines with com- Control devices whose failure may impair the func- pressed air, see Section 9b, H.2.

Chapter 8 Section 9d K Storage of Liquids, Piping Systems, Valves and Pumps I - Part 1 Page 9d–20 GL 2007

2. Control air systems 1.1.2 Bilge suctions are normally to be located on both sides of the vessel. For compartments located 2.1 Control air systems for essential consumers fore and aft in the vessel, one bilge suction may be are to be provided with the necessary means of air considered sufficient provided that it is capable of treatment. completely draining the relevant compartment.

2.2 Pressure reducing valves in the control air 1.1.3 Spaces located forward of the collision bulk- system of main engines are to be redundant. head and aft of the stern tube bulkhead and not connected to the general bilge system are to be drained by other suitable means of adequate capacity.

J. Exhaust Gas Lines 1.1.4 The required pipe thickness of bilge lines is to be in accordance with Table 9d.5.

1. Pipe layout 1.2 Pipes laid through tanks 1.1 Engine exhaust gas pipes are to be installed separately from each other, taking into account the 1.2.1 Bilge pipes may not be led through tanks for structural fire protection. Other designs are to be sub- lubricating oil or drinking water. mitted for approval. The same applies to boiler exhaust gas pipes. 1.2.2 Bilge pipes from spaces not accessible during the voyage if running through fuel tanks located above 1.2 Account is to be taken of thermal expansion double bottom are to be fitted with a non-return valve when laying out and suspending the lines. directly at the point of entry into the tank.

1.3 Where exhaust gas lines discharge near water level, provisions are to be taken to prevent water from 1.3 Bilge suctions and strums entering the engines. 1.3.1 Bilge suctions are to be so arranged as not to impede the cleaning of bilges and bilge wells. They 2. Silencers are to be fitted with easily detachable, corrosion- Engine exhaust pipes are to be fitted with effective resistant strums. silencers or other suitable means are to be provided. 1.3.2 Emergency bilge suctions are to be arranged Silencers are to be provided with an inspection open- such that they are accessible, with free flow and at a ing. suitable distance from the tank top or the vessel's bottom. 3. Water drains 1.3.3 For the size and design of bilge wells see Exhaust lines and silencers are to be provided with Chapter 1 – Hull Structures, Section 8, B.5.3. suitable drains of adequate size. 1.3.4 Bilge alarms of main- and auxiliary machin- 4. Insulation ery spaces, see Section 9a, E.5. and Section 12. For insulation of exhaust gas lines inside machinery spaces, see Section 8, B.3.1. 1.4 Bilge valves

5. Engine exhaust gas lines are additionally 1.4.1 Valves in connecting pipes between the bilge subject to Section 9b, G.7. and the seawater and ballast water system, as well as between the bilge connections of different compartments, are to be so arranged that even in the event of faulty operation or intermediate positions of the valves, penetration of seawater through the bilge sys- K. Bilge Systems tem will be safely prevented.

1. Bilge lines 1.4.2 Bilge discharge pipes are to be fitted with shut-off valves and reverse-flow protection at the 1.1 Layout of bilge lines vessel's shell.

1.1.1 Bilge lines and bilge suctions are to be so 1.4.3 Bilge valves are to be arranged so as to be arranged that the bilges can be completely drained always accessible irrespective of the ballast and load- even under unfavourable trim conditions. ing condition of the vessel.

I - Part 1 Section 9d K Storage of Liquids, Piping Systems, Valves and Pumps Chapter 8 GL 2007 Page 9d–21

1.5 Reverse-flow protection 3. Bilge pumps

1.5.1 A screw-down non-return valve or a combi- 3.1 Capacity of bilge pumps nation of a non-return valve without positive means of closing and a shut-off valve are recognized as reverse Each bilge pump shall be capable of delivering: flow protection. −3 2 3 Q = 5,75⋅10 ⋅ d H [m /h] (3) 1.6 Pipe layout Q = minimum capacity [m3/h]

1.6.1 To prevent the ingress of ballast and seawater dH = calculated inside diameter of main bilge pipe into the vessel through the bilge system two means of [mm] reverse-flow protection are to be fitted in the bilge connections. 3.2 The minimum capacity shall be 4/3 of the required fire pump capacity. One of such means of protection is to be fitted in each suction line. 3.3 Where centrifugal pumps are used for bilge pumping, they shall be self-priming or priming units 1.6.2 The direct bilge suction and the emergency are to be provided. suction need only have one means of reverse-flow protection as specified in 1.5.1. 3.4 Use of other pumps for bilge pumping

1.6.3 Where a direct seawater connection is ar- 3.4.1 Ballast pumps, stand-by seawater cooling ranged for attached bilge pumps to protect them pumps and general service pumps may also be used as against running dry, the bilge suctions are also to be independent bilge pumps provided they are self- fitted with two reverse flow protecting devices. priming and of the required capacity according to formula (3).

2. Calculation of pipe diameters 3.4.2 In the event of failure of one of the required bilge pumps, one pump each has to be available for 2.1 The calculated values according to formulae fire fighting and bilge pumping. (1) to (2) are to be rounded up to the next higher nominal diameter. 3.4.3 Bilge ejectors are acceptable as bilge pumping arrangements provided that there is an independent supply of driving water. 2.2 Main and branch bilge lines a) Main bilge pipes 3.5 Number of bilge pumps Vessels are to be provided with two independent, d1,68LBH25H =⋅⋅++() [mm] (1) mechanically driven bilge pumps. One of these pumps may be attached to the main engine. b) Branch bilge pipes On vessels of less than 100 gross tonnage, one mechanically driven bilge pump is sufficient. The second d2,15BH25=⋅⋅++A () [mm] (2) independent bilge pump may be a permanently in- z stalled manual bilge pump. The engine-driven bilge pump may be coupled to the main propulsion plant. dH = calculated inside diameter of main bilge pipe [mm] 4. Bilge pumping for various spaces dz = calculated inside diameter of branch bilge pipe [mm] 4.1 Machinery spaces L = length of vessel between perpendiculars [m] 4.1.1 On vessels of more than 100 gross tonnage, the bilges of every main machinery space shall be B = moulded breadth of ship [m] capable of being pumped simultaneously as follows: H = depth of ship to the bulkhead deck [m] a) through the bilge suctions connected to the main bilge system A = length of the watertight compartment [m] b) through one direct suction connected to the largest independent bilge pump 2.3 Minimum diameter c) through an emergency bilge suction connected The inside diameter of main and branch bilge pipes is to the sea cooling water pump of the main pro- not to be less than 50 mm. For vessels under 24 m pulsion plant or through another suitable emer- length, the diameter may be reduced to 40 mm. gency bilge system

Chapter 8 Section 9d L Storage of Liquids, Piping Systems, Valves and Pumps I - Part 1 Page 9d–22 GL 2007

4.1.2 On vessels with Class Notation K the emer- 4.5 Cofferdams, pipe tunnels and void gency bilge suction may be dispensed with. spaces Cofferdams, pipe tunnels and void spaces adjoining 4.1.3 If the vessel's propulsion plant is located in the vessel's shell are to be connected to the bilge sys- several spaces, a direct suction in accordance with tem. Where the aft peak is adjoining the engine room, 4.1.1 b) is to be provided in each watertight compart- it may be drained over a self-closing valve to the en- ment in addition to branch bilge suctions in accor- gine room bilge. dance with 4.1.1 a). When the direct suctions are in use, it must be possible 4.6 Chain lockers to pump simultaneously from the main bilge line by Chain lockers are to be drained by means of appropri- means of all the other bilge pumps. The diameter of ate arrangements. the direct suction may not be less than that of the main bilge pipe. 5. Bilge testing 4.1.4 The diameter of the emergency suction shall All bilge arrangements are to be tested under GL's be equal to the diameter of the pump's suction line. supervision. The emergency bilge suction must be connected to the pump suction line by a reverse-flow protection according to 1.5. This valve is to be provided with a plate with the no- L. Equipment for the Treatment and Storage tice: of Bilge Water, Fuel/Oil Residues 4 Emergency bilge valve! 1. Oily water separating equipment To be opened in an emergency only! Emergency bilge valves and cooling water inlet valves 1.1 Requirements of the flag state shall be ob- shall be capable of being operated from above the served additionally. floor plates. 1.2 Vessels of 400 gross tonnage and above shall 4.1.5 Rooms and decks in engine rooms are to be be fitted with an oily water separator or filtering. provided with drains to the engine room bilge. A drain pipe which passes through a watertight bulkhead is to 1.3 A sampling device is to be arranged in a be fitted with a self-closing valve. vertical section of the discharge line of oily water separating equipment/filtering systems. 4.2 Holds 1.4 By-pass lines are not permitted for oily-water 4.2.1 Holds with bilge gutterways are to be fitted separating equipment/filtering systems. with bilge suctions fore and aft. 1.5 Recirculating facilities have to be provided to 4.2.2 Holds in which the tank decks extend to the enable the oil filtering equipment to be tested with the vessel's shell are to be provided with bilge wells of overboard discharge closed. adequate size. 2. Discharge of fuel/oil residues On vessels with only one hold, bilge wells of sufficient size are to be provided fore and aft. 2.1 A sludge tank is to be provided. For the fittings and mountings of sludge tanks, see Q. 4.3 Refrigerated cargo spaces Refrigerated cargo spaces and thawing trays are to be 2.2 A self-priming pump is to be provided for provided with drains which cannot be shut off. Each sludge discharge to reception facilities. The capacity drain pipe is to be fitted at its discharge end with a of the pump shall be such that the sludge tank can be trap to prevent the transfer of heat and odours. emptied in a reasonable time.

4.4 Spaces above fore and aft peaks 2.3 A separate discharge line is to be provided for discharge of fuel/oil residues to reception facilities. These spaces shall either be connected to the bilge system or are to be drained by means of hand pumps. –––––––––––––– Spaces located above the aft peak may be drained to 4 Oily water separators, filter plants, collecting tanks, discharge the engine room bilge, provided the drain line is fitted lines and a monitoring & control system or an 15 ppm alarm with a self-closing valve which is to be located at a shall comply with the International Convention for the Preven- tion of Pollution from Ships, 1973, (MARPOL) and the Proto- highly visible and accessible position. The drain lines col 1978 as amended. Form F 323 (MP1) is to be submitted for shall have a diameter of at least 40 mm. approval.

I - Part 1 Section 9d M Storage of Liquids, Piping Systems, Valves and Pumps Chapter 8 GL 2007 Page 9d–23

M. Air, Overflow and Sounding Pipes 1.2 Number of air and overflow pipes

General 1.2.1 The number and arrangement of the air pipes is to be so performed that the tanks can be aerated and The laying of air, overflow and sounding pipes is de-aerated without exceeding the tank design pressure permitted only in places where the laying of the corre- by over- or underpressure. sponding piping system is also permitted, see Table 9d.5. 1.2.2 Tanks which extend from side to side of the vessel shall be fitted with an air/overflow pipe at each 1. Air and overflow pipes side. At the narrow ends of double bottom tanks in the forward and aft parts of the vessel, only one air/ over- 1.1 Arrangement flow pipe is sufficient.

1.1.1 All tanks, void spaces, etc. are to be fitted at 1.3 Air pipe closing devices their highest position with air pipes or overflow pipes. Air/overflow pipes terminating above the open deck Air pipes must normally terminate at the open deck. are to be fitted with approved air pipe heads. 1.1.2 Air and overflow pipes are to be laid vertically. Table 9d.15 Cross-sectional areas of air and overflow pipes 1.1.3 Air and overflow pipes passing through cargo holds are to be protected against damage. Cross-sectional areas of air and overflow pipes 1.1.4 For the height above deck of air and overflow Tank filling systems pipes, see Section 2, Table 2.2. LR LÜR 1/3 f 1.1.5 Air pipes from unheated leakage oil tanks and by gravity – lubricating oil tanks may terminate at clearly visible filling per tank positions in the engine room. Where these tanks form mode 1,25 f by pumping – part of the vessel's hull, the air pipes are to terminate per tank 1 above the freeboard deck. Explanatory note: 1.1.6 Air pipes from lubricating oil tanks and leak- LR = air pipe age oil tanks which terminate in the engine room are LÜR = air-/overflow pipe to be provided with funnels and pipes for safe drain- f = cross-sectional area of tank filling pipe age in the event of possible overflow. 1 1,25 f as the total cross-sectional area is sufficient if it can be proved that the resistance to flow of the air and 1.1.7 Air pipes for cofferdams/void spaces with overflow pipes including the air pipe closing devices at the bilge connections are to be extended above the open proposed flow rate cannot cause unacceptable high deck. pressures in the tanks in the event of overflow.

1.1.8 Where fuel service tanks are fitted with change-over overflow pipes, the change-over devices To prevent blocking of the air pipe head openings by are to be so arranged that the overflow is led to one of their floats during tank discharge the maximum allow- the storage tanks. able air velocity determined by the manufacturer is to be observed. The overflow pipes of changeable tanks shall be capable of being separated from the fuel overflow system. 1.4 Overflow systems

1.1.9 Where the air and overflow pipes of several 1.4.1 The overflow collecting manifolds of fuel tanks situated at the vessel's shell lead to a common tanks are to be led at a sufficient gradient to an over- line, the connections to this line are to be above the flow tank of sufficient capacity. freeboard deck, as far as practicable but at least so high above the deepest load waterline that should a The overflow tank is to be fitted with a level alarm leakage occur in one tank due to damage to the hull or which operates when the tank is about 1/3 full. listing of the vessel, fuel or water cannot flow into another tank. 1.4.2 For the size of the air and overflow pipes, see Table 9d.16. 1.1.10 The air and overflow pipes of lubricating oil and fuel tanks shall be kept separate. 1.4.3 The use of a fuel storage tank as overflow tank is permissible but requires the installation of a 1.1.11 For the cross-sectional area of air pipes and high level alarm and an air pipe with 1,25 times the air/overflow pipes, see Table 9d.15. cross-sectional area of the main bunkering line.

Chapter 8 Section 9d M Storage of Liquids, Piping Systems, Valves and Pumps I - Part 1 Page 9d–24 GL 2007

Table 9d.16 Cross-sectional areas of air and overflow pipes (closed overflow systems)

Tank filling and Cross-sectional areas of air and overflow pipes Remarks overflow systems LR ÜR2 AR cross-sectional area of Stand-pipe 1/3 f – – stand-pipe ≥ 1,25 F Filling cross-sectional area of Relief valve 1/3 f 1 min. 1,25 F – relief valve ≥ 1,25 F Overflow chest 1/3 F at chest min. 1,25 F 1,25 F – Overflow Manifold 1/3 F min. 1,25 F – – system Overflow tank 1/3 F – – –

Explanatory notes: LR = air pipe ÜR = overflow pipe AR = drainage line f = cross-sectional area of tank filling pipe F = cross-sectional area of main filling pipe 1 1/3 f only for tanks in which an overflow is prevented by structural arrangements. 2 Determined in accordance with 1.4

1.5 Determination of the pipe cross-sectional 2.1.4 Sounding pipes which terminate below the areas deepest load waterline are to be fitted with self- closing shut-off devices. Such sounding pipes are For the cross-sectional areas of air and overflow only permissible in spaces which are accessible at all pipes, see Tables 9d.15 and 9d.16. times. Air and overflow pipes shall have an outside diameter All other sounding pipes are to be extended to the of at least 60,3 mm. open deck. The sounding pipe openings have to be always accessible and fitted with watertight closures. 1.6 The minimum wall thickness of air and overflow pipes are to be in accordance with Table 2.1.5 Sounding pipes of tanks are to be provided 9d.17a and 9d.17b, whereby A, B and C are the close to the top of the tank with holes for equalising groups for the minimum wall thickness. the pressure.

1.7 The pipe materials are to be selected accord- 2.1.6 In holds, a sounding pipe is to be fitted to ing to B. each bilge well. 2.1.7 Where level alarms are arranged in each 2. Sounding pipes bilge well of cargo holds, the sounding pipes may be dispensed with. The level alarms are to be independ- 2.1 General ent from each other and are to be type approved by GL 5. 2.1.1 Sounding pipes are to be provided for tanks, cofferdams and void spaces with bilge connections 2.1.8 Sounding pipes passing through cargo holds and for bilges and bilge wells in spaces which are not are to be laid in protected spaces or they are to be accessible at all times. protected against damage. On application, the provision of sounding pipes for bilge wells in permanently accessible spaces may be 2.2 Sounding pipes for fuel and lubricating oil dispensed with. tanks

2.1.2 Where tanks are fitted with remote level 2.2.1 Sounding pipes which terminate below the indicators which are type approved by GL, the ar- open deck are to be provided with self-closing de- rangement of sounding pipes can be dispensed with. vices as well as with self-closing test valves, see also Q.2.3.3.6. 2.1.3 As far as possible, sounding pipes are to be laid straight and are to extend as near as possible to –––––––––––––– the bottom. 5 National Regulations, where existing, are to be considered.

I - Part 1 Section 9d N Storage of Liquids, Piping Systems, Valves and Pumps Chapter 8 GL 2007 Page 9d–25

Table 9d.17a Classification of minimum wall thickness groups

Location Drain lines and Air, sounding and Piping sys- scupper pipes overflow pipes tem or posi- Tanks Tanks below freeboard deck tion of open with with Cargo Machinery or bulkhead deck pipe outlets same disparate above above below holds spaces media media without with freeboard weather weather shut-off on shut-off on deck deck deck ship's side ship's side Air, overflow and C – – – C A A sounding pipes Scupper pipes from A open deck Discharge and scupper A A pipes leading B – directly B A – – B overboard Discharge pipes of pumps for – A sanitary systems

Table 9d.17b Minimum wall thickness of air, over- 2.3 Cross-sections of pipes flow, sounding and sanitary pipes 2.3.1 Sounding pipes shall have an inside diameter Outside pipe Minimum wall thickness of at least 32 mm. diameter da [mm] [mm] A 1 B 1 C 1 2.3.2 The diameters of sounding pipes which pass 38 - 82,5 4,5 7,1 6,3 through refrigerated holds at temperatures below 0 °C 88,9 4,5 8 6,3 are to be increased to an inside diameter of 50 mm. 101,6 - 114,3 4,5 8 7,1 127 - 139,7 4,5 8,8 8 2.3.3 The minimum wall thicknesses of sounding 152,4 4,5 10 8,8 pipes are to be in accordance with Tables 9d.17a and 159 - 177,8 5 10 8,8 9d.17b. 193,7 5,4 12,5 8,8 219,1 5,9 12,5 8,8 244,5 - 457,2 6,3 12,5 8,8 N. Drinking Water System 5 1 wall thickness groups, see Table 9d.17a

1. Drinking water tanks 2.2.2 Sounding pipes shall not be located in the vicinity of oil firing equipment, machine components with high surface temperatures or electrical equip- 1.1 For the design and arrangement of drinking ment. water tanks, see Chapter 1 – Hull Structures, Sec- tion 12. 2.2.3 Sounding pipes shall not terminate in accommodation or service spaces. 1.2 On vessels with ice class E1 to E4 and higher drinking water tanks located at the vessel's side are to 2.2.4 Sounding pipes are not to be used as filling be provided with means for tank heating to prevent pipes. freezing.

Chapter 8 Section 9d O Storage of Liquids, Piping Systems, Valves and Pumps I - Part 1 Page 9d–26 GL 2007

2. Drinking water tank connections O. Sewage Systems

2.1 Filling connections are to be located suffi- 1. General ciently high above deck and are to be fitted with a closing device. 1.1 Vessels of 400 gross tonnage and above and vessels of less than 400 gross tonnage which are certified to carry more than 15 persons and with keel lay- 2.1.1 Filling connections are not to be fitted to air ing on or after 2003-09-27 are to be fitted with the pipes. following equipment: – a sewage treatment plant approved according to 2.2 Air/overflow pipes are to be extended above Resolution MEPC.2(VI), or the open deck and are to be protected against the entry of insects by a fine mesh screen. – a sewage comminuting and disinfecting system (facilities for the temporary storage of sewage Air pipe closing devices, see M.1.3. when the vessel is less than 3 nautical miles from the nearest land, to be provided), or 2.3 Sounding pipes shall terminate sufficiently – a holding tank high above deck. 1.2 A pipeline for the discharge of sewage to a reception facility is to be arranged. The pipeline is to 3. Drinking water pipe lines be provided with a standard discharge connection.

3.1 Drinking water pipe lines are not to be con- 1.3 National requirements are to be observed nected to pipe lines carrying other media. additionally.

3.2 Drinking water pipe lines are not to be laid 2. Arrangement through tanks which do not contain drinking water. 2.1 For scuppers and overboard discharges see Chapter 1 – Hull Structures, Section 21. 3.3 Drinking water supply to tanks which do not contain drinking water (e.g. expansion tanks of the 2.2 The minimum wall thicknesses of sanitary fresh water cooling system) is to be made by means of pipes below freeboard and bulkhead decks are speci- an open funnel or with means of preventing back- fied in Tables 9d.17a and 9d.17b. flow. 2.3 For discharge lines located above freeboard deck steel pipes according to Table 9d.6, Group N 4. Pressure water tanks/calorifiers may be used. For design, equipment, installation and testing of pres- 2.4 For sanitary discharge lines located below sure water tanks and calorifiers, Section 9e is to be freeboard deck within a watertight compartment, observed. which terminate in a sewage tank or in a sanitary treatment plant, pipes according to 2.3 may be used. 5. Drinking water pumps 2.5 Sewage tanks and sewage treatment systems 5.1 Separate drinking water pumps are to be provided for drinking water systems. 2.5.1 Sewage tanks are to be fitted with air pipes leading to the open deck. For air pipe closing devices see M.1.3. 5.2 The pressure lines of the pumps of drinking water pressure tanks are to be fitted with screw-down 2.5.2 Sewage tanks are to be fitted with a filling non-return valves. connection, a rinsing connection and a level alarm.

2.5.3 The discharge lines of sewage tanks and 6. Drinking water generation sewage treatment tanks are to be fitted at the vessel' side with screw-down non-return valves. Where the distillate produced by the vessel's own evaporator unit is used for the drinking water supply, When the valve is not arranged directly at the vessel’s the treatment of the distillate has to comply with cur- side, the thickness of the pipe is to be according to rent regulations of national health authorities. Table 9d.17b, column B.

I - Part 1 Section 9d Q Storage of Liquids, Piping Systems, Valves and Pumps Chapter 8 GL 2007 Page 9d–27

2.5.4 A second means of reverse-flow protection is Q. Storage of Liquid Fuels, Lubricating and to be fitted in the suction or delivery line of the sew- Hydraulic Oils as well as Oil Residues age pump from sewage tanks or sewage treatment plants. 1. General 2.5.5 Where at a heeling of the vessel of 5° at port 1.1 Scope or starboard, the lowest inside opening of the sewage system lies on the summer load line or below, the The following requirements apply to the storage of discharge line of the sewage collecting tank is to be liquid fuels, lubricating and hydraulic oils as well as fitted in addition to the required reverse-flow protec- oily residues and to gas bottles for domestic purposes. tion device according to 2.5.4 with a gate valve directly at the shell plating. In this case the reverse-flow 1.2 Definitions protection device needs not to be of screw-down type. Service tanks are settling tanks and daily service tanks 2.5.6 Bilge pumps may not be used for emptying which supply consumers directly. sewage tanks. 1.3 Tank plan

P. Hose Assemblies and Compensators A tank plan is to be submitted for approval in triplicate. It should include particulars regarding arrange- 1. Hose assemblies and compensators made of ment, medium and volume of the tanks as well as non-metallic and metallic materials may be used ac- information about the maximum height of the over- cording to their suitability in fuel-, lubricating oil-, flow level. hydraulic oil-, bilge-, ballast-, fresh water cooling-, sea water cooling-, compressed air-, auxiliary steam-, 2. Storage of liquid fuels and exhaust gas systems as well as in secondary piping systems. 2.1 General safety precautions for liquid fuels

2. Hoses and compensators used in the systems Tanks and pipes are to be so located and equipped that fuel may not spread either inside the vessel or on deck mentioned in 1. are to be of approved type 6. and may not be ignited by hot surfaces or electrical 3. Hose assemblies and compensators made of equipment. The tanks are to be fitted with air and non-metallic materials are not permitted in perma- overflow pipes as safeguards against overpressure, see nently pressurized starting air lines. Furthermore it is M. not permitted to use hose assemblies and compensators in fuel injection piping systems of combustion 2.2 Distribution, location and capacity of fuel engines. tanks

4. Hose assemblies and compensators for the 2.2.1 Distribution of fuel tanks use in fuel-, lubricating oil-, hydraulic oil-, bilge- and sea water systems are to be flame-resistant. 2.2.1.1 The fuel supply is to be stored in several tanks so that, even in the event of damage to the bot- 5. Non-metallic hose assemblies and compensa- tom of one of the tanks, the fuel supply will not be lost tors are to be located at visible and accessible posi- entirely. tions. 2.2.1.2 Fuel tanks are to be separated by cofferdams 6. Where hose assemblies and compensators are from tanks containing lubricating or hydraulic oil as installed in the vicinity of hot components they shall well as from tanks containing drinking water. This be provided with approved heat-resistant sleeves. does not apply to used lubricating oil which will not be used on board anymore. 7. Manufacturers of hose assemblies and compensators 7 are to be recognized by GL. 2.2.1.3 On small vessels the arrangement of cofferdams according to 2.2.1.2 may, with the approval of GL be dispensed with, provided that the common boundaries between the tanks are arranged in accordance with Chapter 1 – Hull Structures, Section 12, A.5.2. –––––––––––––– 6 See GL Rules VI – Additional Rules and Guidelines, Part 7 – 2.2.2 Arrangements of fuel tanks Guidelines for the Performance of Type Approvals, Chapter 8 – Test Requirements for Mechanical Components and Equip- 2.2.2.1 Fuel tanks may be located above engines, ment. 7 boilers and other equipment with a high surface tem- See GL Rules VI – Additional Rules and Guidelines, Part 3 – perature (above 220 °C) only if adequate spill trays are Machinery Installations, Chapter 9 – Guidelines for the Rec- ognition of Manufacturers of Hose Assemblies and Compensa- provided below such tanks and they are protected tors. against heat radiation.

Chapter 8 Section 9d Q Storage of Liquids, Piping Systems, Valves and Pumps I - Part 1 Page 9d–28 GL 2007

Surface temperature of the elements without insulation – Sounding pipes are either to terminate in loca- and lagging shall be considered. tions remote from ignition hazards or they are to be effectively screened to prevent that spillage 2.2.2.2 Fuel tanks shall be an integral part of the through the sounding pipes may come into con- vessel's structure. If this is not practicable, the tanks tact with a source of ignition. shall be located adjacent to an engine room boundary and the tank top of the double bottom. The arrange- – The sounding pipes are to be fitted with self- ment of free-standing fuel tanks inside engine rooms closing shut-off devices and self-closing test is to be avoided. Tank arrangements which do not cook. conform to the preceding rules require the approval of GL. 2.4 Appliances and fittings on fuel tanks

2.2.2.3 Tanks adjacent to refrigerated cargo holds are 2.4.1 Appliances, mountings and fittings not form- subject to Section 10, M. ing part of the fuel tank equipment may be fitted to 2.2.2.4 In case of fuel supply for prime movers of tank walls only by means of intermediate supports. To emergency source of electrical power please refer to free-standing tanks only components forming part of Chapter 2 – Machinery Installations, Section 10, B. the tank equipment may be fitted. 2.2.4 / 2.2.5 2.4.2 Valves and pipe connections are to be attached to doubler flanges welded to the tank wall. 2.3 Fuel tank fittings and mountings Holes for attachment bolts shall not be drilled in the 2.3.1 For filling and suction lines see E.; for air, tank wall. overflow and sounding pipes see M. Instead of doubler flanges, thick walled pipe stubs with flange connections may be welded into the tank 2.3.2 Service tanks are to be so arranged that water walls. and residues can deposit despite of ship movement. Fuel tanks located above the double bottom are to be 2.5 Hydraulic pressure tests fitted with water drains with self-closing shut-off valves. Fuel tanks are to be tested for tightness in accordance with Section 3. 2.3.3 Tank gauges 2.3.3.1 The following tank gauges are permitted: 2.6 Fuels with a flash point of ≤ 60 °C – sounding pipes For the storage of liquid fuels with a flash point of ≤ 60 °C, see Section 9a, D.12. – oil-level indicating devices (type approved) – oil-level gauges with flat glasses and self- 3. Storage of Lubricating and Hydraulic Oils closing shut-off valves at the connections to the tank and protected against external damage 3.1 Tank arrangement 2.3.3.2 For fuel storage tanks the provision of sound- For the arrangement of the tanks 2.2.2.1 and analo- ing pipes is sufficient. The sounding pipes may be gously Section 3 are to be applied. dispensed with, if the tanks are fitted with oil-level indicating devices which have been type-tested by GL. 3.2 Tank fittings and mountings 2.3.3.3 Fuel oil settling and daily service tanks are to be fitted with oil-level indicating devices or oil-level 3.2.1 For filling and suction lines of lubricating oil gauges according to 2.3.3.1. For vessels under German and hydraulic oil tanks, see F.2.2. flag only type approved oil-level gauges are allowed. 3.2.2 For tank sounding devices for oil tanks, see 2.3.3.4 Sight glasses and oil gauges fitted directly on 2.3.3.1 and 2.3.3.4. the side of the tank and cylindrical glass oil gauges are not permitted. 3.2.3 For the mounting of appliances and fittings on the tanks 2.4 is to be applied. 2.3.3.5 Sounding pipes of fuel tanks may not terminate in accommodation spaces, nor shall they termi- 3.3 Capacity and construction of tanks nate in spaces where the risk of ignition of spillage from the sounding pipes consists. 3.3.1 Lubricating oil circulation tanks should be 2.3.3.6 Sounding pipes should terminate outside sufficiently dimensioned to ensure that the dwell time machinery spaces. Where this is not possible, the is long enough for settling out of air bubbles, residues, following requirements are to be met: etc. With a maximum permissible filling level of about 85 %, the tanks shall be large enough to hold at least – Oil-level gauges are to be provided in addition the lubricating oil contained in the entire circulation to the sounding pipes. system including the contents of gravity tanks.

I - Part 1 Section 9d Q Storage of Liquids, Piping Systems, Valves and Pumps Chapter 8 GL 2007 Page 9d–29

3.3.2 Measures, such as the provision of baffles or of the vessel having regard to the maximum duration limber holes consistent with structural strength re- of a voyage. National requirements, if any, are to be quirements, particularly relating to the machinery bed observed. Reference is made to MEPC circular 511. plate, are to be provided to ensure that the entire content of the tank remains in circulation. 4.2 Fittings and mountings of sludge tanks Limber holes should be located as near the bottom of the tank as possible. Suction pipe connections should 4.2.1 For tank sounding devices 2.3.3.2 and 2.3.3.5 be placed as far as practicable away from the oil drain are to be applied. pipe so that neither air nor sludge may be sucked in irrespective of the heeling angle of the vessel likely to 4.2.2 For air pipes, see M. be encountered during service.

3.3.3 Lubricating oil circulating tanks are to be 5. Storage of gas bottles for domestic purpose equipped with sufficiently dimensioned vents. 5.1 Storage of gas bottles shall be located on open deck or in well ventilated spaces which only 4. Storage of oil residues open to open deck. 4.1 Capacity of sludge tanks 5.2 Gaseous fuel systems for domestic purposes The capacity of sludge tanks shall be such that they shall comply with an acceptable standard. National are able to hold the residues arising from the operation requirement, if any, are to be observed.

I - Part 1 Section 9e A Boilers and Pressure Vessels Chapter 8 GL 2007 Page 9e–1

Section 9e

Boilers and Pressure Vessels

A. Steam Boilers and Thermal Oil Heaters 3. Documents for approval

1. Scope 3.1 Steam boilers Drawings of all boiler parts subject to pressure, such 1.1 Steam boilers as drums, headers, tubes, manholes and inspection covers, etc., are to be submitted to GL in triplicate. For the purpose of these requirements, the term These drawings shall contain all the data necessary for "boiler" includes all closed vessels and piping systems strength calculations and design assessment, such as used for working pressures, superheated steam temperatures, materials to be used and full details of welds including – generating steam at a pressure above atmos- filler materials. pheric pressure (steam generators) Details and drawings are also to be submitted covering – raising the temperature of water above the boil- the valves and fittings and their arrangement together ing point corresponding to atmospheric pressure with a description of the boiler plant specifying the (hot water generators) arrangement of the boiler with reference to the vessel's longitudinal axis, the essential boiler data and equip- necessary for the operation of the vessel or for fish ment items, e.g. steam conditions, heating surfaces, processing. allowable steam output, feed, firing system, safety valves, controllers and limiters. The term "steam generator" also includes any equipment directly connected to the aforementioned pressure vessels or piping systems in which the steam is 3.2 Thermal oil heaters superheated or cooled, external drums, the circulating For thermal oil heaters the following documents are to lines and the casings of circulating pumps serving be additionally submitted: forced-circulation boilers. – a description of the system stating the discharge 1.2 Thermal oil heaters and return temperatures, the maximum allowable film temperature, the total volume of the The following requirements apply also to thermal oil system and the physical and chemical character- heaters in which organic liquids (thermal oils) are istics of the thermal oil heated by oil fired burners, exhaust gases or electricity to temperatures below their initial boiling point at – drawings of the heaters, the expansion and other atmospheric pressure. pressure vessels and the drainage and storage tanks 1.3 Warm water generators – circuit diagrams of the electrical control system, respectively monitoring and supervision For warm water generators with a permissible discharge temperature of not more than 120 °C and all – a functional diagram with information about the systems incorporating steam or hot water generators safety devices and valves provided (for informa- which are heated solely by steam or hot liquids B. tion) applies regarding materials, design calculations and manufacturing principles. For equipment and testing If specially requested, mathematical proof of the the requirements of 2. - 4. apply. maximum film temperature in accordance with DIN 4754 is to be submitted.

2. General principles 4. Testing after installation on board 2.1 Steam and hot water generators and thermal Following installation on board, a check is carried out oil heaters as defined in 1. are to be manufactured, on the fitting of the pressure vessels, the equipment equipped and tested in accordance with the GL Rules and on the arrangement and setting of safety appli- according to Chapter 2 – Machinery Installations, ances. Operating tests are to be performed wherever Sections 7a and 7b. necessary. Chapter 8 Section 9e C Boilers and Pressure Vessels I - Part 1 Page 9e–2 GL 2007

B. Pressure Vessels C. Oil Firing Equipment

1. Scope 1. General The following requirements apply to pressure vessels (gauge or vacuum pressure) for the operation of the main propulsion plant and its auxiliary machinery. 1.1 Oil firing equipment for steam boilers or They also apply to pressure vessels and equipment thermal oil heaters is subject to the GL Rules accord- necessary for the operation of the fishing vessel and ing to Chapter 2 – Machinery Installations, Section 9, for fish processing if these are subjected to internal or B. external pressure in service. 1.2 Where oil burners are to be used additionally 2. General principles for burning waste oil and oil sludge, the necessary All pressure vessels mentioned under 1. are to be measures are to be agreed with GL Head Office in manufactured, equipped and tested in accordance with each case. the GL Rules according to Chapter 2 – Machinery Installations, Section 8. 1.3 The oil burners of warm water generators, oil-fired heaters and small heating appliances which 3. Documents for approval are located in the engine room or in spaces containing For all pressure vessels necessary for the operation of equipment important to the operation of the machinery the fishing vessel and for fish processing for which space are subject to the requirements of the Rules drawing approval is required according to 2., drawings defined in Chapter 2 – Machinery Installations, Sec- containing all the data necessary for their safety as- tion 9, C. sessment are to be submitted in triplicate. The following details, in particular, are to be specified: 2. Documents for approval – intended use, substances to be contained in the pressure vessel A sectional drawing of each type of burner together – working pressures and temperatures; if necessary, with a description of its mode of operation and also secondary loads, volume of individual spaces circuit diagrams and equipment lists of the electrical control system are to be submitted to GL in triplicate – materials to be used, welding details, heat treat- for approval. ment – design details of the pressurized parts 3. Exemption 4. Testing after installation on board Burners manufactured and tested in accordance with Following installation on board, a check is to be car- EN 267 or other internationally recognized regulations ried out on the fitting of the pressure vessels, the may be accepted. In general, examination of drawings equipment and on the arrangement and setting of of these burners may be dispensed with, if proof is safety appliances. Operating tests are to be performed furnished of a prototype or equivalent test having been wherever necessary. carried out. I - Part 1 Section 10 A Refrigeration Installations Chapter 8 GL 2007 Page 10–1

Section 10

Refrigeration Installations

A. General 4. Documents for approval

1. Scope 4.1 Cargo refrigeration installations 1.1 Class Notation RIC For refrigerating installations which are built under the supervision and in accordance with the GL Rules, The complete requirements of this Section apply to each of the following documents is to be submitted to refrigeration installations intended for use on board of GL in triplicate in due time: fishing vessels with Class Notation RIC, compare GL Rules Part 0 – Classification and Surveys, Section 2, a) A description of the refrigerating installations on C.2.5. Form 139-2006 to provide the information necessary for the Classification of refrigerating in- 1.2 Safety requirements stallations. These forms are available from GL. The safety requirements of this Section also apply to fishing vessel cargo refrigerating installations for b) A calculation of the cooling load as evidence of which Class Notation RIC is not requested as well as the adequate capacity of the installation. for refrigerating installations used for cooling of pro- c) A general arrangement plan of the refrigerating visions and air conditioning. installation with details of the ventilation of the For these refrigerating installations the following refrigerating machinery spaces. requirements have to be considered: d) Drawings of the compressors, such as longitudi- – C. Refrigerants nal and transverse sections, and a workshop – D. Refrigerating Machinery Spaces drawing of the crankshaft or rotors. – F. Pressure Vessels and Apparatus e) Performance data of the compressors. – J.1. Safety Equipment – M.1.5 Escape from refrigerated or air-cooler f) Drawings of all vessels and equipment under re- spaces, etc. frigerant pressure, e.g. condensers, evaporators, oil separators, receivers as well as brine/RSW 2. Definitions coolers together with details of the materials used. Within the scope of this Section refrigerating installations on board fishing vessels are: g) Diagrams showing the layout of refrigerant, brine / CO , RSW and cooling water pipelines – cargo refrigerating installations for the refrigera- 2 with details of the wall thickness and materials. tion of insulated cargo holds – cargo refrigerating installations for the refrigera- h) Drawings showing the arrangement and equip- tion of insulated brine/seawater tanks (RSW) ment of the refrigerated spaces with details of air ventilation including airducts. – quick-freezing installations for fish and other catch i) Drawings showing the type and design of the The provisions assume that the refrigerating installa- defrosting system. tions are permanently installed and belong to the ves- j) Drawings showing the type and execution of the sel. insulation used for the refrigerated spaces and tanks, with details of the insulation of hatches, 3. Classification and survey of refrigeration doors, covers for scuppers and bilges, thermal installations bridges and refrigerant and brine piping.

3.1 For the Classification and Characters of Clas- k) Drawings of the bilge pumping and drainage sification of refrigeration installations see GL Rules facilities for refrigerated spaces and tanks. Part 0 – Classification and Surveys, Section 2. l) Drawings and descriptions of electrical tempera- 3.2 For surveys of refrigeration installations see ture-monitoring systems. GL Rules Part 0 – Classification and Surveys, Sec- tion 3. m) Description of automatic control systems. Chapter 8 Section 10 B Refrigeration Installations I - Part 1 Page 10–2 GL 2007

5. Testing of materials and components 3. Number of refrigerating units

5.1 The selecting and testing of materials is sub- 3.1 At least two complete refrigerating units ject to the GL Rules II – Materials and Welding, Part including compressors, condensers, receivers (if appli- 1 – Metallic Materials, Chapters 1 – 4. cable) and prime mover are to be provided.

5.2 Components under refrigerant pressure are 3.2 Where several compressors operate in a required to undergo material testing as a matter of closed circuit with one condenser and, where installed, principle. Specific requirements are stated individually one brine cooling evaporator, this also counts as one within this Section. refrigerating unit.

5.3 Material tests are to be performed on the 3.3 Where only two refrigerating units are in- crankshafts of reciprocating compressors and the ro- stalled, each compressor shall be capable of working tors of screw compressors with a calculated journal with each condenser and, where applicable, with each diameter of more than 50 mm. Works Certificates are brine cooling evaporator. sufficient in case of journal diameters ≤ 50 mm. 3.4 In case of vessels with Class Notation K and with refrigerated spaces less than 400 m3, considera- 5.4 GL reserve the right to extend material test- tion will be given to the installation of only one con- ing to other important plant components. densing unit.

4. Refrigerating capacity B. Installation, Design and Rating 4.1 The refrigerating capacity of the installation is to be rated in such a way that the required tempera- 1. Design principles ture(s) in holds or tanks can be maintained when any of the refrigerating units are out of operation. Fully 1.1 Refrigeration systems shall be so designed, loaded condition is to be assumed. constructed, tested and installed as to take account of The required temperature is the temperature on which the safety of the system and also emission of chloro- the refrigerating capacity calculation is based and fluorocarbons (CFCs) or any other ozone-depleting which is certified in the Refrigerating Installation substances from the refrigerant held in quantities or Certificate. concentrations which are hazardous to human health or to the environment and shall be also to the satisfaction of the Administration of the country of registra- 4.2 Where additional plants, such as quick freez- tion. ers, icemakers, etc. are connected to the refrigerating installation, the reserve refrigerating unit may be taken into account when the conditions are most unfavour- 1.2 Refrigeration systems shall be adequately able. protected against vibration, shock, expansion, shrink- age, etc. and shall be provided with an automatic safety control device to prevent a dangerous rise in 5. Factors affecting plant rating temperature and pressure. 5.1 The calculation of the required refrigerating capacity is to be based on a seawater temperature of at 2. Electrical power supply least 32 °C and an ambient air temperature of at least At least two generating sets have to be available for 40 °C with 55 % relative humidity unless other values supplying power to refrigerating installations. The are agreed with GL in consideration of special opera- capacity of the generators is to be such that, in addition. tion to other requirements: 5.2 The calculation shall likewise be based on the – when all generators are in operation the total area enveloping the refrigerated spaces/tanks on the power requirements of the refrigerating installa- inside of the insulation, where such spaces are adja- tion can be satisfied, the "total power require- cent to non-cooled spaces, cooled spaces at higher ments" being the installed electrical load of the temperatures, the ambient air or seawater. refrigerating installation – in the event of the failure or shutdown of any 6. Automation, instrumentation and alarms one generator, all refrigerating machinery, with the exception of the stand-by sets can be oper- 6.1 Automated refrigerating installations are to ated at full load. For vessels with Class Notation be so equipped that they can also be operated with K this requirement may be dispensed with. manual control. I - Part 1 Section 10 B Refrigeration Installations Chapter 8 GL 2007 Page 10–3

6.2 Input units and actuating devices are to be alarm shall be generated for the cases defined in Ta- type-tested. ble 10.1.

6.3 Measures shall be taken to prevent freezing 7. Plant of novel design of refrigerated seawater. Refrigerating installations differing in design from 6.4 Defrosting arrangements for air coolers are to those which have already been proved suitable in be controlled by a defrosting program. service on board fishing vessels are subject to special GL approval. For such installations, GL may impose 6.5 Fault alarms special requirements as to the extent of the documentation to be submitted for approval and the scope of An alarm system is to be installed which actuates an the testing, see also GL Rules Part 0 – Classification alarm at a position which is constantly manned. An and Surveys, Section 2, D.3.5.4.

Table 10.1 Instrumentation and alarms

Item Display Alarm Reaction Automatic stop Activated 1 Lubricating oil Pressure Low Automatic stop Driving motors Running Stop 1 Discharge line: - pressure Pressure High Automatic stop Compressor 1 - temperature Temperature High/low Automatic stop (high) 1 Suction line: - pressure Pressure Low Automatic stop 1 - temperature Temperature High 1 Intermediate stage (if fitted) Pressure High Automatic stop Circulation pumps Running Stop Available pumps Running Start For auto start Secondary circuit 1 Brine/CO2 cooler – inlet/outlet Temperature High (outlet) Brine/CO2 1 Pressure line Pressure Low 1 Header tank Level Low Cooling water pumps Running Stop Available cooling water pump Running Start Condenser 1 Cooling water – inlet Temperature -- 1 Cooling water – outlet Temperature High Refrigerating Lock-in alarm Manually activated machinery space Concentration in refrigerating Leakage Automatic stop of re- machinery space, pump rooms, NH3 = 50 ppm frigerating machinery Refrigerant production areas CO2 = 5000 ppm if NH3 > 500 ppm leakage Concentration in refrigerated Leakage

spaces CO2 = 10000 ppm Detection system Failure Temperature measuring Temperature High Left/right hand cooler delivery Temperature High air/return air Refrigerated spaces Lock-in alarm Manually activated

Ventilation fan Stop/running Failure (full/half speed) Defrost Time duration Disabled

1 these devices are to be provided at or in the proximity to the refrigeration machinery

Chapter 8 Section 10 C Refrigeration Installations I - Part 1 Page 10–4 GL 2007

C. Refrigerants Table 10.2 Allowable working pressures for refrigerants 1. Classification Working pressures PB [bar] Refrigerants used in refrigeration systems shall be to Refrigerant High-pressure side Low-pressure side the satisfaction of the Administration of the country of (HP) (LP) registration. Methylchloride or CFCs whose ozone- depleting potential is higher than 5 % of CFC-11 shall R22 22,5 17,0 not be used as refrigerants. Refrigerants are classified R134a 13,9 10,6 as follows: R404A 25,0 19,7 R407A 25,2 19,8 1.1 Approved refrigerants, Group 1 R407B 26,5 20,9 Incombustible refrigerants without significant hazard R407C 23,9 18,8 to human health, e.g.: R410A 33,6 26,4 R22 Chlorodifluormethane CHCIF 2 R507 25,6 20,2 R134a Tetrafluorethane CH2F-CF3 R717 (NH3) 24,0 17,5 R404A R125/143a/134a(44/52/4%) 1 1 R744 (CO2) R407A R32/125/134a(20/40/40%) 1 Design pressure to be determined by the plant designer taking R407B R32/125/134a(10/70/20%) into account the proposed operating pressure and the maximum pressure at rest condition. Where the maximum design R407C R32/125/134a(23/25/52%) pressure at rest conditions is maintained by the fitting of a R410A R32/125(50/50%) supplementary refrigeration unit, condensing the vapour in a holding vessel, supporting calculation require to be provided R507 R125/143a(50/50%) to show that this can be undertaken with a local ambient temperature of 45 °C. R744 Carbon Dioxide CO 2 The holding vessel is to be thermally insulated to prevent the operation of the relief devices within a 24 hour period after With these refrigerants the danger of asphyxiation is, de-energising the supplementary refrigeration unit at an ambi- however, to be borne in mind. ent temperature of 45 °C and an initial pressure equal to the starting pressure of the refrigerating unit.

1.2 Approved refrigerants, Group 2 Toxic or caustic refrigerants and those which, when 2.2 Within the meaning of these Rules, the low- mixed with air, have a lower explosion limit of at least pressure side of the plant includes all parts exposed to 3,5 % by volume. the evaporation pressure of the refrigerant. However, these parts are also subject to the design pressure PR

R717 Ammonia NH3 for the high-pressure side if, e.g. for hot gas defrosting, a switch-over of the system can subject them to NH3 may generally be used as refrigerant with indirect high pressure. systems only. In case of quick freezing installations and in cooling coils fitted in brine / RSW tanks these Medium-pressure vessels of two-stage plants form refrigerants may be directly expanded. In addition, the part of the high pressure side. regulations imposed by the competent authorities of the country of registration are to be observed. 3. Storage of reserve supplies of refrigerants

1.3 Refrigerants which are not approved, 3.1 Reserve supplies of refrigerants may be Group 3 stored only in steel bottles approved for this purpose by the competent authorities of the country of registra- Refrigerants which, when mixed with air, have a lower tion. explosion limit of less than 3,5 % by volume, e.g. eth- ane, ethylene. 3.2 The filling level of these bottles shall be suitable for tropical conditions, unless operating range 2. Working pressures of the fishing vessel is restricted to cold climate zones.

2.1 For the common refrigerants, the allowable 3.3 Bottles containing refrigerant are to be se- working pressures PB (design pressures PR) are laid curely anchored in an upright position and protected down in Table 10.2. against overheating. For other refrigerants, the design pressures PR are determined by the pressure at the bubble point at a 3.4 Bottles containing refrigerant may be stored temperature of 55 °C on the high pressure side and at a only in well ventilated spaces specially prepared for temperature of 45 °C on the low pressure side. this purpose or in refrigerating machinery spaces. I - Part 1 Section 10 D Refrigeration Installations Chapter 8 GL 2007 Page 10–5

3.5 On fishing vessels where, with due regard for b) Equipment for producing water screens is to be the provisions of D., there is no refrigerating machin- fitted above the access doors to refrigerating ery space and the refrigerating machinery is installed machinery spaces. Provision shall be made for in the main or auxiliary engine room, GL may permit actuating this equipment from outside the refrig- exceptions to 3.4 in the case of refrigerants belonging erating machinery space. The actuating device to Group 1. In this case storage bottles up to a maxi- shall not be located in the immediate vicinity of mum of 20 % of the total refrigerant charge for imme- the entrances. diate replenishing of the system may be kept in the main or auxiliary engine room. Where water sprinklers are additionally mounted in the refrigerating machinery spaces themselves, these are to be permanently installed and shall be capable of being actuated from outside. D. Refrigerating Machinery Spaces The spray nozzles of sprinkler systems are to be suitably distributed in the refrigerating machinery space. 1. Definition Due attention is to be paid to electrical machinery and Refrigerating machinery spaces are spaces separated equipment. The spray nozzles shall be capable of by bulkheads from other service spaces and housing covering as large an area as possible with fine water refrigerating machinery and associated equipment. droplets. c) The electrical consumers in the refrigerating 2. Installation of refrigerating machinery machinery spaces shall be capable of being switched off, independently of the forced venti- 2.1 Any space containing refrigerating machinery lation system, by a central switch located out- including condensers and gas tanks utilizing toxic side the room. refrigerants shall be separated from any adjacent space by gastight bulkheads. 3.4 Provision shall be made for the bilge pumping or drainage of refrigerating machinery spaces. 2.2 When the containment according to 2.1 is not Where installations are operated with ammonia, the practicable, due to the size of the vessel, the refrigerat- refrigerating machinery spaces shall be provided with ing system may be installed in the machinery space drainage devices leading to a place where refrigerant provided that the quantity of refrigerant used will not presents no danger to the vessel or to the persons on cause danger to persons in the machinery space, board. should all the gas escape and provided that an alarm is fitted to give warning of dangerous concentration of gas should any leakage occur in the compartment. 4. Leak detection and alarm This arrangement may be considered for a total refrigerant charge of less than 25 kg. 4.1 Refrigerant leak detectors need to be fitted in case of NH3 and/or CO2 in any area where leakage 2.3 Refrigerating machinery is to be installed in may occur, e.g. refrigerating machinery spaces, fish such a way that sufficient space is left for operation, processing area, valve stations, refrigerating cargo servicing and repair. holds. Welded pipelines passing through passageways or access ducts are not considered possible leakage 3. Equipment and accessories areas.

3.1 Refrigeration systems using ammonia in 4.2 Leak detection systems are to be type tested. charges exceeding 25 kg are to be installed in refriger- Set points for alarms shall be adjusted as given in ating machinery spaces separated by gas tight divi- Table 10.1. sions from other ship spaces and service rooms. 4.3 Leak detectors are to activate audible and 3.2 Regardless of the type of refrigerant used, the visual alarms located both inside and outside the af- doors of refrigerating machinery spaces shall not give fected space. The alarm is to be linked to the general access to living quarters or corridors in the accommo- machinery alarm system and is to trip an alarm on the dation area. The doors must open outwards and be bridge as well as in the engine control room. self-closing. 5. Ventilation 3.3 Where refrigeration systems operate with ammonia spaces accommodating the refrigerating machinery are to be equipped as follows: 5.1 Refrigerating machinery spaces shall have a suitably arranged, mechanical ventilation system. The a) Spaces shall be provided with at least two access ventilation system shall be activated either manu- doors as far as possible from each other. The ally or automatically by the detector system. Where doors are to open outwards and be of self- Group 1 refrigerants are used, at least the exhaust air closing type. shall be conveyed into the open air separately from the Chapter 8 Section 10 E Refrigeration Installations I - Part 1 Page 10–6 GL 2007

ducts serving other spaces. The air intake duct shall 1.2 Other compressor drives, like diesel engines, not be connected to the ventilation system serving the turbines, etc. shall comply with Section 9b and the accommodation. relevant Sections of Chapter 2 – Machinery Installa- tions. 5.2 Where ammonia is used, the ventilation system shall not be connected to systems serving other 1.3 Air-cooled compressors are to be designed spaces of the vessel. for an air temperature of at least 45 °C.

5.3 The rating of mechanical fans is subject to the 1.4 Seawater-cooled compressors are to be de- following criteria: signed for a minimum inlet temperature of 32 °C. The cooling water spaces of compressors are to be pro- a) Refrigerating machinery spaces where Group 1 tected against excessive overpressure by safety valves refrigerants are used are to be equipped with or rupture safety devices, unless provided with a free mechanical means of ventilation enabling the air outlet. to be changed at least 30 times/hour. 2. Design and construction of refrigerant b) Where the refrigerant used is ammonia, the compressors minimum flow rate of the mechanical fans serving the refrigerating machinery spaces is to be For the design and construction of refrigerant com- calculated by applying the formula: pressors, see GL Rules defined in Chapter 10 – Re- frigerating Installations, Section 1, E. ⅔ 3 V(punkt) = 60 ⋅ G [m /h] 3. Material testing V = flow rate [m3/h] (punkt) Refrigerant compressors and compressor parts are to G = weight of the refrigerant charge [kg] be subjected to material testing in accordance with the GL Rules defined in A.5. In any case, the number of air changes per hour may not be less than 40. 4. Equipment

Where installations operated on ammonia are 4.1 Compressors are to be equipped with devices equipped with an effective water sprinkler system such as pressure relief valves, rupture discs, etc. arranged in the refrigerating machinery space, the which, if the maximum allowable working pressure is minimum flow rate of the fans specified above may be exceeded, will equalize the pressures on the discharge reduced by 20 %. and suction sides. Semi-hermetic compressors in automatic installations may be exempted from this 5.4 Where the refrigerant used is CO2, the mini- requirement, provided that they are protected by over- mum flow rate of the mechanical fans shall be de- pressure safety switches and can be operated with signed for 30 air changes/hour. permanently open shutoff valves in such a way that the safety valves fitted to the installation remain effec- 5.5 Fans serving refrigerating machinery spaces tive. shall also be capable of being switched on and off from outside the space in question. The switches are to 4.2 Pressure gauges and thermometers are to be be clearly marked. fitted in accordance with J.2.1 and J.2.2.

5.6 Exhaust air ducts of fans serving refrigerating 4.3 A manufacturer's plate with the following machinery spaces are to be gastight inside the vessel. information is to be fixed to each refrigerant compressor: The exhaust air has to be conveyed in such a way as to – manufacturer prevent leakage of gas into other vessel's spaces. – year of construction – refrigerant E. Refrigerant Compressors – maximum allowable working pressure PB [bar]

1. General 5. Testing After completion, refrigerant compressors are to be 1.1 Where the compressors are electrically subjected to a trial run without refrigerant at the manu- driven, the motors and other items of electrical plant facturer's works and to the pressure and tightness tests shall comply with the Sections 11a – 11 l. specified in K. I - Part 1 Section 10 F Refrigeration Installations Chapter 8 GL 2007 Page 10–7

F. Pressure Vessels and Apparatus 2.1.5 Brine tanks which can be shut off shall be protected against excessive pressure rises due to the thermal expansion of the brine by the provision of 1. Pressure vessels and apparatus under re- safety valves or by mechanism for interlocking the frigerant pressure shutoff devices in the open position.

1.1 General 2.2 Testing Pressure vessels and apparatus under refrigerant pres- Brine tanks are to be subjected in the manufacturer's sure shall comply with the GL Rules in Chapter 2 – works to the hydraulic pressure and tightness tests Machinery Installations, Section 8. specified in K. Material tests and pneumatic tightness tests may in general be dispensed with. 1.2 Material testing The materials of components under refrigerant pres- 3. Refrigerated seawater tanks (RSW) sure must be tested in accordance with the GL Rules defined in Chapter 2 – Machinery Installations, Sec- 3.1 Each RSW tank is to be provided with appro- tion 8, B. priate venting and sounding arrangements. The arrangements to assess the liquid levels in the tanks may be permanently installed or be a temporary arrange- 1.3 Safety devices ment. 1.3.1 Pressure vessels and apparatus which contain 3.2 Where a RSW tank is intended to carry dry liquid refrigerant and which can be shut off are to be fish in bulk, the following arrangements are to be fitted with a safety valve, see J.1. provided: 1.3.2 Where more than one pressure vessel are – the tank is to be provided with a bilge well and a provided with one common safety valve, any closing permanent connection to the bilge system, device fitted between the pressure vessels is to be unless the tanks are provided with independent equipped as to secure in the open position. A warning bilge systems sign with the following wording is to be fitted in the vicinity of each closing device: – arrangements are to be made for blanking off sea water piping "Valve is to be secured in open position and may be closed for repairs only". 4. Air coolers

1.3.3 Filters and dryers need not be fitted with 4.1 General safety valves. 4.1.1 Air coolers for direct evaporation 1 count as 1.4 Pressure and tightness tests apparatus under refrigerant pressure and are therefore subject to the requirements in 1. Notwithstanding this, After completion, pressure vessels and apparatus un- safety devices are required only for flooded evapora- der refrigerant pressure are to be subjected to the pres- tors. sure and tightness tests specified in K. 4.1.2 Air coolers operated by indirect evaporation, 2. Brine tanks insofar as brine is used as the cooling medium, shall not be galvanized internally. 2.1 General 4.1.3 Air coolers are to be provided with drip trays 2.1.1 The term "brine" as a cooling medium means and adequate drains. a solution of industrial salts. The use of other media with a low freezing point requires the special approval 4.1.4 Air coolers are to be provided with defrosting of GL. equipment according to M.2.

2.1.2 In this context, brine tanks do not include 4.1.5 Air coolers shall be made of corrosion resis- brine cooling evaporators. The latter shall comply tant material or be externally protected against corro- with the requirements for pressure vessels and appara- sion by galvanizing. tus under refrigerant pressure, as set out in 1.

2.1.3 Brine tanks shall not be galvanized internally. –––––––––––––– 1 2.1.4 Brine systems have to be equipped with air Refrigerating installations with direct evaporation are those where the refrigerant evaporator is located in the refrigerated pipes which cannot be closed off and with brine com- space itself. In such plants no brine or similar cooling medium pensating tanks. is used. Chapter 8 Section 10 G Refrigeration Installations I - Part 1 Page 10–8 GL 2007

4.1.6 Where finned-tube or multi-plate type air tions, Section 11, U. Approved hose assemblies and coolers are used, the distance between the fins or bellows expansion joints are to be used only. plates shall be not less than 10 mm, at least on the air inlet side. In this context, the air inlet side is taken to 1.1.7 Shut-off valves are to be provided to allow mean ¼ of the length of the cooler measured in direc- the replacement of hose assemblies without loss of tion of air flow. refrigerant.

4.1.7 Depending on the type of air circulation sys- 1.1.8 Pipe sections of CO2 piping systems which tem employed, the air coolers are to be subdivided by can be isolated are to be protected by a pressure relief shut offs in such a way that, even after breakdown of valve. At least one pressure relief valve is to be fitted one air cooler section, the cooling of the refrigerated at the CO2 piping system which ensures safe blow-off space can be maintained. of CO2-vapour directly to a safe location above deck. This requirement need however, not be applied in case of very small spaces. 1.2 Material testing 1.2.1 Materials for refrigerant pipes are to be tested 4.2 Material testing in accordance with the GL Rules defined in Chapter 2 Materials for air coolers using direct evaporation are – Machinery Installations, Section 11, B. to be subjected to the tests specified in the GL Rules II – Materials and Welding, Part 1 – Metallic Materials, 1.2.2 Refrigerant valves and fittings are subject to Chapter 2 – Steel and Iron Materials, Section 1, F. and material testing if their housings are made of cast steel Section 2, D. or nodular graphite cast iron and the product of the maximum allowable working pressure PB [bar] multi- In the case of air coolers for indirect evaporation, the plied by the nominal diameter DN [mm] is > 2500. testing of materials may be dispensed with if the cool- Valves and fittings with nominal diameter DN ≤ 50 ing medium employed is brine. are exempted from this requirement.

1.2.3 Where the housings of valves and fittings are made of grey iron, GL reserve the right to check the G. Pipes, Valves and Fittings quality of the material. EN-GJL-200 grade material is to be used as a minimum. 1. Refrigerant pipes, valves and fittings 1.2.4 Where the housings of valves and fittings are 1.1 General manufactured by die-forging or are made of copper alloys, material testing is not required. 1.1.1 Refrigerant pipes, valves and fittings are to be designed in accordance with Section 9d. 1.3 Pressure and tightness test

Where ammonia is employed for refrigerant, copper, 1.3.1 Refrigerant valves and fittings are to be sub- bronze, brass and other copper alloys are not to be jected in the manufacturer’s works to the pressure and used. tightness tests specified in K.

1.1.2 Refrigerant pipes shall be insulated in accor- 1.3.2 Automatic control valves can be exempted dance with L.1. Steel pipes shall be galvanized exter- from this requirement where sensitive internal compo- nally, unless other adequate corrosion protection has nents may be damaged by the pressure testing. Where been demonstrated to GL. the design permits, the housings are to be tested without internal components in these cases. 1.1.3 At points where pipes are supported or pass through decks or bulkheads, a metallic contact with 1.3.3 After installation, refrigerant pipes are to be steel members of the vessel's structure has to be subjected to the tightness test specified in K.2.1.3. avoided.

1.1.4 Where necessary, refrigerant pipes between 2. Brine pipes, valves and fittings compressors and condensers are to be protected against being inadvertently touched. 2.1 General

1.1.5 Automatic control valves are to be arranged 2.1.1 Brine pipes, valves and fittings have to com- or fitted with by-passes so that the installation can be ply with the requirements set out in Section 9d. They operated by hand. are not to be galvanized internally, but shall be protected against corrosion externally. 1.1.6 Flexible refrigerant hoses of non-metallic materials shall comply with the requirements of the 2.1.2 In general thick-walled pipes in accordance GL Rules defined in Chapter 2 – Machinery Installa- with Section 9d, group M are to be used. I - Part 1 Section 10 J Refrigeration Installations Chapter 8 GL 2007 Page 10–9

2.1.3 At points where brine pipes are supported or I. Cooling Water Supply pass through decks or bulkheads, a metallic contact with steel members of the vessel's structure has to be 1. General avoided. Pipes, valves and fittings have to comply with Sec- 2.2 Testing tion 9d. After being installed but prior to the application of the insulation, brine piping systems are to be subjected to 2. Reserve cooling water supply the hydraulic pressure tests specified in K. Material Where the reserve cooling water supply system of the tests may generally be dispensed with. refrigerating installation is connected to the cooling water system of the main propulsion plant, the stand- by cooling water pump specified in H.4. may be dispensed with provided that the stand-by cooling water H. Fans and Pumps pump of the main propulsion plant is capable of the adequate supply of cooling water to the refrigerating installation without adversely affecting the operation 1. Fans of the main propulsion plant. After being installed, the fans are to be tested in accordance with Q.1.5. 3. Suction lines Provision shall be made for replacing fan impellers Each cooling water pump has to be equipped with its and fan motors even when the refrigerated holds are own suction line and shall be able to draw from at fully loaded. On fishing vessels with Class Notation K least two sea chests. Seawater filters are to be fitted this requirement may be dispensed with. and so arranged that they can be cleaned without interrupting the cooling water supply. 2. Refrigerant circulating pumps 4. Dock operation 2.1 At least two mutually independent pumps are to be installed, one of which is to act as a stand-by. By suitable connection of the cooling water lines to ballast water tanks or by hose connections to the deck- On fishing vessels with Class Notation K the stand-by washing line or fire main, measures shall be taken to pump may be dispensed with. ensure that, where necessary, the refrigerating installation can also be operated while the vessel is docked. 2.2 Evidence of the quality of the materials used is to be supplied in respect of all parts subject to re- This requirement is not applicable for fishing vessels frigerant pressure. Where housings are made of grey with Class Notation K. cast iron, EN-GJL-200 grade material is to be used as a minimum requirement. 5. Cooling water pipes in cargo holds Where cooling water pipes have to be laid through 2.3 Refrigerant circulating pumps are to be sub- cargo holds or refrigerated cargo holds to the refriger- jected in the manufacturer's works to a performance ating machinery spaces, they are to be installed in pipe test in presence of a GL Surveyor and to the pressure tunnels. In exceptional cases, cooling water pipes may and tightness tests specified in K. be installed above deck or in the double bottom tank.

3. Brine pumps 6. Testing 3.1 At least two mutually independent pumps are After being installed, cooling water pipes, valves and to be installed, one of which is to act as a stand-by. fittings are to be subjected to a pressure test specified in K. On fishing vessels with Class Notation K the stand-by pump may be dispensed with.

3.2 Brine pumps are to be subjected in the manu- J. Safety and Monitoring Equipment facturer's works to a performance test in presence of a GL Surveyor and to the hydraulic pressure and tightness tests specified in K. A pneumatic tightness test is 1. Safety equipment not required. 1.1 General 4. Cooling water pumps 1.1.1 Provisions are to be made to ensure that the The requirements set out in 3. are applicable in analo- compressor switches off automatically if the limits are gous manner. Regarding the stand-by pumps see I.2. exceeded, see Table 10.1. Chapter 8 Section 10 L Refrigeration Installations I - Part 1 Page 10–10 GL 2007

1.1.2 Pressure vessels and apparatus which can be K. Pressure and Tightness Tests isolated and which contain liquefied refrigerants have to be equipped with a safety valve, see also F.1.3. 1. General

1.1.3 Provision has to be made for the safe blow- 1.1 All pressure and tightness tests are to be off of refrigerants directly into the open air. performed in presence of a GL Surveyor. They are to be carried out initially during supervision of construc- 1.2 Safety valves and rupture discs tion at the manufacturer’s works or on board of the vessel as specified in the relevant parts of this Section. 1.2.1 Safety valves exposed to refrigerant pressure are subject to the requirements set out in G.1. The 1.2 As a rule, pneumatic tightness tests are to be provisions of G.2. are applicable in analogous manner performed after the hydraulic pressure tests. to safety valves under brine pressure. 1.3 Exceptionally, GL may, on application, waive 1.2.2 Safety valves are to be set to the maximum the hydraulic pressure test provided that a pneumatic allowable working pressure and secured to prevent the pressure test is performed at a test pressure approved setting being altered inadvertently. by GL. In addition regulations for accident prevention of national authorities are to be observed. 1.2.3 Where a rupture disk is fitted upstream of a safety valve, the space between the rupture disc and 1.4 In refrigerating installations which have al- the safety valve is to be monitored by an alarm pres- ready been charged with refrigerant, pneumatic pressure gauge or an equivalent device. sure tests may be performed only with nitrogen or carbon dioxide if Group 1 refrigerants are used or only A screen is to be fitted downstream the rupture disc to with nitrogen if the refrigerant is ammonia. ensure the function of the safety valve. The use of other gases requires the agreement of GL. The bursting pressure of the rupture disc shall not exceed the maximum allowable working pressure. A 2. Test pressures margin of 10 % is permitted. 2.1 Components under refrigerant pressure

2. Monitoring equipment 2.1.1 The hydraulic test pressure is to be 1,5 × the maximum allowable working pressure PB according An overview of the monitoring equipment is contained to Table 10.2. in Table 10.1. 2.1.2 Where the low-pressure side of the installa- 2.1 Pressure gauges tion can be subjected by operational switching to the pressure of the high pressure side, e.g. for defrosting The suction and discharge pipes of refrigerant com- with hot gas, the vessels and equipment involved are pressors, intermediate stage pressure vessels and pres- to be designed and tested at the pressures prescribed surized brine pipes are to be fitted with pressure for the high pressure side. gauges. Refrigerant pressure gauges are required to have pressure and temperature scales for the refriger- 2.1.3 The pneumatic tightness test pressure is to be ant concerned. The maximum allowable working equal to the maximum allowable working pressure PB. pressure is to be indicated by a red mark. 2.2 Components under cooling water or brine 2.2 Thermometers pressure.

Brine delivery and return pipes, condenser cooling The hydraulic test pressure is to be 1,5 × the maximum water inlet and outlet pipes and pressure and suction allowable working pressure PB, but not less than 4 bar. pipes of compressors are to be equipped with thermometers.

For the number and disposition of thermometers in L. Insulation of Pressure Vessels, Apparatus, refrigerated cargo holds see N. Pipes, Valves and Fittings

2.3 Liquid level indicators 1. Cold insulation

Direct indicators such as sight glasses for liquid re- 1.1 Pressure vessels, apparatus, pipes, valves and frigerants are to be fitted with shut off valves. fittings whose operating temperatures may drop below the ambient temperatures are to be provided with cold The use of tubular glasses is not permitted. insulation. Components of plants which are accom- I - Part 1 Section 10 M Refrigeration Installations Chapter 8 GL 2007 Page 10–11

modated in specially insulated refrigerating machinery 1.4 The clear openings of access trunkways and spaces are exempted from this requirement. companion hatches leading to cargo or air-cooler spaces shall not be less than 600 × 600 mm. Hinged 1.2 Refrigerant and brine pipes which traverse hatch covers are to be protected against closing acci- uncooled spaces are to be insulated with special care dentally and shall be capable of being reopened by and are to be installed so that they are protected from hand from inside. damage. 1.5 Refrigerated or air-cooler spaces are to be 1.3 Air-, sounding-, thermometer- and drain equipped with an escape leading out to the open deck. pipes in refrigerated and air-cooler spaces are to be For this purpose, each space is to be provided with at adequately insulated. least one door which can also be opened from inside. In addition an alarm for operation from within the 1.4 Before being insulated, the items concerned space shall be connected to the bridge or permanently are to be protected against corrosion. manned machinery control centre (MCC) to prevent persons being trapped. 1.5 Cold insulation is to be designed as to prevent the formation of condensation water on its sur- 1.6 The supporting structures of refrigerated face at a maximum relative humidity of 90 %. spaces and inspection passageways are to be designed to withstand the load expected by the cargo. 1.6 The insulation is to be free from discontinui- ties and its final layer shall be given a vapourtight 1.7 Refrigerated spaces are to be provided with coating. drains and/or bilge pumping facilities. In this connection see Section 9d, K. 1.7 Insulation is to be protected at points where there is a danger of damage. 1.8 For scuppers in the bulkhead deck, see Section 2. 2. Heat insulation 1.9 Circulating fans and air-coolers installed in 2.1 To avoid premature refrigerant condensation, refrigerated or air-cooler spaces have to be accessible hot gas defrosting pipes are to be insulated over their at all times. It shall be possible to change fan impellers entire length. and drive motors even when the cargo spaces are fully loaded, see also H.1. 2.2 If insulation is provided to prevent accidental If spaces are served by two or more fans having a touching see also G.1.1.4. capacity that the minimum required temperature can be maintained under most unfavourable conditions 2.3 Components requiring insulation are to be with anyone fan out of action, this requirement need protected against corrosion. not be applied.

2. Defrosting M. Equipment and Insulation of Refrigerated Spaces 2.1 Means are to be provided for defrosting air- coolers. Efficient defrosting is to be ensured even when refrigerated compartments are loaded to their 1. Equipment maximum.

1.1 The external boundary walls of refrigerated 2.2 Drip trays and drains are to be protected from spaces are to be watertight and made of steel. If the freezing by adequate heating arrangements. use of other materials is envisaged, the agreement of GL is required. 2.3 Means are to be provided to protect air coolers from overheating. 1.2 Manholes in the double bottom or in oil tank tops are to be surrounded with an oiltight coaming 100 mm in height. 3. Insulation

1.3 Brine or refrigerant pipe penetrations through 3.1 The inside surfaces of refrigerated spaces are watertight bulkheads and decks shall be of approved to be adequately insulated. Thermal bridges are to be design. The pipes may not come into direct contact avoided. Structural members of the vessel which may with bulkheads, vessel's structure or other metal struc- act as thermal bridges, e.g. decks, partitions and pil- tural members. The fire resistance of the bulkheads lars, are to be fully insulated over a length of at least and decks shall not be impaired. 1 m into the refrigerated space. Chapter 8 Section 10 N Refrigeration Installations I - Part 1 Page 10–12 GL 2007

3.2 Divisions, bulkheads and decks separating N. Temperature Monitoring Equipment for refrigerated spaces at the same temperature need not Refrigerated Spaces be insulated. However, the requirement in 3.1 is to be complied with. Cladding is to be fitted to protect the 1. General cargo. 1.1 Suitably distributed and easily accessible 3.3 Insulation materials shall be odourless and thermometers are to be placed in each refrigerated non-hygroscopic as possible. Combined with their space. At least one thermometer each is required be- cladding material, it shall be not readily ignitable. fore and after each air-cooler. 3.4 If timber is used in refrigerated cargo spaces, this is to be impregnated with, if possible, odourless 1.2 Based on spaces of normal geometry and on media to prevent rotting and fire. the useful volume shown, the following number of thermometers is to be fitted as a minimum: 3.5 Insulation is to be permanently secured. – for spaces up to approximately 300 m3: Where insulation in the form of slabs is used, the 2 thermometers edges of the slabs are to abut tightly against each other. – for spaces up to approximately 800 m3: 3 thermometers

3.6 The insulation at manhole covers, bilge suc- 3 tions and wells shall be removable. – for spaces over 800 m : 4 thermometers 3.7 For the insulation of piping in refrigerated In determining the number of thermometers required, spaces see L. each individual refrigerated space is to be considered separately, even where several spaces are served by a 3.8 The edges of insulated hatches and hatch single air-cooler and the tween decks are not insulated. covers, doors, bilge covers, etc. are to be protected against damage. 1.3 In case of RSW-tanks two thermometers shall be installed as a minimum. 3.9 At hatches and for about 500 mm beyond, the deck insulation in lower holds is to be provided with a special protective covering. The same applies also to 2. Electrical temperature monitoring equip- shaft tunnels. ment

3.10 Unless suitable deck material or aluminium 2.1 Where temperatures are not monitored lo- gratings are provided as top covering, the insulation of cally, electrical devices are to be fitted which comply the decks of refrigerated spaces is to be protected by both with the following requirements and with Sec- battens measuring at least 50 mm by 50 mm in cross tions 11a – 11 l. section. The battens may take the form of removable gratings. 2.2 In design and degree of protection, all appliances and other system components shall be compati- 3.11 The insulation of the bulkheads of refriger- ble with the mechanical and climatic conditions at- ated spaces and of air ducts is to be suitably protected taching to their particular operating environments. If against damage. This protection is to be so designed mobile temperature sensors are provided for refriger- that the cooling air is able to circulate freely. ated holds they are then to be fitted with connecting leads of sufficient length and the sensors are to be 3.12 Refrigerated spaces should not lie adjacent to protected against mechanical damage. fuel or lubricating oil tanks. Where this cannot be avoided, a sufficiently wide gap is to be left between 2.3 Means are to be provided to enable tempera- the vertical surfaces of such tanks and the insulation. ture measuring of cargo holds in case of failure of the This gap is to be provided with a drain leading to the temperature monitoring system. The number of meas- bilge and with a vent pipe leading to the open air. The uring points (sensors) in refrigerated spaces depends back of the insulation is to be protected against the on the configuration and size of each space. The re- penetration of moisture, e.g. by metal cladding. quirements set out in 1.1 and 1.2 are to be complied with as a minimum. 3.13 The requirements set out in 3.12 apply in analogous manner to the tops of lubricating oil and 2.4 The measuring range of the system has to fuel tanks. In the case of welded tank tops, the speci- cover the entire anticipated temperature range plus an fied isolating gap may be dispensed with, provided additional ± 5 K. Temperatures above and below the that the top is covered with a well established oilproof measuring range shall not have any harmful effect on coating without joints and of sufficient thickness. the systems. I - Part 1 Section 10 Q Refrigeration Installations Chapter 8 GL 2007 Page 10–13

2.5 For the accuracy of the temperature meas- 2. Protective equipment urements and reading the following values are to be applied: 2.1 Breathing apparatus – maximum total error: 0,5 K Where any refrigerant harmful to persons is used in the refrigerating system, at least two sets of breathing – scale calibration for analogous measurements: apparatus shall be provided, one of which shall be 2,5 mm/K placed in a position not likely to become inaccessible in the event of leakage of refrigerant. Breathing appa- – exceptions subject to GL approval ratus provided as part of the vessel’s fire-fighting equipment may be considered as meeting all part of 2.6 Wires and their installation has to comply this provision provided its location meets both pur- with Sections 11a – 11 l. Waterproof distribution and poses. Where self-contained breathing apparatus are junction boxes shall be used. used, spare cylinders shall be provided.

2.2 The provision of gas masks, respirators, pro- 2.7 Each temperature measuring system has to be tective clothing, etc. is also subject to national acci- provided with its own power supply. The power sup- dent prevention regulations. ply system shall be duplicated. 2.3 Operating and emergency advice 2.8 Where temperature measuring systems are supplied by their own power sources or via converters Adequate guidance for the safe operation and emer- from the vessel’s supply system provision shall be gency procedures of the refrigeration system shall be made for easy switching to a stand-by power source. provided by suitable notices displayed on board of the vessel. 2.9 Instruments and appliances shall be marked with their type and number. Q. Shipboard Testing 2.10 The system and its individual components are to be subjected to a test in the manufacturer's works under the supervision of GL. 1. Operational tests The refrigerating installation is to be subjected to the following tests.

O. Quick Freezing Installations 1.1 All compressors, pumps, fans, etc. are to be operated individually and simultaneously in all anticipated speed ranges. 1. For pressurized parts of quick freezing installations, such as plate elements or freezing coils, the The operation of the compressors has to be demon- requirements in F. shall be complied with. strated at different evaporating temperatures. During the test, the compressors are to be connected to the condensers and evaporators in all combinations 2. Spaces for quick freezing installations shall possible in service. be in line with the requirements set out in D.3., D.4. and D.2.1. 1.2 In case of automatic refrigerating installations the proper working of the automatic and manual modes of operation are to be demonstrated.

P. Spare Parts and Protective Equipment 1.3 The condensers are to be operated with the main cooling water pump and with the stand-by pump. The operation of the cooling water supply when the 1. Spare parts fishing vessel is in dock, is to be demonstrated in accordance with I.4. 1.1 The extent of spare parts to be carried on board is indicated in Section 13. In the case of re- 1.4 Brine pumps are to be tested. cording instruments, the supply of spare parts is to be agreed with GL. 1.5 It is to be demonstrated that the specified air changes and a uniform air distribution in cargo holds 1.2 For fishing vessels with Class Notation K the are achieved. availability of spare parts for refrigerating installations should be specially considered and decided upon by 1.6 The efficient working of the defrosting sys- the owner. tem is to be demonstrated. Chapter 8 Section 10 Q Refrigeration Installations I - Part 1 Page 10–14 GL 2007

2. Refrigeration test 2.7.2 Ambient conditions and adjacent spaces

2.1 A refrigeration test (balance test) is to be The temperatures of the ambient air and of the water performed to demonstrate to GL the degree of thermal are to be measured as are also the temperatures of insulation of the refrigerated spaces/tanks and that the other vessel's spaces adjoining the refrigerated holds/ available refrigerating capacity of the installation tanks. complies with the requirements set out in B.3. and B.5. The required proof of performance is deemed to 2.7.3 Compressors have been supplied if the evaluation of the test by GL Pressure and temperature of the refrigerant on the shows that the heat transfer coefficient, on which the suction and pressure sides, speed of the compressors calculation is based, has not been exceeded. and the power consumption of the drive motors are to be measured. In case of semi-hermetic motor com- 2.2 The temperature in the refrigerating pressors, measurement of the speed may be dispensed holds/tanks is to be lowered to the level corresponding with. to the refrigerated space/tank temperature specified for the installation. For this purpose, the temperature 2.7.4 Condensers difference between the ambient air and the refrigerated spaces/tanks shall not be less than 15 K. Outlet temperatures of the refrigerant are to be measured. Where the test is performed during cold season the test conditions will be given special consideration by GL. 2.7.5 Brine 2.3 Before commencement of the balance test the The temperature of the brine before and after the brine agreed refrigerated hold/tank temperature is to be kept coolers, the pressure at the brine pump outlets and the constant for at least 10 hours in order to achieve a power consumption of the brine pumps are to be uniform cooling of all parts. At the end of this cooling measured. period, the refrigerating machinery must be in steady operating condition. 2.7.6 Circulating fans for the refrigerated spaces

2.4 The temperature measurements for the bal- The power consumption of the fan motors is to be ance test are to be performed for a period of at least measured. six hours. During this time the outside temperature shall be constant as possible. Periods of strong solar 2.7.7 Measuring intervals radiation are to be avoided. During the balance time recordings are to be made hourly, otherwise every two hours. 2.5 During the balance test all machinery and equipment in use is to be maintained in a steady oper- The ambient temperatures outside the refrigerated ating condition and to be operated manually. holds/tanks, which are required for the evaluation, shall be measured every hour over a period of 4 to 6 2.6 The number of compressors needed to hours prior to the balancing time, depending on the achieve the condition of balance is to be fixed so as to insulation. achieve continuous operation. If the capacity of even a single compressor is too high, the plant has to be oper- 2.8 Reports ated intermittently while recording the "on" time. The switching off of individual cylinders or rows of cylin- After the balance test, the following documents are to der is not allowed. be submitted to GL Head Office:

2.7 Measurements 2.8.1 A diagrammatic drawing of the vessel and the refrigerated holds/tanks showing the temperature The following measurements are to be carried out: measuring points. 2.7.1 Refrigerated spaces/tanks 2.8.2 A test report including all the measured data The temperatures in refrigerated spaces/tanks and at and copies of the recorded temperatures as well as the air-coolers are to be measured. In addition, the those from the thermograph. temperature curve is to be plotted by means of a temperature recorder. 2.8.3 The vessel's draught, for and aft. I - Part 1 Section 11a B General Requirements and Instructions for Electrical Installations Chapter 8 GL 2007 Page 11a–1

Section 11a

General Requirements and Instructions for Electrical Installations

A. General 3. References to other rules and regulations

3.1 Where the requirements for electrical equip- 1. Scope ment and facilities are not laid down in these Rules, decision shall be made, wherever necessary, regarding 1.1 The requirements of the Sections 11a to 11 l the use of other regulations and standards. These in- apply to electrical equipment of decked fishing vessels clude e.g. IEC publications, especially all IEC 60092 with a length L ≥ 12,0 m. For fishing vessels with a publications. length L < 24 m reduced requirements may be defined in different parts of the following Sections. 3.2 If necessary, besides of the GL's Construction Rules for fishing vessels national regulations are to be For other types of ships engaged in the fishery busi- observed as well. ness, like fish processing vessels, whale factory ships or fish transport and flotilla mother ships as well as for fishing vessels with a length L ≥ 45 m, the electrical 4. Design installations have to follow the requirements of Chap- Electrical installations shall be designed so that: ter 3 – Electrical Installations. – the maintaining of normal operational and habitable conditions provided on board will be en- 1.2 Versions deviating from the Construction sured without recourse to the emergency source Rules may be approved if they have been tested for of electrical power suitability and accepted as equivalent by GL. – the operation of the equipment required for 1.3 GL reserve the right to specify additional safety will be ensured under various emergency requirements to the Construction Rules where these conditions are related to new systems or installations or where – the safety of crew and vessel from electrical they are necessary because of new knowledge or oper- hazards will be ensured ating experience.

1.4 For DC or AC main installations with a voltage not exceeding 50 volts and/or a power not exceed- B. Definitions ing 5 kW, the requirements of the Sections 11a to 11 l are not wholly applicable. Such installations may be given special consideration by GL Head Office. 1. Power supply installations The power supply installations comprise all installa- 2. Application tions for the generating, conversion, storage and distribution of electrical energy. 2.1 International Torremolinos Convention 2. Essential equipment Fishing vessels of flag states which have already rati- Essential equipment is required to ensure continuity of fied the Torremolinos International Convention for the following functions (compare also Section 9a, H.): fishing vessels with a length L ≥ 45 m, see Section 1, A.3.3, have to follow directly the requirements de- – the propulsion, manoeuvrability, navigation and fined therein. safety of the vessel – the safety of the crew 2.2 European Communities – type-specific equipment on vessels with special Fishing vessels with a length L ≥ 24 m flying the flag Class Notations, e.g. Certified Fishing Gear of a state of the European Community or vessels fish- CFG ing in the waters of the European Community have to – the maintaining of perfect condition of the follow the requirements of the Torremolinos Conven- cargo, e.g. on vessels with cargo refrigerating tion according to 2.1 overruled by the Commission installations with Class Notation RIC Directives defined in Section 1, A.3.3. A copy of the consolidated text can be delivered by GL. Essential equipment is subdivided into: Chapter 8 Section 11a B General Requirements and Instructions for Electrical Installations I - Part 1 Page 11a–2 GL 2007

– primary essential equipment is that required to 8.1 Wet operating spaces be operative at all times to maintain the manoeuvrability of the vessel as regards propulsion Wet operating spaces are spaces in which facilities and steering and that required directly for the may be exposed to moisture, e.g. main engine rooms. primary duty of the fishing vessel. 8.2 Dry operating spaces – secondary essential equipment is that required for the safety of the vessel and the crew and Dry operating spaces are spaces in which no moisture such equipment which can briefly be taken out normally occurs, e.g. engine control rooms. of service without propulsion, steering of the vessel and equipment needed for the primary 8.3 Locked electrical spaces duty of the fishing vessel being unacceptably impaired. Locked electrical spaces are spaces which are provided with lockable doors and are intended solely for 3. Non-essential equipment the installation of electrical equipment such as switchgear, transformers, etc. They have to be constructed as Non-essential equipment is that which temporary dry spaces. disconnection does not impair propulsion and steerabiliy of the vessel and does not endanger the 9. Systems safety of crew, cargo, vessel and machinery. Systems contain all equipment necessary for monitor- 4. Emergency consumers ing, control and safety including the input and output devices. Systems cover defined functions including Emergency consumers are mandatory consumers behaviour under varying operating conditions, cycles which, after breakdown of the main energy supply, and running. shall be fed by the emergency energy supply. 10. Protection devices 5. Electric network Protective devices detect actual values, activate alarms An electric network comprises all equipment/ installa- in the event of limit-value infringement and prevent tions connected together at the same rated voltage. machinery and equipment being endangered. They automatically initiate curative measures or calls for 5.1 Isolated electric network appropriate ones. This term refers to a system in which a conductor or the neutral is not connected to the vessel's hull in nor- 11. Safety devices mal operation. If it is earthed via measuring or protective devices with a very high impedance, the system is Safety devices detect critical limit-value infringements likewise deemed to be isolated. and prevent any immediate danger to persons, vessel or machinery. 5.2 Electric network with earthed neutral 12. Safety systems This is a system in which the neutral is connected to the vessel's hull in normal operation. Safety systems are a combination of several safety devices and/or protection devices into one functional 6. Safety voltage unit.

Safety voltage is a protection provision and consists of 13. Alarms a circuit with rated voltage not exceeding 50 V AC, operated unearthed and isolated safely from supply An alarm gives optical and acoustical warning of circuits exceeding 50 V. abnormal operating conditions.

7. Low-voltage systems 14. Power electronics Low-voltage systems are systems operating with rated Power electronics are all equipment and arrangements voltages of more than 50 V up to 1000 V inclusive and for generation, transformation, switching and control with rated frequencies of 50 Hz or 60 Hz, or direct- of electrical power by the use of semiconductor com- current systems where the maximum instantaneous ponents. value of the voltage under rated operating conditions does not exceed 1500 V. 15. Equipment of power electronics

8. Machinery spaces All equipment which directly affect the flow of electrical energy; consist of the functional wired semicon- Machinery spaces are spaces in which machines and ductor elements together with their protection and equipment are installed and which are accessible only cooling devices, the semiconductor transformers or to authorized persons, e.g. engine rooms. inductors and the switchgear in the main circuits. I - Part 1 Section 11a D General Requirements and Instructions for Electrical Installations Chapter 8 GL 2007 Page 11a–3

16. Dead ship condition – short-circuit calculation where total generator output > 500 kVA "Dead ship" condition means that the complete machinery plant including the main source of electrical – internal communication systems power are out of operation and auxiliary energy as compressed air, starting current from batteries, etc. are not available for the restoration of the main power – alarm systems supply, for the restart of the auxiliaries and for the start-up of the propulsion plant. It is however assumed – main and emergency lighting arrangement that the equipment for start-up of the emergency diesel-generator is ready for use. – navigation lights – propulsion control system 17. Main switchboard Main switchboard is a switchboard directly supplied – steering gear power and control systems by the main source of electrical power and intended to distribute electrical energy to the vessel's main and 1.1 The drawings of switchgear and control sys- auxiliary systems. tems are to be accompanied by parts lists indicating the manufacturers and characteristics of the electrical 18. Periodically unattended machinery spaces components, circuit diagrams together with descrip- Periodically unattended machinery spaces means those tions, where these constitute a necessary aid to under- spaces containing main propulsion and associated standing. machinery and all sources of main electrical supply which are not at all times manned under all operating The drawings and documents shall make it clear that conditions including manoeuvring. the requirements set out in this Chapter have been complied with. 19. Normal operational and habitable conditions 1.2 Any non-standard symbols used are to be explained in a key. These mean conditions under which the vessel as a whole, its machinery services, means of main and auxiliary propulsion, steering gear and associated 1.3 All documents are to be indicated with the equipment, aids to safe navigation and to limit the hull number and the name of the shipyard. risks of fire and flooding, internal and external means of communicating and signalling, means of escape and winches for rescue boats are in proper working order 1.4 All documentation shall be submitted in Eng- and the minimum comfortable conditions of habitabil- lish or German language. ity are satisfactory. 1.5 GL reserve the right to demand additional documentation if that submitted is insufficient for an assessment of the installation. C. Documents for Approval

2. Modifications and extensions 1. Newbuildings The drawings and documents listed in the following Major modifications to the electrical installations of are to be submitted to GL Head Office in triplicate for vessels under construction or in service are subject to examination at a sufficiently early date to ensure that approval. The relevant documents are to be submitted they are approved and available to the Surveyor at the in ample time prior to the execution of the work. beginning of the manufacture or installation of the electrical equipment. The following drawings are to be submitted: – Form F141 (Details of the type and scope of the D. Fishing Vessel's Documentation electrical systems) When the vessel is commissioned or following major – electrical one line diagram modifications and extensions of the electrical equip- – electrical main switchboard and panel boards ment, at least the documents subject to approval, specified in C. and showing the final arrangement of – electric load analysis the electrical equipment, are to be supplied on board. The documents are to be marked with the name or the – electrical power and lighting systems yard number of the vessel, the name of the yard and – emergency electrical systems the date of preparation of the documents. Chapter 8 Section 11a E General Requirements and Instructions for Electrical Installations I - Part 1 Page 11a–4 GL 2007

E. Ambient Conditions For fishing vessels with L < 24 m GL may accept deviations from Table 11a.1. 1. Environmental effects 2. Vibrations 1.1 The selection, layout and arrangement of all shipboard machinery, equipment and appliances shall 2.1 Electrical machinery and appliances are nor- be such as to ensure faultless continuous operation mally subjected to vibration stresses. Design, con- under the ambient conditions defined in Section 1, C. struction and installation must in every case take ac- Therefore the manufacturer/supplier shall be informed count of these stresses. by the user about the expected environmental conditions. The faultless long-term service of individual components shall not be impaired by vibration stresses. 1.2 Products are classified according to their applications into the environmental categories as 2.2 Assessment, proof and measurement of vibra- stated in Table 11a.1. In type approval Certificates tions shall follow the GL Rules defined in Chapter 3 – will be referred to the respective category. Electrical Installations, Section 1, E.2.

Table 11a.1 Environmental conditions/ environmental categories

Environmental Conditions

Closed Area Open Deck Area

Comments Environmental Category Category Environmental Temperature relative Humidity Vibrations Temperature relative Humidity Vibrations 0 °C to For general applications, except A to 0,7 g 100 % category B, C, D, F, G, H. + 45 °C 0 °C to For application at a higher level B to 4 g 100 % of vibration strain. + 45 °C 0 °C to For application at a higher degree C to 0,7 g 100 % of heat. + 55 °C 0 °C For application at a higher degree to D to 4 g of heat and a higher level of vi- 100 % + 55 °C brations strain.

0 °C to For use in air-conditioned areas. E to 0,7 g 80 % With GL’s special consent only. + 40 °C For application when additional – 25 °C to influences of salt mist and tempo- F to 0,7 g 100 % rary inundation are to be ex- + 45 °C pected. – 25 °C to For use on masts, with the addi- G to 2,3 g 100 % tional influence of salt mist. + 45 °C

The provisions contained in the H In accordance with manufacturer’s specifications Certificates shall be observed.

I - Part 1 Section 11a G General Requirements and Instructions for Electrical Installations Chapter 8 GL 2007 Page 11a–5

F. Operating Conditions 10

1. Voltage and frequency variations 5

1.1 All electrical equipment shall be so designed that it works faultlessly during the voltage and fre- 2 quency variations occurring in the normal operation. / U [%] The variations indicated in Table 11a.2 are to be used n 1

as a basis. U 0,5 Table 11a.2 Voltage and frequency variations

Source of Variations Parameter 0,2 power Continuous Transient Frequency ± 5 % ± 10 % (5 s) 0,1 General 1 3 5 7 10 15 25 100 Voltage + 6 % - 10 % ± 20 % (1,5 s) n Storage batteries Voltage ± 20 % 1 – Fig. 11a.1 Limit values for the single harmonics in and static the supply voltage. U is the RMS value of converters v the v-th order harmonic voltage 1 see 1.2

1.2 For three-phase current (alternating current): 1.2 If in direct-current systems supplied by storage batteries and static converters the permissible – 4 wires with neutral earthed, but without hull limits are exceeded, the faultless function of all elec- return trical devices shall be ensured. – 3 wires with neutral earthed, with hull return 1.3 Any larger voltage variations likely because – 3 wires insulated from the vessel's hull of the different conditions in distribution systems supplied by storage batteries and static converters are to be taken into account. Measures are to be taken to 2. Hull return conduction/system earthing stabilize the input voltage of specific systems, e.g. electronic equipment, which cannot operate satisfacto- 2.1 Systems with hull return are to be installed rily within the stated limits. only with special acceptance of GL Head Office. The hull return system of distribution shall not be used 2. Mains quality for power, heating or lighting in vessels for "unrestricted service". 2.1 In systems without substantial static converter load and supplied by synchronous generators, the total voltage harmonic distortion shall not exceed 5 %. 2.2 This requirement does not preclude the use of: 2.2 In systems fed by static converters and sys- – impressed current cathodic protective systems tems in which the static converter load predominates, for single harmonics in permanence the limit values – limited and locally earthed system, such as starter indicated in Fig. 11a.1 apply. The total harmonic dis- systems for internal combustion engines or tortion shall not exceed 8 %. – insulation level monitoring devices provided the circulation current does not exceed 30 mA under the most unfavourable conditions G. Power Supply Systems 2.3 The connection of the return conductor to the 1. Low-voltage systems hull shall be made somewhere easy to check and not in compartments with isolated bulkheads, e.g. cold The following systems are permitted in principle, for rooms. restrictions see 2.:

1.1 For direct current and single-phase alternat- 3. Systems with earthed neutral ing current: If the selectivity is required in view of the shut-off of – 2 wires, with one wire liable to be earthed earth faults and additional current-limiting devices are mounted between the generator neutral point and the – single wire with hull return vessel's hull, this shall not impair the selective shut-off – 2 wires insulated from the vessel's hull of faulty circuits. Chapter 8 Section 11a J General Requirements and Instructions for Electrical Installations I - Part 1 Page 11a–6 GL 2007

4. Systems with non-earthed neutral J. Protection and Protective Measures

4.1 In non-earthed systems, the generator neutral 1. Protection against foreign bodies and wa- points shall not be connected together. ter

4.2 The insulation resistance of a distribution The protection of electrical appliances against foreign system without earthing of the system is to be moni- bodies and water must be appropriate to the particular tored and displayed. place of installation. The minimum degrees of protection are set out in Table 11a.4. When the machines, appliances and control panels do not have these types of protection, adequate protection H. Voltages and Frequencies shall be carried out during installation. The degree of protection of the appliance as installed shall also be The use of standardized voltages and frequencies is ensured during operation. recommended. The maximum permitted rated main For carrying out the types of protection, see IEC Pub- voltages shall be as shown in Table 11a.3. lication 60529.

Table 11a.3 Maximum permitted rated mains 2. Protection against electric shock voltages 2.1 Protection against direct contact Voltage Electrical installations Protection against direct contact comprises all the For power equipment not removable during measures taken to protect persons against the dangers service, emergency power supply, heating and 500 V arising from contact with the live parts of electrical galley consumers and permanently installed con- facilities. Live parts are conductors and conductive trol circuits. parts of facilities which in normal operating condition are under voltage. For lighting equipment, sockets for general use, portable appliances with double insulation and/ 250 V or protective isolating transformers, machine 2.1.1 Electrical facilities have to be so designed control, monitoring and safety equipment that, when they are used properly, persons cannot touch or come dangerously close to live parts. For For portable appliances for working in confined exceptions see 2.1.2. spaces, in wet rooms, on the open deck, in 50 V stores, engine rooms and other service spaces if 2.1.2 In locked electrical service spaces, protection equipment without double insulation and/or against direct contact is already maintained by the safety isolating transformers is used. mode of installation. Insulated handrails are to be

fitted near live parts.

2.2 Protection against indirect contact I. Materials and Insulation Electrical facilities must be made in such a way that persons are protected against dangerous contact volt- 1. Electrical machines, cables and devices shall ages in the event of an insulation failure. be resistant to air containing moisture and salt, sea- For this purpose, the construction of the facilities shall water and oil vapours. incorporate one of the following protective measures: They shall not be hygroscopic and shall be flame – protective earthing, see 2.3, or retardant and self-extinguishing. The insulation of windings need not be flame-retardant. – protection by extra-low voltage (max. rated voltage AC 50 V and DC 120 V; in certain cases Units of standard industrial type may be used in areas the voltage shall be lower in accordance with not liable to be affected by salty sea air. IEC publication 60364-4-41), or – protection by electrical separation for supplying 2. The evidence of flame-retardation shall be one consuming device only (voltage not exceed- according to IEC Publication 60092-101 or other ing 250 V), or equivalent standards, e.g. IEC publication 60695-11- 10 or UL94. Cables shall correspond to IEC publica- – protection by double insulation, or tion 60332-1. – In case where special precautions against electric shock will be necessary, the additional usage 3. Materials with a high tracking resistance are of residual current protective devices 30 mA to be used as supports for life parts. (not for essential equipment). I - Part 1 Section 11a J General Requirements and Instructions for Electrical Installations Chapter 8 GL 2007 Page 11a–7

Table 11a.4 Minimum degrees of protection against foreign bodies and water (in conformity with publication IEC 60529)

Equipment Communication equipment, dis- Switchgear, play and input Heating Generators, electronic units, signalling appliances Lighting fittings motors, equipment equipment, heaters and transformers 1 and recording switches, power cooking equip- devices 1 sockets, junction ment boxes and con- Location trol elements 1 Locked dry electrical IP 00 IP 00 IP 20 IP 20 IP 20 service rooms Dry spaces, service rooms IP 20 IP 20 IP 20 IP 20 IP 20 dry control rooms, accommodation Wheelhouse, radio room, IP 22 IP 22 IP 22 IP 22 IP 22 control stations Wet spaces (e.g. machinery spaces, bow thruster room, ventilation ducts (internal), IP 22 IP 22 IP 44 2 IP 22 IP 22 pantries, provision rooms, store rooms Machinery spaces below floor (bilge), separator and pump rooms, refrigerated rooms, galleys, laundries, IP 44 IP 44 IP 55 2, 3 IP 44 3 IP 34 3 bathrooms and shower rooms Pipe tunnels, ventilation trunks (to open deck), IP 55 IP 55 IP 55 2 IP 55 IP 55 cargo holds Open decks IP 56 IP 56 IP 56 IP 56 IP 55 Notes 1 For the degree of protection for the equipment of watertight doors, see Section 2, B.2. – Motors and associated control and monitoring equipment : IP X7 – Door position indicators : IP X8 – Door-closure warning devices : IP X6 2 For the degrees of protection for measuring chamber of smoke detectors : IP 42 3 For the degrees of protection for bathrooms and shower rooms, see Section 11i, C.2.

2.3 Protective earthing earthing conductor, or the connection cable shall contain a green/yellow coded core. Cable braids and ar- Touchable conductive parts of equipment which are mouring shall not be used as earthing conductors. normally not live, but which are liable under fault conditions to become live part, are to be earthed. 2.4.2 A conductor normally carrying current shall Where such earthing is not effective by fastening or not be used simultaneously as an earthing conductor, mounting, protective earthing conductors are to be nor may it be connected with the latter to the vessel's used. hull. The green/yellow coded core shall not be used as For the earthing of cable shielding, armouring and a current-carrying conductor. braids see Section 11j, D.8. 2.4.3 The cross-section of the earthing conductor 2.4 Protective earthing conductors shall at least conform to the values indicated in Table 11a.5. The following points are to be noted with regard to the use of earthing conductors: 2.4.4 Machines and devices which are insulated 2.4.1 An additional cable or an additional wire with mounted are to be earthed by flexible cables, wires or a green/yellow coded core shall be provided as an stranded copper straps. Chapter 8 Section 11a L General Requirements and Instructions for Electrical Installations I - Part 1 Page 11a–8 GL 2007

Table 11a.5 Cross-sections for earthing conductors 3.2 The IEC publications 60533 and 60945 for the bridge and deck zone are to be observed. Cross- Minimum cross-section of section earthing conductor 3.3 The requirements for electrical and electronic of outer in insulated separately flexible equipment subject for mandatory type approval re- conductor cables laid cables garding immunity and emissions of electromagnetic

and wires influence can be taken from GL Rules VI – Additional [mm2] [mm2] [mm2] [mm2] Rules and Guidelines, Part 7 – Guidelines for the equal to Performance of Type Approvals, Chapter 2 – Test cross-section Requirements for Electrical/Electronic Equipment and of outer Systems. equal to conductor 0,5 cross-section but not less to 3.4 Electrical and electronic equipment on board of outer than 1,5 for 4 equal to ships, required neither by Classification Rules nor by conductor stranded and cross-section international conventions, liable to cause electromag- 4 for solid of outer netic disturbance shall be of a type which fulfils the earth conductor test requirements of the GL Rules VI - Additional conductor Rules and Guidelines, Part 7 - Guidelines for the Per- equal to formance of Type Approvals, Chapter 2 - Test Re- > 4 cross-section quirements for Electrical/Electronic Equipment and to of outer 16 Systems, Section 3, B.21. and B.22. conductor equal to half the > 16 cross-section 4. Lightning protection to 16 of outer 35 equal to conductor Lightning protection shall be implemented in accor- cross-section equal to but not less dance to IEC publication 60092-401. of outer >35 half the than 4 conductor to cross-section but not less < 120 of outer than 16 conductor K. Explosion Protection ≥ 120 70 70 Where a potential explosion risk exists in or near any

space, all electrical equipment and fittings installed in 2.4.5 The connection of the earthing conductor to those spaces should be either explosion-proof or in- the vessel's hull shall be located at a point where it can trinsically safe to the satisfaction of the competent easily be checked. Connections of earthing conductors Authority. Furthermore the requirements in Chapter 3 shall be protected against corrosion. – Electrical Installation, Section 1, K.3. have to be observed. 2.4.6 Insulated mounted structures and aluminium structures have to be connected to the vessel's hull by special conductors at several points. The connections shall have a high electrical conductivity and shall be L. Spare Parts corrosion-resistant. The minimum cross-section is 50 mm2 per conductor. 1. In order to be able to restore machinery operation and manoeuvring capability of the vessel in the 3. Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) event of damage at sea spare parts for the main propulsion plant and the essential equipment shall be 3.1 Electrical and electronic equipment shall not available aboard of each vessel together with the nec- be impaired in their function by electromagnetic en- essary tools. ergy. General measures are to extend with equal im- portance over: 2. The amount of spare parts for unrestricted – decoupling of the transmission path between service and for Class Notations M, K and W have to source of interference and equipment prone to be agreed with GL. interference – reduction of the causes of interference sources 3. The amount of spare parts shall be documented and a corresponding list shall be carried – reduction of the susceptibility to interference aboard. I - Part 1 Section 11b C Installation of Electrical Equipment Chapter 8 GL 2007 Page 11b–1

Section 11b

Installation of Electrical Equipment

A. General the emergency switchboard shall be located above the uppermost continuous deck and may not adjoin the 1. Equipment location boundary surfaces of the machinery space or of those spaces containing the main power source, the associated transformers, if any, or the main switchboard. 1.1 Electrical equipment is to be so placed or protected as to minimize the probability of mechanical injury or damage from the accumulation of dust, oil vapours, steam or dripping liquids. Skylights and ven- C. Storage Batteries tilators are to be so arranged as to avoid the probability of flooding the apparatus. 1. Location 1.2 In spaces where flammable mixtures are Storage batteries shall be installed in such a way that liable to collect and in any compartment assigned persons cannot be endangered and equipment cannot principally to the containment of an accumulator bat- be damaged by exhausted gases or leaked-out electro- tery, no electrical equipment should be installed unless lytes. GL is satisfied that it is: – essential for operational purposes 1.1 Storage batteries shall be so installed as to ensure accessibility for changing of cells, inspection, – of a type which will not ignite the mixture con- testing, topping-up and cleaning. Storage batteries cerned shall not be installed in the accommodation area or in – appropriate to the space concerned cargo holds. An exception may be granted for gastight cells, such as those used in emergency lamps, where – appropriately certified for safe usage in the charging does not result in the development of harm- dusts, vapours or gases likely to be encountered ful gases.

2. Protection from bilge water 1.2 Storage batteries shall not be installed in positions where they are exposed to excessively high All generators and motors are to be so arranged that or low temperatures, water spray or other factors liable they cannot be damaged by bilge water and, if neces- to impair their serviceability or shorten their service sary, a watertight coaming is to be provided to form a life. The minimum degree of protection required is well around the base of such equipment with provision IP 12. for removing water from the well. 1.3 When installing storage batteries, attention is to be paid to the capacity of the associated chargers. B. Generators, Electrical Sources The charging power is to be calculated as the product of the maximum charger current and the rated voltage 1. Main generators of the storage battery. The main generators are to be installed in the main Depending on the operating mode, application and engine room or in a separate auxiliary engine room. duty of the storage battery to be charged, and on the Generators shall not be installed forward of the colli- mode of the charging (charger characteristic), and by sion bulkhead below the bulkhead deck. agreement with GL, the calculation of the charging capacity need not be based on the maximum current. For the typical automatic IU- charging the calculation 2. Emergency generators, emergency sources is stated under 3. The emergency source of electrical power is to be located outside the machinery spaces and is to be so 1.4 Storage batteries shall be prevented from arranged as to ensure its functioning in the event of sliding. The constraints shall not hinder ventilation. fire or other causes of failure of the main electrical installations. 2. Battery-room equipment As far as practicable, the room containing the emergency source of power, the associated transformers, if 2.1 Only explosion-protected lamps, switches, any, the transitional source of emergency power and fan motors and space-heating appliances shall be in- Chapter 8 Section 11b C Installation of Electrical Equipment I - Part 1 Page 11b–2 GL 2007

stalled in battery rooms. The following minimum I = charging current [A] requirements shall be observed: K = battery capacity [Ah] – explosion group II C The gassing voltage shall not be exceeded. If several – temperature class T 1 battery sets would be used, the sum of charging power has to be calculated. Other electrical equipment is permitted only with the special approval of GL. The room free air volume shall be calculated depending on battery size as follows: 2.2 Where leakage is possible, the inner walls of battery-rooms, boxes and cupboards, and all supports, V = 2,5 ⋅ Q troughs, containers and racks, shall be protected against the injurious effects of the electrolyte. Q = f ⋅ 0,25 ⋅ I ⋅ n V = room free air volume [m3] 3. Ventilation of spaces containing batteries Q = air quantity [m3/h] 3.1 General requirements n = number of battery- cells in series connection All battery-installations, except for gastight batteries, f = 0,03 for lead batteries with solid electrolyte in rooms, cabinets and containers shall be constructed and ventilated in such a way as to prevent the accumu- f = 0,11 for batteries with fluid electrolyte lation of ignitable gas mixtures. Gastight NiCd-, NiMH- or Li-batteries need not be ventilated. If several battery sets would be installed in one room, the sum of air quantity shall be calculated. 3.2 Batteries installed in switchboards with Where the room volume or the ventilation is not suffi- charging power up to 0,2 kW cient, enclosed battery cabinets or containers with natural ventilation into suitable rooms or areas shall be Lead batteries with a charging power up to 0,2 kW used. may be installed in switchboards without separation to switchgear and without any additional ventilation, if: The air ducts for natural ventilation shall have a cross- section as follows, assuming an air speed of 0,5 m/s: a) the batteries are valve regulated (VRLA), provided with solid electrolyte A = 5,6 ⋅ Q b) the battery cases are not closed completely (IP 2 2X is suitable) A = cross-section [cm ] c) the charger is regulated automatically by an IU The required minimum cross-sections of ventilation controller with a maximum continuous charging ducts are shown in Table 11b.1 voltage of 2,3 V/cell and rated power of the Small air ducts and dimensions of air inlet and outlet charger is limited to 0,2 kW openings shall be calculated based on lower air speed.

3.3 Ventilated spaces with battery charging power up to 2 kW Table 11b.1 Cross-section of ventilation ducts

Batteries may be installed in ventilated cabinets and Calculation based on battery charging power containers arranged in ventilated spaces (except rooms (automatic IU- charging) mentioned in 1.1) Battery Cross-section [cm2] The unenclosed installation (IP 12) in well ventilated charging positions in machinery spaces is permitted. power Lead Lead Nickel- battery battery Cadmium Otherwise batteries shall be installed in ventilated [W] battery battery cabinets or containers. solid fluid electrolyte electrolyte The charging power for automatic IU-charging shall be calculated as follows: VRLA < 500 40 60 80 P = U ⋅ I 500 < 1000 60 80 120 I = 8 ⋅ K/100 for Pb- batteries 1000 < 1500 80 120 180 1500 < 2000 80 160 240 I = 16 ⋅ K/100 for NiCd- batteries 2000 < 3000 80 240 forced- P = charging power [W] ventilation > 3000 forced ventilation U = rated battery voltage [V] I - Part 1 Section 11b D Installation of Electrical Equipment Chapter 8 GL 2007 Page 11b–3

3.4 Ventilated rooms with battery charging conditions as required for the installation of the emer- power more than 2 kW gency generator, see B.2. Batteries exceeding charging power of 2 kW shall be installed in closed cabinets, containers or battery 5. Batteries for starting of internal combus- rooms forced ventilated to open deck area. Lead bat- tion engines teries up to 3 kW may be ventilated by natural means. 5.1 Batteries for starting of internal combustion Battery rooms shall be arranged according to 2. engines shall be installed near the engine. 3.5 Ventilation requirements 5.2 For the rating of the batteries, see Section 9b, Ventilation inlet and outlet openings shall be so ar- H.3. ranged to ensure that fresh air flows over the surface of the storage battery. 6. Caution labels The air inlet openings shall be arranged below and air The doors or the covers of battery rooms, cupboards outlet openings shall be arranged above. or boxes shall be fitted with caution labels prohibiting If batteries are installed in several floors, the free the exposure of open flames and smoking in, or close distance between them shall be at least 50 mm. to, these spaces. Devices which obstruct the free passage of air, e.g. fire dampers and safety screens, shall not be mounted 7. Recording of the type, location and main- in the ventilation inlet and outlet ducts of battery tenance cycle of batteries rooms. If necessary, weather tight closures shall be carried out otherwise. 7.1 Where batteries are fitted for use for essential and emergency services a schedule of such batteries is Air ducts for natural ventilation shall lead to the open to be compiled and maintained. The schedule, which deck directly. is to be approved by GL, is to include at least the fol- Openings shall be at least 0,9 m above the cupboard/ lowing information regarding the battery(ies): boxes. The inclination of air ducts shall not exceed – type and manufacturer's type designation 45° from vertical. – voltage and ampere-hour rating 3.6 Forced ventilation – location If natural ventilation is not sufficient or required cross-sections of ducts according to Table 11b.1 are – equipment and/or system(s) served too big, forced ventilation shall be provided. – maintenance/replacement cycle dates The air quantity Q shall be calculated according to 3.3. – date(s) of last maintenance and/or replacement The air speed shall not exceed 4 m/s. – for replacement batteries in storage, the date of Where storage batteries are charged automatically, manufacture and shelf life 1 with automatic start of the fan at the beginning of the charging, arrangements shall be made for the ventila- 7.2 Procedures are to be put in place to ensure tion to continue for at least 1 h after completion of that where batteries are replaced that they are of an charging. equivalent performance type. Wherever possible, forced ventilation exhaust fans shall be used.

The fan motors shall be either certified safe type with D. Power Transformers a degree of protection IIC T1 and resistant to electrolyte or, preferably, located outside of the endangered area. 1. Transformers shall be installed at readily accessible and adequately ventilated rooms. Fans are to be of non-sparking construction. The ventilation systems shall be independent of the 2. Open transformers with IP 00 degree of pro- ventilation systems serving other rooms. Air ducts for tection may be installed in dry and locked electrical forced ventilation shall be resistant to electrolyte and service rooms. shall lead to the open deck.

4. Emergency power supply –––––––––––––– 1 Shelf life is the duration of storage under specified conditions The location in which storage batteries for the emer- at the end of which a battery retains the ability to give a speci- gency power supply are installed shall fulfil the same fied performance. Chapter 8 Section 11b F Installation of Electrical Equipment I - Part 1 Page 11b–4 GL 2007

3. The location of transformers for the main 1.2 If installed on the floor above the bilge, the electrical power supply shall fulfil the same conditions main switchboard must be completely sealed from as those applying to the installation of the main gen- below. erator, see B.1. Pipework with flanges or fittings and air ducts are to be run in such a way that the switchgear is not endan- 4. The location of transformers for the emer- gered in the event of leaks. gency power supply shall fulfil the same condition as those applying to the installation of the emergency source of electrical power, see B.2. 1.3 The control passage in front of the main switchboard shall be wide enough to afford an adequate view for the operation of the board. A sufficiently wide passageway is to be provided E. Electronics behind the free-standing panels where these have to be accessible from behind for operation and maintenance. 1. Power electronic equipment and central units for information processing shall be installed in readily 1.4 The floor in front of main switchboards with accessible and adequately ventilated spaces. an operating voltage of more than 50 V has to be provided with insulating gratings or mats and where nec- 2. The heat generated in the unit shall be re- essary behind. moved in a suitable manner. Where electronic equipment is installed in engine rooms or other spaces with The insulation shall be done by a suitable insulating enhanced danger of pollution and corrosion, air filters mat (e.g. according to IEC publication 61111). shall be provided if necessary. 2. Emergency switchboards The emergency switchboard shall be installed close to F. Switchboard the emergency generator and/or the emergency battery, though not in the same room of the emergency 1. Main switchboards battery for reasons of explosion protection. The place of installation shall satisfy the same condi- 1.1 Normally main switchboards shall be in- tions as apply to the installation of the emergency stalled relative to the main generators in such a way generator, see B.2. that the normal electricity supply can only be impaired if a fire or other damage occur in the same room. In- The installation of the emergency switchboard is sub- stallation in a separate control room is permissible. ject to the same conditions as in 1.2, 1.3 and 1.4. I - Part 1 Section 11c B Power Supply Installations Chapter 8 GL 2007 Page 11c–1

Section 11c

Power Supply Installations

A. Electrical Power Demand 1.4 The arrangement of the vessel's main source of electrical power shall be such that the services re- 1. A power balance of the electrical equipment ferred to in Section 11a, A.4. can be maintained in all has to be submitted to proof the sufficient ratings of seas and under all navigating and manoeuvring condi- units for the generating, storage and transformation of tions, even when the vessel is stopped. electrical energy. 1.5 Where transformers constitute an essential 1.1 The power demand has to be determined for part of the supply system required herein, the system the following operating conditions: shall be so arranged as to ensure continuity of the supply. – navigation at sea – fishing 1.6 Dead ship condition – emergency power supply The fishing vessel machinery installations shall be so designed, that they can be brought to operation from "dead ship" condition as defined in Section 11a, B.16. 1.2 Extreme environmental conditions, e.g. arctic or tropical conditions, appropriate to the vessel's area of operation are also to be taken into account. 2. Rating and control of generator sets

2. In the case of fishing vessels with Class No- 2.1 Supply voltage tation RIC for classified refrigeration installations Vessel's service generator sets are to have voltage according to Section 10 account is also to be taken of regulation characteristics so that the vessel's supply the power required for refrigeration systems and pres- voltage may be maintained within ± 3 %. ervation of the catch. 2.2 Steady short circuit current

2.2.1 With a terminal short circuit on three phases B. Main Electrical Power Supply of a generator, the steady short circuit current shall not be less than three times or greater than six times the 1. Design rated current. The alternator and its exciter shall be capable of withstanding the steady short circuit current 1.1 Where electrical power constitutes the only for two seconds without damage. means of maintaining auxiliary services essential for propulsion, manoeuvring and the safety of the vessel, 2.2.2 Exemptions from these requirements may be a main source of electrical power shall be provided allowed where it is demonstrated in particular in- which shall include at least two generating sets, one of stances that provision has been made for short circuits which may be driven by the main engine (shaft gen- in the vessel's mains to be selectively disconnected at erator). GL Head Office may accept other arrange- lower steady short circuit currents. ments having equivalent electrical capability. 2.3 Voltage drop 1.2 The power of these sets shall be such as to The apparent power of three-phase alternators shall be ensure the functioning of the services referred to in such that no admissible voltage drops occur in the Section 11a, A.4. and in case of Class Notation RIC, vessel’s mains due to normal starting currents. Start- including the power required in preservation of the ing of the motor with the highest starting current may catch, in event of any one of these generating sets on no account cause a voltage drop capable of stalling being stopped. consumers already in service.

1.3 However, in fishing vessels with the Class 2.4 Parallel operation Notation K, in the event of any one of the generating sets being stopped, it shall only be necessary to ensure In general when the vessel's service installation is such the functioning of services essential for propulsion, that two or more generators are to be operated in par- manoeuvring and the safety of the vessel. One of the allel, the load on any generator is not to differ more required generating sets may consist of a generator in than plus or minus 15 % of its rated Kilowatt load combination with a battery of sufficient capacity. from its proportionate share, based on the generator Chapter 8 Section 11c C Power Supply Installations I - Part 1 Page 11c–2 GL 2007

ratings, of the combined load for any steady-state con- C. Emergency Electrical Power Supply dition in the combined load between 20 % and 100 % of the sum of the rated loads of all generators. 1. Serving time 2.5 Prime movers A self contained emergency source of electrical power is to be provided capable of serving the consumers The regulators of the driving machines of 3-phase and defined under 3. on all vessels for 18 hours, on fishing single phase alternator groups have to permit an ad- vessels with Class Notation K for 3 hours. justment to obtain, at normal frequency, a regulation of the load of the driving machines between – 5 % and + 5 % of the total load. 2. Class Notation K On fishing vessels with Class Notation K and with 3. Shaft driven generator systems electrical main source backed up by a battery, the emergency consumers may be supplied by this system. 3.1 On vessels with remote control from the The capacity of the battery shall be capable of serving wheelhouse it is necessary to ensure that when ma- the main and emergency consumers for the required noeuvres, preventing the continued operation of the time. shaft driven generator plant are initiated, the supply to consumers and controls essential for propulsion, manoeuvring and steering is automatically restored as 3. Consumers quick as possible. The emergency source of electrical power shall be capable, having regard to starting current and transi- 3.2 Approval may be given for the use of standby tory nature of certain loads, of serving simultaneously sets which are started up by remote control from the the following consumers: bridge and are able to assume the supply automatically. 3.1 The VHF radio station and if applicable: 4. Availability of the main electrical source – MF radio 4.1 In vessels for unrestricted service and provided with periodically unattended machinery space – ship earth station the main source of electrical power shall be supplied – MF/HF radio as follows:

4.1.1 Where the electrical power can normally be 3.2 Internal communication equipment, fire de- supplied by one generator, there shall be provided tecting systems and signals which may be required in suitable load shedding arrangements to ensure the an emergency. integrity of supplies to services required for propulsion and steering. To cover the case of loss of the 3.3 The navigation lights if solely electrical. generator in operation, there shall be adequate provisions for automatic starting and connecting to the 3.4 The following emergency lights: main switchboard of a stand-by generator of sufficient capacity to permit propulsion and steering and with a) of lifeboat/liferaft launching stations and over automatic restarting of the essential auxiliaries includ- the side of the vessel ing, where necessary, sequential operations. b) in all alleyways, stairways and exits Means may be approved in the wheelhouse for remote c) in spaces containing machinery or the emer- (manual) starting and connection of the stand-by gen- gency source of power erator to the main switchboard as well as means of repeated remote starting of essential auxiliaries. d) in control stations and wheelhouse

4.1.2 If the electrical power is normally supplied e) in fish handling and fish processing spaces by more than one generating set simultaneously, there shall, be provisions, e.g. by load shedding, to ensure 3.5 The operation of the emergency fire pump, if that in case of loss of one of these generating sets, the any. remaining ones are kept in operation without overload to permit propulsion and steering. 4. Type of source 4.2 Where required to be duplicated, other auxil- The emergency source of electrical power may be iary machinery essential to propulsion shall be fitted either a generator or an accumulator battery. with automatic change-over devices allowing transfer to a stand-by machine. An alarm shall be given on 4.1 Where the emergency source of electrical automatic change-over. Stand-by circuits are to be power is a generator, it shall be provided with an in- provided to enable sets of the same type to operate dependent fuel supply and with an automatic starting alternatively. and switch-over system. I - Part 1 Section 11c D Power Supply Installations Chapter 8 GL 2007 Page 11c–3

Unless a second independent means of starting the 5. The emergency source of electrical power emergency generator is provided, the single source of and automatic starting equipment shall be so con- stored energy shall be protected to preclude its com- structed and arranged as to enable adequate testing to plete depletion by the automatic starting system. be carried out by the crew while the vessel is in operating condition. 4.2 Where the emergency source of electrical power is an accumulator battery it shall be capable of 6. The emergency source of electrical power carrying the emergency load without recharging whilst may be used for starting up the main propulsion plant maintaining the voltage of the battery throughout the from the dead ship condition provided that its capacity discharge period within plus or minus 12 % of its is sufficient to supply the emergency services at the nominal voltage. In the event of failure of the main same time. power supply this accumulator battery shall be automatically connected to the emergency switchboard 7. Provided that suitable measures are taken for and shall immediately supply at least those services safeguarding independent emergency operation under specified in 3.1 to 3.4. all circumstances, the emergency generator may be used exceptionally and for short periods to supply The emergency switchboard shall be provided with an non-emergency circuits. auxiliary switch allowing the battery to be connected manually in case of failure of the automatic connection system. D. Operation of Emergency Generator in Port 4.3 An indication of inadmissible battery dis- The emergency generator may be used during lay time charge (emergency source of electrical power) shall be in the harbour for the main power supply considering provided at the main switchboard or in the machinery the requirements of Chapter 3 – Electrical Installa- control room. tions, Section 3, D.

I - Part 1 Section 11d A Installation Protection and Power Distribution Chapter 8 GL 2007 Page 11d–1

Section 11d

Installation Protection and Power Distribution

A. General 3. Switchgear

1. Generator protection 3.1 General

1.1 Generators shall be protected against short 3.1.1 Each non-earthed conductor shall be switched circuits and overloads. and protected against short circuit and overload.

3.1.2 When tripped due to overcurrent, generator 1.2 Generators of less than 50 kVA not arranged circuit breakers have to be ready for immediate recon- for parallel operation may be protected by fuses. All nection. The use of thermal bi-metallic release for generators of 50 kVA or above are to be protected by generators used to supply essential consumers is not a circuit breaker providing long-time overcurrent permitted. protection not exceeding 15 % above either full-load rating on continuous-rated machines or the overload rating of special-rated machines. 3.1.3 Generator circuit breakers shall be provided with a reclosing inhibitor which prevents automatic The shutting down of the prime mover is to cause the reclosure after tripping due to a short circuit. tripping of the vessel service generator circuit breaker. 3.2 Single operation 1.3 Alternating-current generator circuit breakers are to be provided with short-time delay short-circuit The following devices are to be provided: trips. The time delay should be up to about 500 milliseconds. – A three pole circuit breaker with time-delayed overcurrent trip and short-time delayed short circuit trip. For alternators with output ratings of 1.4 Direct-current generator circuit breakers are less than 50 kVA fuses and on-load switches are to be provided with short-circuit trips set below the also permitted. maximum generator short-circuit current with a time delay up to about 200 milliseconds. This trip is to be – Any alternator contactors are to have tripping set at the lowest value of current which will coordinate time (up to about 500 ms) and are to be designed with the trip settings of feeder circuit breakers sup- to carry at least twice the rated alternator cur- plied by the generator. rent.

1.5 Selective tripping is to be provided between 3.3 Parallel operation generator and feeder protective devices to ensure the proper coordination indicated in 1.3 and 1.4. In cir- The following devices are to be provided: cuits supplying essential services, selective tripping is also to be provided between feeder and branch-circuit – a three-pole circuit breaker with delayed over- protective devices and each protective device associ- current trip and short-time delay short circuit ated with essential services is to have an interrupting trip, and rating not less than the maximum short-circuit current possible at the point of installation. – short-time-delay undervoltage protection and, with an output per unit of 50 kVA and over, delayed reverse power tripping 1.6 Direct-current generators arranged for parallel operation are to be provided with reverse-current circuit breaker trips, see C.2. 4. Sychronizing equipment – If an automatic synchronizer is fitted, provision 1.7 Generator protection devices are subject to shall also be made for manual synchronization, mandatory type approvals. and

2. Reverse-power protection – protection against parallel connection in oppo- site phase, e.g. a synchronizer interlock for gen- Alternating-current generators arranged for parallel erators with an output per unit of 50 kVA and operation are to be provided with reverse-power relay. above has to be provided. Chapter 8 Section 11d G Installation Protection and Power Distribution I - Part 1 Page 11d–2 GL 2007

B. Emergency Three-Phase Generators 2. Overcurrent protection may be dispensed with in transformers with a rated current of less than Emergency generators supply the emergency switch- 2 A on the secondary side. boards and the connected emergency consumers.

1. Protective equipment and switchgear E. Storage Batteries Generator protection shall consist of at least: Storage batteries are to be provided with overload and – short circuit protection short circuit protection nearby where they are in- – overload protection stalled. Exceptions are made for batteries for preheating and starting of internal combustion engines, but – under voltage protection their cabling shall be made short circuit proof. However it is permissible for the overload protection not to disconnect the generator automatically but instead to trigger an optical and acoustical warning F. Power Electronics signal at the emergency switchboard and at the main switchboard. 1. Power electronics facilities are to be protected against overload and short circuit. 2. Overload shedding If the emergency generator is overloaded, consumers 2. Inverters intended for supply of emergency temporarily supplied from the emergency switch- consumers from the emergency battery shall be de- board, which are not emergency consumers, shall be signed for continuous operation. automatically disconnected so as to safeguard the supply to the emergency circuits. G. Shore Connection

C. Direct Current Generators 1. The shore connection box shall be linked to the power supply system by permanently laid cables. 1. Single operation 2. A device for connection of a protective con- The following devices are to be provided: ductor or a potential equalizer has to provided, if required. – A power circuit breaker operating simultaneously on all non-earthed poles, with delayed overcurrent trip and short-time-delay short cir- 3. Switching-on of the shore supply shall only cuit trip, or a fuse in each non-earthed pole and be possible if the switches of the main generators have a quick-break on-load switch of sufficient been shut-off. Short-term parallel operation of the make/break capacity for the simultaneous dis- vessel's mains and the shore mains for load transfer is connection of all non-earthed poles. permissible.

– For generators with an output of 50 kVA and 4. The shore connection shall be switchable and above circuit breakers are to be provided in it shall be protected against short circuit and overload. every case. The shore connection box shall be provided at least with short circuit protection. 2. Parallel operation The following devices are to be provided: 5. A voltage indicator shall be provided in the main switchboard. – A power circuit breaker with delayed overcurrent trip and short-time-delay short circuit trip, a reverse current trip and short-time-delay under- 6. Facilities shall be provided to compare the voltage protection. polarity (in the case of direct current) and the phase sequence (in the case of three-phase alternating current) – Polarity-reversing facilities. of the shore connection with those of the vessel's mains.

7. The following details shall be indicated on a D. Transformers plate fitted to the shore connection box: – voltage system 1. Transformers shall be protected against short – rated voltage circuits on the primary side and against overloads on the secondary side. – frequency, in case of AC I - Part 1 Section 11d I Installation Protection and Power Distribution Chapter 8 GL 2007 Page 11d–3

H. Consumer Protective Equipment 1.2 Supply systems with hull return

1. General 1.2.1 All final supply circuits shall have all-pole insulation. The return conductors are to be connected 1.1 Protective equipment shall be so selected and in the associated distribution switchboard to an insu- co-ordinated with the generator protection that in the lated busbar, which is connected to the hull. event of a short circuit the selectivity is safeguarded. 1.2.2 The connections to the hull shall have at least If necessary the evidence is to be proved. the same cross-section as the supply cable. 1.2 Every non-earthed conductor in a distribution Bare wires shall not be used. Casings or their mount- circuit shall be protected against overload and short ing bolts shall not be used as return conductors or to circuit. make their connection.

1.3 Where the three phase system is isolated from 1.3 Up to 3 distribution switchboards may be sup- the hull the overcurrent protection can be realised in plied by a common supply cable. only 2 conductors, if the disconnection of all phases is safeguarded. 2. Essential supply cables

2. Final supply circuits 2.1 Essential systems shall be supplied directly from the main switchboard, the emergency switch- 2.1 Circuit breakers and motor protection board or the transitional emergency power supply, as switches the Rules require. For a final circuit supplying one consumer with its own overload protection, it is permissible to provide 2.2 Essential consumers performing the same short-circuit protection only at the input point. In this function, e.g. main and standby lubricating oil pumps, case, fuses two ratings higher than those permissible are to be supplied by separate cables direct from the for rated operation of the consumer may be used for main switchboard or from two independent sub- continuous duty. distribution panels. In the case of short-time and intermittent operation, 3. Emergency supply cables the rated current of the fuses shall not be greater than 160 % of the rated current of the consumer. The asso- 3.1 The emergency switchboard is to be supplied ciated switches are to be selected in accordance with in normal operation from the main switchboard by an the fuse current ratings. inter-connector feeder which is to be protected at the main switchboard against overload and short circuit. 2.2 Where circuit breakers are used, the shortcir- The arrangement at the emergency switchboard shall cuit cutout may be adjusted to a maximum of 15 times be such that the inter-connector feeder is disconnected the rated current of the consumer, though not higher automatically at the emergency switchboard upon than the anticipated minimum value of the initial failure of the main power supply and is to provide for short-circuit alternating current in the circuit con- automatic connection of the emergency supply in the cerned. For steering gear equipment circuits, see Sec- event of such failure. tion 11g, A. 3.2 When the system is arranged for feedback 2.3 Circuit breakers and motor protection operation, the inter-connector feeder shall also be switches with insufficient switching capacity shall be protected at the emergency switchboard at least fitted with back-up fuses specified by the manufac- against short circuit. turer. Automatic circuit breakers without a selectively graded breaking delay may not be connected in series 4. Supply to lighting installations in a single line. 4.1 Main lighting installations are to be supplied 2.4 Final supply circuits for lighting shall not be from the main switchboard, emergency lighting from fused above 16 A. Regarding the number of lighting the emergency switchboard. fixtures connected to a circuit see I.4. 4.2 Final sub-circuits for lighting shall not be fitted with fuses rated higher than 16 A. The number I. Power Distribution of lighting points (lamps) connected to one sub-circuit shall not exceed: 1. Electrical supply systems – 10 lamps for voltages up to 55 V – 14 lamps for voltages over 55 V 1.1 Regarding permissible supply systems see Section 11a, G. – 24 lamps for voltages over 125 V Chapter 8 Section 11d I Installation Protection and Power Distribution I - Part 1 Page 11d–4 GL 2007

4.3 In the important rooms listed below, the 6.2 A common distribution network with back-up lighting has to be supplied by at least two different batteries may be used to supply systems which are circuits: required to remain operative even if the main source of electrical power fails. Such a network shall have – main engine rooms and other important service one of two supply units comprising either: spaces and control stations – fish handling and processing deck 6.2.1 a power supply unit with a capacity sufficient for all the connected consumers together with a – passageways and stairways leading to the boat charger which, acting in buffer operation with the deck back-up battery, is capable of supplying continuously all the connected consumers and maintain the battery 4.4 Sockets outside the accommodation area shall in the charged condition, or be connected to separate circuits. When calculating the permissible connected load, one socket is equiva- 6.2.2 two chargers, which meet the conditions lent to two lighting points. stated in 6.2.1.

5. Navigation and signalling lights 6.3 With regard to residual ripple, the supply facilities specified in 6.2.1 and 6.2.2 shall be designed 5.1 Navigation and signal lights panels shall be to ensure trouble-free operation of the connected sys- supplied from the main- and emergency electrical tems even when the battery is temporarily discon- power source. nected.

5.2 The masthead, the side and stern lights are 6.4 One of the power supply units or chargers each to be supplied by separate lines, each line being shall be supplied directly from the main switchboard. protected by a fuse or automatic circuit breaker. 6.5 Failure of the power supply units and chargers shall be signalled visually and audibly. 5.3 The navigation lights panel is to be provided with a device for each masthead, side and stern light which indicates or gives a warning if the correspond- 6.6 Battery chargers with a charging capacity of ing light fails. P ≥ 2 kW shall be tested at the maker's works in the presence of a GL Surveyor. 6. Control-, monitoring- and vessel's safety systems 7. Emergency shut down The supply of control-, monitoring- and vessel's safety Oil burner equipment, fuel pumps, boiler fans, separa- systems shall comply with the following requirements tors, machinery space ventilators shall be provided (see additionally Section 11h): with an individual emergency switch located at a central position outside the machinery space unless other 6.1 These systems shall be supplied by their own means are available for rapidly interrupting the fuel circuits. and air supply outside the room in which the equipment is installed. The consumers may be arranged in Provision shall be made for the selective disconnec- groups, provided that redundant consumers are allo- tion of the separate circuits in case of a short circuit. cated to at least two electrically independent groups. I - Part 1 Section 11e B Switchgear Assemblies Chapter 8 GL 2007 Page 11e–1

Section 11e

Switchgear Assemblies

A. General 1.5 All components including their connections have to be accessible for the purposes of maintenance, 1. These Rules apply to low-voltage switchgear repair and replacement. with operating voltages up to 1000V AC or 1500V DC. 1.6 Large doors in switchboards shall be fitted with arresting devices. 2. Electrical installations are to be protected against damage due to overload and short circuit. 1.7 Electrical components mounted in the doors of switchboards, e.g. switchgear, measuring devices and 3. The thermal- and electro-dynamic stresses fuses for voltages over 50 V, shall be safeguarded due to overcurrents shall not cause damage to parts of against accidental contact. Such doors are to be the installation during the response time of protective earthed. devices or during the total operating time of switches. 1.8 Where fuses are fitted above switchgear or 4. Overcurrent protective devices are to be se- bare connecting wires or leads, measures are to be lected on the basis of following criteria: taken to ensure that falling parts (e.g. fuse cartridges) – overload current cannot come into contact with live components.

– short circuit 1.9 Operating devices and fuses shall be safely – reclosing capability accessible.

5. Regarding design, construction and testing of 1.10 For circuit breakers and load-switches, the low-voltage switchgear assemblies attention is drawn minimum distances above the arc chutes specified by to IEC Publication 60092-302. the manufacturers are to be maintained.

1.11 Knife-type fuses for supply-circuits are only 6. For further notes see Section 11d. permitted if they can be safely withdrawn and inserted.

B. Construction 2. Main switchboards

2.1 Observation of the measuring and indicating 1. General devices and operation of the switchgear shall be possible from the front side of the switchboard with the 1.1 All devices, instruments and operating de- doors closed. vices shall be permanently identified by name plates. Wherever possible, clear text shall be used. Fuse current ratings are to be stated. The setpoints of adjust- 2.2 Main switchboards are to be designed with able protective devices are to be marked. The rated regard to the connection of generators and outgoing operating parameters of all measuring instruments circuits in such a way that, as far as possible, impor- shall be marked in red either on the scales or on plates tant equipment remains operative in the event of dam- fixed nearby. age to one section of the switchboard.

1.2 All screwed joints and connections shall be 2.3 Measuring and monitoring devices for secured against self-acting loosening. generators

1.3 All conductors shall be secured jig-proof and 2.3.1 Where circuit breakers are used, the follow- are to be kept away from sharp edges. Conductors ing is required: leading to equipment mounted in doors are to be laid – 1 green indicator lamp (power circuit breaker tension-free. connected) 1.4 Main and emergency switchboards shall be – 1 red indicator lamp (power circuit breaker fitted with insulation hand rails or handles. tripped) Chapter 8 Section 11e D Switchgear Assemblies I - Part 1 Page 11e–2 GL 2007

2.3.2 The following is required for each three- The protective devices are to be co-ordinated with phase alternator: each other in such a way that, in event of a fault, the faulty circuit is disconnected and the power supply to – 1 voltmeter, which can, if necessary, be switch- essential consumers is maintained. ed to the other alternators – 1 ammeter, switchable to all phases 1.2 Switchgear has to conform to IEC publications, or to another standard approved by GL. – 1 active power meter for alternators of 50 kVA and over 2. Circuit breakers – 1 frequency meter, which can, if necessary, be switched to the other alternators Circuit breakers are to be capable of opening circuits carrying maximum rated current at rated potential and 2.3.3 The following is required for each direct are to be capable of interrupting short circuits within current generator: their rating. Circuit breakers are to be trip free and – 1 voltmeter thermal units are to be calibrated for an ambient temperature in accordance with Section 11a, E. – 1 ammeter 3. Load switches 2.4 Switchgear and fuses for equipment

2.4.1 Each supply line run from the main switch- 3.1 The current rating of load switches shall be at board shall be provided with a circuit breaker with least equal to that of the fuse protecting the circuit and overcurrent and short-circuit protection, or with a fuse they shall have a making/breaking capacity in accor- for each non-earthed conductor and an all-pole switch, dance with AC-22 A or DC-22 A (IEC publication or with a contactor with control switch. Where fuses 60947-3). and switches are used, the sequence bus-bar-fuse- switch is to be used. 3.2 Where fuses and switches are employed, the sequence bus bar-fuse-switch is to be used generally. 2.4.2 For steering gear, see also Section 11g, A. 4. Fuses 2.5 Measuring instruments The main switchboard and the main distribution panel 4.1 Fuse links shall have an enclosed fusion have to be fitted with ammeters for major consumers, space. They shall be made of ceramic or other material unless these are already mounted on the consumers recognized by GL as equivalent. themselves. It is permissible for one ammeter to be switched-over to a number of circuits. 4.2 Fuses may be used for overload protection only up to a rating of 315 A. Exceptions to this Rule 3. Emergency switchboard are subject to approval by GL. The requirements for main switchboards apply in analogous to emergency switchboards. D. Choice of Electrical Protection Equipment 4. Distribution panels Distribution panels are to be equipped with the neces- 1. General sary devices for the protection of the connected circuits and for the supply of consumers (see Section 11d). Protective devices shall be co-ordinated with each other in such a way that, in the event of a fault, the defective circuit is disconnected and the power supply 5. Motor starters to essential equipment is maintained. The starting of motors in a greater number should not take place simultaneously, if that is necessary to avoid 2. Short-circuit protection equipment a too great voltage drop or too high current flow.

2.1 The rated short-circuit breaking capacity Icn of a switching device shall not be less than the maximum current to be broken in the event of a short cir- C. Selection of Switchgear cuit at the place where the protective device is fitted.

1. General 2.2 The rated short-circuit making capacity Icm of a circuit breaker shall not be less than the maximum 1.1 All electrical equipment has to be protected instantaneous asymmetric short-circuit current at the against damage due to overloads and short circuits. place where it is fitted. I - Part 1 Section 11e E Switchgear Assemblies Chapter 8 GL 2007 Page 11e–3

2.3 The peak short circuit strength of a switching 6. Motor protection unit and its components shall correspond to the maximum short-circuit current which can arise at the place 6.1 Motors with a power rating of more than where it is fitted. 1 kW shall be individually protected against overloads and short-circuit. For steering gear motors see Section 2.4 Circuit breakers whose making/breaking 11g, A. capacities are less than the anticipated maximum short-circuit currents are to be protected by back-up The protective devices shall be compatible with the fuses of sufficient breaking capacity. mode of operation of the motors and have to provide reliable protection against thermal overload.

3. Selective arrangement 6.2 The switchgear of motors, whose simultane- The short-circuit protection of essential equipment has ous restarting on restoration of the supply voltage to be selective and shall ensure that only the switching might endanger operation, shall be provided with device nearest to the fault initiates disconnection of undervoltage protection which causes disconnection of the defective circuit. For this purpose: the circuit if the voltage drops or fails and which prevents automatic reconnection. – the tripping time of protective devices connected in series has to be carefully coordinated The undervoltage protection shall operate reliably in the event of the voltage dropping to between 70 % and – the switching devices being capable of carrying 35 % of the rated voltage. the short-circuit current during the total break time of the device plus the time lag required for 6.3 Where necessary, the start-up of motors selectivity which are required to restart automatically following – Exceptions may be permitted in the case of restoration of the voltage is to be staggered in such a circuits feeding redundant plants or nonessential way that the starting currents do not overload the equipment if selectivity relative to the generator vessel's mains. switch is maintained. 7. Measuring and signalling circuits 4. Overcurrent protection devices Indicator lamps with working voltages exceeding 24 V The current-time characteristics of overcurrent protec- shall be fused separately from control circuit if they tion devices shall be compatible with the system com- are not connected via short-circuit-proof transformers. ponents to be protected, and with the requirements of selectivity. 8. Monitoring of insulation resistance Each non-earthed primary or secondary system serv- 5. Allocation of short-circuit and overcurrent ing power, heating or lighting installations shall be protection devices fitted with an equipment which monitors the insulation resistance relative to the vessel's hull and gives a vis- 5.1 Short circuit protection is required for every ual and audible alarm if the insulation resistance value non-earthed conductor. is abnormally low, see also Section 11k, D.3.10.

5.2 Overcurrent protection is required for at least Insulation monitoring devices may be dispensed with one conductor in insulated direct current and single- in the case of secondary systems such as control cir- phase alternating current circuits. cuits. The audible alarm signal may be dispensed with on fishing vessels with Class Notation K. Overcurrent protection is required for at least two phases in insulated, load-balanced three-phase circuits.

5.3 Overcurrent protection is required for each E. Conductors, Bus Bars, Wiring non-earthed conductor in earthed systems. The continuity of earthed conductors shall not be interrupted by short-circuit or overcurrent protection devices, except 1. Bus bars in the case of multipole disconnection devices which simultaneously interrupt all the conductors, whether 1.1 Materials earthed or not. Bus bars must be made of copper or copper-sheathed aluminium. 5.4 Determined for the overcurrent protection of the entire circuit (switchgear, switchboard wiring, 1.2 Temperature supply cables and equipment) according to regulations is the rated current In of the connected equipment or in The temperature rise of bus bars may not exceed 45 K the case of grouped supply cables the evaluated total under the most unfavourable conditions and shall not rated current. have any harmful effect on adjacent components. Chapter 8 Section 11e F Switchgear Assemblies I - Part 1 Page 11e–4 GL 2007

1.3 Bus bar carriers 2. Switchboard wiring Bus bars are to be mounted and insulated in such a 2.1 Instrument and control wiring is to be of the way that they withstand the stresses caused by short stranded type and is to have heat resisting and flame circuit currents and standing alternating voltages in retarding insulation. accordance with G.2.3.3. The minimum clearances specified in Table 11e.1 2.2 The nominal cross-section of the conductors shall be maintained between bus bars and other volt- shall be sufficient for the rated current of the con- age carrying or earthed components. nected facility and are selected in accordance with Table 11e.2. Table 11e.1 Clearance and creepage distances

Rated service Minimum Minimum voltage clearance creepage distance F. Measuring Instrument's Characteristics [V] (AC/DC) [mm] [mm] ≤ 125 10 12 1. Measuring instruments have to be insensitive to vibrations or mounted so as to be protected from > 125 ≤ 250 15 20 their effects. Instruments used for the primary ma- > 250 ≤ 690 20 25 chines shall not have an error greater than ± 1,5 % in > 690 25 35 relation to full scale value.

Table 11e.2 Current rating of wires in switchgear

Nominal cross-section Bunched, exposed or in conduits Wires run singly, of conductor - total Several power circuits One power circuit at least one conductor cross-section in the case together together with its diameter apart of conductors connected associated measuring in parallel and control wires Circuits of all kinds

Current Current Current [mm2] [A] [A] [A] 1 9 12 15 1,5 12 15 19 2,5 16 20 25 4 20 27 34 6 26 35 42 10 36 48 58 16 48 65 78 25 66 86 102 35 82 107 125 50 104 133 157 70 130 164 194 95 157 198 231 120 186 231 272 Note The current ratings shown apply to conductors with a maximum permissible operating temperature T on the conductor of 70°C and an ambient temperature of 45°C. For conductors with a maximum permissible operating temperature T deviating from 70°C, the current rating is to be determined by applying the correction factor F.

T 60 °C 65 °C 70 °C 75 °C 80 °C 85 °C F 0,77 0,89 1,00 1,10 1,18 1,26

I - Part 1 Section 11e G Switchgear Assemblies Chapter 8 GL 2007 Page 11e–5

2. The upper limit of the graduation of each 2.3.3 High-voltage test voltmeter shall not be less than 120 % of the normal voltage of the circuit. The graduation must include a The test voltage specified in Tables 11e.3 and 11e.4 is red mark corresponding to the normal voltage. to be applied between the conductors, and between the conductors and the switchboard frame. The duration of the test is one minute in each case. Measuring in- 3. The upper limit of the scale of every ammeter struments and other auxiliary apparatus may be dis- or wattmeter shall not be less than 130 % of the nor- connected during test. mal value in the circuit where it is inserted. The graduation must be provided with a red mark corre- – Test voltage for main circuits sponding to the normal value at full load. The amme- For main circuits the test has to be carried out ter for direct current generators and the wattmeters of with the values according to Table 11e.3. alternators able to work in parallel must be capable of showing the return current or the return power respec- – Test voltage for auxiliary circuits tively. For auxiliary circuits the test has to be carried out with the values according to Table 11e.4. – Test voltage for type-approved switchgear G. Testing of Switchboards and Switchgear For the verification of dielectric property of type approved switchgear the test voltage for routine tests may be reduced to 85% of the values ac- 1. Type-approvals cording to Table 11e.3. and 11e.4. The following devices and components are subject to mandatory type approval: 2.3.4 Insulation resistance measurement – circuit breakers, load-switches, disconnect The voltage test is to be followed by measurement of switches and fuses for direct connection to the the resistance of insulation. The insulation resistance main busbars and to non-fused, multi-terminal measurement is to be performed at a DC voltage of at busbars of main-, emergency- and control least 500 V. switchboards – generator protection devices Table 11e.3 Test voltage for main circuits – standardized switchgear in series manufacture Rated insulation voltage Test voltage Ui (AC) 2. Tests in manufacturer's works DC and AC (rms) [V] [V] 2.1 All switchboards are to be tested in the manufacturer's works. Ui ≤ 60 1000

60 < Ui ≤ 300 2000 2.2 The following are subject to testing in the presence of a GL Surveyor: 300 < Ui ≤ 690 2500 3000 – main switchboards 690 < Ui ≤ 800 800 < U ≤ 1000 3500 – emergency switchboards i 1000 < U ≤ 1500 1 3500 – switchboards for electrical propulsion plants i 1 Only for DC voltage

GL reserve the right to stipulate a factory test for other switchboards. Table 11e.4 Test voltage for auxiliary circuits 2.3 Scope of tests Rated insulation voltage Test voltage 2.3.1 Visual inspection Ui (AC) Devices and components shall be checked in compli- DC and AC (rms) ance with the approved drawings. The components [V] [V] and materials used shall conform to the Rules. Ui ≤ 12 250 2.3.2 Function test 12 < Ui ≤ 60 500 During the tests the function shall be demonstrated on 2 U + 1000, the equipment under test in accordance with the ap- Ui > 60 i but at least 1500

proved drawings, as far as is feasible.

I - Part 1 Section 11f C Power Electronics Chapter 8 GL 2007 Page 11f–1

Section 11f

Power Electronics

A. General – feed all essential equipment which may be in simultaneous operation with the propulsion For power electronics in electrical propulsion plants plant at full power the GL Rules Chapter 3 – Electrical Installations apply. – start the biggest consumer without exceeding the maximum permissible voltage and frequency variations To maintain the required availability, bypass switch- B. Construction ing may be resorted to.

1. The rules set out in Section 11e are to be 4. The semiconductor rectifiers and the associ- observed, wherever applicable. ated fuses shall be so selected that their load current is at least 10 % less than the limit current determined in 2. Each power-electronics system shall be pro- accordance with the coolant temperature, the load and vided with separate means for disconnection from the the mode of operation. mains. In the case of consumers up to a nominal current of 315 A the combination fuse-contactor may be 5. The permissible periodic peak blocking volt- used. In all other cases a circuit breaker shall be pro- age of the individual component shall be greater by a vided on the mains side. factor of at least 1,8 than the peak value of the undis- torted supply voltage. This value may be reduced for 3. Equipment shall be readily accessible for static converter circuits with separate power supplies. purposes of measurement and repair. Devices such as simulator circuits, test sockets, indicating lights, etc. 6. Electrical charges in power electronic mod- are to be provided for functional supervision and fault ules shall drop to a voltage of less than 50 V in a pe- location. riod of less than 5 s after disconnection from the mains supply. Should longer periods be required for 4. Control- and alarm electronics shall be gal- discharge, a warning label is to be affixed to the appli- vanically separated from power circuits. ance.

5. External pulse cables are to be laid twisted in 7. If the replacement of plug-in printed circuit pairs and screened, and kept as short as possible. boards while the unit is in operation can cause the destruction of components or the uncontrolled behaviour of drives, a caution label shall be notifying to this effect. C. Rating and Design 8. The absence of external control signals, e.g. due to a circuit break, shall not cause a dangerous 1. Mains reactions of power electronics facili- situation. ties shall be taken into consideration in the planning of the overall installation, see Section 11a, F. and J. 9. Control-circuit supplies are to be safeguarded against unintended disconnection, if this could endan- 2. Rectifier systems have to guarantee secure ger or damage the plant. operation even under the maximum permissible voltage and frequency fluctuations, see Section 11a, F. In the event of unacceptably large frequency and/or volt- 10. It is necessary to ensure that, as far as possi- age variations in the supply voltage, the system has to ble, faults do not cause damage in the rest of the sys- shut-off or remain in a safe operating condition. tem, or in other static converters.

10.1 Special attention shall be paid to the follow- 3. For the supply of mains, number and rating of ing points: electronic facilities is to be so scaled that in the event of failure of any one power-electronics facility the – mutual interference of static converters con- remainder of the installation is sufficient to: nected to the same busbar system Chapter 8 Section 11f G Power Electronics I - Part 1 Page 11f–2 GL 2007

– calculation of commutating impedances reacting F. Protection Equipment to voltage distortion and reacting to other consumers 1. Power electronic equipment shall be pro- – the selection of the ratio between the subtran- tected against exceeding of their current and voltage sient reactance of the system and the commutat- limits. For protective devices, it must be ensured that ing reactance of the static converter upon actuating – consideration of reactions from rectifier installa- – the output will be reduced or defective part tions on the commutation of DC machines systems will be selectively disconnected – consideration of voltage drops in the fishing – drives will be stopped under control vessel's mains due to inverter operation – the energy stored in components and in the load – influence by harmonics and high-frequency circuit cannot have a damaging effect, when interference switching off.

– influence on the vessel's mains by energy feed- 2. In equipment with a current rating of more ing back than 100 A, each bridge arm or parallel-connected valve shall have a special semiconductor fuse. Excep- 10.2 Where filter circuits and capacitors are used tions are quenching circuits in self-regulating systems for reactive current compensation, attention is to be and converters operated with a load-independent cur- paid to the following: rent. For all other equipment, fuses on the input/output – reaction on the mean and peak value of the sys- side may also be used. tem voltage in case of frequency fluctuations 3. Special semiconductor fuses shall be moni- – inadmissible effects on the voltage regulation of tored. After tripping the equipment has to be switched generators off, if this is necessary for the prevention of damage. Activating of a safety device shall trigger an alarm.

4. Equipment without fuses is permissible if a D. Cooling short circuit will not lead to the destruction of the semiconductor components. 1. Natural cooling is preferred.

2. The safety in operation shall be proved for liquid cooling and forced cooling. G. Tests

3. An impairment of cooling shall not result in 1. General unacceptable overtemperatures, an overtemperature Power electronics assemblies shall be individually alarm shall be provided. tested at the maker's works. A Works Test Report shall be rendered on the tests carried out. Essential equipment from 50 kW/kVA upwards shall be tested in the presence of a GL Surveyor. E. Control and Monitoring 2. Extent of routine tests 1. Control, adjustment and monitoring shall ensure that the permissible operating values of the 2.1 Voltage test facilities are not exceeded. Prior to the start of the functional tests a high-voltage test shall be carried out. The RMS value of the alter- 2. The power supply to all control circuits shall nating test voltage is: be monitored for voltage failure. U = 2 Un + 1000 V, duration 1 minute

3. For the monitoring of individual modules and but at least 2000 V, where Un is the maximum assemblies of essential equipment, components shall nominal voltage between any two points on the be provided which, in the event of a fault, facilitate its power electronics device. recognition. For this purpose, switchgear in power circuits shall be bridged, and the input and output terminals of the 4. The control shall be so engineered that the power electronics devices and the electrodes of the installation is protected from damage during the rectifiers shall be electrically connected with each switching-on and switching-off sequence, dedication other. The test voltage shall be applied between the alterations and faulty operation. input/output terminals or between the electrodes and: I - Part 1 Section 11f G Power Electronics Chapter 8 GL 2007 Page 11f–3

– the cabinet 2.3 Function test – the mains connection side, if the power electron- The function shall be demonstrated as far as possible. ics device is electrically isolated from the mains

2.2 Test of insulation resistance 2.4 Testing of protection and monitoring devices Following the voltage test, the insulation resistance shall be measured at the same connections as for the The response thresholds and the coordinated operation voltage test. The measurement shall be performed at a of the protective and monitoring devices shall be voltage of at least 500 V DC. demonstrated.

I - Part 1 Section 11g A Power Equipment Chapter 8 GL 2007 Page 11g–1

Section 11g

Power Equipment

A. Steering Gear 3. Rating of electrical machines

1. General 3.1 If the steering gear is hydraulically operated, the rated output of the steering gear motors is to be 1.1 Two, with regard to their construction as far determined at the maximum load of the pump against as possible independent, steering gear systems are the maximum pressure produced by the steering gear required as follows: (adjusting of safety valves), under consideration of the efficiency of the pump. – 1 main and 1 auxiliary steering gear or – 1 main steering gear with two or more identical 3.2 The following requirements apply to the power units or modes of operation: – 2 main steering gear systems 3.2.1 Steering gear with intermittent power demand: 1.2 The electrical systems of the main and auxiliary steering gear shall be so arranged that as far as – S6 – 25 % for converters and motors of electro- reasonable and practicable a failure in one of them hydraulic drives will not render the other one inoperative. This also applies when the main steering gear comprises two or – S3 – 40 % for motors of electromechanical more identical power units and therefore an auxiliary steering gears steering gear need not be fitted. The ratio of pull-out torque to rated torque is to be at least 1,6 in all cases. 1.3 For increased vibration loads in the steering gear compartment see Section 11a, E.2. 3.2.2 Steering gear with constant power demand:

2. Power supply – S1 – 100 % continuous service

2.1 The power supply to steering gears is also 4. Switchgear required to comply with the provisions of Section 11d, I. Each steering gear motor must have its own separate switchgear. 2.2 For every steering gear power unit a separate power supply circuit from the main switchboard is to 5. Protective equipment be incorporated. However, one of these circuits may be supplied through the emergency switchboard, if pro- 5.1 The circuits and motors of steering gears vided and if the emergency generator capacity is ade- shall be protected against short circuit only. quate to supply the steering gear in addition to the emergency consumers for a period of at least 10 minutes. 5.2 Where fuses are provided, their current ratings are to be of two steps higher than the rated cur- 2.3 After an electrical power failure, the steering rent of the motor or circuit control circuit; however, in gear power units shall restart automatically when the the case of intermittent service motors, the fuse rating power is restored. is not to exceed 160 % of the rated motor current.

2.4 The motors for the power units shall be capa- 5.3 Protection against excess current, if provided, ble of being started or stopped individually or together shall be for not less than twice the full load current of from the steering gear compartment and at the wheel- the motor or circuit so protected and shall be arranged house, by electrically and mechanically separate to permit the passage of the appropriate starting cur- switches. rents. The supply for the remote start and for the remote control of the power units shall come from the starter 6. Steering gear control systems box in the steering compartment to which the remote control belongs and shall be able to be de-energized 6.1 Vessels with electrical operated steering gear from there. controls shall have two independent steering gear Chapter 8 Section 11g D Power Equipment I - Part 1 Page 11g–2 GL 2007

control systems. Separated cables and wires are to be B. Lateral Thrust Propellers provided for these control systems. 1. Power supply 6.2 It must be possible to control the main and auxiliary steering gear from the wheelhouse. The power supply has to be run direct from the main switchboard. 6.3 For the steering control positions on the open deck, e.g. bridge wings, there should be provision to 2. Rating of electrical machines isolate these control positions completely from the The equipment is to be designed in accordance with wheelhouse control circuits. the operating conditions of the vessel. Drives used only for lateral thrust shall be designed at least for 7. Alarms and indicators short-term duty S2 – 30 minutes at all speeds.

The following equipment is required for monitoring in 3. Protective equipment the wheelhouse: The equipment is to be protected in such a way that in 7.1 A green indicator light each indicating that the event of an overload an optical and acoustical the motors of the power units are in operation is to be alarm is to be given in the wheelhouse. provided. 4. Controls, monitors and indicators 7.2 A red indicator light indicating failure of the For lateral thrusters the following indicators are to be steering gear, e.g. in the event of failure of the main provided: power supply or remote steering control is to be provided. – an indicator light showing that the system is activated 7.3 A yellow indicator light indicating overload – a yellow indicator light signalling an overload of the electric motor and/or loss of anyone of the supply phases in case of a three phase system is to be – depending on the type of equipment, displays provided. showing the power steps and the desired direction of motion of the vessel 7.4 A system giving an audible warning of the occurrence of the faults mentioned in 7.2 and 7.3 in the wheelhouse is to be provided. The audible alarm is to be cancellable. The stopping of an audible alarm is C. Variable Pitch Propeller Systems for Main not to prevent the alarming of a fault in the other steer- Propulsion System ing gear drive units in operation. 1. Facilities shall be provided for the system control from the wheelhouse and from the engine 8. Rudder angle indicator room. See Section 11h, C. 2. The failure of any control system shall be signalled visually and audibly in the wheelhouse. 9. Tests

9.1 Electrical machinery, switchgear cabinets and control systems for steering gears are to be tested and D. Auxiliary Machinery and Systems certified at the manufacturer’s works in the presence of a GL Surveyor. 1. Fire pumps 9.2 The works tests comprise: The power supply to the fire pump motors, with regard both to the assignment of power source and to – examination for conformity with the drawings routing of power lines, is to be so arranged that as far approved by GL as possible a fire in any fire zone does not render all – inspection of the components used, construction the fire pumps unserviceable. and wiring 2. Fans, fuel pumps, separators – functional testing The power ventilation of accommodation spaces, – insulation measurements and voltage tests in service spaces, cargo spaces, control spaces and ma- accordance with requirements for switchboards, chinery spaces and fuel oil pumps and separators shall see Section 11e, G. be capable of being stopped from an easily accessible I - Part 1 Section 11g H Power Equipment Chapter 8 GL 2007 Page 11g–3

position outside the spaces concerned. This position F. Electrical Heating Equipment and Heaters should not be cut off in the event of a fire in such spaces. 1. Space heating

1.1 Only watertight heaters may be used in wash- rooms, bathrooms, other damp rooms and machinery E. Deck Machinery, Winches spaces (IP 44 class enclosure).

1.2 Where heaters are installed inside the bulk- 1. General head lining, a tray made of incombustible material is to be fitted behind the heater to prevent the accumula- 1.1 Motors and switchgear located on deck shall tion of heat behind the lining. be protected against temporary flooding (IP 56 enclosure), see also Section 11a, J. 1.3 In the case of ceiling-mounted heaters, it is essential to ensure that the heat is radiated downwards. 1.2 Levers and handwheels for the control of An insulation layer of incombustible material is to be winches and lifting equipment has to return automati- fitted above the heater. The heating elements are to be cally to the zero position when released. Exceptions protected against accidental touch. may be allowed in the case of fishing net winches and special purpose drives. The control consoles are to be equipped with push buttons for emergency stops. 2. Oil and water heaters Oil and water heaters are subject to the provisions of 1.3 Brakes shall apply automatically if the elec- Section 9e. trical power supply fails.

2. Anchor windlasses, fishnet winches G. Plug and Socket Connections for Movable Power Consumers 2.1 Motors are to be rated for short-term operation of 30 minutes (S2 – 30 min) unless the type of 1. Plug and socket connections for power cir- service for which the vessel is intended requires more cuits are to be fused. stringent demand. In addition, the motors for anchor windlasses shall be 2. The specified class of protection against able to deliver twice the rated torque for 2 minutes touch and water shall be ensured for the entire appli- without dangerous overheating. ance with the plug inserted and for the socket even when the plug is withdrawn. The socket is to be fitted 2.2 At vessels with stern fishing system, compare in accordance with its specified position for use. Section 6, periodically overloads of the drives of the fishnet winches are to be considered and should be able to deliver 1,6 the rated torque for 2 minutes without overheating. H. Refrigeration Installations for Preserva- tion of the Catch 2.3 To prevent excessive overload of motors and, All refrigeration installations for preservation of the as far as possible, gears, electrical overload protection catch on fishing vessels with Class Notation RIC have is to be provided in an appropriate manner. to comply with Section 10.

I - Part 1 Section 11h B Control, Monitoring and Vessel's Safety Systems Chapter 8 GL 2007 Page 11h–1

Section 11h

Control, Monitoring and Vessel's Safety Systems

A. General 1.5 The adjustment facilities for safety devices shall be designed so that the last setting can be de- tected. 1. Systems Control, monitoring and alarm systems generally con- 1.6 Where auxiliary energy is needed for the sist of electrical facilities and devices which are re- function of safety devices, this has to be monitored ferred to in the following as "systems". The term in- and a failure has to be alarmed. cludes the control, monitoring and measuring systems necessary to the operation of the machinery and the 1.7 Security equipment like short circuit monitor- safety of the vessel. ing of generators as well as overspeed monitoring of diesel engines shall run independently from automatic power control system, to ensure that the equipment 2. Programmable electronic circuits and can continue operating manually in case of a break- computers down. Where programmable electronic circuits or computers are used Chapter 3 – Electrical Installations, Sec- 1.8 Safety devices are subject to mandatory type tion 10 is to be observed. approval.

2.1 Safety systems, alarm systems and control 2. Safety system systems shall be made in general functionally and physically independent of each other. 2.1 A safety system is to be provided so that serious malfunctioning machinery or boiler opera- 2.2 Where it is appropriate to the application, tions, which present an immediate danger, shall initi- systems shall as far as possible be self-monitoring. ate the automatic shutdown of that part of the plant Failure of the supply has to be indicated. It shall be and an alarm shall be given. Shutdown of the propul- possible to check the operation of the indicator lights. sion system shall not be automatically activated except in cases which could lead to serious damage, complete breakdowns, or explosion.

B. Machinery Control and Monitoring 2.2 Where arrangements for overriding the shut- Installation down of the main propelling machinery are fitted, these shall be such as to preclude inadvertent activation. Visual means shall be provided to show whether 1. Safety devices or not it has been activated.

1.1 The design of safety devices shall be as sim- 2.3 Advance alarms shall be given before auto- ple as possible and has to be reliable and inevitable in matic shutdown. operation. Proven safety devices which are not depending on a power source are to be preferred. 2.4 The monitoring circuits of safety systems shall be electrically isolated from those of the alarm 1.2 The suitability and function of safety devices system (separate sensors) and have to be decoupled to shall be demonstrated in the given application. prevent reciprocal effects in the event of faults. In exceptional cases and with special approval, safety 1.3 Safety devices shall be designed so that po- systems may share monitoring circuits with the alarm tential faults such as, for example, loss of voltage or a system provided that indicators with a separate power broken wire shall not create a hazard to human life, supply additional to those of the alarm system are vessel or machinery. These faults and also the tripping mounted in the wheelhouse and in the engine room to of safety devices shall be signalled by an alarm. signal the need for a shutdown (instead of automatic shutdown) or slow down. 1.4 For preference, safety devices shall be designed in conventional technology (hard wired). Al- 2.5 Safety systems are subject to mandatory type ternative technical solutions shall be agreed with GL. approval. Chapter 8 Section 11h C Control, Monitoring and Vessel's Safety Systems I - Part 1 Page 11h–2 GL 2007

3. Alarm systems C. Vessel Control Systems

3.1 A machinery alarm system is required to give 1. Remote control of the main engine a visual and audible warning of any unacceptable deviations of the operating parameters requiring atten- Where the remote control of the main engine from the tion. wheelhouse is envisaged, the requirements according to Section 12 shall be observed. The alarms shall be perceptible throughout the whole machinery space, on vessels equipped for operation 2. Engine telegraph systems with unattended machinery space also in the wheelhouse and living quarters of the engineers or the crew Two separate means of communication between the responsible for the machinery. wheelhouse and the machinery space control platform shall be provided. One of the means shall be an engine In vessels with the Class Notation K an alarm system room telegraph. Vessels with remote control system to be capable of sounding and indicating visually each from the bridge are to be equipped according to Sec- separate alarm function in the wheelhouse only, may tion 12. be permitted. 3. Indicators on the bridge and on bridge 3.2 Indication is to be provided that the system is wings operative. 3.1 All instruments and indicators important to 3.3 Visual signals are to be individually dis- the control of the vessel shall be legible at all times. played. The meaning of each signal has to be made clear by inscription or symbol. 3.2 All indicators and illuminations for instruments shall be provided with dimmers either individu- Where a fault is indicated, the visual indication is to ally or in groups. remain visible until the fault has been eliminated.

Means shall be provided to distinguish an alarm which 4. Rudder angle indicator has been acknowledged to one which has not been The position of the rudder, if power operated, shall be acknowledged, e.g. steady/flashing signal, light/dark indicated in the wheelhouse. The rudder angle indica- signal, etc. tion for power operated steering gear is to be independent of the steering gear control system. 3.4 Provision shall be made for acknowledging audible alarms. The acknowledgement of any alarm 5. Indicators for speed and direction of rota- shall not inhibit another alarm. tion

3.5 Alarm systems shall generally be designed on Indicators showing the speed and direction of rotation the closed-circuit principle or the monitored open- of the propeller shafts are to be installed in the wheel- circuit principle, as appropriate. house. See also Section 9b, I. and 12, E.

Short-term faults which are self-correcting without 6. Variable pitch propellers indicators intervention are to be indicated by memory signals. The audible alarm needs not go into the self-hold Where variable-pitch propellers are used, indicators mode. are to be installed in the wheelhouse showing the pitch of the propeller blades and speed of the rotation of the propeller shafts. See also Section 9b, I. and 12, E. 3.6 Exceptions may be admitted for small installations confined to individual auxiliary machines or on fishing vessels with Class Notation K. 7. Voice communication and signalling systems 3.7 The alarm system is to be supplied by a network with battery back-up. 7.1 Important voice communication

7.1.1 The following voice communications are 3.8 The amount of the alarm points is to be de- required: termined in accordance with Section 9b, J. a) Bridge-radio room (if any) 3.9 For machinery alarm systems for vessels with Required is a two-way voice link between the periodically unattended machinery space reference is bridge and the operator’s position in the radio made to Section 12, D. room. I - Part 1 Section 11h D Control, Monitoring and Vessel's Safety Systems Chapter 8 GL 2007 Page 11h–3

b) Bridge-engine room 2.2 A sufficient number of alarm facilities is to Required is a two-way voice link between the be provided to ensure that all persons on board can be bridge and the engine room from which the alerted without fail. Additional flashing lights may be main propulsion plant can be controlled. used where necessary (with high ambient noise). See also IMO Resolution A.830(19)/1995. 7.1.2 Communication links, if electrical, provided for in 7.1.1 a) and 7.1.1 b) are to be independent of the 2.3 The general emergency alarm shall be pow- vessel's mains, unless they are backed-up by battery. ered from the vessel's main supply and the emergency source of electrical power. 7.2 Additional intercommunication system on vessels for unrestricted service 2.4 A loudspeaker system may be accepted as A two-way intercommunication is to be provided be- alarm facility. tween the bridge and the engineers' accommodation rooms. 3. Fire extinguishing This system may consist of portable or permanently For the general design, construction and detection of installed equipment and shall be capable of operation Fire Extinguishing Systems, see Section 8. even if the main power supply fails.

4. Fire detection system Section 7 requires a fire detection system only for D. Vessel's Safety Systems fishing vessels with a length L ≥ 45 m. According to Section 11a, electrical installations for such vessels 1. Engineers' alarms are defined in Chapter 3 – Electrical Installations. On vessels for unrestricted service an engineers' alarm Fishing vessels with Class Notation TORRE-EC and shall be provided to be operated from the engine con- a length L ≥ 24 m have to meet the requirements of trol room or at the manoeuvring platform as appropri- the Torremolinos Convention, Chapter V. ate and shall be clearly audible in the engineers’ accommodation. The system is to be supplied by the emergency source of electrical power. 5. Fire detection and alarm systems for unattended machinery spaces 2. General alarm 5.1 Unattended machinery spaces shall be pro- 2.1 Vessels for unrestricted service are to be vided with an approved automatic fire detection and provided with an alarm system enabling the crew to be alarm system. alerted or called to the boat stations in case of danger. It shall be possible to initiate the alarm from the 5.2 The design and arrangement are to comply wheelhouse. with Section 12, D.

I - Part 1 Section 11i C Lighting and Socket-Outlets Chapter 8 GL 2007 Page 11i–1

Section 11i

Lighting and Socket-Outlets

A. Construction and Extent 2.2 All lighting fixtures shall be so mounted that combustible parts are not ignited by the generated heat, and they themselves are not exposed to damage. 1. There is to be a lighting system supplied by The minimum distances indicated on the lighting fix- the main source of electrical power and illuminating tures shall be respected. all parts of the vessel normally accessible to the crew and an emergency lighting system supplied by the Where no minimum distances are specified, the mini- emergency source of electrical power, if any. mum distances in the direction of radiation indicated in Table 11i.1 shall be applied for lighting fixtures in accordance with IEC publication 60598-1 Luminaires, 2. Lights in machinery spaces, other important Part 1 - General Requirements and Tests. service and control stations, fish handling and processing decks, passage ways and stairways leading to the boat deck are to be so arranged that the failure of any Table 11i.1 Minimum distances for the mounting one branch circuit will not leave these spaces in dark- of lighting fixtures ness, see Section 11d, I.4.

Rated power Minimum 3. Lights on open decks which are to be in use distance while the vessel is under way are to be located in such [W] [m] a way that they do not interfere with navigation. If necessary, they are to be fitted with shields. up to and incl. 100 0,5 over 100 up to and incl. 300 0,8 over 300 up to and incl. 500 1,0

B. Lighting Installations

1. Design and construction of the lighting installation C. Socket-Outlets

1.1 A sufficient number of lighting fixtures shall 1. General be provided to achieve a good level of illumination. 1.1 The supply for socket-outlets in the accom- 1.2 The arrangement of the main- and emergency modation, day rooms and service rooms (250 V) are to lighting systems (sources of electrical power, associ- be run from lighting distribution panels. The maxi- ated transformer) shall be such that a fire or other mum fuse rating for a circuit is 16 A. incident does not cause the failure of both systems. 1.2 Sockets outside the accommodation area shall 1.3 Following a failure of the main power supply, be connected to separate circuits. When calculating the emergency lighting system shall cut in automati- the permissible connected load, one socket is equiva- cally. Local switches may be provided only where the lent to two lighting points. ability to switch off the emergency lighting is required. 1.3 For the sockets of distribution systems with different voltage and/or frequencies, non- interchangeable plugs and socket outlets shall be used. 2. Mounting of lighting fixtures

1.4 Plug-in connections shall not be installed 2.1 Within arm's reach of showers and bathtubs below the floor in engine rooms or boiler rooms. up to 1,2 m from the shower head and/or 0,6 m from the tubrim vertical surface and up to a height of 2,25 m, lighting fixtures shall only be installed if their degree of 1.5 Socket outlets for power circuits over 16 A protection is at least IP 55. AC or 10 A DC shall be interlocked in such a way that the plug can be neither inserted nor withdrawn when Switches shall not be installed within arm's reach. the socket contacts are live. Chapter 8 Section 11i C Lighting and Socket-Outlets I - Part 1 Page 11i–2 GL 2007

2. Shower rooms and bathing rooms Table 11i.2 Minimum degree of protection against foreign bodies and water 2.1 In locations containing a bath or shower the Degree of protection of the installed electrical equipment shall be installed in accordance Zone with IEC publication 60364-7-701. electrical equipment 0 IP X7 2.2 The minimum degree of protection against 1 IP 55 foreign bodies and water shall be appropriate to Table 2 IP 34 11i.2.

I - Part 1 Section 11j B Cable Network Chapter 8 GL 2007 Page 11j–1

Section 11j

Cable Network

A. Choice of Cables and Wires cables or wires of sufficient flexibility and installed with compensating bends. 1. General instructions 5.2 Mobile equipment shall in every case be Cables and wires shall conform to the requirements supplied via heavy, flame-retardant and oil-resistant stated in Section 11k, E. rubber-sheathed flexible cables. For rated voltages above 50 V, the movable connect- 2. Rated voltage ing cables or wires of equipment without double insu- The rated voltage of a cable shall be not less than the lation shall also include an earth conductor. operating voltage of the relevant circuit. In insulated distribution systems, the outer conductor voltage of the system shall be deemed to be the rated B. Determination of Conductor Cross- voltage of the cable between a conductor and the ves- Sections sel's hull. 1. General 3. Temperatures 1.1 Cables are to be rated according to the ex- At places where higher ambient temperatures are pected service load based on the connected load and expected, cables shall be used whose permissible type of duty of the consumers supplied. temperature is at least 10 K above the maximum anticipated ambient temperature. 1.2 If all the connected consumers in a part of the A correction of the permissible current rating shall be system are certain not to be in operation simultane- made in accordance with Table 12.1 of the GL Rules, ously, a diversity factor may be used for determining Chapter 3 – Electrical Installations, Section 12, B. the cross-section of the group supply lines.

Cables on diesel engines, turbines, boilers, etc., where 1.3 For cables and wiring in switchboards and there is danger of excessive heating, shall be so routed distribution equipment see Section 11e, E.2. that they are protected against inadmissible external heating stress, or cables are to be used which are approved for the maximum arising ambient temperature. 2. Minimum cross-sectional areas and their current-carrying capacity

4. Mechanical protection 2.1 The conductor cross-sections indicated in Table 11j.1 are the minimum cross-sections for exter- 4.1 Cables installed in locations liable to damage nal cabling respective for internal wiring, e.g. of during normal operation of the vessel, e.g. engine switchgear and consoles. rooms, fish handling rooms, open deck are to be provided with braided metallic armour or otherwise be 2.2 The maximum current-carrying capacity of suitably protected from mechanical injury. conductor cross-sections for external cabling shall be For further requirements see D. taken from GL Rules, Chapter 3 – Electrical Installa- tions, Section 12, B.4.2. 4.2 Except for final sub-circuits of room lighting and space heating systems, as a rule cables of stranded 2.3 In accommodation and day rooms, flexible core are to be used. cables with a conductor cross-section of not less than 0,75 mm2 (AWG 18) may also be used for the connection of movable equipment with a current consump- 4.3 For single-phase and three-phase AC systems tion of up to 6 A. multi-core cables are to be used wherever possible. 2.4 For vessel's hull return, see Section 11d, 5. Mobility I.1.2.

5.1 Machines or equipment mounted on rubber or 2.5 For earthing conductors, see Section 11a, spring vibration absorbers are to be connected via J.2.4. Chapter 8 Section 11j C Cable Network I - Part 1 Page 11j–2 GL 2007

Table 11j.1 Minimum cross-sectional areas

Nominal cross-section Type of installation external wiring internal wiring international AWG international AWG

Power, heating and lighting systems 1,0 mm2 17 1,0 mm2 17

Control circuits for power plants 1,0 mm2 17 1,0 mm2 17 Control circuits in general, safety systems in 0,75 mm2 18 0,5 mm2 20 accordance with Section 11h Telecommunications equipment in general, 0,5 mm2 20 0,1 mm2 28 automation equipment Telephone and bell installations, not relevant for 0,2 mm2 24 0,1 mm2 28 the safety of the ship or crew call installations

Data bus and data cables 0,2 mm2 24 0,1 mm2 28

AWG = American Wire Gauge

3. Voltage drop 2. Cables overload protection

3.1 The section of the cables shall be calculated 2.1 Cables shall be protected against short circuit not only according to the admissible intensity, but also and overcurrent. to the voltage drop allowable. 2.2 Rating and setting of the protection devices Under normal service conditions the voltage drop shall be in compliance with the requirements in Sec- between the busbars and the most unfavourable point tion 11d. in the system concerned may not generally exceed 6 %, or 10 % in battery-powered circuits of 50 V and 2.3 Cables protected against overcurrent at the less. For navigation lights the voltage drop may not consumers side require only short-circuit protection at exceed 5 %. the supply side. For steering gear, see Section 11g, A.

3.2 Where short-term peak loads occur due, e.g. 2.4 Exciter cables for DC motors and DC genera- to the starting of machines, it is essential to ensure that tors operating in parallel shall not be fused. Exciter the voltage drop in the cable does not cause faults in cables for individually connected DC generators and the system. synchronous three-phase alternators shall be fused only if there are special reasons for it, e.g. where the cables are passing through various compartments of the vessel. C. Protection and Installation of Circuits 3. Separation of circuits 1. Mechanical protection 3.1 A separate cable shall normally be provided All cables liable to damage, such as in locations in for each circuit having its own overcurrent and short way of cargo ports, hatches, tank tops, open decks circuit protection. Deviating from this requirement the subject to seas and where passing through decks, are following may be combined in a common cable: to be protected by substantial metal shields, structural shapes, pipe or other equivalent means. – a main circuit and its control circuits which have their tapping off after the main switch All such coverings are to be of sufficient strength to – various control circuits laid separately from the provide effective protection to the cables and if metal- main circuits lic are to be electrically continuous and grounded to the metal hull. Horizontal pipes or the equivalent used – various main circuits and their control circuits for cable protection are to be provided with drainage belonging to a common system, e.g. for several holes and where they are carried out through decks or drives of an air-conditioning system, if all the bulkheads, arrangements are to be made to ensure the cores of the cable can be centrally disconnected integrity of the water or gas tightness of the structure. from the supply I - Part 1 Section 11j D Cable Network Chapter 8 GL 2007 Page 11j–3

3.2 Separate cables shall be provided for safety In any case the radius shall not be smaller than 6 times voltage circuits. the outside diameter of the cable.

3.3 Separate cables shall be provided for intrinsi- 1.3 Heat sources such as boilers, hot pipes, etc. cally safe circuits. shall be bypassed so that the cables are not subjected to additional heating. If this is not possible, the cables 4. Cable laying for circuits are to be shielded from thermal radiation.

4.1 For single-phase and three-phase AC systems, 1.4 Cables are to be installed in such a manner multi-core cables are to be used wherever possible. that stresses on the cables are not transmitted to the conductors. They are not to be fastened directly to the 4.2 Should it be necessary to lay single-core shell plating. cables for the carriage of more than 10 A in single- phase or three-phase AC circuits, the special require- 1.5 Cables may be installed behind sheathing, but ments of Chapter 3 – Electrical Installations, Section they are not to be imbedded in structural heat insula- 12, D.7. shall be fulfilled. tion. They are to pass through such insulation at right angles and are to be protected by a continuous pipe 4.3 In three-phase systems without hull return, with a stuffing tube at one end. three-core cables shall be used for three-phase connec- For deck penetrations stuffing tubes are to be at the tions; four-core cables are required for circuits with upper end of the pipe and for bulkhead penetrations loaded neutral point. they are to be on the uninsulated side of the bulkhead.

4.4 In three-phase systems with hull return the 1.6 Cables may be installed behind panelling, asymmetry of the currents in the three conductors of provided all connections are accessible and the loca- three-core cables shall not exceed 20 A (see Section tion of concealed connection boxes is indicated. Dome 11d, I.). fixtures are to be installed so that they are vented or they are to be fitted with fire-resistant material in such 4.5 In DC systems without hull return multi-core a manner as to protect the insulated wiring leading to cables shall be provided in all cases of smaller cross- the lamps and any exposed woodwork from excessive sections. temperature. Where single-core cables are used for large cross- sections, the outgoing- and return-cables are to be laid 1.7 Cables for supply of essential equipment and as close as possible to each other over their entire emergency consumers, e.g. lighting and essential length to avoid magnetic stray fields. communications and signalling systems shall, wherever possible, bypass galleys, laundries, Category A 4.6 The generator cables, all cables run from the engine rooms and their casings and areas with a high main or emergency switchboard or an auxiliary fire risk and laundries, fish handling and fish process- switchboard, and all interconnecting cables for essen- ing spaces and other spaces where there is a high tial equipment, shall be laid as far as possible uninter- moisture content. rupted in length to the distribution panels or to the equipment. 1.8 Cables which feed the fire pumps and the emergency switchboard shall be of a fire-resistant type 4.7 The cables of intrinsically safe circuits shall where they pass through high fire risk areas. be laid at a distance of at least 50 mm separated from the cables of non-intrinsically safe circuits. The laying 1.9 Where practicable, all such cables (1.7; 1.8) of intrinsically safe circuits together with non-intrin- should be run in such manner as to preclude their sically safe circuits in a pipe is not permitted. Cables being rendered unserviceable by heating of the bulk- of intrinsically safe circuits shall be marked. heads that may be caused by a fire in an adjacent space.

1.10 Cables installed in refrigerating compart- D. Installation ments shall be suitable for low temperatures and high humidity. 1. Routing of cables 1.11 Cables in hazardous areas zone 0 and 1 shall 1.1 The routes of cables shall be such that cables be armoured or screened, or run inside a metal tube. are laid as straight as possible and are not exposed to mechanical damage. 2. Fasting of cables and wires

1.2 For bends, the minimum internal radius of 2.1 Cables are to be supported in cable trays or curvature permitted by the maker has to be observed. hangers. The distance between the supports in cable Chapter 8 Section 11j D Cable Network I - Part 1 Page 11j–4 GL 2007

racks and the fastenings used are to be selected with by metal bulkheads or decks from aerials, aerial due regard for the type and number of cables and the downleads, the radio room, direction finder or other possibility of vibration. radio-navigation or receiving equipment. The metal sheaths and shields are to be effectively earthed. Cables grouped in a single support are to be limited to two banks except for turnouts. Cables running transversely to the underside of beams are to be supported 5.2 Single-core cables are not permitted in the in cable racks or the equivalent. radio room.

2.2 Except for flexible cords for the connection 5.3 Cables liable to carry interference pulses of mobile consumers and for cables laid in pipes, because of the nature of the equipment connected to conduits, trunking or special casings, all cables and them, e.g. echo sounders, are to be shielded, for ex- wires shall be fixed by metal clips or bindings treated ample, by thick-walled iron conduits in addition to the against corrosion or by fastenings made of some other cable shield. flame-resistant material. 6. Magnetic compass zone 2.3 Plastic fastenings shall have been approved by GL. All electric cables and lines, machines, apparatus and accessories shall be laid or installed at a sufficient 2.4 Suitable materials are to be placed together distance from the magnetic compass or have to be when fastening cables to aluminium walls, e.g. cad- shielded so as to prevent any undue interference with mium-plated or galvanized steel screws and galva- the compass (deviation < 0,5 degree). nized clips may be used. 7. Earthing of cables and accessories 3. Deck and bulkhead penetrations 7.1 Metallic cable sheaths, armouring and shields 3.1 Where cables pass through watertight, fire- in power installations shall be electrically connected to tight or gastight bulkheads or decks, the penetrations the vessel's hull at each end; single-core cables shall are to be made through the use of approved stuffing be earthed at one end only. For cables and wires for tubes, transit devices or pourable materials which will electronic equipment, the manufacturer's recommen- maintain the watertight, fire-tight or gastight integrity dations shall be observed, earthing at one end only is of the bulkheads or decks. recommended.

3.2 The penetration shall not impair the mechani- 7.2 Electrical continuity of all metallic cable cal strength of the bulkhead. coverings shall also be maintained inside of cable junction and connection boxes. 3.3 Additionally, each stuffing tube, transit device or pourable material is to be of a character so as 7.3 Metallic cable sheaths, armouring and shields not to damage the cable physically or through chemi- shall be earthed, preferably by the use of standard cal action or through heat build-up. cable gland fittings designed for that purpose, or by suitable equivalent clips or joints. 3.4 Cables passing through decks are to be protected from damage by protection pipes or casings up 7.4 Metallic cable sheaths, armouring and shields to a height of at least 300 mm. shall in no case be deemed to constitute earthing conductors for the protective earthing of the connected 3.5 Deck and bulkhead penetration systems must electrical equipment. be approved by GL. 8. Cable joints and branches 4. Measures to limit the propagation of fire along cable and wire bundles 8.1 Cables shall be extended only with the ap- All cables shall be so installed that the original flame- proval of GL. The used material shall have been type retardant properties of the individual cables are not tested by GL and shall maintain the flame-retardant impaired. and, where required, the fire-resistant properties of the cables. 5. Cables in the vicinity of radio and radio- navigation equipment 8.2 Junction and distribution boxes shall be accessible and marked for identification. 5.1 Except where laid in metal conduits or ducts, cables and wires with metal sheaths or metal braiding 8.3 Cables for safety extra-low voltage shall not are to be used above the uppermost metal deck and in pass a junction or distribution box together with cables positions where the cables and wires are not separated for higher voltage systems. I - Part 1 Section 11j D Cable Network Chapter 8 GL 2007 Page 11j–5

8.4 The terminals for different types of systems, – suitable measures have been taken during the especially such of differently operating voltages, shall installation, e.g. by providing of fire stops or be separated. application of flameproof coatings

9.2 For cable bundles consisting of cables which 9. Measures for limitation of the propagation have not been subjected to a bundle fire test, the pre- of fire along cable and wire bundles cautions shall be taken to limit the fire propagation in accordance with Chapter 3 – Electrical Installations, 9.1 All cables shall be so installed that the origi- Section 12, D. nal flame-retardant properties of the individual cables are not impaired. This requirement can be considered 10. Application of fire-resistant cables to be fulfilled if: Cables for services required to be operable under fire – the bundled cables are individually flame- conditions including those for their power supplies are retardant and have been successfully passed the to be of a fire-resistant type, complying with Section bundle fire test in accordance with IEC publica- 11k, E. where they pass through high fire risk areas, tion 60332-3 category A/F fire zones or decks, other than those which they serve.

I - Part 1 Section 11k A Electrical Equipment Chapter 8 GL 2007 Page 11k–1

Section 11k

Electrical Equipment

A. Electrical Machinery Two-part bearings are to be fitted with thermometers indicating, wherever possible, the temperature of the 1. General lower bearing shell.

1.1 Except as regards the particular points men- 3.2 Antifriction bearings tioned in the following, the generators and motors are Antifriction bearings should be of the preloaded type. to be constructed and installed according to recommendations of IEC Publication 60034 and the require- 4. Windings ments of Section 11a, H. For generators and motors intended for electrical pro- 4.1 In conjunction with the specified protective pulsion special requirements are to be observed, see devices, machines shall be able to withstand the dy- Section 11a, A. namic and thermal stresses likely to result from a short circuit. 1.2 The permissible limits of temperature rise, particularly for windings, sliprings and commutators 4.2 Where insulating materials are laminated, the for motors under continuous running and for genera- maximum temperature permitted for each individual tors, are given in Table 11k.1 with regard to 45 °C insulating material shall not be exceeded, see Table conventional ambient temperature 11k.1.

1.3 The permissible temperature rise limits for 4.3 All windings have to be effectively protected motors supplying an intermittent service will be spe- against the effects of oil vapours and air laden with cially considered by GL Head Office. moisture or salt.

2. Ventilation and cooling 5. Terminal boxes The class of enclosure of terminal boxes shall corre- 2.1 Draught ventilation spond to that of the machine, but shall in any case not be less than IP 44, see Section 11a, J. The air supply to draught-ventilated machines shall be free of moisture, oil vapours and dust as far as possible. 6. Operation in network with semiconductor converters Where re-coolers are used in the air circuit, they shall Electric machines operating in networks containing be designed and mounted in such a way that condensa- semiconductor converters shall be designed for the ex- tion or water leaking from the re-cooling system is pected harmonics of the system. A sufficient reserve kept away from the machine windings. Dual-tube shall be considered for the temperature rise, compared coolers are to be used where appropriate. with a sinusoidal load. 2.2 Surface cooling 7. Testing of electrical machinery Surface cooled machines on exposed decks may have external fans only if they are fully protected against 7.1 Machines supplying an essential service icing. together with their gear are to be submitted to tests to verify that the requirements defined herein are com- 3. Bearings and bearing lubrications plied with. For this purpose and without prejudice to tests and inspections deemed necessary during con- 3.1 Plain bearings struction and after completion, a Certificate of the builder has to give the machine specifications and the Provision shall be made for checking the bearing lu- results of the required tests. brication. Even in the case of the inclined positions specified in Section 11a, E. no oil shall flow out and 7.2 The machines listed in the following are penetrate into the machine. subject to testing in the manufacturer's works in the presence of a GL Surveyor: In the case of bearings with force lubrication, failure of the oil supply and the occurrence of excessive bear- – generators with outputs of 50 kW or kVA or ing temperatures shall trigger an alarm. over Chapter 8 Section 11k A Electrical Equipment I - Part 1 Page 11k–2 GL 2007

– motors of 50 kW or over for steering gear followed by determination of the temperature rise. drives, anchor windlasses, for fishing winches The results shall be within the limits given in Table and refrigeration equipment for vessels with 11k.1. Class Notation RIC 7.3.2 Machines with separate cooling fans and/or – all other drive motors for essential auxiliary ma- air filters are to be tested together with this equip- chines rated at 100 kW or over. ment. 7.3 Heat test 7.3.3 Heat runs on machines of identical construc- 7.3.1 Heat run until the final temperature corre- tion which occurred not more than 3 years previously sponding to the required mode of operation is reached, can be recognized.

Table 11k.1 Permitted temperature-rises of air cooled machines at an ambient temperature of 45°C (difference values in K)

Method of Insulation class No. Machinery component 3 measurement A E B F 1 H 1 1 AC windings of machines R 55 70 75 100 120 2 Commutator windings R 55 70 75 100 120 3 Field windings of AC and DC machines with DC exci- R 55 70 75 100 120 tation, other than those specified under 4 4 a) Field windings of synchronous machines with cy- R – – 85 105 125 lindrical rotors having DC excitation winding, embedded in slots except synchronous induction motors b) Stationary field windings of DC machines having R 55 70 75 100 120 more than on layer c) Low-resistance field windings of AC and DC ma- R 55 70 75 95 115 chines and compensation windings of DC machines Th having more than one layer d) Single-layer field windings of AC and DC machines R 60 75 85 105 125 with exposed bare or varnished metal surfaces and Th single-layer compensation windings of DC machines 5 Permanently short-circuited, insulated windings Th 55 70 75 95 115 6 Permanently short-circuited, uninsulated windings The temperature rises of these parts shall in no case reach such values that there is a risk of injury to any 7 Iron cores and other parts not in contact with insulation or other material on adjacent parts or to windings the item itself 8 Iron cores and other parts in contact with windings Th 55 70 75 95 115 9 Commutators and slip rings, open or enclosed Th 55 65 75 85 105 10 Plain bearings measured in the lower 45 bearing shell or in the oil sump after shutdown 11 Roller bearings measured in the lubrica- 45 tion nipple bore or near Roller bearings with 75 the outer bearing seat special grease

12 Surface temperature Reference 35 2

1 These values may need correction in the case of high-voltage AC windings. 2 Higher temperature rises may be expected on electrical machines with insulation material for high temperatures. Where parts of such machinery may be accidentally touched and there is a risk of burns (>80°C), GL reserve the right to request means of protection such as a handrail to prevent accidental contacts. 3 R = resistance method, Th = thermometer method.

I - Part 1 Section 11k A Electrical Equipment Chapter 8 GL 2007 Page 11k–3

7.4 Load characteristic – for motors with one nominal speed, at 1,2 times the no-load speed For generators the voltage and for motors the speed shall be checked as a function of the load. – for variable-speed motors, at 1,2 times the maximum no-load speed 7.5 Overload test – for motors with series characteristics, at 1,2 The overload test shall be performed: times the maximum speed shown on the rating plate, but at least at 1,5 times the rated speed – for generators for 1,5 times to rated current for two minutes The overspeed test may be dispensed with in the case of squirrel-cage machines. – for standard motors at 1,6 times the rated torque for 15 seconds. Motors may not depart substan- 7.8 Winding test tially from their rated speed during the test. 7.8.1 The following requirements have to be con- – Proof is required that windlass motors are capa- sidered: ble of delivering twice the rated torque for two minutes and motors for travel winches 1,6 the a) The test voltage shall be as shown in Table rated torque for two minutes. Earlier overload 11k.2. It shall be applied for 1 minute for each test on motors of identical construction can be single test. recognized. The voltage test shall be carried out between the – Steering gear motors are to be tested in accor- windings and the machine housing, the machine dance with the provisions of Section 11g, A.3. housing being connected to the windings not involved in the test. This test shall be performed 7.6 Short-circuit test only on new, fully assembled machines fitted with all their working parts. 7.6.1 On all synchronous generators, the steady The test voltage shall be a practically sinusoidal short circuit current shall be determined with the ex- AC voltage at system frequency. citer unit in operation. The maximum anticipated no-load voltage or the With a three-phase short circuit between terminals, the maximum system voltage is to be used as refer- steady short-circuit current shall not be less than three ence in determining the test voltage. times the rated current, and shall not be greater than b) Any repetition of the voltage test which may be six times the rated current. The generator and its ex- necessary shall be performed at only 80 % of the citer unit shall be capable of withstanding the steady nominal test voltage specified in Table 11k.2. short-circuit current for a period of two seconds without suffering damage. 7.8.2 In the case of machines supplied by inverters or operated in series with other machines, the maxi- 7.6.2 A short-circuit withstand test may be de- mum anticipated no-voltage is to be used as reference manded: in determining the test voltage. – to determine the reactances 7.9 Determination of insulation resistance – if there is any concern regarding mechanical and (test) electrical strength; synchronous generators The insulation resistance measurement shall be carried which have undergone a short-circuit withstand out, if possible with the machine at operating tempera- test shall be thoroughly examined after the test ture, on completion of the tests and with the applica- for any damage tion of a DC voltage of at least 500 V. 7.7 Overspeed test The minimum insulation resistance shall be: As proof of mechanical strength, a two-minute over- 3⋅ rated voltage [V] [MΩ ] speed test shall be carried out as follows: rated output [kVA]+ 1000 – for generators with their own drive, at 1,2 times the rated speed but not less than 1 MΩ. – for generators coupled to the main propulsion In the case of machines supplied by inverters or oper- plant and not arranged in the main shafting, at ated in series with other machines, the maximum 1,25 times the rated speed anticipated no-load voltage or the maximum system voltage is to be taken as the rated voltage. – for shaft generators arranged in the main shafting and whose construction makes testing im- 7.10 Test of degree of protection practicable, proof by computation of mechanical strength is required See Section 11a, J. Chapter 8 Section 11k A Electrical Equipment I - Part 1 Page 11k–4 GL 2007

Table 11k.2 Test voltages for the winding test

Test voltage (rms) dependent on rated No. Machine or machinery component voltage U of the subject winding 1 Insulated windings of rotating machines of output less 2 U + 500 V than 1 kW (kVA), and of rated voltages less than 100 V with the exception of those in items 4 to 8 2 Insulated windings of rotating machines of size less than 2 U + 1000 V, with a minimum of 1500 V 10000 kW (kVA), with the exception of those in item 1 and items 4 to 8 3 Insulated windings of rotating machines of size 10000 kW (kVA) or more with the exception of those in items 4 to 8 rated voltage up to 11000 V 2 U + 1000 V 4 Separately excited field windings of DC machines 1000 V + twice the maximum excitation voltage but not less than 1500 V 5 Field windings of synchronous generators, synchronous motors and rotary phase converters: a) rated field voltage 10 times rated field voltage, up to 500 V with a minimum of 1500 V b) over 500 V 4000 V + twice rated field voltage

When a machine is intended to be started with the field 10 times the rated field voltage, winding short-circuited or connected across a resistance of minimum 1500 V, maximum 3500 V value less than ten times the resistance of the winding When the machine is intended to be started either with the 1000 V + twice the maximum value of the rms volt- field winding connected across a resistance of value equal age, which can occur under the specified starting to, or more than, ten times the resistance of the winding, conditions, between the terminals of the field wind- or with the field windings on open-circuit with or without ing, or in the case of a sectionalized field winding a field dividing switch between the terminals of any section, with a minimum of 1500 V 6 Secondary (usually rotor) windings of induction motors or synchronous induction motors if not permanently short- circuited (e.g. if intended for rheostatic starting)

a) for non-reversing motors or motors reversible from 1000 V + twice the open-circuit standstill voltage as standstill only measured between slip rings or secondary terminals with rated voltage applied to the primary windings

b) for motors to be reversed or braked by reversing the 1000 V + four times the open-circuit secondary volt- primary supply while the motor is running age as defined in item 6a) 7 Exciters (exception below) as for the windings to which they are connected Exception 1: Exciters of synchronous motors (including synchronous twice rated exciter voltage + 1000 V, induction motors) if connected to earth or disconnected with a minimum of 1500 V from the field windings during starting Exception 2: Separately excited field windings of exciters as under item 4 8 Assembled group of machines and apparatus A repetition of the tests in items 1 to 7 above should be avoided if possible, but if a test on an assembled group of several pieces of new machines, each one of which has previously passed its high-voltage test, is made, the test voltage to be applied to such assembled group shall be 80 % of the lowest test voltage appropriate for any part of the group. 1

1 Where a number of windings belonging to one or more machines are connected together, the test voltage is dictated by the maximum voltage to earth which can occur.

I - Part 1 Section 11k B Electrical Equipment Chapter 8 GL 2007 Page 11k–5

B. Transformers and Reactance Coils The tests mentioned under 3.2 till 3.5 shall be performed at approximately operating temperature. The scope of the tests is defined in 3.2 to 3.6: 1. General Transformers and reactance coils shall conform to IEC 3.2 Heat test publication 60076, Power Transformers or an equivalent standard. The test shall be performed to determine the temperature rise, which shall not exceed the maximum permissible values shown in Table 11k.3. 1.1 Coolant Temperature-rise tests on transformers of identical Only dry type transformers may be used on board of construction and carried out not more than 3 years the vessel. previously may be recognized. The referenced temperature rise shall be 10 % below the values shown in 1.2 Windings Table 11k.3. All transformers are to have separate windings for primary and secondary coils, except for starting and 3.3 Induced overvoltage test ignition transformers which may be of the auto- The windings shall be tested at twice the rated voltage transformer type. and at increased frequency to verify that the insulation between turns is sufficient and satisfactory. 2. Rating The duration of the test shall be

2.1 Voltage variation during loading test frequency 120 s ⋅ Under resistive load, the voltage variation between no rated frequency load and full-load shall not exceed 5 %. but not less than 15 s. This requirement does not apply to short-circuit-proof transformers. 3.4 Short-circuit test 2.2 Temperature rise On request, the short-circuit proof property in accordance with 2.3 shall be verified. The limit temperature rise of windings may not exceed the values shown in Table11k.3. 3.5 Winding test Parts of casings with surface temperatures exceeding The test voltage shown in Table 11k.4 shall be applied 80 °C are to be protected against accidental contact. between the winding parts to be tested and all other windings, which are to be connected to the core and Table 11k.3 Permissible temperature rise of trans- the frame during the test. former- and reactance coil windings with an ambient temperature of 45 °C The test voltage shall be applied for one minute. Table 11k.4 Test voltage for transformers and reac- Insulation class A E B F H tance coil windings Temperature rise [K] 55 70 75 95 120

Maximum operating Alternating withstand voltage voltage 2.3 Short-circuit resistance [V] [V] Transformers in conjunction with their protective 50 1000 devices shall be able to withstand the effect to external 250 1500 short circuits without damage. 600 2500 1000 3000

3. Tests 3.6 Determination of insulation resistance 3.1 General The measurement of insulation resistance shall be Transformers shall be tested in the manufacturer's carried out at the end of the test sequence with a DC works. Transformers rated with 100 kVA and above voltage of at least 500 V. shall be tested in the presence of a GL Surveyor. A The insulation resistance shall be at least: works test report covering the tests carried out shall be prepared. – 5 MΩ between primary and secondary winding The works test reports shall be presented on request. – 2 MΩ for the remaining insulation Chapter 8 Section 11k D Electrical Equipment I - Part 1 Page 11k–6 GL 2007

C. Storage Batteries and Chargers D. Switchgear and Protection Device

1. General 1. General

1.1 These requirements apply to permanently 1.1 Switchgear and protective devices have to installed storage batteries and their chargers for sup- comply with the relevant IEC Publications and shall plying power systems and automation equipment, for be suitable for the application concerned. use as emergency source of electrical power and for starting internal combustion engines. 1.2 For materials and insulation, see Section 11a, I. 1.2 Rating of batteries 1.3 For equipment and components subject to Batteries are to be so rated that they can supply the mandatory type-approval, see Section 11e, G. consumers for the required period, in accordance with the energy balance, when charged to 80 % of their rated capacity. 2. Low-Voltage switchgear

2.1 Circuit breakers 2. Storage batteries 2.1.1 Drives 2.1 Lead-acid storage batteries with dilute sul- phuric acid as electrolyte and steel batteries with Power-driven power circuit breakers shall be equipped nickel-cadmium cells and dilute potassium hydroxide with an additional emergency drive operated by hand. as electrolyte are generally permitted. 2.1.2 Making and breaking capacity 2.2 Other types of storage batteries of non- The making and breaking capacity is to be in accor- standard design, such as silver/zinc batteries may be dance with IEC Publication 60947-2. Other standards allowed if their suitability for shipboard use has been may be recognized. demonstrated. 3. Protection devices 2.3 The cells of batteries of accumulators shall be grouped in cases or on platforms fitted with handles to 3.1 General facilitate handling; the total weight of a set may not exceed 100 kg. Protective and tripping devices are installed together with circuit breakers and other appliances in switch- Each case or platform shall be fitted with a name plate boards and consoles. including information concerning the designation of the type, the name of the maker and the nominal ca- 3.2 Short-circuit protection pacity at a particular discharge rate (for preference that which corresponds to the particular application, Short-circuit protection devices shall be independent discharge in 5, 10 or 20 hours). of energy supplied from circuits other than that to be protected. In the event of a short circuit, provision is The boxes of cells shall not be manufactured from to be made for the total loss of the supply voltage. a material sensitive to shocks such as glass, nor from celluloid, nor any other material easily inflam- Short-circuit protection devices for generators shall be mable. delayed for selective disconnection. They shall be carried out in such a way as to prevent 3.3 Overcurrent protection any spillage of the electrolyte by reason of an inclination of 40 ° from the vertical. The operation of overcurrent relays shall not be effected by the ambient temperature. 3. Chargers Bimetal devices are to be compensated and, for motor protection, are to be fitted with a re-closing inhibitor. 3.1 Chargers are to be so rated that discharged storage batteries can be charged to 80 % of their rated Overcurrent relays for motor protection shall be ad- capacity within at least 15 hours without exceeding justable. the maximum permissible charging currents. 3.4 Undervoltage protection If consumers are simultaneously supplied during charging, the maximum charging voltage may not 3.4.1 Undervoltage trips shall cause the power exceed 20 % of the rated voltage. The power require- circuit breaker to break if the voltage drops to 70 % - ments of the consumers are to be taken into account 35 % of the rated value. Undervoltage trips for genera- when selecting the charger. tor circuit breakers shall be delayable by up to 500 ms. I - Part 1 Section 11k E Electrical Equipment Chapter 8 GL 2007 Page 11k–7

3.4.2 Short-circuit trips shall be delayed where the Cables manufactured and tested to standards other selective disconnection of short circuits is necessary. than those specified above will be accepted provided The reset ratio is also to be determined by reference to they are in accordance with an acceptable and relevant the conditions after disconnection of a short circuit international or national standard. and should be as far as possible approximate to unity. 2. Conductor material and structure 3.5 Shunt trips Shunt trips shall ensure the disconnection of the cir- 2.1 Electrolytic copper with a resistivity not cuit- breakers even if the voltage drops to 85 % of the exceeding 17,241 Ohm mm2/km at 20°C shall be used rated voltage. as the material for the conductors of cables and wires.

3.6 Electronic protection devices 2.2 If the insulation consists of natural or syn- Electronic protection devices shall remain operative at thetic rubber vulcanized with sulphur, the individual their maximum permissible load at an ambient tem- conductor wires shall be tinned. perature of 55 °C. 2.3 The conductors of movable wires shall be 3.7 Reverse power protection finely stranded. The reverse power protection device shall respond to The conductors of permanently laid cables and wires the active power regardless of the power factor and shall be made of stranded copper conductors (class 2) may operate only in the event of power return. or flexible stranded copper conductors (class 5).

3.8 Phase failure protection Solid conductors up to 4 mm2 in cross-section are permitted for final circuits of room lighting and space Protection devices for detection of a single-phase heating systems in the accommodation. failure in three-phase circuits have to operate instanta- neously. Bimetallic relays with differential release do not constitute phase failure protection devices in the 3. Materials and wall thickness of insulating opinion of these Rules. covers The materials used for insulation shall be of standard- 3.9 Check synchronizers ized types for which the maximum permissible tem- Check synchronizers for protection of alternators peratures at the conductors during undisturbed opera- against parallel connection at an unacceptable phase tion are specified. angle may allow connection only up to an angular deviation of 45° (electrical) and up to a frequency difference of 1 Hz. 4. Protective coverings, sheaths and braids

3.10 Insulation monitoring equipment 4.1 Single-core cables shall have a suitable separating layer of filler material or foil over the core insu- Insulation monitoring devices shall continuously dis- lation. play the insulation resistance for the distribution system and have to trigger an alarm should the insulation 4.2 Multi-core cables shall have a common core resistance of the system fall below 50 Ohms per Volt covering made of filler material or shall have a wrap- of mains voltage. ping and sheath. The measuring current may not exceed 30 mA in the event of a dead short circuit to earth. 4.3 Only materials of a standardized type shall be used for non-metallic sheaths. In all cases the thermal stability of the compounds used shall correspond to that of the insulating material. E. Cables and Insulated Wires 4.4 Braids shall be made of corrosion-resistant 1.1 Cables and wires shall be flame-retardant and material such as copper or copper alloy or of material self-extinguishing. treated to prevent corrosion, e.g. galvanized steel. For cable bundles, see Section 11j, D.9. 4.5 Outer metallic wire braids shall have a coat- 1.2 Cables manufactured in accordance with the ing of protective paint, which have to be lead-free and relevant recommendations of IEC publications 60092- flame-retardant. The paint shall be of sufficiently low 350, 60092-351, 60092-352, 60092-353, 60092-354, viscosity when applied to enable it to penetrate readily 60092-359, 60092-373, 60092-374, 60092-375 and into the wire braid. When dry, it shall not flake off 60092-376 will be accepted by GL provided that they when the cable is bent around a mandrel with a diame- are tested to its satisfaction. ter of 15 times that of the cable. Chapter 8 Section 11k G Electrical Equipment I - Part 1 Page 11k–8 GL 2007

5. Identification 7.3 Individual tests on non-type-tested cables and wires shall be performed in the manufacturer's works 5.1 Each cable shall be marked for type and for in the presence of a GL Surveyor. name of the manufacturer. The scope of the tests shall be agreed with GL in advance. 5.2 The cores of multi-core cables and wires shall have a permanent marking. In multi-core cables and The following tests shall be carried out at least: wires where the cores are arranged in a number of – conductor resistance concentric layers, two adjacent cores in each layer shall be coloured differently from each other and from – dielectric strength all other cores, unless the individual cores are other- – insulation resistance wise unambiguously identified, e.g. by printed numbers. – dimensions and construction of samples – mechanical strength characteristics of samples 5.3 Protective earth conductors shall have green/yellow colour coding.

6. Approvals F. Installation Material

6.1 Cables and wires are subject to mandatory 1. General type approval by GL. 1.1 The installation material shall conform to IEC 6.2 Proof is required by the manufacturer by publications. Other standards may be recognized by issue of workshop test reports stating that the continu- GL. ous production is made in conformity to relevant standards and is verified by individual and sample tests for 1.2 It is necessary to ensure that terminals are each production length of cables. These reports shall suitable for the connection of stranded conductors. record any deviations from the standards. Exceptions are permitted for systems with solid conductors (e.g. lighting, socket-outlets and heating appli- 6.3 The application of cables and wires without ances in the accommodation area). type-test is subject to an agreement with GL in every case. Individual and sample tests performed at the The method of connection shall be compatible with manufacturer's works on each lengths delivered are the terminals used. required for these cables, see 7.3. 1.3 For materials, see Section 11a, I. 7. Tests 2. Plug-and-socket connections 7.1 Type tests shall be carried out in accordance with the relevant standards in the manufacturer's 2.1 Depending on their application, the design of works and in the presence of a staff member of the plug-and-socket connections shall conform to the Head Office. The scope of the tests shall be agreed following regulations: with GL. a) in the accommodation area, day rooms and service rooms (up to 16 A, 250 V AC) – IEC publi- 7.2 If not specified in the standards, the following cation 60083 or 60320 tests shall be performed as an additional requirement: b) power circuits (up to 250 A, 690 V AC) – IEC Ozone tests on cable sheaths whose basic material publication 60309-1 and 60309-2 consists of natural or synthetic rubber. Test conditions c) electronic switchgear - IEC publications, e.g. shall be: 60130 and 60603 Ozone concentration: 250 - 300 ppm Temperature: (25 ± 2) °C Duration: 24 h G. Lighting Fittings The test shall be carried out in accordance with IEC publication 60811-2-1. 1. General Other equivalent test methods may be agreed with GL. Luminaries, floodlights and searchlights shall conform to IEC publications 60598 and 60092-306. Other stan- The test is passed satisfactory if no cracks will be dards may be recognized by GL. The requirements discovered visible to the naked eye. stated in F.1. shall be observed. I - Part 1 Section 11k H Electrical Equipment Chapter 8 GL 2007 Page 11k–9

2. Design – 55 °C for metal parts or – 65 °C for parts made of porcelain, glass, 2.1 The surface temperature of easily touchable moulded plastics or wood parts of lighting fixtures shall not exceed 60°C. A temperature of 5 °C higher is permissible for parts 2.2 High-power lights with higher surface tem- operated by finger tipping only. peratures shall be protected against unintentional contact by additional means. 1.4 Only heating elements with shrouding or ceramic-embedded heating coils shall be used. Infra- 2.3 The terminals and spaces for the connection red radiators are permitted. of cables shall not reach a higher temperature as permissible for the insulation of the wires or cables used, 2. Design see also Section 11j, A.3. The temperature rise in the terminal box shall not exceed 40 K. 2.1 Space heaters 2.4 All metal parts of a lighting fixture shall be 2.1.1 The casing or enclosure of each heater shall bounded together. be so designed that no objects can be placed on it, and the air can circulate freely around the heating ele- 2.5 Wiring inside lighting fixtures shall have a ments. minimum cross-section of 0,75 mm2. A cross-section 2 of at least 1,5 mm shall be used for through wiring. 2.1.2 Electrical space heaters shall be so designed Heat-resistant wires shall be used for internal wiring. that, based at an ambient temperature of 20 °C, the temperature of the casing or enclosure and of the air 2.6 Each lighting fixture shall be durably marked flow from the heater does not exceed 95 °C under with the following details: defined test conditions. – maximum permitted lamp wattage 2.1.3 To prevent unacceptable temperature rises – minimum mounting distance due to heat accumulation, each heater shall be fitted with a safety temperature limiter. Automatic reconnection is not permitted.

H. Electrical Heating Equipment The safety temperature limiter may be dispensed with for watertight heaters in spaces without a substantial fire risk, e.g. in bathrooms and washing rooms. 1. General 2.1.4 The operating switches have to disconnect all 1.1 Electrical heating equipment and boilers shall live conductors. The switch positions shall be clearly conform to IEC publications, e.g. 60335, with particu- marked at the switches. lar attention to IEC publication 60092-307. In addition the general assignments in F.1. have to be observed. 3. Oil and water calorifiers 1.2 The connections of power supply cables shall Continuous-flow electric calorifiers and water accu- be so arranged that temperatures higher than permitted mulators are to be equipped with two mutually inde- for the terminals and supply cables do not arise. pendent temperature protection devices, one of which shall be a permanently set safety temperature limiter 1.3 Controls in operation such as switch knobs while the other may take the form of a thermostatic and handles shall not attain temperatures higher than: controller.

I - Part 1 Section 11l C Tests Chapter 8 GL 2007 Page 11l–1

Section 11l

Tests

A. General C. Tests in the Manufacturer's Works

1. The following Rules apply to the testing of 1. Tests in the presence of a GL Surveyor electrical and electronic installations, equipment and components. 1.1 The tests shall be carried out on the basis of 2. Within the framework of their general quality the Rules for Construction and the approved docu- assurance programme, manufacturers shall ensure that ments. They shall be performed in accordance with a the products they manufacture conform to the speci- recognized standard. fied requirements. Records shall be made, containing quality assurance measures and tests and shall be 1.2 Machines, appliances and installations sub- handed over to GL on request. ject to testing in accordance with 2. are to be tested in the presence of a GL Surveyor unless the precondi- 3. For certain installations, equipment and com- tions for one's own responsibility tests by the manu- ponents, testing is required in the presence of a GL facturer are fulfilled, see 3. Surveyor according to these Rules, see C., D. and E. The tests and items for testing specified below consti- 2. Machines, appliances and installations tute minimum requirements. subject to testing GL reserve the right to demand that tests also be performed on other items, either on board or in the manu- 2.1 Electrical machines facturer's works. For scope of tests see Section 11k, A. 4. For appliances of a new type or for equipment which is being used for the first time on vessels 2.2 Transformers with GL Class, additional tests and trials are to be agreed between the manufacturer and GL, if the cir- For scope of tests see Section 11k, B. cumstances this require. 2.3 Power electronics 5. It is the aim of the tests to verify conformity with the requirements covered by the Rules for Con- For scope of tests see Section 11f, G. struction, and to prove the suitability of equipment for its particular application. 2.4 Switchboards

6. Tests are divided into: For scope of tests see Section 11e, G. and check list – examinations of the technical documentation, form F 217. see B. – Main switchboards – tests in the manufacturer's works, see C. – Emergency switchboards – tests on board, see D. – tests for type approvals, see E. – Switchboards for electrical propulsion plants – Starters for motors in accordance with 2.1

B. Examinations of Technical Documentation 2.5 Electrical propulsion plant

1. The list of documents subject to approval is For scope of tests, see Chapter 3 – Electrical Installa- specified in Section 11a, C. tions, Section 13.

2. The documents which have been examined 2.6 Computer System and approved by GL Head Office shall be presented to the GL Surveyor on request. See Section 11h, A.2. Chapter 8 Section 11l D Tests I - Part 1 Page 11l–2 GL 2007

3. One's own responsibility tests made by the – construction of watertight and fireproof bulk- manufacturers head and deck penetrations – insulation resistance measurement 3.1 A part of the products under 2.1, 2.3 and 2.4 may be tested on the manufacturer's own responsibility if the following preconditions are fulfilled: 3. Tests during dock trials – A Quality Management System recognized by 3.1 General GL is available. Proofs are required of the satisfactory condition and – GL has carried out type tests of the products. proper operation of the main and emergency power – The one's own responsibility tests have been supply systems, the steering gear and the aids of ma- agreed with GL. noeuvring, as well as of all the other installations specified in the Rules for Construction. 3.2 Reference is made to the GL Rules VI – Ad- Unless already required in the Rules for Construction, ditional Rules and Guidelines, Part 3 – Machinery In- the tests to be performed shall be agreed with the GL stallations, Chapter 8 – Guidelines for the Inspection Surveyor in accordance with the specific characteris- of Mechanical and Electrotechnical Products. tics of the subject equipment.

3.2 Generators

D. Tests on Board A test run of the generator sets and as far as possible of the shaft generators shall be conducted under normal operating conditions, and shall be reported on 1. General form F 218. The tests are divided into: 3.3 Storage batteries – tests during construction/installation The following shall be tested: – tests during dock trials – installation of storage batteries – tests during sea trials – ventilation of battery rooms and boxes, and cross-sections of ventilation ducts 2. Tests during construction – storage-battery charging equipment 2.1 During the period of construction of the ves- – the required caution labels and information sel, the installations shall be checked for conformity plates with the documents approved by GL and with the Rules for Construction. 3.4 Switchgear 2.2 Test Certificates for tests which have already The following items shall be tested under observance been performed shall be presented to the Surveyor on of forms F 217 and F 218: request. – accessibility for operation and maintenance 2.3 Protective measures shall be checked: – protection against the ingress of water and oil from ducts and pipes in the vicinity of the – protection against foreign bodies and water switchboards, and sufficient ventilation – protection against electric shock, such as protec- – equipment of main and emergency switchboards tive earthing, protective separation or other with insulated handrails, gratings and insulating measures as listed in Section 11a. floor coverings 2.4 Testing of the cable network – correct settings and operation of protection devices and interlocks Inspection and testing of cable installation and cable routing with regard to: – independent manual operation of generating sets from common external voltage and automation – acceptability of cable routing with regard to: systems (manual operation means local - separation of cable routes start/stop and speed setting as well as voltage control, protection devices and synchronizing - fire safety from switchboard) - the reliable supply of emergency consumers GL reserve the right to demand the proof of selective – selection and fastening of cables arrangement of the vessel's supply system. I - Part 1 Section 11l E Tests Chapter 8 GL 2007 Page 11l–3

3.5 Power electronics E. Type Approvals The following items shall be tested: 1. The installations, equipment and assemblies – ventilation of the place of installation mentioned in 5. are subject to mandatory type ap- – function of the equipment and protection de- proval. vices 2. Type tests shall be carried out in the presence 3.6 Power plants of a staff member of the Head Office either in the The following items shall be tested: manufacturer's works or, by agreement, in suitable institutions. – Motor drives together with the driven machines, which shall, wherever possible, be subjected to the most severe anticipated operating conditions. 3. Type tests are carried out according to GL This test shall include a check of the settings of Rules VI – Additional Rules and Guidelines, Part 7 – the motors' short-circuit and overcurrent protec- Guidelines for the Performance of Type Approvals tion devices. and standards defined therein. – emergency remote stops (compare also Section 11d, I.7.) of equipment such as: 4. Type tested installations, apparatuses and assemblies shall be used within the scope of valid - engine room fans Construction Rules only. The suitability for the sub- - fuel pumps ject application shall be ensured. – closed loop controls, open loop controls and all electric safety devices. 5. Installations, apparatuses and assemblies subject to type testing 3.7 Control, monitoring and vessel's safety systems 5.1 Generator protection devices, see Section For these systems operational tests shall be performed. 11d, A. and Section 11e, G.

3.8 Electrical propulsion plants 5.2 Switchgear, see Section 11e, G. Regarding scope of tests see Chapter 3 – Electrical – circuit breakers, load-switches, disconnect Installations, Section 13. switches and fuses for direct connection to the main busbars and to non-fused, multi-terminal 4. Tests during the sea trial busbars of main, emergency and control switchboards 4.1 Rating of the main- and emergency electri- – generator protection devices cal power supplies – standardized switchgear in series manufacture During the sea trial it shall be proved that the main and emergency electrical power supplies are adequately rated and conform to Section 11c and all con- 5.3 Steering gear and lateral thrust propeller trol and monitoring devices are functioning according system, see Section 11g, A. and B. to their assignments. 5.4 Machinery control system, see Section 11h, B. 4.2 Operating reliability during navigation – safety devices 4.2.1 Tests shall be carried out to determine whether all the machines, equipment, etc. constituting – safety system the electrical installation operate satisfactorily at all revolutions of the main engine, particularly during 5.5 Vessel’s control and safety system, see Sec- engine and steering gear manoeuvres. tion 11h, C. and D.

4.2.2 Tests shall be carried out on the restoration of – fire detection and alarm system the main and emergency electrical power supplies following a black-out during navigation. 5.6 Cables and accessories, see Section 11k, E.

I - Part 1 Section 12 C Special Requirements for Automation Chapter 8 GL 2007 Page 12–1

Section 12

Special Requirements for Automation

A. General submitted for the main propulsion plant and also for other equipment where necessary. 1. Alarm systems and remote control 1.5 GL reserve the right to demand for other Fishing vessels having machinery plants built, documents where those submitted are not adequate to equipped, surveyed and tested in compliance with the provide an evaluation of the system. requirements of this Section may be assigned the Class Notation RC – Remote Control. 2. Modifications and additions This is only possible for vessels with L < 45 m. For control and monitoring compare also Section 11h. Major modifications which may affect the automation system on a vessel which is under construction or at sea are subject to approval. Documents are to be sub- 2. Full automation mitted in time before conversion. Fishing vessels having machinery plants built, equipped, surveyed and tested in compliance with the requirements of the GL Rules in Chapter 4 – Automa- tion may be assigned the Class Notation AUT - C. Extent, Design and Construction of the Automation. Equipment This is only possible for vessels with L ≥ 24 m. 1. Extent of automation The extent of automation of the propulsion plant together with the auxiliary equipment necessary for B. Documents for Approval operation and the safety of the vessel is to be suffi- The following documents are to be submitted for ap- cient for an unattended engine room operation during proval in German or English language, in triplicate normal sea service and normal manoeuvring. and in good time so that they can be approved and The supervision of the machinery plant is done from made available to the GL Surveyor at the start of the navigating bridge. manufacture respectively at the installation of the systems. 2. Automatic restart or manual start possibility from the bridge after a blackout is to be arranged for 1. Newbuildings all components which are necessary for restoring of propulsion. 1.1 For each of the systems described in the following: Exemptions may be granted for multi unit installations where stop of one unit does not cause loss of propul- – general plan sion. – wiring diagrams – power supply plan 3. Manual operation – description of functional relationships Each important automatic and/or remote controlled system shall also be capable of being operated manu- – general arrangement ally. – functional description Where auxiliary machinery is started up automatically or by remote control, means shall be provided to se- 1.2 The list of measuring points is to be submit- cure them against remote controlled or automatic start- ted for the monitoring system. up, e.g. during repairs.

1.3 List of indications located on the navigating 4. Pneumatic and hydraulic systems bridge for the supervision of the machinery. Pneumatic and hydraulic systems for supplying non- 1.4 Safety programmes giving details of limit redundant units or more than one consumer have to be values which result in shutdown or reduction are to be redundant in design. Chapter 8 Section 12 D Special Requirements for Automation I - Part 1 Page 12–2 GL 2007

D. Monitoring Equipment 1.14 Alarm systems shall be designed on the closed-circuit or the monitored open-circuit principle. Equivalent monitoring principles are permitted. 1. Machinery alarm system 1.15 The alarm system is to be supplied from the 1.1 The machinery alarm system shall provide an main power source with battery backup for at least 15 optical and an audible signal of unacceptable devia- minutes. tions from operating figures. The failure of the supply from the main power source 1.2 The alarms shall be presented on the navigat- is to be alarmed. ing bridge. 1.16 The automatic suppression of alarm signals is to be monitored for correct function or shall be of 1.3 Collective alarms are allowed for stand-alone redundant type. systems except main propulsion machinery. The individual alarms shall be recognisable at the 1.17 The failure of the machinery alarm system concerned system. shall be alarmed.

1.4 Alarm delays shall be kept within time limits 1.18 Machinery alarm systems are subject to man- to prevent any risk to the monitored system in the datory type approval. event of exceeding the limit value. 2. Fire detection and alarm systems for ma- 1.5 Optical signals shall be individually indicated chinery spaces at a central position. The meaning of the individual indications has to be clearly identifiable by text or 2.1 An automatic fire detection and alarm system symbols. with means of testing is to be provided which indicates the initial stage of fire in machinery spaces. 1.6 If a fault is indicated, the optical signal shall The fire detection system has to be based on a self- remain visible until the fault has been eliminated. monitoring principle. Only ionisation or smoke detectors are permitted. 1.7 It shall be possible to distinguish between an optical signal which has been acknowledged and one 2.2 The fire alarm shall be given visually and that has not been acknowledged. audibly on the navigation bridge, in the machinery spaces, and in the accommodation. 1.8 It shall be possible to acknowledge audible The alarm shall be clearly distinguishable from other signals. alarms.

1.9 The acknowledgement of an alarm shall not 2.3 Location and number of the detectors shall be inhibit an alarm which has been generated by new such as to provide ample cover for all the endangered causes. areas.

1.10 Acknowledgement of optical alarms shall 2.4 The fire detection system is to be fed auto- only be possible where the fault has been indicated as matically from an emergency source of power if the an individual signal and a sufficient overview of the main source of power fails. concerned process is been given. 2.5 Fire detection and alarm systems are subject 1.11 Alarms have to be discernible under all oper- to mandatory type approval. ating conditions. Where this cannot be guaranteed, for example due to the noise level, additional optical sig- 3. Safety system nals, e.g. flashing lights must be installed. 3.1 A safety system which is for all important 1.12 Transient faults which are self-correcting parameters independent of the alarm system, is to be without intervention shall be memorized and indicated provided. by optical signals which shall only disappear when the alarm has been acknowledged. 3.2 When abnormal operating conditions are reached or serious malfunction occur which cannot be 1.13 Where an alarm has not been acknowledged dealt with in time by the crew members responsible within a preset time, an alarm shall be released in the for the machinery, the safety system has to safeguard accommodation and mess areas of the engineer offi- machinery against critical conditions (automatic shut- cers. down). I - Part 1 Section 12 E Special Requirements for Automation Chapter 8 GL 2007 Page 12–3

3.3 Where safety systems are provided with over- to the desired course of the vessel. Commands entered riding arrangements, these shall be safeguarded into the remote control system from the bridge shall be against accidental operation. The actuation of overrid- recognizable at all control stations. ing arrangements is to be indicated.

3.4 The monitored open-circuit principle is to be 2. Control positions applied to safety systems. Alternatively, the closed It shall be ensured that control is only possible from circuit principle may be applied where it is demanded one control station at any time. by the provisions of national regulations (e.g. boiler and oil-fired systems). 3. Transfer of control positions Equivalent monitoring principles are permitted. Transfer of command from one control station to an- 3.5 The suitability and function of safety systems other shall only be possible when the respective con- shall be demonstrated in the given application. trol levers are in the same position and when a signal to accept the transfer is given from the selected control 3.6 Safety systems shall be so designed that po- station. A display at each control station shall indicate tential faults such as, for example, loss of voltage or a which control station is in operation. broken wire shall not create a hazard to human life, vessel or machinery. Change-over of control within the bridge area is not required where the control levers at the control sta- 3.7 Faults and also the tripping of the safety tions are mechanically or electrically connected to- system shall be signalled by an alarm. gether and with the control unit of the remote control system so that they automatically adopt the same posi- 3.8 Where faults which affect the operation of the tion. safety system cannot be identified, appropriate test facilities shall be provided which shall be actuated periodically. 4. Equipment on the bridge The following equipment is to be provided on the 3.9 The adjustment facilities for safety systems bridge: shall be so designed that the last setting can be de- tected. 4.1 An indicator showing which control position 3.10 Safety systems shall be designed preferably is in use. using conventional technology (hard wired). Alterna- tive technical solutions shall be agreed with GL. 4.2 Emergency shut-down:

3.11 On failure of the vessel's main power supply, Should the remote control fail, it must be possible to the power supply to a safety system has to be guaran- shut-down the main engine from the navigating bridge teed as long as the supervised machinery is in opera- using a system independent of the remote control tion. system and its power supply. Alternatively, where the installation is fitted with clutch couplings, means can 3.12 Safety systems are subject to mandatory type be provided for disengaging the shaft from the bridge. approval. The emergency shut-down systems are to be backed- up by sufficient storage of control power and shall 4. Call systems for crew members responsible work on the open-circuit principle, if electrical. for the machinery Measures are to be taken to ensure that the emergency The officer of the watch on the bridge shall be able to shut-down system cannot be operated inadvertently. call the crew members. This equipment may take the form of a two-way inter- 4.3 For direct propulsion (fixed propeller): communication system. The system may consist of portable or permanently installed equipment and shall An indicator showing the rotation speed and direction be capable of operation even if the main power supply of rotation of the propeller shaft. fails. 4.4 For controllable pitch propellers: An indicator showing the rotation speed of the propel- E. Remote Control from the Navigating ler shaft and the pitch of the blades. Bridge 4.5 For installations equipped with reversing 1. Type of remote control gears: Single lever control is to be preferred for remote con- Indicator showing the speed and direction of rotation trol systems. Lever movement shall be in accordance of the propeller shaft and the rpm of the main engine. Chapter 8 Section 12 I Special Requirements for Automation I - Part 1 Page 12–4 GL 2007

4.6 For installations equipped with clutch cou- G. Prevention against Engine Room Flooding plings: 1. Valves in the vessel's shell plating which are An arrangement is to be provided for remote-con- open during operation of the engines have to be acces- trolled engagement/disengagement of the couplings. sible and capable of operation from a safe height The engaged/disengaged position is to be indicated. above the floor plates.

4.7 Additional necessary indications for the su- 2. Engine room bilges and drain wells are to be pervision of the machinery plant may be decided case large enough to accommodate normal drainage with- by case. out tripping a level alarm during the unattended period. 5. Shaft-driven generators 3. In each machinery space bilge at least 2 high On vessels with shaft-driven generators, the remote level sensors are to be provided. In vessels with the control from the bridge shall be so designed that, with Class Notation K (Coastal Service) one level sensor the shaft-driven generators in operation, manoeuvres may be accepted. can be performed without disturbing the main electrical power supply system (e.g. by the use of constant speed equipment with controllable pitch propellers or by arranging for the power supply system to be auto- H. Miscellaneous matically transferred to an independent diesel generator). 1. Auxiliary boilers and thermal oil plants The automatic controls of auxiliary boilers or thermal oil plants shall be capable of maintaining the desired F. Fire Protection / Fire Extinguishing values within the permissible limits of all possible load variations, independent of the kind of heating. 1. Fire protection Should the permissible operating values be exceeded, individual alarm shall be given and the safety system 1.1 Fuel injection high pressure lines of diesel has to act automatically. The intervention of the safety engines are to be shielded or installed in such a way system is to be monitored. that, should leakage occur, the leaking fuel can be safely collected in a suitable drain tank. 2. Tests After installation on board all automatic and remote 1.2 Where tanks with flammable liquids are re- controls are to be tested during trials at the shipyard plenished automatically or remote-controlled, means and sea trials to the satisfaction of GL. are to be provided to prevent overflow spillage.

2. Fire extinguishing I. Alarm and Recording Points

2.1 A fixed fire extinguishing system according The following Tables 12.1 – 12.3 summarize the mo- to Section 8 is to be provided in the machinery spaces. nitored parameters and define the limits for an alarm. For special installations, like two stroke engines or the 2.2 One main fire pump is to be provided with a use of heavy fuels reference is made to GL Rules in remote start arrangement from the navigating bridge. Chapter 4 – Automation, Section 8. I - Part 1 Section 12 I Special Requirements for Automation Chapter 8 GL 2007 Page 12–5

Table 12.1 Alarms for propulsion machinery – Main engines, gear and shafting

Monitored parameters: L = low limit Comments H = high limit Limit Limit Main engine Engine overspeed H Stop by safety system Lubricating oil pressure at engine inlet L Stop by safety system Lubricating oil temperature at engine inlet H Differential pressure across lubricating oil pres- H sure filter Fault in automatic lubricating oil filter Fuel oil pressure at engine inlet L Fuel oil leakage from high pressure pipes Differential pressure across fuel oil filters H Fault in automatic fuel oil filter Fuel level in closed stand pipe L Does not apply when automatic gas venting Cylinder cooling water pressure or flow at engine L Cylinder cooling water temperature at cylinder H outlet Where cooling water is used for heat exchangers Oil contamination of engine cooling water H with fuel or thermal oil Sea cooling water pressure L Secondary fresh cooling water pressure L Secondary fresh cooling water temperature H Charge air temperature at charge air cooler inlet L Charge air temperature at charge air cooler outlet L + H Or "water in charge air duct" instead of low limit Start air pressure L Control air pressure L Exhaust gas temperature H Oil mist concentration in crankcase H Approved alternative methods may be used Gear Lubricating oil temperature H 1500 kW and above Lubricating oil pressure inlet L Shafting Temperature of stern tube bearing aft H For shaft diameter < 400 mm sensor may be located in the vicinity of the aft bearing. Temperature of line shaft bearings H 1500 kW and above Thrust block lubricating oil temperature or thrust H block temperature Controllable pitch propeller system, if applicable Hydraulic oil pressure L May be displayed on bridge jointly with "Failure of remote control system". Hydraulic oil level in gravity tank or backing L Stop by safety system pump pressure Couplings Control power of couplings L If failure results in loss of manoeuvrability

Chapter 8 Section 12 I Special Requirements for Automation I - Part 1 Page 12–6 GL 2007

Table 12.2 Alarms for propulsion machinery – Auxiliary machinery, tanks and miscellaneous items

Monitored parameters: L = low limit Comments H = high limit Limit Limit Diesel generators Engine overspeed H Stop by safety system Lubricating oil pressure at engine inlet L Stop by safety system Lubricating oil temperature at engine inlet H Fuel oil pressure at engine inlet L Fuel oil leakage from high pressure pipes Cylinder cooling water pressure or flow at engine L inlet Cylinder cooling water temperature at cylinder H outlet Oil mist concentration in crankcase H Voltage L + H Frequency L Tripping of non-essential consumers Applies only to propulsion plants with non- Failure of main source of electrical power electrically driven essential auxiliaries. Purifying installations Temperature of medium for separation L + H If local individual indication is provided, one Unintentional discharge of bowl/loss of water seal/ common alarm is sufficient in the central alarm

water in medium to be separated or equivalent panel. Steering gear Failure of steering gear Phase failure/overload Failure of control system Tank levels Fuel service tanks L Expansion tanks L All tanks with automatic or remote controlled Sludge, leak oil and fuel oil overflow tanks H filling are to be provided with additionally high Gravity oil tanks for stern tube L level alarms Main engine lubricating oil sump trunks/tanks L Steering gear hydraulic oil tank L Fire detection system Fire alarm Fault Miscellaneous Failure of remote control system Failure of alarm systems Failure of safety systems Tripping of safety system Automatic change-over of auxiliary machinery At least 2 sensors and detecting loops per ma- Level of machinery space bilges/drain wells H chinery space Fault in fire extinguishing system Release of automatic fire extinguishing system

I - Part 1 Section 12 I Special Requirements for Automation Chapter 8 GL 2007 Page 12–7

Table 12.3 Alarms for propulsion machinery of 750 kW and above – Auxiliary steam boilers and thermal oil plants

Monitored parameters: L = low limit Comments H = high limit Limit Limit Steam boilers Tripping of safety system Steam pressure L + H Water level L + H Failure of circulating pump H Salinity of condensate H Oily contamination of condensate H Thermal oil systems Tripping of safety system Flow of thermal oil L Temperature of thermal oil H At heater outlet Level in expansion tank L + H

I - Part 1 Section 13 B Spare Parts Chapter 8 GL 2007 Page 13–1

Section 13

Spare Parts

A. General 1. Main internal combustion engines 1. In order to be able to restore engine operation For internal combustion engines see Section 9b. The and manoeuvring capacity to the vessel in the event of volume of spare parts is defined in Table 13.1. damage at sea, spare parts for the main drive and the 2. Auxiliary internal combustion engines essential equipment as defined herein and in the basic Rules are to be carried on board every fishing vessel, The range of spare parts required for auxiliary internal together with the necessary tools. combustion engines for essential equipment according to Section 9a, H. is to be specified in accordance with These requirements are considered to be complied Table 13.2. with if the range of spare parts corresponds to the following Tables allowing for the extent of the in- Note stalled systems and components in question at the time of commissioning. Where an additional unit is provided for the same purpose no spare parts are required. 2. Depending on the design and arrangement of the engine plant, the intended service and operation of 3. Gears, thrust bearings the fishing vessel, and also the manufacturer’s rec- For gears and thrust bearings see Section 9c. The ommendations, a different volume of spare parts may volume of spare parts is defined in Table 13.3. be agreed between the owner/operator and GL.

Where the volume of spare parts is based on special 4. Starting equipment and air compressors arrangements between the vessel owner and GL, tech- For starting equipment air compressors see Section 9b. nical documentation is to be provided. The volume of spare parts is defined in Table 13.4. A list of the relevant spare parts is to be carried on board. 5. Spare parts for pumps For pumps see Section 9d. The volume of spare parts 3. In case of propulsion systems and operation- is defined in Table 13.5. ally essential machinery which are not included in the following Tables, the requisite range of spare parts is 6. Spare parts for hydraulic systems to be established in each individual case between shipyard, vessel owner and GL. For hydraulic systems see especially Section 5 (windlass, mooring winches, etc.), Section 6 (winches, power blocks, stern gallows, etc.),. The volume of 4. Spare parts shall be properly stored and pro- spare parts is defined in Table 13.6. tected against vibration, humidity and damages. Heavy spare parts should be kept near the point of installation and means to remove them have to be 7. Spare parts for refrigerating installations provided. For refrigerating systems see especially Section 10. The volume of spare parts is defined in Table 13.7.

8. Other spare parts B. Volume of Spare Parts Other spare parts for main and auxiliary engines and The scope of spare parts has to be in accordance with essential equipment according to Section 9a, H. are the following Tables and is classified according to defined in Table 13.8. different ranges of service: 9. Spare parts for electrical installations A = unlimited range of service and M For the spare parts of electrical installations see Sec- B = all other ranges of service tion 11a, L. Chapter 8 Section 13 B Spare Parts I - Part 1 Page 13–2 GL 2007

Table 13.1 Spare parts for main internal combustion engines 1, 4, 5

Range of spare parts A B Main bearings or shells for one bearing of each size and type fitted, Main bearings 1 – complete with shims, bolts and nuts Bottom end bearings or shells of each size and type fitted, complete 1 set – with shims, bolts and nuts, for one cylinder Connecting rod bearings Trunk piston type: Piston pin complete with bush/bearing shells and securing rings for 1 set – one cylinder Cylinder liner Cylinder liner, complete, with joint rings and gaskets 1 – Cylinder cover with full equipment and ready for installation, in- 1 – Cylinder cover cluding gaskets Cylinder cover bolts and nuts, for one cylinder ½ set –

Exhaust valves, with full equipment and ready for installation, for one 1 set 1 set cylinder Inlet valves, with full equipment and ready for installation, for one 1 set 1 set cylinder Valves Starting air valve, with full equipment and ready for installation 1 1 Overpressure control valve, complete 1 1

Fuel injection valves of each type, ready for installation, for one en- 1 set ¼ set gine 2 Hydraulic valve drive High-pressure pipe/hose of each type 1 – Piston: Piston of each type, ready for fitting, with piston rings, gudgeon pin, 1 – Trunk piston type connecting rod, bolts and nuts Piston rings Piston rings for one cylinder 1 set – Cylinder lubricator Complete lubricator, largest type, with drive 1 – Fuel injection pump complete or, when replacement of individual Fuel injection pumps components at sea is practicable, complete pump element with asso- 1 – ciated valves, seals, springs, etc. High pressure fuel pipe of each size and shape fitted, complete with Fuel injection pipes 1 – couplings Exhaust-gas turbocharger: rotor complete with bearings, nozzle 1 set – Charge air system 3 rings and attached lube oil pump Inlet and exhaust valves of each type for one cylinder 1 set – Special gaskets and packings of each type for cylinder covers and Gaskets and packings – 1 set cylinder liners, for one cylinder Exhaust gas system Compensator of each type 1 – (engine related)

1 In the case of multi-engine installations, the minimum required spares are only necessary for one engine. 2 a) Engines with one or two fuel-injection valve per cylinder: one set of fuel valves, complete b) Engines with more than two fuel injection valves per cylinder: two valves complete per cylinder plus a corresponding number of valve parts (excluding the valve bodies) which make it possible to form a complete spare set by re-using the operational parts of the dismantled valves. 3 Spare parts for exhaust-gas turbocharger and auxiliary blower may be omitted if emergency operation of the main engine after failure is demonstrably possible. The requisite blanking and blocking arrangements for the emergency operation of the main engine are to be available on board. 4 The necessary tools and equipment for fitting the required spare parts have to be available on board. 5 Spare parts are to be replaced immediately as soon as they are "used up"

I - Part 1 Section 13 B Spare Parts Chapter 8 GL 2007 Page 13–3

Table 13.2 Spare parts for auxiliary internal combustion engines driving electric generators for essential equipment

Range of spare parts A Bearings or shells for one bearing of each size and type fitted, complete with Main bearings 1 shims, bolts and nuts Exhaust valves, complete with casings, seats, springs and other fittings for one 2 sets cylinder Inlet valves, complete with casings, seats, springs and other fittings for one cylinder 1 set Valves Starting air valve, complete with casing, seat, springs and other fittings 1 Overpressure control valve, complete 1 Fuel valves of each size and type fitted, complete, with all fittings, for one engine ½ set Connecting rod Bottom end bearings or shells of each type, complete with all fittings 1 bearings Piston pin with bushing for one cylinder 1 Piston rings Piston rings, for one cylinder 1 set Fuel injection pump complete or, when replacement of individual components at sea Fuel injection pumps 1 is practicable, complete pump element with associated valves, seals, springs, etc. Fuel injection pipes High pressure fuel pipe of each size and shape fitted, complete with couplings 1 Special gaskets and packings of each size and type fitted, for cylinder covers and Gaskets and packings 1 set cylinder liners for one cylinder Notes 1. Where the number of generating sets (including stand-by units) is greater than required, no spares are required for the auxiliary engines. 2. Where several internal combustion engines of the same type are installed for generator drive spare parts are required for one engine only. 3. No spares are required for the engine driving emergency generator sets.

Table 13.3 Spare parts for gears and thrust bearings in propulsion plants

Range of spare parts A B Wearing parts of main-engine driven pump supplying lubricating oil to gears or 1 set – one complete lubricating oil pump if no stand-by pump is available 1 Thrust pads for ahead side of thrust bearings 1 set 1 set

Table 13.4 Spare parts for air compressors

Range of spare parts A B Piston rings of each type and size fitted for one piston 1 set 1 set Suction and delivery valves complete of each size fitted in one unit ½ set ½ set Note Spare parts for refrigerant compressors have to be specially agreed.

Table 13.5 Spare parts for pumps

Range of spare parts A B Valve with seats springs each size fitted 1 set 1 set Piston pumps Piston rings each type and size for one piston 1 set 1 set

Bearing of each type and size 1 1 Centrifugal pumps Rotor sealings of each type and size 1 1 Gear and screw type Bearings of each type and size 1 1 pumps Rotor sealings of each type and size 1 1 Note Where, for a system served by a pump, a stand-by pump of sufficient capacity is available, the spare parts may be dispensed.

Chapter 8 Section 13 B Spare Parts I - Part 1 Page 13–4 GL 2007

Table 13.6 Spare parts for hydraulic systems

Range of spare parts A B Pressure hoses and flexible pipes, at least one of each size 20 % 20 % Seals, gaskets 1 set 1 set Note For seals, this requirement is applicable only to the extent that these parts can be changed with the means available on board. Where the hydraulic system comprises two mutually independent sub-systems, spare parts need to be supplied for one sub- system only.

Table 13.7 Spare parts for refrigerating installations

Range of spare parts A Compressor piston with piston rod and crank bearing of each type, ready for fitting 1 Set of piston rings of each type for one piston 1 Set of suction and delivery valves of each type for one cylinder 1 Shaft seal of each type ready for fitting 1 Expansion valve of each type for the refrigerant circuit 1 Suction and delivery valve stem of each type, with cone and seat, for the main shutoff valves of the 1 compressors Pressure switch of each type for suction and pressure lines 1 Pressure gauge of each type 1 Thermometers for the refrigerating machinery and the refrigerated spaces/tanks including at least two of 5 % each type Set of V-belts of each length, for one compressor 1 Oil sight glass of each type with gaskets 1 Fan impeller of each type 1 Complete set of all rupture discs 1 Detector for tracing leaks in the refrigerant system 1 Sensors for electrical remotely-operated thermometers, including at least one of each type 5 % Note According to the size of the refrigerating installation, a sufficient number of suitable packing, jointing and sealing materials; a few length of the most commonly used pipes, screw couplings, flanges nuts and bolts and a device for topping up refrigerant charge are to be carried on board.

Table 13.8 Other spare parts for main and auxiliary engines and also for essential equipment

Range of spare parts A B Safety valve or one valve cone and spring of each type for pressure vessels 1 1 Hoses and compensators 20 % 20 % Testing device for fuel injection valves 1 1